POH

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED
Cover Page
PSA Airlines, Inc.

CRJ PILOT OPERATING
HANDBOOK
NAME
BASE
CCN 5910021

Preface
Scope of This Manual
Preface-i
12 FEB 10

This CRJ Pilot Operating Handbook is issued by PSA Airlines, Inc. to flight crewmembers qualified on the aircraft and to
other individuals and agencies whose duties make it necessary that material contained herein be available to them.
It is the responsibility of such individual or agency to maintain this manual in a current condition. A Record of Revisions
sheet is located in the front of this manual. After insertion of each revision, enter the Revision Date (opposite the proper
Revision Number) and Initials of the individual inserting the revision.
Certain changes to the manufacturers recommendations in operating technique and procedures have been made.
This Pilot Operating Handbook is that portion of PSA Airlines, Inc.s operating manual which can substitute for the FAAApproved Airplane Flight Manual as provided by FAR 121.141. Where the procedures differ from those in the FAAApproved Airplane Flight Manual, PSA Airlines, Inc. has determined that equivalent safety is provided by such alternate
procedures and assumes ultimate responsibility for this determination. Flight crewmembers are expected to utilize the
operating techniques and procedures outlined in this Pilot Operating Handbook.
A Log of Current Pages is contained in the Pilot Operating Handbook, listing all pages and their current dates. This log may
be used as a checklist provided that your manual is current through the last revision.
Revision of subject material on a page is indicated by a vertical line encompassing the material, indicating addition, change, or
deletion of material.
Masculine pronouns used herein will include the feminine.
Abnormal Operations. The FOM will provide guidance on checklist usage and methodology for handling the QRH.
Errors and discrepancies should be brought to the attention of the Training or Technical Publications departments. Comments
and suggestions to improve the contents of this and all PSA Airlines, Inc.s manuals are solicited.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

CRJ Pilot Operating Handbook

Preface-ii
12 FEB 10
Preface
Intentionally Left Blank
PSA Airlines, Inc.


POH Revision 14 Overview
Chapter Overviews
9 MAY 11

The following is a list of the major changes contained herein. This list is not all encompassing, and pilots are responsible for
all content contained in the revision. THIS OVERVIEW IS NOT PART OF THE REVISION AND MAY BE DISCARDED.
Chapters 3:
Incorporated POH Bulletin 01-10.
3.16.1 - Clarified aircraft applicability
Chapters 4a and 4b:

Checklist
Made changes to use D for delayed engine start items (Before Start and After Start)
Changed wording for Flaps in taxi checklist to read indicating. This now matches the wording on the before landing
checklist.
Changed the T/O config check to a verify item.
4.2.4 - Added delayed engine start wording.
4.5.1 - Made changes to the standard flight routine to allow better flow and operation of the checklist. Added statement for
Sterile Cockpit in the taxi section.
Changed Hydraulic expanded to account for hydraulic pump 3b. (200 only)
Placed Crew O2 on the before start flow. Changed before start flow below the line to place emphasis on the normal start of
the right engine only. Changed the after start flow and trigger. Removed the rudder and nosewheel steering from the flow to
help enable the crews to perform some items while awaiting for the towbar to be removed.
Added taxi wording to show the use of "Parking Brake Released, Sterile Cockpit."
Added triggers, items, and pictures for the delayed start flows and checklists.
Adjusted the expanded wording for the Runway Heading on the before takeoff checklist.
Made adjustments for the approach preparation to account for the GPS waypoint identification.
Added thrust reversers to the before landing flow.
Clarified the wording for single engine taxi in procedures.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Chapter Overviews
9 MAY 11
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Revisions / LEPs
Revision Log
1-1
9 MAY 11
Record of Revisions
Revision
Number
Revision
Date
Initials
Revision
Number
27 OCT 03
PSA
24
12 MAR 04
PSA
25
15 NOV 04
PSA
26
25 MAY 05
PSA
27
14 APR 06
PSA
28
28 FEB 07
PSA
29
10 JUN 07
PSA
30
10 SEP 07
PSA
31
30 MAY 08
PSA
32
10
12 JAN 09
PSA
33
11
12 FEB 10
PSA
34
12
15 MAR 10
PSA
35
13
30 AUG 10
PSA
36
14
9 MAY 11
Initials
37
15
38
16
39
17
40
18
41
19
42
20
43
21
44
22
45
23
Revision
Date
46
Follow revision instructions.
For missing pages, please submit a Request for Publications Form
Via CoMail to Tech Pubs, DAY / PHQ or Fax to 937-454-5340
(Forms are located in crew room or at www.psaairlines.net)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Revisions / LEPs
Revision Log
1-2
9 MAY 11
Revision
Number
Revision
Date
Initials
Revision
Number
47
69
48
70
49
71
50
72
51
73
52
74
53
75
54
76
55
77
56
78
57
79
58
80
59
81
60
82
61
83
62
84
63
85
64
86
65
87
66
88
67
89
68
90
Revision
Date
Follow revision instructions.

For missing pages, please submit a Request for Publications Form
Via CoMail to Tech Pubs, DAY / PHQ or Fax to 937-454-5340
(Forms are located in crew room or at www.psaairlines.net)
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Initials

Pilot Operating Handbook Transmittal Sheet
Instructions
TS-i
9 MAY 11
Instructions
INSERT REVISION 14 DATED 9 MAY 11 INTO THIS MANUAL IN THE FOLLOWING MANNER:
REMOVE
INSERT
Revisions/LEPs
1 thru 8
Same
Chapter 3: Limitations
i/ii and 23/24
Same
Chapter 4a: Normal Procedures <-200>
200 Normal Checklist, i/ii, 1 thru 6, 17 thru 200 Normal Checklist, i/ii, 1 thru 6, 17 thru
20, 23/24, 29/30, 35 thru 66
20, 23/24, 29/30, 35 thru 68
Chapter 4b: Normal Procedures <-701>
701 Normal Checklist, i/ii, 1 thru 6, 9/10, 15 Same
thru 18, 31 thru 58
Bulletins Tab
Status Page A-10
Status Page A-11
Additional Instructions
Record insertion of this revision on the Revision Log (1-1).
Discard Revision 13 Transmittal Sheet.
Note
Each manual holder is responsible for the care, maintenance and insertion of
updated materials into this manual.
Note
If your revision included an acknowledgement sheet, please sign and return it to
Technical Publications within 60 days.
PLEASE KEEP THIS SHEET BEHIND THE WHITE REVISION LOG.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


TS-ii
9 MAY 11

Instructions
PSA Airlines, Inc.


List of Effective Pages
Revisions / LEPs
1-3
9 MAY 11

This log of current pages uses one date to establish the current date of each chart. In checking the dates on the log of current
pages against the dates on the charts, the listed date will always correspond to the most current date (latest) applicable date on
the chart. If the log of current pages date matches the date on the front of the sheet, it is unnecessary to check the back date.
Title Page - CRJ Pilot Operating Handbook(front & back)

UNDATED
Preface
4 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

5 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
6 ................................REVISION 12...................15 MAR 10
i................................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

ii ............................... REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
7 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

8 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
1. REVISIONS / LEPs TAB
9 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
1................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
10 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
2................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
11 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
3................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
12 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
4................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
13 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
5................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
14 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
6................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
15 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
7................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
16 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
8................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
17 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
2. GENERAL TAB
1................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
2................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
3................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
4................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
5................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
6................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
18 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

19 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
20 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
21 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
22 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
23 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
24 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
7................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

8................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
9................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
10.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
3. LIMITATIONS TAB
i................................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
ii ............................... REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
1................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
2................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
3................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Revisions / LEPs
1-4
9 MAY 11
4a. NORMAL PROCEDURES
(-200) TAB
i .................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
ii ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
Normal Checklist <-200> (front &
back) .........................REVISION 13.................... 9 MAY 11
1 ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
2 ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
3 ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
4 ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
5 ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
6 ................................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
7 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
8 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
9 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
10 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
11 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
12 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
13 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
14 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
15 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
16 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
17 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
18 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
19 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
20 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
21 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
22 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
23 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
24 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
25 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
26 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
27 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
28 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
29 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
30 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
31 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
32 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
33 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.
34.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10

35.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
36.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
37.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
38.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
39.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
40.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
41.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
42.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
43.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
44.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
45.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
46.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
47.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
48.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
49.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
50.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
51.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
52.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
53.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
54.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
55.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
56.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
57.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
58.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
59.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
60.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
61.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
62.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
63.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
64.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11
65.............................. REVISION 14 ....................9 MAY 11

Revisions / LEPs
1-5
9 MAY 11
66.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
30 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
67.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
31 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
68.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
32 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
4b. NORMAL PROCEDURES

(-701) TAB
33 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11

34 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
i................................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
35 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
ii ............................... REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
36 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
Normal Checklist <-701> (front &

back)......................... REVISION 11 .................... 9 MAY 11
37 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
1................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
39 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
2................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
40 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
3................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
41 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
4................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
42 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
5................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
43 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
6................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
44 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
7................................ REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
45 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
8................................ REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
46 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
9................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
47 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
10.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
48 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
11.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
49 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
12.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
50 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
13.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
51 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
14.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
52 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
15.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
53 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
16.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
54 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
17.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
55 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
18.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11
56 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
19.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
57 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
20.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
58 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
38 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11
21.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10

22.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
23.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
24.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
25.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
26.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
27.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
28.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
29.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Revisions / LEPs
1-6
9 MAY 11
5. SUPPLEMENTAL PROCEDURES TAB
9................................ REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
i .................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
10.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
ii ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
11.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
1 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
12.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
2 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
13.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
3 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
14.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
4 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
15.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
5 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
16.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
6 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
17.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
7 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
18.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
8 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
19.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
9 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
20.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
10 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
21.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
11 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
22.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
12 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
23.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
6. IMMEDIATE ACTIONS TAB

i .................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
ii ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
1 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
2 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
3 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
4 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
24.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10

25.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
26.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
27.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
28.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
29.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
30.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10
5 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
8. ADVERSE WEATHER TAB
6 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
i................................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
7 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
ii ............................... REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
8 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
1................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
7. MANEUVERS & PROFILES TAB

i .................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
ii ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
1 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
2 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
3 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
4 ................................REVISION 12...................15 MAR 10
5 ................................REVISION 12...................15 MAR 10
6 ................................REVISION 12...................15 MAR 10
7 ................................REVISION 12...................15 MAR 10
8 ................................REVISION 12...................15 MAR 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.
2................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

3................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
4................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
5................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
6................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
7................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

Revisions / LEPs
8................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
9................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
10.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
11.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
12.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
13.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
14.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
15.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
16.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
17.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
18.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
19.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
20.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
1-7
9 MAY 11
22 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
23 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
24 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
25 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
26 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
27 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
28 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
29 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
30 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
31 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
32 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
33 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
34 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
35 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
9. PERFORMANCE TAB
36 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
i................................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
37 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
ii ............................... REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
38 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
1................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
39 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
2................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
40 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
3................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
41 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
4................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
42 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
5................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
43 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
6................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
44 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
7................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
45 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
8................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
46 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
9................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
47 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
10.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
48 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
11.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
49 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
12.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
50 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
13.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
51 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
14.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
52 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
15.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
53 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
16.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

17.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
18.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
19.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
20.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
21.............................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Revisions / LEPs
1-8
9 MAY 11
54 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
11. FMS QUICK REFERENCE TAB
55 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
i................................. REVISION 12 .................. 15 MAR 10
56 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
ii ............................... REVISION 12 .................. 15 MAR 10
57 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
1................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
58 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
2................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
59 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
3................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
60 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
4................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
61 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
5................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10
62 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
6................................ REVISION 12 .................. 15 MAR 10
63 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

64 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
65 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
66 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
10. DIFFERENCES TAB
1 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
2 ................................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10
3 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
4 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-1
12 FEB 10
Chapter 2: General
The following abbreviations/acronyms may be used by flight deck displays, radio tuning units and flight management system
or be found throughout the manual. Some abbreviations may also appear in lower case letters.
-AALT
Altitude, Altimeter, Altitude Hold (PFD/

FD)
A/C
Air-Conditioning
A/G
Air/Ground
A/ICE
Anti-ice
ALT CAP
Altitude Capture (PFD/FD)
A/P
Autopilot
ALT HOLD
Altitude Hold
A/S
Airspeed
ALTN
Alternate
A/SKID
Anti-Skid
ALTS
Selected Altitude Arm/Abort (PFD/FD)
AC
Alternating Current
AMB
Ambient
Airborne Communications Addressing &

Reporting System
AMP
Amperes
ANNUN
Annunciator
ACCEL
Acceleration, Accelerate(d),
Accelerometers
AOA
Angle of Attack
AP
Autopilot
ACM
Air Cycle Machine
APC
Auxiliary Power Control
ACMP
Alternating Current Motor Pump (Electric

Hydraulic Pump)
APPROX
Approximately
ACSC
Air-Conditioning System Controller
APR
Automatic Performance Reserve
ACT
Active
APU
Auxiliary Power Unit
ACU
Air-Conditioning Unit (Pack)
ARINC
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ADC
Air Data Computer
ARP
Air Data Reference Panel
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ASYM
Asymmetrical
ADG
Air Driven Generator
ATA
Air Transport Association
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
ATC
Air Traffic Control
ADS
Air Data System
ATS
Air Turbine Starter
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
ATT
Attitude
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
ATTND
Attendant
AGL
Above Ground Level
AUTO
Automatic
AHC
Attitude Heading Computer
AUTO BAL
Automatic Balance
AHRS
Attitude Heading Reference System
AIL
Aileron
AILC
Anti-ice Leak Controller
ALIGN
Aligning, Alignment
ACARS
AUTO XFER Automatic Transfer

AUX
Auxiliary
AV
Avionics
AVAIL
Available
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-2
12 FEB 10
-BB/AIR
Bleed Air
BLD
Bleed
B/C
Back Course
BRG
Bearing
B/LEAK
Bleed Leak
BRT
Bright
BARO
Barometric
BTL
Bottle
BATT
Battery
BTMS
Brake Temp Monitoring System
BDI
Bearing Distance Indicator
BTMU
Brake Temp Monitoring Unit
BITE
Built-In-Test-Equipment
BYPS
Bypass
BK
Brake
-C-
C/B
Circuit Breaker
CM
Centimeters
CAA
Civil Aviation Authority
CMD
Command
CAL
Calibrate
CMPS
Compass
CAP
Capture
CMPTR
Computer
CAPT, C
Captain
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
CAS
Calibrated Airspeed, Crew Alerting

System
COMM
Communication
CB
Circuit Breaker
COMP
Compressor, Comparator
CBP
Circuit Breaker Panel
COMPT
Compartment
CC
Cubic Centimeter
COND
Condition
CCW
Counter Clockwise
CONFIG
Configuration
CDL
Configuration Deviation List
CONT
Control, Controller, Continuous, Contactor
CDU
Control Display Unit
CONT'D
Continued
CFM
Cubic Feet Per Minute
CORR
Correction
CG
Center of Gravity
CPAM
Cabin Pressure Acquisition Module
CH
Chapter
CPLT
Copilot
CHAN
Channel
CRS
Course
CHGR
Charger
CRT
Cathode Ray Tube
CHRT
Chart
CK
Check
CKPT
Cockpit
CKT
Circuit
CLB
Climb
CLK
Clock
CLSD
Closed
PSA Airlines, Inc.

CRZ
Cruise
CSD
Constant Speed Drive
CTR
Center
CVR
Cockpit Voice Recorder
CW
Clockwise
CYL
Cylinder

General
2-3
12 FEB 10
-DDA
Drift Angle
DFDR
Digital Flight Data Recorder
DBU
Data Base Unit
DG
Directional Gyro
DC
Direct Unit
DH
Decision Height
DCP
Display Control Panel
DIFF
Differential
DCU
Direct Concentrator Unit
DIM
Dimming
DECEL
Decelerate(d)
DIR
Direct
DECR
Decrease
DIS
Distance (to way point)
DEFL
Defuel
DISC
Disconnect
DEG
Degree
DISCH
Discharge
DEPR
Depressurize
DISP
Dispatch, Display
DEPT
Department
DIST
Distance
DEST
Destination
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DET
Detector
DN
Down
DEV
Deviation
DOT
Department of Transport
DFDAU
Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit
DR
Door
-EEAS
Equivalent Airspeed
ELEC
Electrical
ECP
EICAS Control Panel
ELEV
Elevator, Elevation
ECS
Environment Control System
ELT
Emergency Locator Transmitter
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EMER
Emergency
ED
EICAS Display
ENG
Engine
EDP
Engine Driven Pump
EPC
External Power Contactor
EFIS
Electronic Flight Instrument System
EQUIP
Equipment
EFP
Engine Failure Procedures
ESS
Essential
EGPWS
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning

System
ET
Elapsed Time
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EVAC
Evacuation
EICAS
Engine Indication & Crew Alerting

System
EXH
Exhaust
EL
Elevation
EXTIN
Extinguish(ed)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-4
12 FEB 10
-FF/CTL
Flight Controls
FIREX
Fire Extinguisher
F/F
Fuel Flow
FLT
Flight
FA
Flight Attendant
FLUOR
Florescent
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
FLX
Flex Thrust (Reduced Takeoff Thrust)
FADEC
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FMS
Flight Management System
FAIL
Failure
FO
First Officer
FCC
Flight Control Computer
FOD
Foreign Object Damage
FCU
Fuel Control Unit
FPM
Feet Per Minute
FD
Flight Director
FREQ
Frequency
FDAU
Flight Data Acquisition Unit
FT
Feet, foot
FDR
Flight Data Recorder
FUSE
Fuselage
FECU
Flaps Electronic Control Unit
FW
Fire Wall
FF
Fuel Flow
FWD
Forward
FIDEX
Fire Detection & Extinguishing

-G-
G (+/-)
Receiver Gain
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
G/S
Glide Slope
GND
Ground
GA
Go-Around
GPM
Gallons Per Minute
GAL
Gallon
GPS
Global Positioning System
GALY
Galley
GPWS
Ground Proximity Warning System
GCS
Ground Clutter Suppression
GR
Gear
GCU
Generator Control Unit
GRAV
Gravity
GE
General Electric
GRD
Ground
GEN
General
GS
Ground Speed
GLD
Ground Lift Dumping
GW
Gross Weight
-HHDG
Heading
HP
High Pressure
HDG HOLD
Heading Hold
hPa
Hecto Pascals
HDG SEL
Heading Select
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HF
High Frequency (3 - 30 mHz)
HSTA
Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Actuator
Hg
Mercury
HSTCU
Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Control Unit
HI
High
HTR
Heater
HOR
Horizontal
HUD
Heads Up Display
HORIZ
Horizontal
HYD
Hydraulic
Hz
Hertz
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-5
12 FEB 10
-II/B
Inboard
INBD
Inboard
I/C
Intercom
INCR
Increase
IAPS
Integrated Avionics Processor System
IND
Indication, Indicator
IAS
Indicated Air Speed
INFLT
In-Flight
IB
Inboard
INHIB
Inhibit
IC
Intercom
INOP
Inoperative
ICAO
International Civil Aviation Organization
INPH
Interphone
ID
Identification
INSP
Inspection
IDENT
Identification
INST
Instrument
IDG
Integrated Drive Generator
INT
Internal, Integral, Intersection
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
INVAL
Invalid
IGN
Ignition
IRS
Inertial Reference System
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IRU
Inertial Reference Unit
IM
Inner Marker
ISA
International Standard Organization
IMC
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
ISOL
Isolation, Isolated
IN
Inch, Inches
ISIS
Integrated Standby Instrument System
in Hg
Inches of Mercury
ITT
Inter Turbine Temperature
-JJAA
Joint Aviation Authorities

-K-
Kg(s)
Kilogram(s)
KT, KTS
Knots
kHz
Kilohertz
kVa
Kilo Volt amperes
KIAS
Knots Indicated Airspeed
kW(s)
Kilo Watt(s)
kPa
Kilo Pascals
Leak
-LL
Left, Landing
LK
L/T
Landing/Taxi
LN
Left Nose
LAV
Lavatory
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
lb(s).
Pounds
LO
Low
LCN
Load Classification Number
LOC
Localizer
LCV
Load Control Valve
LP
Low Pressure
LDG
Landing
LPM
Liter Per Minute
LDG GR
Landing Gear
LR
Left Rear
LDU
Lamp Driver Unit
LRC
Long Range Cruise
LE
Leading Edge
LSB
Lower Side Band
LG
Landing Gear
LT(s)
Light(s)
LGW
Landing Gross Weight
LW
Left Wing
LH
Left Hand
LWD
Left Wing Down
LIM
Limit
LWR
Lower
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-6
12 FEB 10
-Mm
Meter
MIN
Minimum
Mach Number
MISC
Miscellaneous
MAA
Maximum Authorized IFR Altitude
MKR
Marker
MAC
Mean Aerodynamic Cord
MLG
Main Landing Gear
MAG
Magnetic
MLS
Microwave Landing System
MAINT
Maintenance
MLW
Maximum Landing Weight
MALF
Malfunction
MM
Middle Marker
MAN
Manual
MMEL
Master Minimum Equipment List
MAP
Ground Map (WXR)
MMO
MAX
Maximum
Maximum Operating Speed in Mach

Number
MB, mbs
Millibars
MOCA
Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude
MCA
Minimum Crossing Altitude
MOD
Module
MCT
Maximum Continuous Thrust
MON
Monitor
MDA
Minimum Descent Altitude
MPH
Miles Per Hour
MEA
Minimum Enroute Altitude
MPH
Miles Per Hour
MECH
Mechanic
MRA
Minimum Reception Altitude
MED
Medium
MSG
Message
MEL
Minimum Equipment List
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MES
Main Engine Start
MTC
Maintenance
MFD
Multi-Function Display
MTG
Miles to Go
MHz
Mega Hertz
MTOW
Maximum Takeoff Weight
MI
Miles
MTW
Maximum Taxi Weight
MIC
Microphone
MZFW
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
MILS
.001 of an inch
- MISC -
Percent
Degrees Celsius
Number
Degrees Fahrenheit
&
And
Not Applicable
NEUT
Neutral
N/W
Nosewheel
NL
Nose Left
N1
Low Pressure Spool Speed
NLG
Nose Landing Gear
N2
High Pressure Spool Speed
NM
Nautical Mile(s)
NAM
Nautical Air Mile(s)
No.
Number
NAV
Navigation
NORM
Normal
ND
Nose Down, Navigation Display
NU
Nose Up
NDB
Non Directional Beacon
NW
Nosewheel
NEG
Negative
-NN/A
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-7
12 FEB 10
-OO2
Oxygen
OM
Outer Marker
OAT
Outside Air Temperature
OUTBD
Outboard
OB
Outboard
OVBD
Overboard
OBS
Observer
OVHD
Overhead
OBV
Operability Bleed Valve
OVHT
Overheat
OEI
One Engine Inoperative
OVLD
Overload
OEO
One Engine Only
OVSPD
Overspeed
OEW
Operating Empty Weight
OVTEMP
Over Temperature
OH
Overheat
OXY
Oxygen
OH
Overhead
-P-
P/S
Pitot/Static
PRI
Primary
PA
Passenger Address
PROC
Procedure
PASS
Passenger
PROT
Protection
PAX
Passenger
PROX
Proximity
PBE
Portable Breathing Equipment
PRV
Pressure Regulating Valve
PCU
Power Control Unit
PSEU
Proximity Sensor Electronic Unit
PDP
Planned Descent Point
PSI
Pounds Per Square Inch
PF
Pilot Flying
PSID
Pounds Per Square Inch Differential
PFD
Primary Flight Display
PSIG
Pounds Per Square Inch Gauge
PLA
Power Lever Angle
PSS
Proximity Sensor System
PLT
Pilot
PSU
Passenger Service Unit
PNF
Pilot Not Flying
PT2
Engine Inlet Pressure
PNL
Panel
PTCT
Protect
POS
Position
PTT
Push To Talk
PPH
Pounds Per Hour
PWR
Power
PRESS
Pressure, Pressurization
-Q-
QAR
Quick Access Recorder
QNE
ISA, Barometric Pressure
QEC
Quick Engine Change
QNH
Altimeter Setting
QFE
Local Station Pressure
QTY
Quantity
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-8
12 FEB 10
-RRight
RMI
Radio Magnetic Indicator
R/T
Receiver Transmitter
ROT
Rotation
RA
Radio Altitude
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
RAT
Ram Air Turbine
RT
Receiver Transmitter
RCCB
Remote Controlled Circuit Breaker
RTE
Route
RCDR
Recorder
RTO
Rejected Takeoff
RCVR
Receiver
RTU
Radio Tuning Unit
RDR
Radar
RUD
Rudder
RECOG
Recognition
RVR
Runway Visual Range
REF(s)
Reference(s)
RVSR
Reverser
REFL
Refuel
RW
Right Wing
REV
Reverse
RWD
Right Wing Down
RH
Right Hand
RWY
Runway
Static Air Temperature
SQL
Squelch
SCAV
Scavenge
SSB
Single Side Band
SEC
Second, Secondary
SSCU
Spoiler Stabilizer Control Unit
SECU
Spoiler Electronic Control Unit
STA
Station
SEL
Select, Selector
STAT
Status
SELCAL
Selective Calling
STBY
Standby
SENS
Sensitivity, Sensor
STEER
Steering
SERV
Service
SUPPL
Supply
SOV
Shutoff Valve
SW
Switch
SP
Speed
SYN
Synchronize
SPD
Speed
SYNC
Synchronous
SPKR
Speaker
SYS
System
SPLR(s)
Spoiler(s)
SYST
System
-SSAT
-TT/C
Top of Climb
TEMP
Temperature
T/D
Top of Descent
TGT
Target
T/O
Takeoff
TO
Takeoff
T/R
Thrust Reverser
TOD
Top of Descent
T2
Engine Inlet Temperature
TOL
Tolerance
TAS
True Airspeed
TRK
Track
TAT
Total Air Temperature
TRM
Trim
TCAS
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance

System
TRU
Transformer Rectifier Unit
TURB
Turbulence
TE
Trailing Edge
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-9
12 FEB 10
-UUNSCHD
Unscheduled
USG
US Gallons
USB
Upper Side Band
UTIL
Utility
-VV
Volt
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
V/S
Vertical Speed
VNAV
Vertical Navigation
Vac
Volt Alternating Current
VOL
Volume
Vdc
Volt Direct Current
VOLT
Voltage
VDP
Visual Descent Point
VOR
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station
VERT
Vertical
VORTAC
VOR and TACAN co-located
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VPA
Vertical Path Angle
VG
Vertical Gyro
VS
Vertical Speed Mode
VHF
Very High Frequency (30 - 300 mHz)
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VIB
Vibration
-W-
W&B
Weight and Balance
WOW
Weight-On-Wheels
W/C
Wind Component
WPT
Way point
W/S
Wind Shear
WS
Second Segment Limited Weight
W/W
Wheel Well
WSHLD
Windshield
WARN
Warning
WT
Weight
WF
Runway Field Length Limited Weight
WX
Weather
WHLS
Wheels
WXR
Weather Radar
WIND
Window
-X-
XFER
Transfer
XPNDR
Transponder
XFLOW
Cross Flow
XTK
Cross Track
XFR
Transfer
XWC
Cross Wind Component
XMIT
Transmit
YD
Yaw Damper
-YY/D
Yaw Damper
-Z-
ZFW
Zero Fuel Weight
PSA Airlines, Inc.


General
2-10
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Table of Contents
3-i
9 MAY 11
3.1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2
Operational Limits.................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.3
Center of Gravity Limits ........................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.4
Structural Weight Limitation ................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.5
Airspeed and Mach Number Limits ......................................................................................................
3.5.1
Maximum Operating Speed and Mach Number..................................................................................
3.5.2
Design Maneuvering Speed................................................................................................................
3.5.3
Flap Extended Speeds........................................................................................................................
3.5.4
Flap Operating Speeds .......................................................................................................................
3.5.5
Minimum Operating Limit Speed.........................................................................................................
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3.6
Operation in Icing Conditions ...............................................................................................................
3.6.1
Definition of Icing Conditions ..............................................................................................................
3.6.2
Tactile Check. .....................................................................................................................................
3.6.3
Cowl Anti-Ice System..........................................................................................................................
3.6.4
Wing Anti-ice System..........................................................................................................................
3.6.5
Supercooled Large Droplet Icing ........................................................................................................
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3.7
Takeoff and Landing on Contaminated Runways ............................................................................... 3-6
3.8
Ozone Concentration............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.9
Engines .................................................................................................................................................
3.9.1
Engine Indications.............................................................................................................................
3.9.2
Engine Operating Limits....................................................................................................................
3.9.3
Airplane Cold Soak ...........................................................................................................................
3.9.4
Oil Temperature ................................................................................................................................
3.9.5
Oil Pressure ......................................................................................................................................
3.9.6
Continuous Engine Ignition ...............................................................................................................
3.9.7
Automatic Performance Reserve (APR) ...........................................................................................
3.9.8
Starter Cranking Limits .....................................................................................................................
3.9.9
Engine Relight Limitations ................................................................................................................
3.9.10 Thrust Reversers ..............................................................................................................................
3.9.11 Engine Operating Limits Due to Wind Direction................................................................................
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-16
3.10 Fuel........................................................................................................................................................
3.10.1 Fuel Quantities..................................................................................................................................
3.10.2 Fuel Crossflow ..................................................................................................................................
3.10.3 Fuel Temperature .............................................................................................................................
3.10.4 Fuel Grades ......................................................................................................................................
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-18
3.11 Oil .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-18

3.11.1 Oil Consumption ............................................................................................................................... 3-18
PSA Airlines, Inc.


3-ii
9 MAY 11
Limitations
Table of Contents
3.12 Auxiliary Power Unit ............................................................................................................................

3.12.1 Starting..............................................................................................................................................
3.12.2 Operating Range...............................................................................................................................
3.12.3 APU Bleed Air ...................................................................................................................................
3.12.4 APU Indications ................................................................................................................................
3.12.5 APU Door Open Limitation................................................................................................................
3.12.6 APU Start and Operating Envelope ..................................................................................................
3.13
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
Air Conditioning and Pressurization .................................................................................................. 3-21
3.14 Navigation .............................................................................................................................................

3.14.1 Automatic Flight Control System.......................................................................................................
3.14.2 Integrated Standby Instrument (ISI)..................................................................................................
3.14.3 Altimeter System...............................................................................................................................
3.14.4 EGPWS.............................................................................................................................................
3.14.5 Global Position System.....................................................................................................................
3.14.6 FMS ..................................................................................................................................................
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-22
3.15 Electrical Systems ............................................................................................................................... 3-22

3.15.1 Permissible AC Electrical System Loads .......................................................................................... 3-22
3.15.2 Permissible DC Electrical System Loads.......................................................................................... 3-23
3.16 Flight Controls - Lift / Drag Devices ................................................................................................... 3-23
3.16.1 Slats/Flaps ........................................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.16.2 Flight Spoilers ................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.17
Taxi Lights ............................................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.18
Wheel Brake Cooling Limitations ....................................................................................................... 3-23
3.19
Flight Deck Door................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.20
Hydraulic Pump 3B (CRJ-200 Only).................................................................................................... 3-24
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Introduction
3-1
12 FEB 10
The following is a listing of the CRJ-200 and CRJ-701 limitations. PSA pilots are responsible for being aware of and
observing all limitations. Some limitations have been modified and are more restrictive than the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM)
in order to promote commonality between the two fleet types.
These limitations must be adhered to unless otherwise directed by a QRH, MEL, or CDL procedure. All limitations apply to
the -200 and -701 unless noted otherwise by <-200> or <-701> preceding the text, chart or table. In addition, certain
limitations must be memorized. Memory items are identified by bold print. Boxes that contain memory items are identified
by a bold border. These items are of such importance that flight crews must be continuously aware of them in order to avoid
exceeding the limitation, prevent equipment damage, and ensure safety.
3.1
Introduction
The limitations included in this chapter contain items unique to the CL600, model 2B19, Bombardier CRJ-200; and the
CL600, model 2C10, Bombardier CRJ-701 airplanes. Observance of these limitations is mandatory.
The information presented in this chapter contains limitations that have been extracted from the AFM, however these
limitations are not all inclusive.
In addition, POH limitations do not represent all aircraft configurations of the CRJ, only those associated with PSA Airlines,
Inc.s aircraft.
3.2
Operational Limits
Minimum flight crew
One Captain and

one First Officer
Maximum 90 degree crosswind for takeoff and landing
27 knots
Maximum 90 degree crosswind for reduced landing minima (RVR below 2400) to runways
without TDZ lights and/or CL lights, including runways with installed but inoperative TDZ
lights and/or CL lights (Ref US OpSpec C074):
15 knots
Maximum direct tailwind for takeoff and landing
10 knots
Maximum runway slope approved for takeoff and landing
+2.0% (uphill)
-2.0% (downhill)
Maximum operating altitude <200>
36,000 ft.
Maximum operating altitude <700>
41,000 ft.
Maximum pressure altitude for takeoff and landing
8,000 feet
Maximum ambient temperature for takeoff and landing
50C
Minimum ambient temperature approved for takeoff
-40C
Maneuvering Limit Load Factors
Flaps Retracted
-1.0 to +2.5 G
Flaps Extended
0.0 to +2.0 G
Note: Gust factors are not limiting but should be considered at the time of takeoff and landing.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Center of Gravity Limits
3-2
12 FEB 10
3.3
Center of Gravity Limits
The airplane must be loaded in accordance with the loading instructions in the Flight Operations Manual (FOM).
TAKEOFF
Pitch Trim
WARNING
Pitch trim must be set according to the aircraft's computed center of gravity.
Failure to set the pitch trim appropriate to the computed center of gravity may result in excessive rotation
rate at takeoff.
Rotation Rate
WARNING
Excessive rotation rates (exceeding 3 degrees per second) or overrotations may lead to high pitch
attitudes being attained while the aircraft is near the ground. This can reduce stall margins
significantly resulting in stick shaker / pusher activation and potentially loss of control. Pilots must
rotate smoothly towards the target pitch attitude then transition to speed control.
3.4
Structural Weight Limitation

<-200>
<-701>
Maximum Taxi and Ramp Weight
53,250 lbs.
75,250 lbs.
Maximum Takeoff Weight
53,000 lbs.
75,000 lbs.
Maximum Landing Weight
47,000 lbs.
67,000 lbs.
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
44,000 lbs.
62,300 lbs.
Minimum Operating Weight Empty
25,480 lbs.
42,000 lbs.
Maximum Weight In Cargo Compartment
3,500 lbs.
Maximum Weight Forward Cargo Compartment
1,000 lbs.
Maximum Weight In Aft Cargo Compartment
3,300 lbs.
<-200>
Flight must be within 45 minutes of a suitable airport, if cargo is carried in the cargo compartment.
<-701>
Flight must be within 60 minutes of a suitable airport, if cargo is carried in either cargo compartment.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Airspeed and Mach Number Limits
3.5
3-3
12 FEB 10
Turbulence Penetration Speed
280 KIAS/.75M,
whichever is lower
Maximum gear extension speed
220 KIAS
Maximum gear extended speed
220 KIAS
Maximum gear retraction speed
200 KIAS
Maximum airspeed for windshield wiper operation
220 KIAS
Maximum airspeed for windshield wiper operation failed in the non-parked position <-701 only>
250 KIAS
Maximum Cruise Mach in RVSM Airspace

Tire limit ground speed
3.5.1
0.83M
182 knots
Maximum Operating Speed and Mach Number
Maximum operating limit speeds must not be deliberately exceeded in any regime of flight unless a higher speed is specifically
authorized for flight test or training operations.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
3-4
12 FEB 10
3.5.2
Design Maneuvering Speed
Full application of rudder and aileron controls, as well as maneuvers that involve angles of attack near the stall, must be
confined to speeds below VA (refer to aircraft placards).
Caution
Avoid rapid and large alternating control inputs, especially in combination with large changes in
pitch, roll, or yaw (e.g., large side slip angles) as they may cause structural failure at any speed,
including below VA.
3.5.3
Flap Extended Speeds
The maximum speeds at which the aircraft may be flown with the flaps extended are:
Flap Position
VFE
<-200>
<-701>
230 KIAS
Flaps 1
3.5.4
Flaps 8
230 KIAS
Flaps 20
230 KIAS
Flaps 30
185 KIAS
Flaps 45
170 KIAS
Flap Operating Speeds
The maximum speeds at which it is safe to extend the flaps are:

Flap Selection
VFO
<-200>
Flaps 0 to 8
200 KIAS
Flaps 8 to 20
200 KIAS
Flaps 20 to 30
185 KIAS
Flaps 30 to 45
170 KIAS
The maximum speed at which it is safe to retract the flaps is VFE for the initial flap position.
<-701> The VFE and VFO speeds are equal.
3.5.5
Minimum Operating Limit Speed
Intentional speed reduction below the onset of stall warning, as defined by stick shaker operation, is prohibited unless a lower
speed is specifically authorized for flight test or training operations.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Operation in Icing Conditions
3-5
30 AUG 10
3.6
Operation in Icing Conditions
3.6.1
Definition of Icing Conditions
COWL ANTI-ICE - Icing Conditions exist when the OAT (on the ground and for takeoff) or TAT (inflight) is 10C or
below, and:
Visible moisture in any form (such as clouds, fog, mist, rain, snow, sleet, or ice crystals), is present in flight, or below
400 feet AGL for ground operations, or
When operating on surfaces that are wet or contaminated.
WING ANTI-ICE - Icing conditions exist when the OAT (takeoff) is 5C or TAT (inflight) is 10C or below, and:
Visible moisture in any form (such as clouds, fog, mist, rain, snow, sleet or ice crystals) is present in flight, or below
400 feet AGL for ground operations, or
The runway is wet or contaminated.
WARNING
Do not hold in icing conditions with slats and/or flaps extended.
WARNING
Take-off is prohibited with frost, ice, snow or slush adhering to any critical surface (wings, upper
fuselage, horizontal stabilizer, vertical stabilizer, control surfaces or engine inlets).
Take-off is permitted with frost adhering to the underside of the wing (maximum 1/8 inch), which is caused by cold soaked
fuel.
WARNING
Even small amounts of frost, ice, snow or slush on the wing leading edges and upper wing surface
may adversely change the stall speeds, stall characteristics and the protection provided by the stall
protection system, which may result in loss of control on take-off.
ANTI-ICE will be used any time that icing conditions are expected prior to thrust reduction in the After Takeoff Check.
Single Engine Taxi is prohibited when ramps or taxiways are contaminated with snow, slush or ice OR during icing
conditions.
To prevent wing contamination from reverse jet blast, operating the thrust reversers during taxi operations on wet and
contaminated surfaces should be avoided.
3.6.2
Tactile Check.
In addition to a visual check, a tactile check of the wing leading edge, wing forward upper surface and wing rear upper surface
is required during the External Walkaround inspection to determine that the wing is free from frost, ice, snow or slush when:
The OAT is 5C or less, or

The wing fuel temperature is 0C or less, or
The atmospheric conditions have been conducive to frost formation.
Ice and frost may continue to adhere to wing surfaces for some time even at outside air temperatures above 5C.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


3-6
15 MAR 10
3.6.3
Limitations
Takeoff and Landing on Contaminated Runways
Cowl Anti-Ice System.
Cowl Anti-Ice must be ON for all ground and flight operations when icing conditions exist except when the inflight SAT
is -40C or below, or ICE is annunciated by the ice detection system.
3.6.4
Wing Anti-ice System.
Wing Anti-Ice must be ON for takeoff and flight operations when ICE is annunciated by the ice detection system, or
when icing conditions exist and the airspeed is less than 230 KIAS except when the inflight SAT is -40C or below.
When Type III or IV anti-icing fluids have been applied, the wing anti-ice system must only be selected and confirmed ON,
if required, just prior to thrust increase for takeoff.
L or R WING A/ICE caution messages may be posted during taxi but must be verified out (i.e. WING A/ICE ON advisory
message posted) prior to take-off.
<-200 Only> Wing Anti-Ice must be ON for the final two minutes prior to takeoff during all ground operations 5C
OAT or below unless Type III or IV anti-icing fluid has been applied.
3.6.5
Supercooled Large Droplet Icing.
Continued operation in areas where supercooled large droplet (SLD) icing conditions exist is prohibited.
SLD icing conditions are indicated by ice accretion on the flight compartment side windows.
Wing and cowl anti-icing systems must be ON in SLD icing conditions
Leave icing conditions when side window icing occurs
3.7
Takeoff and Landing on Contaminated Runways
Takeoff on contaminated runways is prohibited when:

<-200>
Standing water is more than 0.5 inch in depth

Slush is more than 0.5 inch in depth
Wet snow is more than 1.0 inch in depth
Dry snow is more than 3.0 inches in depth
Crosswind or tailwind component exceeds the guidelines for braking action in the chart at the end of Chapter 8 of this POH
<-701>

PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Ozone Concentration
3-7
12 FEB 10
Landing on contaminated runways is prohibited when:

<-200>

<-701>

3.8
Ozone Concentration
The following data are presented in order to determine the flight altitudes and / or duration at altitude in compliance with the
cabin ozone concentration requirements as per FAR 25.832, which states that the airplane cabin ozone concentration during
flight must not exceed:
0.25 parts per million by volume, sea level equivalent, at any time above flight level 320, and
0.1 parts per million by volume, sea level equivalent, time-weighted average during any 3-hour interval above flight level
270.
Sea level equivalent refers to conditions of 25C and 760 millimeters of mercury pressure.
Cabin ozone concentration limits are dependent upon the latitude, time of year and geographic location. These tables are
separated into Eastern North America (i.e. east of 100 W) and Western North America (i.e. west of 100 W). Two checks are
required to determine the cabin ozone concentration flight profile limitation. The first check determines the maximum
allowable altitude while the second check determines the maximum flight duration at altitude. It is permitted to interpolate
linearly between months, latitudes or altitudes.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Ozone Concentration
3-8
12 FEB 10
<200> Maximum Operating Altitude of FL 360 is under the max altitude due to ozone
<701> Maximum Altitude due to ozone
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
390
410
410
410
410
410
FEB
390
390
410
410
410
410
EASTERN NORTH AMERICA

MAR APR MAY JUN
390
370
370
410
390
390
390
410
390
390
390
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
JUL
410
410
410
410
410
410
AUG
410
410
410
410
410
410
SEP
410
410
410
410
410
410
OCT
410
410
410
410
410
410
NOV
410
410
410
410
410
410
DEC
410
410
410
410
410
410
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
410
410
410
410
410
410
FEB
390
410
410
410
410
410
WESTERN NORTH AMERICA

MAR APR MAY JUN
370
370
390
390
410
370
390
410
410
390
390
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
410
JUL
410
410
410
410
410
410
AUG
410
410
410
410
410
410
SEP
410
410
410
410
410
410
OCT
410
410
410
410
410
410
NOV
410
410
410
410
410
410
DEC
410
410
410
410
410
410
MAXIMUM FLIGHT DURATION AT ALTITUDE

FL 350
JAN
FEB MAR APR MAY JUN
Latitude
60 N 1.90 1.00
0.85
0.67
0.67
1.00
55 N 1.90 1.30
1.00
0.82
0.82
1.85
50 N 3.20 1.90
1.37
1.03
1.00
3.20
45 N 6.00 3.20
3.20
1.36
1.90
6.00
40 N 6.00 6.00
6.00
3.20
6.00
6.00
35 N 6.00 6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
JUL
3.20
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
AUG
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
DEC
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
JUL
1.46
2.05
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
AUG
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
3.35
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
DEC
2.05
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
Latitude
Latitude
FL 370
Latitude
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
1.00
1.40
2.00
3.55
6.00
6.00
FEB
0.68
0.80
1.38
2.05
3.50
6.00
PSA Airlines, Inc.


MAR APR MAY JUN
0.60
0.55
0.55
0.67
0.70
0.58
0.56
1.00
0.86
0.69
0.67
1.46
1.45
0.86
1.39
3.57
6.00
1.43
3.57
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00

Limitations
Ozone Concentration
3-9
12 FEB 10
FL 390
Latitude
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
0.60
0.80
1.10
2.15
3.90
6.00
FEB
0.40
0.50
0.80
1.10
1.50
6.00

MAR APR MAY JUN
0.40
0.30 0.30 0.50
0.45
0.40 0.38 0.66
0.57
0.50 0.50 1.10
0.90
0.65 0.84 2.15
2.10
0.84 2.16 6.00
6.00
3.90 6.00 6.00
JUL
1.10
1.40
3.60
6.00
6.00
6.00
AUG
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
3.70
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
2.00
3.70
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
DEC
1.40
2.15
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
FEB
0.25
0.30
0.45
0.63
0.96
4.70

MAR APR MAY JUN
0.20
0.17 0.20 0.36
0.26
0.23 0.25 0.43
0.33
0.29 0.29 0.74
0.63
0.40 0.58 1.23
1.20
0.60 1.23 2.70
4.17
2.50 4.50 6.00
JUL
0.63
0.92
1.60
4.50
6.00
6.00
AUG
2.50
2.50
4.50
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
2.50
4.50
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
1.20
0.25
4.70
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
0.90
1.20
1.75
4.50
6.00
6.00
DEC
0.77
1.20
2.50
2.50
4.50
6.00
FL 410
Latitude
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
0.37
0.45
0.63
1.10
2.50
6.00
FL 350
Latitude
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
FEB
1.40
6.00
6.00
6.00
3.20
6.00

MAR APR MAY JUN
0.87
0.76 0.82 1.10
1.40
0.82 0.82 1.40
3.20
0.82 0.85 1.95
6.00
1.32 1.37 6.00
3.20
3.20 6.00 6.00
6.00
6.00 6.00 6.00
JUL
1.37
1.90
3.20
6.00
6.00
6.00
AUG
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
DEC
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
2.15
3.70
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
FEB
0.90
2.15
6.00
6.00
1.46
6.00

MAR APR MAY JUN
0.63
0.44 0.56 0.64
0.76
0.56 0.56 0.76
1.53
0.56 0.60 1.10
2.08
0.84 0.86 3.57
2.05
1.86 3.57 6.00
6.00
6.00 6.00 6.00
JUL
0.88
1.08
1.46
6.00
6.00
6.00
AUG
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
DEC
3.60
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
FL 370
Latitude
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3-10
12 FEB 10
FL 390
Latitude
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
1.19
2.30
6.00
6.00
3.93
6.00
FEB
0.61
1.19
6.00
6.00
1.11
6.00

MAR APR MAY JUN
0.00
0.00
0.38
0.45
0.61
0.00
0.38
0.61
0.90
0.38
0.41
0.71
1.11
0.57
0.57
1.18
1.11
1.44
2.16
6.00
4.02
6.00
6.00
6.00
60 N
55 N
50 N
45 N
40 N
35 N
JAN
0.70
1.04
1.78
2.55
1.68
6.00
FEB
0.00
0.70
1.87
2.55
0.88
6.00

MAR APR MAY JUN
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.43
0.00
0.00
0.43
0.64
0.00
0.00
0.45
0.92
0.40
0.40
0.96
0.74
0.88
1.62
4.50
2.55
6.00
4.85
6.00
FL 410
Latitude
3.9
JUL
0.71
0.71
0.90
2.15
6.00
6.00
AUG
2.30
3.93
3.93
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
2.17
3.95
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
DEC
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
JUL
0.55
0.58
0.74
2.34
6.00
6.00
AUG
1.68
1.68
2.42
6.00
6.00
6.00
SEP
2.59
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
OCT
1.23
2.50
2.59
6.00
6.00
6.00
NOV
1.75
1.80
2.59
4.80
6.00
6.00
DEC
0.72
1.33
4.70
6.00
6.00
6.00
Engines
The engine limit display markings on EICAS must be used to determine compliance with the maximum/minimum limits and
precautionary ranges. If EICAS markings show more conservative limits than those specified below, the limit markings on the
EICAS must be used.
Red
Maximum and minimum limitations
Amber
Caution range
Green
Normal operating range
During all starts, do not exceed 75% N1 for 2 minutes after start, or until all operating indications are in the normal
range, whichever is longer.
Operate engines at or near idle for 2 minutes prior to shutdown.
Taxi time at a stabilized 80% N2 or below may be credited towards the two-minute cool down period.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3.9.1
3-11
12 FEB 10
Engine Indications.
<-200>
CF 34-3B1 Engine
Red
Indication
Amber
*874 to 900
Green
0 to 98.5
0 to 900
0 to 884
0 to 928
0 to 900
0 to 874
N1% RPM
98.6
ITT C
900 (for first 2 min)
Normal Takeoff
884 (for next 3 min)
ITT C Go-Around
928 (for first 2 min)
or APR Thrust
900 (for next 3 min)
ITT C Maximum
* 900
Continuous Thrust
** 874 to 900
(MCT)
** 900
N2% RPM Wing Anti-Ice ON
99.3
0 to 77.9
78 to 99.2
99.3
0 to 99.2
N2% RPM
Wing Anti-Ice OFF
Oil Temp C
163
150 to 162
-40 to 149
Oil Press psi
0 to 25
116 to 156
26 to 115
* During MCT, amber band and red tick mark appears if ITT is greater than 874C
** During MCT, amber band becomes a red band if ITT remains above 874C for more than 30 seconds or if ITT is greater
than 900C. Red tick mark stays at 900C.
<-701>
CF 34-8C1 Engine
Indication
N1 % rpm
N2 % rpm
ITT C
Oil Temp C
Oil Press psi
3.9.2
Red
99.5
99.4
Variable
164
0 to 24
Amber
156 to 163
Variable
Green
0 to 99.4
0 to 99.3
Variable
-40 to 155
Variable
Engine Operating Limits.
<-200>
Condition
Start
Idle
Acceleration
Max Continuous
Normal
Takeoff
Go-Around or APR Thrust
Core RPM N2%

20
** 56.5 to 68.0
99.2
98.3
99.4
CF 34-3B1 Engine
Fan RPM N1%
ITT C
900
900
98.6
874
96.2
*884 (5 minutes)
*900 (2 minutes out of 5 total transient)
98.6
*900 (5 minutes)
928 (2 minutes out of 5 total transient)
* Transient limits
** Engine to engine N2 split at ground idle power should not be greater than 2% N2. If N2 is 57% or less with an OAT
of -20C or less, do not accelerate above idle.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3-12
12 FEB 10
<-701>
CF 34-8C1 Engine
Assisted Air
Idle
Windmill Start5
Start5
Limit
Ground Start4
N1
815C
815C
927C
(5 sec.)
955C
(2 sec.)
0-45%
ITT
N2
Oil Press
Min Oil Level
for Flight
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.9.3
182 psi
95 psi (after
10 min.)
40 % min with
affected engine
not started
Max Cont.
20-25%
99.5%
927C
993C
(5 sec.)
1010C
(2 sec.)
927C
(25 sec.)
960C
(10 sec.)
1010C
(2 sec.)
0-45%
55-65%
182 psi
95 psi (after
10 min.)
-
97.9%
Normal TO
(TOGA)1
97.9%
920C
(5 min.)
939C
(2 min.)
1021C
(30 sec.)3
98.3%
182 psi
25-60 psi
95 psi (after 10 25-95 psi (oil 45-95 psi6,7 45-95 psi6,7
min.)
temp <60C)
-
APR2 (Max
Power)1
99.5%
960C
(5 min.)
979C
(2 min.)
1021C
(30 sec.)3
99.4%
45-95 psi6,7
Normal takeoff power and maximum power (2 engines) is limited to 5 minutes.

APR power (1 engine) is limited to 10 minutes.
Transient occurrences above 979C (as indicated by ITT EXCEED B, ITT EXCEED B1, or ITT EXCEED C
White Status messages) must be logged.
Pilot initiated APR thrust is prohibited for the first 30 minutes after any engine start at altitudes below 7,500 MSL
and at all times above 7,500 MSL. This limitation does not prohibit the pilot from selecting APR as required for
safety of flight.
NOTE: If subsequently restarted in flight, the engine will reset the FADEC and the greater than 30 minute warmup time limit then re-applies.
ITT must be below 120C before attempting to ground start engine.
ITT must be below 90C before attempting to airstart engine.
Maximum oil pressure is limited to 156 psi when oil temp transient is <60C.
Oil pressures (above IDLE) between 25 and 45 psi require oil temperature monitoring.
Oil pressures should show positive value during start and may peak beyond 182 psi (max display value). Oil pressures above 182 psi are displayed as amber dashes. Oil pressure may be greater than 95 psi for a maximum of 10
minutes.
Airplane Cold Soak.
Before the first flight of the day, when the airplane is cold-soaked at an ambient temperature of -30C (-22F) or below for
more than 8 hours:
The engines must be motored for 60 seconds and fan rotation must be verified before an engine start is initiated
<-200>
Thrust reversers must be actuated until the deploy and stow cycles are less than 5 seconds
<-701>
Thrust reversers must be actuated until the deploy and stow cycles are 2 seconds or less
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3.9.4
3-13
30 AUG 10
Oil Temperature.
Minimum for starting
3.9.5
-40C
Maximum Continuous
+155C
Maximum Permissible
+163C
(15 minutes maximum)
Oil Pressure.
<-200>
<-701>
Steady-state idle
25 psi minimum
Takeoff Power
45 psi minimum
Maximum Continuous
115 psi maximum
Maximum Transient
Maximum transient after cold start

(10 minutes maximum)
156 psi, 130 psi at idle
95 psi maximum
156 psi when oil temp is <60C
182 psi
or amber dashes
Note
After cold start, engine must remain at idle until oil pressure returns to normal range.
3.9.6
Continuous Engine Ignition.
Continuous engine ignition must be used during the following:
Takeoff and landing on contaminated runways
Takeoff with high crosswind components (15 knots or greater)
Flight through moderate or heavier intensity rain
Flight through moderate or heavier intensity turbulence
Flight in the vicinity of thunderstorms
3.9.7
Automatic Performance Reserve (APR).
<-200 only>
If takeoff performance is predicated upon the use of APR, the APR system must be verified operative prior to takeoff.
The APR system must be selected OFF if an APR INOP Amber Caution message is displayed on EICAS.
APR OFF performance must be used if an APR INOP Amber Caution message is displayed.
3.9.8
Starter Cranking Limits.
<-200 only>
Start
Maximum Time ON
Followed By
1 Minute
10 Seconds OFF
1 Minute
10 Seconds OFF
3 and Subsequent
1 Minute
5 Minutes OFF
The starter must not be engaged if indicated N2 RPM exceeds 55%:
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3-14
12 FEB 10
<-701 Ground only>
Start
Maximum Time ON
Followed By
90 Seconds
10 Seconds OFF
90 Seconds
10 Seconds OFF
3 and Subsequent
90 Seconds
5 Minutes OFF
<-701 Flight only>

Start
Maximum Time ON
Followed By
2 Minutes
10 Seconds OFF
2 and Subsequent
1 Minute
5 Minutes OFF
The starter must not be engaged if indicated N2 RPM exceeds 45%

Associated Conditions.
At initiation of thrust lever movement from SHUT OFF to IDLE:
ITT must be 120C or less for all ground starts
ITT must be 90C or less for all air starts
Dry-Motoring Cycle.
A dry-motoring cycle (with thrust levers at SHUT OFF) may be used for engine ground starts and engine air starts.
Start
3.9.9
Maximum Time ON
Followed By
90 Seconds
5 Minutes OFF
2 and Subsequent
30 Seconds
5 Minutes OFF
Engine Relight Limitations.
<-200>
Relight Type
Windmilling
Starter Assisted Crossbleed
(> 60 psi)
Relight Envelope
Altitude from 21,000 to 15,000 ft.:
Speed 300 KIAS to VMO and from 12 to 55% N2
Altitude less than 15,000 ft.:
Speed 300 KIAS to VMO and from 9 to 55% N2
Altitude from 21,000 ft. to sea level:
Speed from VREF up to VMO and from 0 to 55% N2
Engine starting inflight is only permitted within the envelope defined in the following figure.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3-15
12 FEB 10
<-701>
Relight Type
Windmilling
Starter Assisted
All Engine-Out Rapid Relight
Relight Envelope
Altitude from 21,000 to 10,000 ft.:
Speed 290 KIAS to VMO and from 7.2% N2 minimum
Altitude less than 10,000 ft.:
Speed 250 KIAS to VMO and from 7.2% N2 minimum
Speed from VREF up to VMO and from 0 to 45% N2
Speed from 200 to 250 KIAS.
FADEC rapid relight capability has been demonstrated at 200
KIAS for up to 15-second fuel interruptions.
Engine starting inflight is only permitted within the envelope defined in the following figure.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Engines
3-16
12 FEB 10
3.9.10 Thrust Reversers

Thrust reversers are approved for ground use only.
The thrust reversers are intended for use during full stop landings. Do not attempt a go-around maneuver after deployment of
the thrust reversers.
Takeoff with any thrust reverser lights ON, icons, or EICAS messages displayed is prohibited.
During landing, application of reverse thrust above 60% N1 is not permitted at airspeeds below 75 KIAS. Below 60
KIAS, reverse thrust must be reduced to idle (not above 30% N1).
During preflight check of the thrust reversers with the airplane stationary, reverse thrust must be limited to 30% N1.
Backing-up (power-back) using thrust reversers is prohibited.
3.9.11 Engine Operating Limits Due to Wind Direction.

<-701 only>
Wind and fan speed limitations listed below must be observed:
Wind Condition
Limitation
Within 30 on either direction of the airplane

nose-no windspeed limit
-OR>30 in either direction of the airplane
nose- <5 knots windspeed
No limitations - TOGA thrust may be

applied before brakes released.
>30 in either direction of the airplane

nose-between 5 and 30 knots windspeed
Apply maximum of 75% N1 before brake

release, then TOGA thrust.
>30 in either direction of the airplane

nose- >30 knots windspeed
Apply maximum of idle/taxi thrust before

brake release, then TOGA thrust
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Fuel
3.10
3-17
12 FEB 10
Fuel
3.10.1 Fuel Quantities.

Maximum permissible fuel imbalance between the left and right wing tanks for:
<-200>
<-701>
Takeoff
800 lbs.
300 lbs.
All other phases of flight
800 lbs.
800 lbs.
Fuel remaining in a tank when the appropriate fuel quantity indicator reads zero is not usable.
Fuel quantities are based on 6.75 lb./per US gal. The maximum usable fuel load for each fuel tank is given below:
Left Tank
Right Tank
Center Tank
Total
Pressure Refueling (lbs.)

<-200>
<-701>
4,760
7,492
4,760
7,492
4,998
4,610
14,518
19,594
Gravity Refueling (lbs.)

<-200>
<-701>
4,488
7,290
4,488
7,290
4,930
13,906
14,580
Takeoff with a fuel load in excess of 500 lbs. in the center tank is not permitted unless each wing tank is above 4,400 lbs.
The minimum fuel quantity for go-around per wing tank (with the airplane level) and assuming a maximum airplane climb
attitude of 10 nose up:
<-200>
<-701>
450 lbs.
600 lbs.
3.10.2 Fuel Crossflow

Powered crossflow and gravity crossflow must be OFF for takeoff.
3.10.3 Fuel Temperature.

Takeoff with engine fuel temperature indications below 5C (41F) is prohibited.
Takeoff with bulk fuel temperature indications below the stated is prohibited.
During flight, bulk fuel temperature should remain above the following:
Fuel Type
Bulk Fuel
Takeoff Limit
Bulk Fuel
Freezing Point
ASTM D1655 (Jet A)
-30C
-40C
ASTM D 1655 (Jet A1)
-37C
-47C
MIL-T-5624 (JP 5)
-36C
-46C
MIL-T-83133 (JP 8)
-37C
-47C
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Oil
3-18
12 FEB 10
3.10.4 Fuel Grades.

Fuels conforming to any of the following specifications are approved for use. Mixing of fuels is permitted.
Fuel Grades
Canadian
American
NATO
Kerosene Type
CAN 2-3.23
ASTM D1655 JET A
ASTM D1655 JET A1
F35
MIL-T-83133 JP 8
F34
MIL-T-5624 JP 5
F44
When using JET A type fuel with ambient temperature of -30C (-22F) or below, the bulk fuel temperature prior to flight
must be verified to be above -29C (-21F).
3.11
Oil
3.11.1 Oil Consumption.

Maximum oil consumption on each engine is 6.4 ounces per hour/0.05 US gallons per hour.
3.12
3.12.1 Starting.
Minimum temperature for cold-soaked APU starting on the ground: -40C
The following APU start cycles are permitted:

<-200>
APU Start (on BATTERY)
Start
Max Time ON
Followed By
30 seconds
2 minutes OFF
30 seconds
20 minutes OFF
30 seconds
2 minutes OFF
30 seconds
40 minutes OFF
APU Start (using DC Ground Power)

Start
Max Time ON
Followed By
15 seconds
2 minutes OFF
15 seconds
20 minutes OFF
15 seconds
2 minutes OFF
15 seconds
40 minutes OFF
Note
The 2-minute delay must be observed between cranking attempts to allow for cooling of the starter
and start contactor and APU fuel drainage.
<-701>
The APU starter motor duty cycle is limited to not more than three (3) starts/start attempts in one (1) hour with a two
(2) minute delay between cranking attempts.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Limitations
3-19
12 FEB 10
3.12.2 Operating Range

<-200>
Maximum RPM
107%
<-700>
106%
Maximum EGT
Normal
743C
Below 60% RPM
870C
All Conditions
974C
1038C
Maximum Starting Altitude
30,000 feet
37,000 feet
Maximum Operating Altitude
36,000 feet
41,000 feet
3.12.3 APU Bleed Air.

APU Bleed Air Limitations
System / Condition
Air Conditioning
Engine start during

ground operations
Engine start during flight
Limitation
Bleed air extraction from the APU is not permitted above:
<-200>
15,000 ft.
<-701>
25,000 ft.
Each engine may be started using the APU as a bleed air source.
<-200 only>
If both engines are to be started using the APU bleed air, the operating engines thrust
must not exceed 70% N2.
<-200>
During single-engine operations, APU bleed air extraction for an engine start is not permitted.
During double-engine failure conditions, APU bleed air extraction for engine starts is permitted.
However, APU bleed air extraction is limited to 13,000 ft. and below.
<-701>
Starter assisted main engine start (MES) using APU bleed is limited to 21,000 ft. or below (not
an APU bleed limitation but an in-flight MES altitude limitation).
3.12.4 APU Indications.

The APU limits display markings on the EICAS must be used to determine compliance with the maximum/minimum limits
and precautionary ranges. If EICAS markings show more conservative limits than those specified below, the limit markings on
the EICAS should be used.
Note
Red
Maximum and minimum limitations
Amber
Caution range
Green
Normal operating range
Indication
Green
<-200>
Amber
<-701>
Red
<-200>
<-701>
<-200>
<-701>
APU EGT C
0 to 712
0 to 806
713 to 742
> 743
> 807
APU RPM %
0 to 100
0 to 106
101 to 106
>107
> 107
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
3-20
12 FEB 10
3.12.5 APU Door Open Limitation.

With the APU door not closed or the door position is unknown:
The airplane must be limited to:

<-200>
300 KIAS
<-701>
220 KIAS
Or the APU must remain in operation
3.12.6 APU Start and Operating Envelope.

<-200>
Calibrated Airspeed (Kt)

Mach (M)
<-701>
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Air Conditioning and Pressurization
3.13
3-21
12 FEB 10
Air Conditioning and Pressurization
Maximum relief differential pressure:
8.7 psi.
Maximum negative differential pressure:
-0.5 psi.
Max differential pressure for taxi, takeoff, and landing:
0.1 psi.
Maximum altitude for single pack operation:

<-200>
25,000 ft.
<-701>
31,000 ft.
The airplane must be completely depressurized prior to opening any of the airplane doors.
The cabin pressurization must not be operated to a cabin altitude of -1,500 ft. below sea level when the system is in manual
mode.
To preclude possible crew and/or passenger ear damage, use of the EMER DEPRESS switch above 15,000 feet is prohibited.
<-200 only>
The bleed air 10th-stage valves must be closed for takeoff and landing if the anti-ice systems have been selected ON.
3.14
Navigation
3.14.1 Automatic Flight Control System

Use of SPEED MODE (DES or IAS), flight director or autopilot coupled, during approach is not permitted.
Operation with the autopilot engaged is prohibited at altitudes below 600 ft. AGL, except when performing the
following:
For visual and non-precision approaches, the minimum height for autopilot use is 400 ft. AGL
For precision approaches (PAR/ILS), the minimum height for autopilot use is 100 ft. AGL
The ADC source coupled to the active FCC must be the same as that coupled to the ATC transponder during flight in RVSM
airspace.
3.14.2 Integrated Standby Instrument (ISI)

When NAV 1 is tuned to a valid ILS frequency, the ISI will display localizer and glideslope deviation while on the LOC BC
approach. Use of the ISI localizer and BC information is prohibited during LOC BC approaches.
3.14.3 Altimeter System

Before takeoff:
The aircraft altimeters should be set to the local (QNH) setting. They should display a known elevation such as the
published field elevation. The difference between the published field elevation and the altimeter display should not exceed
75 feet.
In flight, prior to entering RVSM airspace all required equipment for operation in RVSM airspace must be operational.
In flight: The primary and stand-by altimeters should be cross-checked at least every hour. A minimum of two primary
altimeters should agree with a maximum difference of 200 feet or less. If there is a difference greater than 200 feet, the
altimeter system should be reported to ATC as being defective.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Electrical Systems
3-22
12 FEB 10
3.14.4 EGPWS
If the GPS is inoperative, the terrain awareness alerting and display system must be inhibited by selecting the GRND
PROX, TERRAIN switch to OFF during the QFE operations.
The terrain database, terrain displays and alerting system do not account for man-made obstructions, except for all known
man-made obstructions in Canada, the United States and Mexico.
Airplane navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the terrain display.
The GRND PROX, TERRAIN switch should be selected OFF if the FMS position has not been updated within five (5)
minutes prior to takeoff.
3.14.5 Global Position System

Other approved navigation equipment appropriate to the route of flight (enroute and terminal) must be installed and operating.
When an alternate airport is required by applicable operating rules, the following conditions apply.
The alternate aerodrome must be served by an approach based on other than GPS navigation
The airplane must have operational equipment capable of using that navigation aid, and
The required navigation aid must be operational
3.14.6 FMS
RNAV (RNP), ILS, LOC, LOC/BC, LDA, and SDF approaches using the FMS are prohibited.
The FMS does not provide automatic transition to the ILS.
FMS thrust, range, and fuel management information is advisory only.
The VNAV system information is advisory only.
3.15
Electrical Systems
3.15.1 Permissible AC Electrical System Loads.

Individual AC generator loading must not exceed the following values:
<-200>
Altitude
Load Limitation
Main Generator (each)
APU Generator
0 to 35,000 ft.
30 kVA
30 kVA
35,001 to 36,000 ft.
25 kVA
30 kVA
<-701>
Altitude
0 to 41,000 ft.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Load Limitation
Main Generator (each)
APU Generator
40 kVA
40 kVA

Limitations
Flight Controls - Lift / Drag Devices
3-23
9 MAY 11
3.15.2 Permissible DC Electrical System Loads.

Inflight:
Maximum continuous load on each TRU:

<-200>
100 amps
<-701>
120 amps
Ground Operation:
To protect the flight compartment CRT displays, the maximum permissible time for ground operations with DC
power only is 5 minutes.
3.16
Flight Controls - Lift / Drag Devices
3.16.1 Slats/Flaps.
Enroute use of slats/flaps is prohibited.

Maximum slats and/or flaps extended altitude:
15,000 ft.
Flap Operation <-200>

Upon arrival at the destination airport, an approach shall not be commenced, nor shall the flaps be extended beyond the 0
degree position, unless ONE of the following conditions exists:
When conducting a precision approach, the reported visibility (or RVR) is confirmed to be at or above the required
visibility for the approach in use, and can be reasonably expected to remain at or above this visibility until after landing;
or
When conducting a non-precision approach, the reported ceiling AND visibility (or RVR) are confirmed to be at or
above the ceiling and visibility associated with the landing minima for the approach in use, and can be reasonably
expected to remain at or above this ceiling and visibility until after landing; or
An emergency or abnormal situation occurs that requires landing at the nearest suitable airport.
3.16.2 Flight Spoilers.
Minimum altitude for flight spoiler deployment:

1,000 ft. AGL
To ensure adequate maneuver margins, flight spoilers must not be extended inflight at airspeeds below the
recommended reference speed plus 17 KIAS.
3.17
Taxi Lights
The taxi lights must be switched OFF whenever the airplane is stationary in excess of 10 minutes.
3.18
Wheel Brake Cooling Limitations
Brake cooling times must be observed between a landing or rejected takeoff (RTO) and a subsequent takeoff to ensure that
sufficient brake energy is available to bring the airplane to a complete stop, if the subsequent takeoff is rejected. (Refer to
Chapter 9, Performance of this manual)
Minimum brake cooling time is 15 minutes, and all BTMS indicators must be green and are not increasing.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Limitations
Flight Deck Door
3-24
9 MAY 11
3.19
Flight Deck Door
The flight deck door must be kept closed and locked at all times during flight except to permit access and egress in accordance
with FAA and Company-approved procedures for opening, closing, and locking the door. (Reference FOM Chapter 4: General
for procedures.)
Any time the flight deck door is opened in flight, a challenge and response closing and locking verification must be used to
verify that the door is closed and locked.
Any time a required flight crewmember leaves the flight deck, another crewmember must be present in the flight deck to ensure
that the required flight crewmember is not locked out of the flight deck.
This limitation does not apply to non-routine flight operations (NRFO), operational check flights (OCF), route proving,
or training flights.
3.20
Hydraulic Pump 3B (CRJ-200 Only)
The Hydraulic Pump 3B switch must be selected ON instead of AUTO from the Before Start Checklist to the Shutdown
Checklist.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Procedures <-200>
Table of Contents
4a-i
9 MAY 11

4.1
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 4a-1
4.2
Checklists .............................................................................................................................................
4.2.1
Standardized Abbreviations ..............................................................................................................
4.2.2
Checklist Usage ................................................................................................................................
4.2.3
First Flight of the Day (FFD) .............................................................................................................
4.2.4
Delayed Start (D). .............................................................................................................................
4a-1
4a-1
4a-1
4a-2
4a-2
4.3
Types of Checklists ............................................................................................................................
4.3.1
Silent Checklist .................................................................................................................................
4.3.2
Challenge and Response Checklist ..................................................................................................
4.3.3
Flow ..................................................................................................................................................
4a-2
4a-2
4a-2
4a-2
4.4
Crew Communication .......................................................................................................................... 4a-3
4.4.1
Flight Mode Annunciation ................................................................................................................. 4a-3
4.5
Standards.............................................................................................................................................. 4a-3
4.5.1
Standard Flight Routine .................................................................................................................... 4a-3
4.5.2
Standard Callouts ............................................................................................................................. 4a-7
4.6
Normal Checklists................................................................................................................................ 4a-9
4.6.1
Safety & Power On Check (Silent, No Flow)..................................................................................... 4a-9
4.6.2
Acceptance Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow) ........................................................... 4a-18
4.6.3
Before Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response).................................................................. 4a-31
4.6.4
After Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow) .............................................. 4a-42
4.6.5
Taxi Check (Challenge & Response).............................................................................................. 4a-50
4.6.6
Before Takeoff Check (Challenge & Response, FO Flow) ............................................................. 4a-50
4.6.7
After Takeoff Check (Silent, PM Flow)............................................................................................ 4a-54
4.6.8
Descent Check (Challenge & Response, No Flow) ........................................................................ 4a-59
4.6.9
Before Landing Check (Challenge & Response, PM Flow) ............................................................ 4a-61
4.6.10 After Landing Check (Silent, FO Flow) ........................................................................................... 4a-63
4.6.11 Shutdown Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow) .............................................................. 4a-64
4.6.12 Securing Check (Silent, No Flow) ................................................................................................... 4a-67
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Table of Contents
4a-ii
9 MAY 11
PSA Airlines, Inc.

PSA CRJ-200
NORMAL CHECKLIST
Indented items are for first flight of the day only.
SAFETY AND POWER ON
BEFORE START
Aircraft Status ............................................................... Checked

Circuit Breakers ............................................................ Checked
Nosewheel Steering................................................................Off
Hydraulic Pumps.................................................................... Off
Probes.....................................................................................Off
Landing Gear Lever ........................................................... Down
Flight Spoiler Lever ................................................................... 0
Flaps Lever ................................................ Set to actual position
Radars ....................................................................................Off
ADG Manual Release ......................................................Stowed
Battery Master.........................................................................On
APU/AC Electrics ........................................... As req'd/Establish
AHRS (both)........................................................................ MAG
Emergency Equipment.................................................. Checked
When flight controls and nosewheel area are confirmed
clear:
Hydraulic Pump 3A .................................................................On
Nosewheel Door .............................................................. Closed
Logbook/Req'd Docs ..................Verify ......................... Onboard

Crew O2 & Masks ......................Verify ............... Checked/__psi
Anti-Skid Test ............................... [C] ..........................Complete
Parking Brake............................... [C] .................... Set/Checked
Fuel Qty......................................Verify ............... __Req'd,__OB
Altimeters ...................................Verify ................... _._Set/Chkd
Departure Briefing ....................... [PF] .........................Complete
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------(D) CAS ......................................Verify ......................... Checked
ACCEPTANCE
TAXI
Logbook/Forms/Manuals ........... Verify......................... Checked

Preflight Inspection .................... Verify........................ Complete
Gear & ADG Pins..........................[C]..............................Stowed
Selector Valves................... Verify.................Normal(If Inst)
Audio Warning Panel........... [FO] .......................... Checked
Electrics ....................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Fire Test ............................... [C] .......................... Complete
Lights ................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Fuel Panel.................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Bleed Test ............................ [C] .......................... Complete
Bleeds .......................................... [C] .................................... Set
APU.............................................. [C] ............................ As req'd
Start Panel ............................ [C] ........................... Checked
Hydraulics ............................. [C] ........................... Checked
ELT ...................................... [C] .....................ARM/RESET
Pressurization ....................... [C] ........................... Checked
Air Conditioning............................ [C] ........................... Checked
Ice Detector Test .................. [C] .......................... Complete
Emergency Lights ........................ [C] ..................................ARM
Standby Compass ................ [C] ........................... Checked
Clocks ........................................ Verify......................... Checked
Side Control Panels ............ Verify......................... Checked
CVR Test .............................. [C] .......................... Complete
Displays & Stby Instruments ...... Verify......................... Checked
MLG Overheat Test.............. [C] .......................... Complete
Upper Pedestal..................... [C] ........................... Checked
Thrust Lever Quadrant................. [C] ........................... Checked
TCAS Test ............................ [C] .......................... Complete
RTUs/TCAS/ACPs ...................... [C] ........................... Checked
Engine Speed Switches ....... [C] .....................................On
Trims .................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Lower Pedestal ............................ [C] ........................... Checked
Stall/EGPWS Test ................ [C] .......................... Complete
Flaps...........................................Verify ............ __Set/Indicating

Takeoff Data...............................Verify ..................................Set
Trims ..........................................Verify ....... Green Centered _._
Pressurization..............................[PM] ...................................Set
Altimeters ...................................Verify ............................_._ Set
Landing Data ...............................[PM] ...................................Set
Approach Briefing........................ [PF] .........................Complete
CAS ............................................Verify ......................... Checked
SECURING
BEFORE LANDING
Chocks/Brakes................................................................... In/Set
Thrust Reversers ....................................................................Off
Stby Attitude Indicator.................................Caged (if applicable)
Emergency Lights ...................................................................Off
Windshield Heat......................................................................Off
Cargo Fan ...............................................................................Off
Packs ......................................................................................Off
Bleeds .....................................................................................Off
Hydraulic/Oxygen Quantity ........................................... Checked
Hydraulic Pumps.....................................................................Off
External Lights (Except NAV) .................................................Off
APU Generator .......................................................................Off
APU Start/Stop........................................................................Off
APU Pwr/Fuel .........................................................................Off
DC Service..............................................................................Off
Battery Master.........................................................................Off
Dome Light..............................................................................Off
External Power Switchlight .....................................................Off
Thrust Reversers.........................[PM] ..............................Armed

Landing Gear..............................Verify ............... Down, 3 Green
CRJ-200 NORMAL CHECKLIST

CCN: 5910004
AFTER START
Fuel Check Valve ................... [C] ........................... Checked
APR ........................................ [C] ...................Tested/Armed
Anti-ice ........................................[FO] ................ Chkd/As Reqd
Rudder.......................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Nosewheel Steering ..................... [C] ...............................Armed
Thrust Reversers.........................[FO] ..............................Armed
(D) CAS ......................................Verify ......................... Checked
BEFORE TAKEOFF
T/O Config ..................................Verify ......................... Checked
T/O Fuel Qty/Balance.................Verify ...... __ Req, __ OB/Chkd
Brake Temp.................................[FO] .......................... Checked
Fuel X-Flow .................................[FO] .......................... MAN/Off
Flight Controls .............................[FO] .......................... Checked
T/O Briefing ................................. [PF] ...........Rwy___/Complete
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ignition/Anti-ice............................[FO] ..........................As Reqd
Runway Heading ........................Verify ......................... Checked
AFTER TAKEOFF
Gear/Flaps...............................................................................Up
Fuel X-Flow ..........................................................................Auto
Bleeds/APU ............................................................ Set/As Reqd
Thrust .....................................................................................Set
Thrust Reversers.................................................................... Off
DESCENT
Flaps...........................................Verify ............... __ , Indicating
AFTER LANDING
Lights/No PED......................................................... As Req'd/Off
APU ...............................................................................As Req'd
Flaps........................................................................................Up
Transponder/Radar .................................................As Reqd/Off
SHUTDOWN
Parking Brake............................... [C] .....................Set/Checked
Electrics........................................ [C] ....................................Set
Fuel Pumps .................................[FO] ................................... Off
Anti-ice ........................................[FO] ................................... Off
Windshield Heat ..........................[FO] ..........................As Req'd
Transponder ................................[FO] ................................... Off
Thrust Levers ............................... [C] ..............................Shutoff
Passenger Signs .......................... [C] .................................... Off
Hydraulic Pump 3A & 3B.............. [C] .................................... Off
Lights............................................ [C] .................................... Off
Nosewheel Steering ..................... [C] .................................... Off
REVISION 13
CRJ-200 SUPPLEMENTAL
CHECKLIST
Engine Start (Cross-Bleed)
Caution
Engine Start (External Air)
Before attempting a cross-bleed start, do not

exceed 75% N1 for 2 minutes on operating engine
after start, or until all operating indications are in
the normal range, whichever is longer.
Note
Complete the Before Start Check prior to
accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After
Start Check after accomplishing this procedure.
Note
UNCONTROLLED
WHEN
PRINTED
Complete the Before Start Check in its entirety
IGNITION (A or B) .......................................................... ARM
prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete

the After Start Check after accomplishing this
procedure.
14TH STAGE BLEED AIR switchlights ........................OPEN

APU LCV ....................................................................CLOSE
APU LCV OPEN White Status message out
Note
Coordinate air supply with ground crew just prior
to engine start and to shut off external air source
during a NO STARTER CUTOUT.
R ENG ........................................................................ START
When N2 reaches 20% and ITT is below 120C:
Right Thrust Lever....................................... Advance to IDLE
Note
If the ENG STOP switchlight does not clear a NO
STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message, you
must shut down the enigne and remove external air
pressure.
First Flight of the Day
Fuel Check Valve ................................................Checked
Note
Complete the Before Start Check in its entirety prior
to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After
L BOOST PUMP ...............................................................ON
IGNITION B ....................................................................ARM
L ENG......................................................................... START
IGNITION B Green Advisory message on
L ENGINE START White Status message on
10TH ISOL OPEN White Status message on
L & R 10TH SOV CLSD White Status messages out
GEN 1................................................................................ON
L ENG OIL PRESS normal (above 25 psi)
External air supply.....................................................Remove
Note
If the NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution
message appears, pressing the applicable ENG
STOP switchlight should be all that is required to
close the start valve and stop the airflow to the air
turbine starter (ATS). On the ground, should the ENG
STOP action not resolve the problem, you must
shutdown the engine and remove the external air
source.
L & R BOOST PUMPs.......................................................ON
HYDRAULIC Pump 2B..................................................... ON
R ENG ........................................................ Cross-bleed start
To achieve 60 psi (approximately 85% N2)
ENG (L or R)............................................................... START

Applicable Thrust Lever...............................Advance to IDLE
Confirm starter disengages at 55% N2
After Start is Complete
Thrust Levers .................................................................IDLE
HYDRAULIC Pumps.............................................. AUTO/ON
Unpressurized Takeoff or Landing

The procedures outlined below are required when the APU
BLEED is inoperative and:
1. Performing a zero-engine bleed takeoff or landing, or
2. Anti-ice is selected ON for takeoff or landing.
Before Takeoff
AIR CONDITIONING PACKs ..........................................OFF

EMER DEPRESS ............................................................. ON
10TH STAGE ISOL valve ........................................ CLOSED
10TH STAGE L & R BLEED AIR switchlights ......... CLOSED
PRESS CONT ..............................................................AUTO
RAM AIR VALVE ..........................................................OPEN
After Takeoff

Left Thrust Lever ......................................... Advance to IDLE
IGNITION B Green Advisory message out
L ENGINE START White Status message out
ITT is 450C - 600C
N1 stabilizes and does not drop below 22 - 25%
N2 is between 62.9 - 64.0%
14TH STAGE BLEED AIR switchlights ........................OPEN

ECS page .................................................... Select & Monitor
Thrust Lever (operating engine) ...............................Advance
L ENG................................................................. As Required
Engine Start (Battery with External Air)
HYDRAULIC Pumps.................................................... All ON

IGNITION (A or B) ..........................................................ARM
10TH STAGE BLEED (operating engine).....................OPEN
APU LCV ....................................................................CLOSE
Engine instruments.................. Monitor until start is complete
Note
If an engine failure occurs, delay turning on the
bleeds until after obstacle clearance is assured.
At a safe altitude, preferably between 1,000' and 3,000' AFE:
10TH STAGE L & R BLEED AIR switchlights ..............OPEN
AIR CONDITIONING PACKs ........................................... ON
RAM AIR VALVE ........................................................CLOSE
EMER DEPRESS ............................................................OFF
Landing
Prior to selecting Flaps 8 and below 10,000 ft.:
10TH STAGE, L & R BLEED AIR switchlights ........ CLOSED
RAM AIR valve .............................................................OPEN
Note
Avoid high rates of descent for passenger comfort.
External AC Power Procedures

If you leave the aircraft while connected to External AC Power
and are not completing the Securing Checklist the following
procedure should be accomplished:
Chocks/Brakes ............................................................. In/Set

CAPT, FO, PEDESTAL LIGHTING .................................OFF
Stby Attitude Indicator .......................... Caged (If Applicable)
EMER LTS ......................................................................OFF
DOME LIGHT ..................................................................OFF
DC SERVICE...................................................................OFF
BATTERY MASTER ........................................................OFF
If you arrive at the aircraft and the battery master is off and the
flight deck is dark, perform the Safety and Power On Checklist
then the Acceptance Checklist. Ensure that the flight deck
lighting is set to appropriate levels.
REVISION 13

CCN: 5910004

Introduction
4a-1
9 MAY 11

4.1
Introduction
These Normal Procedures have been developed to provide guidance for operating the Bombardier CRJ in a standardized
manner. These procedures have been compiled from various sources and consist of normal checklists, standard profiles and
standard callouts.
These Normal Procedures comply with the safety of flight issues dictated by the AFM. For this reason, compliance with the
procedures contained in this chapter is compulsory unless the situation requires modification for safety factors.
The Bombardier CRJ uses the dark cockpit philosophy. This is defined as normal flight with no EICAS messages displayed
or switchlights illuminated. Normal flight is defined as an aircraft in smooth air, utilizing normal bleed extraction, without
malfunction and clear of icing.
4.2
Checklists
4.2.1
Standardized Abbreviations.
The following abbreviations and symbols are used to identify which crew member is responsible for responding to a checklist
challenge.
C- - - FO - - VERIFY
PF - - PM - - -
4.2.2
- - - - - Captain
- - First Officer
- - - Both Pilots
- - - Pilot Flying
Pilot Monitoring
Checklist Usage.
All checklists performed are initiated at the command of the Captain on the ground and by the Pilot Flying (PF) in flight. The
Captain, however, still retains final authority for all actions directed or performed.
No checklist will be performed while taxiing across runways or if complex taxi instructions are issued.
When a checklist is completed, the pilot reading the checklist will state the name of the check and the word complete, i.e.,
Before Takeoff Check, Complete.
Some checklists contain a line. If the checklist contains a line, the first section is considered down to the line, and the second
section is below the line.
When the appropriate crewmember reads the checklist to the line, he will state, Down to the line. Crewmembers should not
call to the line when calling for a checklist, as it will always be read to the line until the appropriate crewmember calls for
Below the line.
At no time should a challenge be recited from memory. If a pilot incorrectly responds to a challenge, the pilot reading the
checklist will state the proper response and then wait for the corrected response before proceeding.
Example: (Challenge and Response)
FO
CFO
C-
- - - - - - - - Passenger Signs
- Set (Proper response is ON)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
When AS REQD is the checklist response, the responding pilot will state the actual position/condition of the item.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Types of Checklists
4a-2
9 MAY 11
4.2.3
First Flight of the Day (FFD).
Some aircraft systems require operational verification prior to the first flight of the day (FFD). These checklist items are
indented on the Acceptance Check, After Start Check, and Shutdown Check and must be completed and read on the FFD only.
For subsequent flights on the same day, these items may be omitted.
4.2.4
Delayed Start (D).
When the Captain is ready to start the left/right engine after utilizing single engine taxi, delayed start procedures will be used.
The items on the Before Start and After Start Checklists that need to be read aloud are marked with a (D).
4.3
Types of Checklists
There are two types of checklists: Silent Checklists, and Challenge and Response Checklists.
4.3.1
Silent Checklist.
Silent Checklists may be preceded by a flow, and the items will be verified complete using the checklist after the flow is done.
In the absence of a flow, the designated crewmember will read the checklist item and carry out the appropriate action. A Silent
Checklist is indicated by the absence of a response designator. When a pilot completes a silent checklist, he will state aloud,
(Checklist Title) Check Complete.
The following checklists are Silent:
Safety & Power On Check

After Takeoff Check (PM flow)
After Landing Check (FO Flow)
Securing Check
4.3.2
Challenge and Response Checklist.
Challenge and Response Checklists may be preceded by a flow that will contain some of the checklist items. These checklists
are read aloud, and the applicable pilot shall respond to the challenge after having verified or changing the existing
configuration. Both pilots shall cross-check, whenever feasible, the validity of the response. The pilot reading the checklist
shall wait for the response before proceeding with the next item. If the actual configuration is not in accordance with the
checklist requirement, corrective action shall be initiated.
The following checklists are Challenge and Response:
Acceptance Check (C and FO flow)

Before Start Check (C flow)
After Start Check (C and FO flow)
Taxi Check
Before Takeoff Check (FO flow)
Descent Check
Before Landing Check (PM flow)
Shutdown Check (C and FO flow)
4.3.3
Flow.
Flow patterns are established to configure aircraft systems or accomplish required tasks in an organized manner without
reference to a checklist. There are some flow items that are not directly backed up with a checklist reference. These items
show what is accomplished / checked in the flow box. The items that are backed up with a checklist reference show what is
accomplished / checked in the expanded section.
When accomplishing flows, pilots are expected to complete all items in order from memory. Applicable checklist (except
Safety & Power On and Securing) are initiated after the flow pattern is completed.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Crew Communication
4.4
Crew Communication
4.4.1
Flight Mode Annunciation.
4a-3
9 MAY 11
Reference to the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) as well as a thorough understanding of all armed and engagement
indications is essential to the successful operation of the autoflight system.
It is imperative to visually confirm all FMA changes. Below 3,000 ft. AGL callouts of all FMA changes are required. The
pilot making the FCP selection will make the FMA callout.
4.5
Standards
4.5.1
Standard Flight Routine.
General. This shows the normal procedures for airport surface operations.
Captain
First Officer
Preflight
45 minutes prior to departure obtain Flight Release and weather package

Report to aircraft at least 35 minutes prior to scheduled departure time
The first pilot on the flight deck will determine the aircraft maintenance status prior to actuating switches and controls
Accomplish Crew Briefing when originating trip, or a crew
change
Participate in Crew Briefing
If electrical power is not already on, read and do Safety & Power On Checklist
Accomplish Captains Acceptance Flow
Accomplish First Officers Exterior Preflight

Record current ATIS information
Accomplish First Officers Acceptance Flow
Acceptance Checklist
Accomplish Acceptance Checklist
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4a-4
9 MAY 11
Captain
First Officer
Before Start
At least 25 minutes prior to departure when fueling is complete:

Verify actual fuel load is within limits of RAMP fuel
Check ACARS. Insert flight number, departure and

destination airport identifiers and employee numbers
Obtain ATC clearance. If done verbally, both pilots will listen to clearance
Verify the proper altitude and transponder code is set
Set the proper altitude in altitude alerter and verify on the

FMA
Accomplish Captain's Before Start Flow (to the line)
Accomplish First Officer's Before Start Flow (to the line)
Ensure that the FMS and ACARS initialization is complete. Ensure that the ATIS, Clearance, FMS, RTUs, and PFDs are set
up as prescribed in the Departure Setup section of this chapter.
Review the cleared departure with emphasis on the following:
Planned Route of Taxi:

Both pilots will review the expected taxi route, hot spots, any airport contruction, and applicable NOTAMS for taxiway
closures. Both pilots will confirm all taxi instructions, especially hold short clearances. When crossing an active runway,
each pilot shall confirm the runway is clear and there is a clearnace to cross. Vigilance shall be used when the first officer
is performing Heads Down tasks such as checlist and FMS inputs.
Planned departure runway
Cleared SID or departure runway
Engine Failure Procedure
Take off Alternate or procedure for returning to the field
Specials (i.e. anti-ice usage, ignition usage, terrain, thunderstorms, abnormal bleed setup, unique airport advisory
information, etc.)
Approximately 20 minutes prior to departure: Before Start

Checklist
Accomplish Before Start Checklist to the line Down to the

line
Initiated by Captain approximately 10 minutes prior to departure:

Accomplish Welcome Aboard announcement
Just prior to pushback - or engine start at gate - after agent provides count:
Ensure Cabin Ready Notification is received from flight
attendant and relay short taxi, or other pertinent information
Obtain pushback clearance, if required
Pushback/Engine Start
Normal starting procedure is to start Engine 2 and single engine taxi out.
When issued pushback clearance or cleared to start engine(s):
Accomplish Before Start Flow (below the line)
Below the line
Accomplish Before Start Checklist below the line
If the Captain performs the engine start the aircraft must be stopped with the parking brake set. If the Captain elects to have
the engine started while the aircraft is in motion, the First Officer must perform the engine start.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4a-5
9 MAY 11
Captain
First Officer
After Start
After engine(s) are started.

Accomplish After Start Flow
When ground equipment is clear and acknowledgment of the ground crew signal:
After Start Checklist
Accomplish After Start Checklist

Delayed Engine Start
When the delayed engine start is accomplished:

Accomplish the Delayed Engine Start Flow

Accomplish the Before Start Checklist, (D) items
Start the engine
Accomplish the Delayed Engine After Start Flow
Accomplish the After Start Checklist, (D) items
Taxi
Upon initial parking brake release for taxi: Parking Brake

Released. Sterile Cockpit.
Once Captain is able to monitor ATC communications,

request Taxi Clearance
Monitor Taxi Clearance and restate any hold short

instructions
Write down non-standard or complex taxi instructions

Request confirmation if Captain does not restate any hold
short instructions
Turn taxi light on when aircraft is moving
Maintain vigilance outside the aircraft

Inform captain if out of the loop for any reason
Crosscheck HSI, airport diagram, and airport signage to confirm aircraft position while taxiing.
Approaching the entrance to an active runway, ensure compliance with hold short or crossing clearance before continuing
with non-monitoring tasks. Visually scan runway and approach areas.
When clear of ramp congestion and both engines are running:
(State departure airport) Runway___, Flaps___, Taxi
Check
Accomplish Taxi Checklist
Before Takeoff
When cabin secure notification is received and when number approximately 1 or 2 for the departure runway:
Before Takeoff Checklist
Accomplish Before Takeoff Flow and checklist to the line

Down to the line
PF accomplish Takeoff Briefing:

The pilot flying will point to the MFD (runway displayed) and call out the T/O runway, initial heading, initial attitude,
first fix, Engine Failure Procedure and special considerations
Accomplish Before Takeoff Checklist to the line
Cleared onto the active runway:
Verbally confirm ATC clearance onto active runway with other crewmembers and confirm proper runway selection using
airport signs and markings and the airport diagram.
Visually scan runway and approach areas.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4a-6
9 MAY 11
Captain
First Officer
Turn on wing, logo, landing and taxi lights

Below the line
Complete Before Takeoff Checklist
When cleared for takeoff:
Turn on all remaining exterior lights
Taxi In
When clear of active runway:
instructions
Request taxi clearance

short instructions
Crosscheck HSI, airport diagram, and airport signs to confirm aircraft position while taxiing.
When approaching the entrance to an active runway, ensure compliance with hold short or crossing clearance before
continuing with non-monitoring tasks. Visually scan runway and approach areas.
When clear of landing runway and compliance with any runway hold short clearances can be assured.
After Landing Checklist
Accomplish After Landing Flow
Turn taxi light on when the aircraft is moving
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4.5.2
4a-7
30 AUG 10
Standard Callouts.
General. The following are sample callouts and are not all-inclusive.
Conditions
Brake Release
Thrust Set
At 80 knots
At V1-5
At VR
Positive Climb
Takeoff
Select Gear Up
V2 + 10 to 15
400 ft. AFE
Above 600 ft. AFE
Flaps Selection
Transition Altitude/Level
1,000 ft. to Level-Off
Climb & Descent
New Altitude
Assignment
Significant
Deviation from
Briefed Profile
PF selecting Speed mode to climb or

descend below 3,000 ft. AFE
PF or PM sets new altitude and both pilots
point to it
IAS > Bug (+/-) 5
Pilot Flying
Set Thrust
-
Pilot Monitoring
Thrust Set
80 knots
Checks
-
V1
Rotate
Positive Rate
Gear Up
Speed Mode
Gear Up
Climb
Heading, or FMS
Heading Mode, or
Nav Mode
Autopilot On
Flaps 8
Flaps Up
xx.xx set
Checks
Autopilot On
Flaps 8
Flaps Up
xx.xx set
9,000 for 10,000
280 for 290
Climb, or Descent
15,000
310
15,000
310
Airspeed
Correcting
VSI > 1,000/min
below 1,000 AFE
1 dot GS or LOC
Sink Rate
Correcting
Correcting
Localizer
Glideslope
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4a-8
30 AUG 10
Conditions
Localizer Alive/Captured
Glide Slope Alive/Captured
Pilot Flying
Checks
Checks
Pilot Monitoring
Localizer Alive,
Localizer Captured
Glideslope Alive,
Checks
Glideslope Captured
Checks
1,000 ft. AFE
1,000 feet
Checks
IFR Approach
Callouts
500 ft. AFE

(not required for non-precision
approaches)
100 ft.
above minimums
DA (Runway environment in sight)
Checks
Checks
Landing
MAP (Runway environment NOT in

sight)
MDA
500 feet,
Bug +/- ___,
Sink ___
100 above
Go Around
Checks,
Set Missed
Approach Altitude
Approach Lights in Sight
Minimums, Runway in
sight
Missed Approach Point,
No contact
ALTS
(or MDA without Flight
Director)
Lights in sight
Continuing
Runway in Sight
On Landing or
Rejected Takeoff
At 90 knots &
at 60 knots
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Runway in sight
Landing
-
90 knots
60 knots

Normal Checklists
4.6
Normal Checklists
4.6.1
Safety & Power On Check (Silent, No Flow).
4a-9
30 AUG 10
General. This checklist safely configures the aircraft for application of electrical power and / or air conditioning. This is a
read and do checklist. Each item is read and accomplished silently.
Safety & Power On (Expanded).
Aircraft Status
Checked
Verify maintenance, nose gear door, flap, and APU exhaust area status prior to applying power to the aircraft
Circuit Breakers (Panels 1-4)
Checked
Circuit breakers should be either in (closed) or out (open) and collared
Note
PSAs philosophy and policy with respect to the resetting of tripped circuit breakers (In flight/On
ground) is given in Chapter 11 of the FOM.
Nosewheel Steering
OFF
Hydraulic Pumps
OFF
Probes
OFF
Landing Gear Lever
Down
Flight Spoiler Lever
Flaps Lever
Set to Actual Position
Lever and flap surface positions should agree. If not, reposition flap lever to actual surface position.
Radars
OFF
Verify that both control panels are selected OFF
ADG Manual Release
Stowed
Battery Master
ON
With BATTERY MASTER selected ON, verify on the DC ELECTRICAL synoptic page that both batteries indicate
22 volts DC minimum and that no CHARGER message is displayed
Note
EICAS display cooling is not available when the battery bus is powered and normal AC power is not
available. DO NOT remain on battery power for more than 5 minutes.
APU/AC Electrics
AS REQD/Establish
AC power will be obtained from a jetway or ground power unit (GPU). If ground power is not available, start the APU.
Prior to starting the APU on the FFD, carry out the APU portion of the Fire Detection/Firex Monitor test.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Normal Checklists
4a-10
30 AUG 10
APU Fire Detection/Firex Monitor Test.

Caution
Before commencing the fire test, ensure that there is no APU FIRE FAIL Amber Caution message
displayed on the Primary page. If APU FIRE FAIL Amber Caution message is displayed, do NOT
carry out the Fire Detection/Firex Monitor Test, do NOT start the APU, and advise Maintenance
Control.
FIRE DETECTION/FIREX MONITOR Panel.
APU switch............................................................................................................................................................Select to BOTH
TEST switch .......................................................................................................................................................... Hold at WARN
Verify the Following:
Both master warnings, triple chime

APU FIRE PUSH and BOTTLE ARMED PUSH TO DISCH switchlights illuminated
Fire Bell & JET PIPE OVERHEAT aural
And the following Red Warning message:
APU FIRE
TEST switch ....................................................................................................................................................................... Release

APU BOTTLE switch ................................................................................................................................ Hold at TEST Position
Verify the following Green Advisory messages:
APU SQUIB 1
APU SQUIB 2
After 5 seconds, the messages disappear, and the APU fire horn sounds from the aft equipment bay.
APU BOTTLE switch ........................................................................................................................................................ Release
Horn sound stops, and after 5 seconds, the APU SQUIB 1 & 2 Green Advisory messages return momentarily, then disappear.
APU Starting Sequence.
Before starting the APU on the ground, ensure that:
APU GEN switch is OFF

APU LCV switchlight is pressed out
Note
The APU PWR/FUEL switchlight must be selected OFF between each APU start. The APU PWR/
FUEL switchlight should be firmly pressed only once. If pressed twice, an immediate reset of the
starting process and shutdown (if running) will occur.
If starting the APU in flight, press the APU PWR/FUEL switch light, wait until the APU door inlet
position indicates MID or OPEN, then press the APU START/STOP switch light. This process should
take no more than 5 seconds. If no door indication is displayed (dashed lines in lieu of position), do
NOT start the APU.
APU PWR/FUEL switchlight............................................................................................................................................Select in
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-11
30 AUG 10
Verify the following is displayed on the status page:
APU gauges
APU DOOR OPEN message
And the following White Status messages:
APU SOV OPEN

APU IN BITE (for approximately 5 seconds)
APU START/STOP switchlight ......................................................................................................................Select in
Note the following:
White START portion of the switchlight illuminates

APU start and acceleration
And the following White Status message:
APU START
At 50% rpm, START light disappears, and APU START White Status message is removed.
At 99% rpm + 4 seconds, AVAIL indication in the Green APU START/STOP switchlight illuminates.
Note
The green AVAIL light indicates that the APU is available for bleed air extraction.
If the APU generator is not selected ON within 30 seconds of the completion of the APU start, the APU
GEN OFF Amber Caution message appears.
APU GEN switch ...................................................................................................................................................................... ON
Select the AC ELECTRICAL synoptic page to verify that voltage, frequency, and load indications are normal and all AC buses
are powered.
Select the DC ELECTRICAL synoptic page to verify that TRU voltage and load indications are normal and all DC buses are
powered.
Establishing Air Conditioning (APU bleed air).
APU LCV switchlight ................................................................................................................................................Select OPEN
10TH STAGE ISOL switchlight................................................................................................................................Select OPEN
L 10TH STAGE SOV switchlight ........................................................................................................................Select CLOSED
R 10TH STAGE SOV switchlight ........................................................................................................................Select CLOSED
L & R PACK switchlight ............................................................................................................................................... Select ON
Note the following White Status messages:
APU LCV OPEN

10TH ISOL OPEN
L 10TH SOV CLSD
R 10TH SOV CLSD
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-12
30 AUG 10
AHRS (Both)
MAG
AHRS initialization takes 30 to 70 seconds. Alignment in DG mode can take up to 11 minutes.

Emergency Equipment
Checked
Check the following:
Escape rope
Escape hatch
Visually check that the escape hatch is closed and locked (two green witness marks are correctly aligned).
Flashlights (2)
Crash Axe
Halon 1211 portable fire extinguisher
Check indicator is in green band
Smoke hood (PBE)

Check condition of seal
Life preservers (3)

Oxygen masks/Smoke goggles (3)
WARNING
Ensure nose gear area is clear before turning ON hydraulic system 3 ACMP. Nosegear
doors will close automatically with hydraulic system 3 pressure and the NOSE DOOR
switch on the external service panel in the FLT/NORM position.
Hydraulic Pump 3A
ON
Note
When ambient temperatures are greater than 40C (104F), avoid prolonged ground operations with
any hydraulic system(s) operating.
Nosewheel Door
Verify the following Red Warning message IS NOT displayed:
NOSE DOOR OPEN
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Closed

Normal Checklists
4a-13
30 AUG 10
External Walkaround.
Note
The Safety and Power On checklist must be complete prior to the external walkaround.
The external walkaround is primarily a visual check to ensure that the overall condition of the airplane and its visible
components and equipment are safe for flight.
Proximate area is free of potential FOD items

Passenger walkway and boarding stairs are safe and clear
Flight control surfaces are unobstructed and free from ice, frost, or snow
All vents, ports, intakes, and exhausts are unobstructed
Tire condition and pressure are acceptable
Note
All tires should be inspected for evidence of bulges, cuts, bruises, embedded foreign objects,
underinflation, excessive wear, or visible cord. The Captain will contact Maintenance Control and
have the tire inspected when any doubt exists as to its serviceability.
All covers, plugs, picket/mooring lines are removed

Pay particular attention to any evidence of fluid leaks from components, drains, panels, and airplane skin
Condition of skin (visible damage) on radome section, fuselage, wings, nacelles, pylons, and empennage
All access panels and doors not actually involved in maintenance are secured
Pitot static probes for evidence of freezing, severe discoloration, condition, and security
The word CHECK is used throughout this walkaround procedure to describe a visual examination that will detect obvious
unsatisfactory condition/discrepancies.
Start at the top of the boarding stairs, proceed in the direction indicated in the external walkaround sequence illustration, and
terminate at the bottom of the boarding stairs.
During cold weather operations, the flight crew must ensure that the fuselage, wings and tail surfaces are free from ice, snow
or frost.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-14
30 AUG 10
Note
Refer to Chapter 8 - Cold Weather Operations for cold weather external walk around requirements.
Left Forward Fuselage.
(1) Passenger door emergency light ..................................................................................................................................... Check
(2) Alternate static port...........................................................................................................................................................Clear
(3) AOA vane ....................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(4) Standby pitot probe ......................................................................................................................................................... Check
(5) Ice detector probe..............................................................................................................................................................Clear
(6) Pitot static probe ............................................................................................................................................................. Check
(7) Windshields, Windows ................................................................................................................................................... Check
(8) Wipers (2) ....................................................................................................................................................................... Check
Nosewheel and Gear.
WARNING
Hydraulically operated nose doors open and shut rapidly.
operated.
Stay clear when doors are
(1) Wheel chocks ...............................................................................................................................................................Installed

(2) Nose landing light ........................................................................................................................................................... Check
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-15
30 AUG 10
(3) Oleo extension .................................................................................................................................................................Check

(4) Nosewheel scissors................................................................................................................................................ As Required
(5) Tires.................................................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
Refer to note on page 4a-13 concerning tire wear limits.
(6) NOSE DOOR ................................................................................................................................................... Confirm closed
Note
If nose door open, select NOSE DOOR switch OPEN on the external A/C Service Panel. Contact
Maintenance.
(7) Nose gear pin..............................................................................................................................................................Removed
Right Forward Fuselage.
(1) NOSE DOOR switch.............................................................................................................................................FLT/NORM
(2) External AC power service door ........................................................................................................................... As Required
(3) Pitot Static Probe .............................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Ice detector probe ............................................................................................................................................................Check
(5) TAT probe ........................................................................................................................................................................ Clear
(6) AOA vane........................................................................................................................................................................Check
(7) Oxygen blowout plug ....................................................................................................................................................... Intact
(8) Alternate static port .......................................................................................................................................................... Clear
(9) Galley service door and emergency light ........................................................................................................................Check
(10) Antennae........................................................................................................................................................................Check
(11) Beacon light...................................................................................................................................................................Check
(12) Wing inspection lights...................................................................................................................................................Check
(13) Landing/taxi lights.........................................................................................................................................................Check
(14) Overwing emergency lights (3) .....................................................................................................................................Check
(15) Overwing emergency exit .......................................................................................................................................... Secured
Right Main Gear.
(1) Wheel chocks ........................................................................................................................................................ As Required
(3) Downlock safety pin...................................................................................................................................................Removed
(4) Dust cover........................................................................................................................................................................Lower
(5) Tires.................................................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
(6) Brake wear pins ...............................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
At least one wear pin must not be flush or recessed with hydraulic pressure on and brakes applied.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-16
30 AUG 10
Right Wing.
Note
Past experience has shown that airplanes without leading edge devices may be more susceptible to loss
of lift due to wing leading edge contaminants.
(1) Leading edge................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(2) Navigation and strobe lights ........................................................................................................................................... Check
(3) Winglet............................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(4) Static dischargers ............................................................................................................................................................ Check
Note
Ensure proper clearance of all flight control surfaces from all ground equipment or other obstructions
and ensure that surfaces are clear of any contaminants.
(5) Aileron ............................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(6) Lower wing surface......................................................................................................................................................... Check
(7) Spoileron ......................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(8) Flaps................................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(9) Ground spoilers............................................................................................................................................................... Check
(10) Upper wing surface ....................................................................................................................................................... Check
(11) Wing anti-slip surface .................................................................................................................................................... Intact
Right Rear Fuselage.
(1) Engine cowl .................................................................................................................................................................... Check
Check cowl anti-ice blowout plug is flush with skin and cowl leading edge for evidence of discoloration or deformation
(2) Thrust reverser ...............................................................................................................................................................Stowed

(3) Right pylon...................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(4) Antennae ......................................................................................................................................................................... Check
Empennage.
(1) Horizontal stabilizer........................................................................................................................................................ Check
Note
(2) Elevators ......................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(5) Antennae ......................................................................................................................................................................... Check
Left Rear Fuselage.
(1) Left pylon........................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(2) Thrust reverser ...............................................................................................................................................................Stowed
(3) Engine cowl .................................................................................................................................................................... Check
Check cowl anti-ice blowout plug is flush with skin and cowl leading edge for evidence of discoloration
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-17
30 AUG 10
Left Wing.
Note
of lift due to wing leading edge contaminants.
(1) Wing anti-slip surface ...................................................................................................................................................... Intact
(2) Upper wing surface .........................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
(3) Ground spoilers ...............................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Flaps ................................................................................................................................................................................Check
(5) Spoileron .........................................................................................................................................................................Check
(6) Aileron.............................................................................................................................................................................Check
(7) Lower wing surface .........................................................................................................................................................Check
(8) Static dischargers.............................................................................................................................................................Check
(9) Winglet ............................................................................................................................................................................Check
(10) Navigation and strobe lights..........................................................................................................................................Check
(11) Leading edge .................................................................................................................................................................Check
(12) Landing/Taxi lights .......................................................................................................................................................Check
(13) Wing inspection light ....................................................................................................................................................Check
Left Main Gear.
(3) Downlock safety pin...................................................................................................................................................Removed
(4) Dust cover........................................................................................................................................................................Lower
(5) Tires.................................................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
(6) Brake wear pins ...............................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
Entering Airplane.
(1) Stairs ................................................................................................................................................................................Check
(2) Door area security ...........................................................................................................................................................Verify
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-18
9 MAY 11
4.6.2
Acceptance Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow).
Acceptance Flow (C & FO).

General. This flow ensures all systems and equipment are operating properly.
Trigger. Accomplish on the first flight of the day, after a crew change, or if maintenance has been performed in the flight deck.
Start early enough to ensure all equipment is operating properly and to allow maintenance sufficient time to correct any
irregularities.
The crew will accomplish the entire flow on the FFD.
Indented items need not be completed on receiving flights (i.e. crew swap or depowered aircraft).
Logbook / Forms /
Manuals
Gear & ADG Pins
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-19
30 AUG 10
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
Logbook/Forms/Manuals ............................................Check
Selector Valves .....................................NORMAL(if instld)
Electrics.......................................................................Check
Fire Test ........................................................... Complete
Lights (NAV always ON) ...........................................Check
Fuel Panel....................................................................Check
Bleeds..........................................................................Set
APU.....................................................................AS REQD
Start Panel ...................................................................Check
Hydraulics ..............................................................Check
ELT ................................................................ ARM/RESET
PASS OXY switch ......................................................Check
Pressurization ..............................................................Check
Air Conditioning .........................................................Check
Anti-Ice ..................................................................Check
Probes.............................................................................OFF
Misc. lights/PAX signs ...................................... Check/OFF
Emergency Lights ........................................................ARM
STBY Compass...........................................................Check
Glareshield ..................................................................Check
Flight Control Panel ....................................................Check
NWS...............................................................................OFF
Clock ...........................................................................Check
Side Control Panels................................................Check
Instrument Panel .........................................................Check
CVR Test ......................................................... Complete
EICAS & STBY INST ................................................Check
MLG OVHT Test............................................. Complete
Upper Pedestal ............................................................Check
Thrust Lever Quadrant ................................................Check
RTUs/TCAS/ACPs ................................................Check
Engine Speed Switches ................................................... ON
Trims ...........................................................................Check
Yaw Dampers....................................................... ENGAGE
Source Select Panel ...........................................4 NORMAL
Lower Pedestal ............................................................Check
Stall Test .......................................................... Complete
EGPWS Test .................................................... Complete
Logbook/Forms/Manuals............................................ Check
External Walkaround.............................................Complete
Gear & ADG Pins..................................................... Stowed
Selector Valves ..................................... NORMAL(if instld)
Audio Warning Panel ................................................. Check
Clock........................................................................... Check
Side Control Panels ............................................... Check
Instrument Panel ......................................................... Check
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-20
9 MAY 11
Acceptance (Expanded).
Logbook/Forms/Manuals
Verify
Checked
Confirm all manuals are current using the DRS.

Verify the following items are onboard:
Airworthiness certificate
Aircraft registration
FCC operating license
Maintenance logbook and MEL stickers
Normal checklists (2 normal, 1 required)*
MEL/CDL
QRH
POH (1 must be onboard the aircraft)
FOM (1 must be onboard the aircraft)
Speed Books (2 normal, 1 required)*
Weight and balance forms
SeeGee calculator
Jumpseat briefing card (a verbal briefing of ACM may be substituted)*
* Before departing a maintenance base, a full supply of aircraft forms and manuals must be obtained if available.
Preflight Inspection
Verify
Gear & ADG Pins
Complete
[C]
Stowed
Confirm 3 landing gear pins and 1 ADG pin are onboard
Note
Insertion or removal of gear or ADG pins requires a logbook entry. If pins are not onboard contact
Maintenance Control.
Selector Valves
Verify
NORMAL (If Installed)
Selected up and guarded
Note
ISIS equipped aircraft do not have Selector Valves.
Audio Warning Panel
[FO]
Checked
DCU switches...............................................................................................................................................Guarded, no lights

Electrics
[C]
Checked
DC Service switch.............................................................................................................................................................. OFF

BATTERY MASTER switch...............................................................................................................................................ON
IDG Disconnects ..........................................................................................................................................Guarded, no lights
APU GEN switch .................................................................................................................................................. As Required
GEN 1 & 2 switches..............................................................................................................................................OFF/RESET
Switchlights.......................................................................................................................................................Flush, no lights
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Fire Test
4a-21
30 AUG 10
[C]
Complete
FIRE DETECTION/FIREX MONITOR Test.

Caution
Before commencing the fire test, ensure that there is no APU FIRE FAIL Amber Caution message
displayed on the Primary page. If APU FIRE FAIL Amber Caution message is displayed, do NOT
carry out the Fire Detection/Firex Monitor Test, do NOT start the APU, and advise Maintenance
Control.
FIRE DETECTION Panel
LOOP switches (5)............................................................................................................................................................... BOTH
TEST switch........................................................................................................................................................... Hold at WARN
Verify the following:

LH/RH ENG FIRE PUSH and BOTTLE 1/BOTTLE 2 ARMED PUSH TO DISCH switchlights illuminated
Fire bell & JETPIPE OVERHEAT aural
And the following Red Warning messages:

L ENG FIRE
R ENG FIRE
APU FIRE
L JETPIPE OVHT
R JETPIPE OVHT
Ensure no FIRE FAIL Amber Caution messages appear.
TEST switch........................................................................................................................................................................Release
All fire detection indications are removed
TEST switch.............................................................................................................................................................. Hold at FAIL

Both master cautions, single chime
And the following Amber Caution messages:
L FIRE FAIL
R FIRE FAIL
APU FIRE FAIL
L JET OVHT FAIL
R JET OVHT FAIL
TEST switch........................................................................................................................................................................Release
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-22
30 AUG 10
FIREX MONITOR Panel

ENGINE BOTTLE 1 & 2 switches .......................................................................................................................... Hold at TEST
L ENG SQUIB 1
R ENG SQUIB 1
L ENG SQUIB 2
R ENG SQUIB 2
ENGINE BOTTLE 1 & 2 switches .................................................................................................................................... Release
All FIREX Green Advisory messages disappear
CARGO BOTTLE switch .................................................................................................................................................. TEST 1


NORMAL & STANDBY CARGO SMOKE PUSH switchlights illuminated
NORMAL BOTTLE ARMED PUSH TO DISCH switchlight illuminated
SMOKE aural
The following Red Warning message:
SMOKE CARGO
And the following Green Advisory message:
CARGO SQUIB 1
CARGO BOTTLE switch .................................................................................................................................................. TEST 2


NORMAL & STANBY CARGO SMOKE PUSH switchlights illuminated
STANDBY BOTTLE ARMED PUSH TO DISCH switchlight illuminated
SMOKE aural
The following Red Warning message:
SMOKE CARGO
CARGO SQUIB 2
CARGO BOTTLE switch .................................................................................................................................................. Release

Lights
[C]
Checked
All external lights will be checked for operation prior to the first flight of the day.
NAV lights ...........................................................................................................................................................................ON
NAV lights should always be left in the ON position
BEACON ........................................................................................................................................................................... OFF

STROBE ............................................................................................................................................................................ OFF
LOGO.................................................................................................................................................................... As Required
WING INSP .......................................................................................................................................................... As Required
LANDING LTS (LEFT, NOSE, RIGHT).......................................................................................................................... OFF
RECOG/TAXI LTS ........................................................................................................................................................... OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Fuel Panel
4a-23
30 AUG 10
[C]
Checked
L & R BOOST PUMP switchlights....................................................................................................................... Selected out
INOP lights (amber) are illuminated
GRAVITY XFLOW switchlight ........................................................................................................................... Selected out

L & R XFLOW and AUTO OVERRIDE switchlights ......................................................................................... Selected out
Bleed Test
[C]
Complete
Bleed Leak Detection Test.

BLEED AIR Control Panel
DUCT MON rotary switch .......................................................................................................................................Hold at TEST

BLEED AIR DUCT aural
On the BLEED AIR and ANTI-ICE overhead panels, verify the following red switchlights:
L 10TH STAGE DUCT FAIL
R 10TH STAGE DUCT FAIL
L 14TH STAGE DUCT FAIL
R 14TH STAGE DUCT FAIL
WING ANTI-ICE DUCT FAIL
The following Red Warning messages:
L 10TH STAGE DUCT

R 10TH STAGE DUCT
L 14TH STAGE DUCT
R 14TH STAGE DUCT
ANTI-ICE DUCT
DUCT TEST OK
DUCT MON rotary switch ................................................................................................................................................. NORM
All bleed air duct overheat indications are removed

Bleeds
[C]
Set
L & R 14TH STAGE switchlights .......................................................................................................................... Selected in
Note L & R 14TH ARM CLSD White Status messages are removed
14TH STAGE ISOL switchlight ........................................................................................................................... Selected out

L & R 10TH STAGE switchlights ........................................................................................................................ Selected out
APU
[C]
AS REQD
Start the APU approximately 10 minutes prior to door closure unless passenger comfort warrants otherwise.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-24
9 MAY 11
Start Panel
[C]
Checked
L & R ENG START switchlights ..........................................................................................................................Selected out

IGNITION A & B switchlights..............................................................................................................................Selected out
IGNITION CONT switchlight ...............................................................................................................................Selected out
Hydraulics
[C]
Checked
Hydraulic Systems Test.

Caution
Ensure that all flight control surfaces are clear before powering any hydraulic system.
EICAS Control Panel (ECP)................................................................................................................. Select HYD synoptic page
AC Motor Pump (ACMP) switches........................................................................................... 1B ON, 3A OFF, 3B ON, 2B ON
Fluid quantities ................................................................................................................................................... Normal (45-85%)
Note
If quantity is outside of this range contact Maintenance Control for an accurate quantity percentage
related to temperature.
Reservoir output lines............................................................................................................................................................Green
System pressure .........................................................................................................................................Normal (3000+200 psi)
ACMP switches .............................................................................................................. 1B AUTO, 3A ON, 3B OFF, 2B AUTO
System 3 pressure (HYD synoptic page)...................................................................................................Normal (3000+200 psi)
ELT
[C]
ARM/RESET
Also verify PASS OXY switchlight is guarded and no light

Pressurization
[C]
Checked
MAN ALT switch ....................................................................................................................................................... Centered

EMER DEPRESS switchlight...................................................................................................................... Guarded, light out
PRESS CONT switchlight .............................................................................................................................. AUTO, light out
MAN RATE knob ................................................................................................................................................... Full DECR
Air Conditioning
[C]
Checked
L & R PACK switchlights..................................................................................................................................... As Required

RAM AIR switchlight .................................................................................................................................. Guarded, light out
Temp control MAN switchlights .................................................................................................................. AUTO, lights out
CARGO fan switch ............................................................................................................................................................FAN
Anti-Ice Control Panel
ANTI-ICE, WING switch .................................................................................................................................................. OFF
ANTI-ICE, COWL LH & RH switches............................................................................................................................. OFF
LH and RH PROBES switches .......................................................................................................................................... OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Normal Checklists
Ice Detector Test
4a-25
30 AUG 10
[C]
Complete
Ice Detector Test.

DET TEST switchlight........................................................................................................................................................ Hold in
Below a preset temperature, verify the following:

ICE switchlight illuminated
And the following Amber Caution message:
ICE
Above a preset temperature, verify the following Green Advisory message only:
ICE
Emergency Lights
[C]
ARM
Passenger Signs Panel

NO PED ..............................................................................................................................................................................OFF
SEAT BLTS .......................................................................................................................................................................OFF
Standby Compass
[C]
Checked
Compare headings with Captain and First Officers HSIs on the PFD and MFD, and ensure the compass card is in place
Note
AHRS heading information may be inaccurate due to ground equipment magnetic disturbance at the
gate. This can cause an EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution message with an accompanying HDG
comparator box on the PFDs.
Glareshield
ROLL SEL, PLT & CPLT switchlights ..................................................................................................................... No lights
Flight Control Panel (FCP)
AP DISC switch-bar .................................................................................................................................................... Engaged
Clocks
VERIFY
Checked
VERIFY
Checked
Ensure that the UTC time and date are accurate

Side Control Panels
Wiper Switches
WIPERS .............................................................................................................................................................. Both OFF/PARK
Side Panel Lighting Controls
Side LIGHTING panels .............................................................................................................................................. As Required
DH ..................................................................................................................................................Ensure removed from PFD
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-26
30 AUG 10
RA Test.
RA TEST ..................................................................................................................................................................Push and hold
50 ft. RA on the PFD
RA TEST ............................................................................................................................................................................ Release

Verify the RA indication on the PFD returns to 0.
Note
EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution message and RA flag may appear in dual radar altimeter
configuration.
Display Reversionary Panel.................................................................................................................................................NORM
CVR Test
[C]
Complete
Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) Test.

TEST switch ......................................................................................................................................Press and hold for 5 seconds
Verify that the green light illuminates

Displays & STBY Instruments
[VERIFY]
Checked
Displays (PFD, MFD, ED1 and ED2)
Confirm that no abnormal indications are present
Standby Instruments
Standby attitude indicator .......................................................................................................... Uncaged (if applicable), erect
Standby altimeter ..................................................................................................................................... Set to field elevation
Standby airspeed indicator .......................................................................................................................................................0
MLG Bay Overheat Test
[C]
Complete
MLG Overheat Test.

MLG BAY switch ...................................................................................................................................................Hold at OVHT

GEAR BAY OVERHEAT aural
MLG BAY OVHT
MLG BAY switch .............................................................................................................................................................. Release
Warning message is removed
OVHT TEST switch .....................................................................................................................................Hold at WARN FAIL

MLG OVHT FAIL
OVHT TEST switch ........................................................................................................................................................... Release

Caution message is removed
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Normal Checklists
Upper Pedestal
4a-27
30 AUG 10
[C]
Checked
MUTE HORN switchlight.......................................................................................................................... Guarded, lights out

ANTI-SKID switch..................................................................................................................................................... ARMED
IND LTS switch.....................................................................................................................................................As Required
GRND PROX-TERRAIN, OFF & FLAP, OVRD switchlights................................................................. Guarded, lights out
Thrust Lever Quadrant
[C]
Checked
PITCH DISC handle ............................................................................................................................................... In (vertical)

ROLL DISC handle ............................................................................................................................................In (horizontal)
GND LIFT DUMPING switch ....................................................................................................................................... AUTO
LH & RH THRUST REVERSER switches ................................................................................................................ARMED
EMER STOW switchlights ................................................................................................................... Selected out, no lights
FLIGHT SPOILER lever......................................................................................................................................................... 0
Thrust Levers ........................................................................................................................................................... SHUTOFF
TCAS Test
[C]
Complete
TCAS Test.
Radio Tuning Unit (RTU)
TCAS line key....................................................................................................................................................................... Select
TEST line key ....................................................................................................................................................................... Select
On the VSI: TRAFFIC, TCAS test & red/green bands

On the MFD: Four levels of targets (hollow cyan diamond, solid cyan diamond, solid yellow circle, and solid red square)
TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK aural

RTUs/TCAS/ACPs
[C]
Checked
Radio tuning units (both) ...............................................................................................................................................Normal

TCAS Main Page................................................................................................................................................... As Required
Audio Control Panel
All receive and transmit switches .......................................................................................................................... As Required
VOICE/BOTH switch..................................................................................................................................................... BOTH
MASK/BOOM switch ................................................................................................................................................... BOOM
EMER/NORM switch.................................................................................................................................................... NORM
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-28
30 AUG 10
Public Address System Test.

ACP transmit knob ..........................................................................................................................................................Select PA
Interphone control unit ...................................................................................................................................Push PA switchlight
Green PA Switchlight remains ON

Transmit a test message
Note
Ensure that the public address test message is heard by the cabin crew.
ACP transmit knob ..................................................................................................................................................... As Required
Weather Radars
Weather radars ................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
Backup Tuning Panel
1 & 2 RTU INHIB PUSH switchlights ..................................................................................................................Selected out
FMS TUNE INHIBIT switch....................................................................................................................................... Forward
ATC SEL knob................................................................................................................................................................ STBY
Mode selector knob ......................................................................................................................................................... STBY
Verify that the frequencies displayed are the same on COM1 and NAV1 on RTU 1
STAB and MACH TRIM

Review the location of the STAB CH1 HSTCU (CB2-F5) and the STAB CH2 HSTCU (CB4-A1) circuit breakers. These are
noted with a YELLOW collar. Note the following Amber Caution messages:
STAB TRIM
MACH TRIM
STAB TRIM CH1 & CH2 ................................................................................................................................................ Press
After pressing one STAB TRIM button, the STAB TRIM Amber Caution message should be removed, and a STAB
CH 1 (or 2) INOP White Status message will appear until the other STAB TRIM button is pressed
CAPTAINS STAB TRIM DISCONNECT ..................................................................................................................... Press

Note the following Amber Caution message:
STAB TRIM
Repeat procedure using First Officer stab trim disconnect.

STAB TRIM CH1 & CH2 ................................................................................................................................................ Press
MACH TRIM.................................................................................................................................................................... Press
Confirm that all messages are removed
Display/ARINC Fans
DISPLY & ARINC FAN switches ................................................................................................................................NORM
Engine Speed Switches
[C]
ON
Trims
[C]
Checked
AIL TRIM, ELV TRIM & RUD TRIM.............................................................................................. Move in both directions
On the status page, verify free and correct movement in both directions, then set exactly centered
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Lower Pedestal
4a-29
30 AUG 10
[C]
Checked
Interior Lighting
LIGHTING knobs.................................................................................................................................................. As Required
YAW DAMPER
YD1 & YD2...............................................................................................................................................................ENGAGE
After engaging one YD, the YAW DAMPER Amber Caution message and amber YD indication on both PFDs
should be removed, and a YD 1 (or 2) INOP White Status message will appear until the other YD is engaged
Confirm YD 1 INOP and YD 2 INOP White Status messages are not displayed
Source Select Panel

ATT HDG knob........................................................................................................................................................NORM
AIR DATA knob ......................................................................................................................................................NORM
EICAS knob..............................................................................................................................................................NORM
DSPL CONT knob....................................................................................................................................................NORM
Observers ACP ..................................................................................................................................................... As Required
LANDING GEAR manual release handle..................................................................................................................... Stowed
ADG manual deploy handle .......................................................................................................................................... Stowed
AHRS................................................................................................................................................................................MAG
Stall/EGPWS Test
[C]
Complete
Stall Protection System Test.

WARNING
Both STALL PTCT PUSHER switches must remain ON for all phases of flight.
Note
of lift due to wing leading edge contamination.
Note
To ensure a successful test, all items within the following test must be verified to have occurred in the
sequence indicated.
FLAPS lever.................................................................................................................................................................................. 0
STAB TRIM position................................................................................................................................................... 6 0.2 units
Hydraulic pressure ............................................................................................................................................................ Checked
Ensure that hydraulic system 3 pressure is normal
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4a-30
9 MAY 11

Normal Checklists
STALL PTCT, PUSHER switches.............................................................................................................................Select to ON

STALL switch ........................................................................................Select momentarily and check for the following events:
CONT IGNITION White Status message ON
Display Flight Control Synoptic page on ED2
Captains and First Officers stick shaker is activated
CONT, ON light on
Stick pusher is activated and STALL switches flash
EICAS R/H elevator surface pointer indicates full travel or First Officer control column is against forward stop
Stick pusher is de-activated and STALL switches out
Captains and First Officers stick shaker stops
CONT, ON light out
CONT IGNITION White Status message out
Note
Stick pusher deactivation and control column return to the neutral position is slower in ISIS equipped
aircraft and does not necessarily indicate an unsatisfactory test. This is due to the fact that the pusher
motor clutch does not disengage until approximately 5 seconds after the test is complete.
Note
STALL FAIL Amber Caution message appears if either AP/SP DISC switch is depressed for more
than 3 seconds.
Hydraulic Pumps 3A and 3B ................................................................................................................................................... OFF
EGPWS Test.
GND PROX TERRAIN switchlight....................................................................................................... Selected out and guarded
GPWS switchlight ............................................................................................................ Push and release (less than 3 seconds)
GPWS and G/S lights illuminated

GLIDESLOPE, WHOOP, WHOOP, PULL UP, TERRAIN, and WINDSHEAR aurals
On the MFDs: TERRAIN TEST and TERRAIN DISPLAY FAIL messages and a display test pattern
On the PFDs: Windshear warning
GPWS FAIL
WINDSHEAR FAIL
TERRAIN FAIL
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4.6.3
4a-31
30 AUG 10
Before Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response).
General. This flow and checklist is used to prepare for starting the engines.
Trigger. Approximately 25 minutes prior to departure.
For the first flight of the day, the Before Start Check will be executed following the completion of the Acceptance Check. On
turn-around flights when the aircraft remains powered, crews will go directly to the Before Start Check when preparing for the
next flight. When the aircraft is depowered between flights or there is a crew swap, crews will begin with the Acceptance
Check.
Departure Setup.
The following items will be completed and reviewed aloud by both pilots prior to calling for the Before Start Check.
1.
ATIS
2.
ATC Clearance
3.
FMS Setup
4.
RTU Setup
5.
PFD Setup
Departure Setup (Expanded).

Prior to calling for the Before Start Check, either crewmember will have received the ATIS and ATC clearance for the leg to be
flown. Once these are received, the initial altitude, frequencies (COM and NAV on RTUs 1 & 2), transponder code, and
altimeters should be set accordingly. TCAS should be set to AUTO & REL. The WX/TERR selection on the DCP should be
set to terrain unless weather radar is expected to be used for departure.
Note
Primary ATC communications will normally be conducted using COM 1. COM 2 will be used for
Company, Maintenance, ATIS, etc.
Both the Captains and First Officers PFDs and the FMS will be set in the following manner so that these settings can be
reviewed and confirmed without delay prior to the Before Start Check.
1.
Both pilots will select and identify the respective appropriate navigation source. The PF must be in short range (green
needles) if the departure procedure or the engine failure procedure requires localizer tracking, VOR tracking, or DME
identification.
Note
If the waypoint or DME required turn is preloaded from the FMS database both pilots may be in
white needles.
2.
Set Flap Retraction Altitude (FRA) on the MDA bug to 1000 ft. above field elevation or as published in the Takeoff
Report, whichever is higher.
3.
Set airspeed bug to 200 knots.
4.
Set heading bug to runway heading.
5.
Set the initial altitude in ALT preselect.
6.
Set up the assigned departure and route in the FMS.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4a-32
30 AUG 10

Normal Checklists
FMS Initialization (If required).

Confirm the following on the STATUS page:
ACTIVE DATA BASE
UTC and DATE
PERF DATA BASE on page 2 (confirm engine type)
On the INDEX page select:
POS INIT
Enter the airport ICAO identifier in the scratchpad
Press the airport line key. Verify that the FMS airport reference position is correct by referring to the latitude and
longitude coordinates on the airport chart.
Press the airport reference position (lat & long) line key
Press the SET POS line key
Note
If this position disagrees by more than 40 nm from the position last known by the FMS, the message
RESET INITIAL POSITION is displayed on the FMS annunciator line. Verify the entry and re-enter
the position.
VOR CONTROL
Ensure that the VOR and DME USAGE line is ENABLED
Up to eight VORs can be inhibited
GPS CONTROL
Ensure that GPS is ENABLED

Deselect satellites, as appropriate
FMS CONTROL
Select FMS DATA KEY to LEFT

DEFAULTS (page 2)
Enter climb speed of 290/.70-.74

Enter cruise speed of 290/.74
Enter descent speed of .74/290
Enter descent angle of 3.0
Enter Fuel flow correction of 0.0 (page 3)
FMS Flight Plan Programming.

If destination airport is served by RNAV or GPS approaches only, the following procedure is mandatory:
Select INDEX
Select GPS CONTROL
Enter the four letter ICAO airport identifier
Enter destination airport ETA in Zulu
Ensure APPR RAIM is AVAILABLE
If APPR RAIM is UNAVAILABLE, contact Dispatch.

FLPN
Insert route (manually or company). Ensure origin, destination, alternate, and flight number are entered.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-33
30 AUG 10
DEP/ARR
Runway, SID, and STAR with applicable transitions.
FLPN
Pilots will verbally review the flight plan by verifying each leg of the route with the ATC clearance, dispatch flight
release and Jeppesen Airway charts. Verify the total distance, confirm and EXEC the flight plan, and COPY
ACTIVE.
RADIO
Select as required
PROG
Select NEXT PAGE to view 2/2
Enter RNP 1.0 in position R6 to ensure GPS coverage during entire flight (N/A if GPS and/or FMS is deferred)
MFD MENU
Select PF window to VNAV
Select PM window to ON
Select SPEED, ALTITUDE, and RNG TO ALT (this allows for any constraints in the flight plan to appear on the
MFD).
PERF
Enter OAT
Temporarily select proper bleed configuration expected for takeoff (this will cause MCT value to be displayed).
Enter MCT value into the scratchpad and line select it into TGT (Target N1), then reselect the bleed configuration to
OFF. This will be the crews MCT reference prior to switching the bleeds after takeoff.
Ensure TO is active on Thrust Limit page 1 for normal takeoff
Exception: If a FLX takeoff is planned, enter FLX temp and ensure FLX is active on Thrust Limit page 2.
PERF MENU
Advisory VNAV, enable
If fuel is not in the PREDICTED performance mode (as indicated on the MFD window), carry out the following steps:
Select PERF MENU
Select FUEL MANAGEMENT
Select PREDICTED performance mode
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-34
30 AUG 10
PERF INIT
On PERF INIT page 1:
Insert cruise altitude to destination
Confirm BOW with release
Enter actual fuel onboard
Enter the average wind component from the release into Climb, Cruise and Descent
Enter the ISA deviation using the following chart:
Airport Elevation
Standard ISA C
15.0
1000
13.0
2000
11.1
3000
9.1
4000
7.1
5000
5.1
6000
3.1
7000
1.1
8000
-0.8
Example
ATIS temp = 18 C
Airport elevation = 1000 MSL
Standard ISA (from chart) = 13.0 C

Current temp is 5 above ISA (or ISA +5)
Once the aircraft has completed the DP and is en route, go to PERF INIT page 2 and delete the ISA deviation value.
VNAV
On VNAV page 1:
Enter TGT SPEED of 290/.70-.74 or cost indexing speed
Confirm SPD/ALT LIMIT 250/10000 and TRANS ALT 18000
On VNAV page 2:
Enter TGT SPEED of 290/.74 or cost indexing speed
On VNAV page 3:
Enter TGT SPEED of .74/290 or cost indexing speed
Confirm SPEED/ALT LIMIT of 250/10000 and TRANS FL of FL180
EXEC after verification
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-35
9 MAY 11
The Captain will ensure that the ATIS and ATC clearance have been reviewed, the PFDs and RTUs have been set, and the FMS
flight plan has been reviewed.
Example ATIS, Clearance, RTU, FMS, and PFD Review.
The ATIS is CHARLEY, wind is 200 at 5 knots, visibility is mile in heavy rain, ceiling 200 overcast, temperature 8,
dewpoint 7, altimeter 29.75. Runways 18L/C/R are in use, 18C RVR is 1200. We are cleared to PIT via the JACAL FIVE
Departure NALEY transition, as filed. Squawk 5432 is set. RTU #1 is set to North Ramp and Outbound Ramp, Nav is
Autotune. RTU #2 is set to OPS and Departure, Nav is autotune. The FMS has been reviewed (if the FMS route has not
been reviewed, BOTH pilots will review it at this point). Both PFDs are set, speed bug 200 knots, Left NAV source is FMS,
Right source is FMS, heading 183, flap retraction altitude 1,750, initial altitude 8,000, flight director coupled left. Any
questions?
The crew will then complete the DEPARTURE BRIEFING as detailed in the Before Start Check (Expanded).
After the departure setup is complete and the aircraft has been fueled, the Captain will call for the Before Start Check.
Note
The Captain will not call for the Before Start Check until the fueling is complete.
Before Start Flow (C & FO).
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
Crew O2 & masks................................................... Checked

Nosewheel Steering ....................................................... OFF
LH & RH WSHLD Switches.............................. AS REQD
With OAT in excess of 25C, the Windshield Heat should
remain OFF until the Before Takeoff Check.
Crew O2 & masks....................................................Checked

Pressurization....................................................................Set
Set the destination elevation on the status page using the
LDG ELEV knob on the CABIN PRESS control panel.
Passenger Signs ............................................................... ON
SEAT BELTS White Status message will be displayed
on ED2.
After the Captain calls Before Start Checklist

Accomplish the Before Start Checklist (to the line)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-36
30 AUG 10
Before Start Check (Expanded).

LOGBOOK/REQD DOCS
VERIFY
Verify that the maintenance logbook and all other required documents are onboard
Crew O2 & Masks
ONBOARD
VERIFY
Checked/__psi
Check EICAS for oxygen pressure. Oxygen supply for crew must comply with minimum requirements in the table below.
OAT
Min. Bottle Pressure (psi)
-20
-10
10
20
30
40
50
-4
14
32
50
68
86
104
122
1410
1431
1505
1579
1654
1728
1802
1877
3 Crewmembers
2 Crewmembers
1410
Oxygen Mask Test.

Oxygen Mask Regulator Storage Compartment
Oxygen mask regulator flow selector .................................................................................................................................... 100%
PRESS TO TEST......................................................................................................................Push and hold down for entire test
Listen for oxygen flow
Verify that the yellow cross located on the compartment door appears and then disappears as flow sound decreases
Harness inflation plates (red)............................................................................................................................................. Squeeze
Verify that the yellow cross (oxygen flowing, harness inflated) appears and then disappears as flow sound decreases
Harness inflation plates (red).............................................................................................................................................. Release

Emergency flow control ..........................................................................................................................................................Push
Verify that the yellow cross (oxygen flowing) is visible
Emergency flow control ..................................................................................................................................................... Release
Verify that the yellow cross appears and then disappears as flow sound decreases
PRESS TO TEST................................................................................................................................................................ Release

Audio Control Panel (ACP)
INT SVC speaker switch ................................................................................................................................................ Select ON
BOOM/MASK switch ......................................................................................................................................................... MASK
SPKR switch................................................................................................................................................................... Select ON
I/C-R/T switch ........................................................................................................................................................................... I/C
PRESS TO TEST..................................................................................................................................................Push and release
Verify mask mic operation by oxygen flowing sound over speaker
I/C-R/T switch ......................................................................................................................................................................... OFF

SPKR switch............................................................................................................................................................... As Required
BOOM/MASK switch .........................................................................................................................................................BOOM
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Anti-Skid Test
4a-37
30 AUG 10
[C]
Complete
Note
This test is required prior to each flight. If possible, it may be completed prior to performing the
Before Start Check for passenger boarding safety concerns.
Anti-Skid Test.
Parking Brake...........................................................................................................................................................................OFF
ANTI-SKID TEST switch ........................................................................................................................................Hold at TEST
A/SKID OUTBD
A/SKID INBD
ANTI-SKID TEST switch ..................................................................................................................................................Release

The Amber Caution messages disappear after approximately 6 seconds.
Note
This test will be performed while holding toe pressure on the brake pedals. Wait for the A/SKID INBD
and A/SKID OUTBD Amber Caution messages to disappear before selecting the parking brake ON.
Parking Brake............................................................................................................................................................................ ON
Parking Brake
Set/Checked
Confirm that the parking brake is set and that the PARKING BRAKE ON Green Advisory message is displayed
Fuel Qty.
[C]
VERIFY
__ Reqd, __ OB
Confirm that the quantity is balanced and corresponds with the Ramp Fuel on the dispatch release. The aircraft may be
over- or under-fueled by 300 lbs. (but in no case may the aircraft be under-fueled below MIN T/O FUEL plus TAXI FUEL),
as long as it is reflected in the Weight & Balance. If this is exceeded, an update to the release must be obtained by notifying
the dispatcher via phone, radio, or ACARS (with a subsequent acknowledgement), or a new release must be obtained.
Note
The center tank fuel limitation (500 lbs. max in the center tank with <4400 lbs. in each wing tank)
ONLY applies for takeoff. Starting engines at the gate will start the fuel transfer process to correct the
imbalance.
Note
When referencing fuel quantities, pilots may omit the last 2 digits of the fuel quantity (i.e., if the ramp
fuel load is 12,386, pilots can state the required quantity as 12.3 or 12,300).
Altimeters
VERIFY
__.__ Set/Chkd
The Captain sets left and standby altimeters and the First Officer sets the right altimeter
Ensure that all three altimeters are within 75 ft. of published field elevation. Also ensure that the Captains and First
Officers altimeters are within 50 ft. of each other (RVSM requirements)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-38
9 MAY 11
Departure Briefing
[PF]
Complete
Ensure that the FMS and ACARS initialization is complete. Ensure that the ATIS, Clearance, FMS, RTUs, and PFDs are set up
as prescribed in the Departure Setup section of this chapter.

Both pilots will review the expected taxi route, hot spots, any airport construction, and applicable NOTAMS for taxiway
closures. Both pilots will confirm all taxi instructions, especially hold short clearances. When crossing an active runway
each pilot shall confirm the runway is clear and there is clearance to cross. Vigilance shall be used when the first officer is
performing Heads Down tasks such as checklist and FMS inputs.

Cleared SID or departure procedure
information, etc.)
Example Departure Briefing.

We are planning to depart Runway 18C, JACAL FIVE, NALEY transition. Planned taxi route from gate E18 to runway
18R is via the north ramp to the main ramp spot 2, then via Taxiway Echo to 18C. The JACAL FIVE SID is a RNAV
departure. We will fly in NAV (FMS) mode and use of the flight director is required, climb and maintain 8,000 feet. We will
not exceed 280 knots until advised by ATC. The Engine Failure Procedure is to fly a direct track on a 183 heading. Our
takeoff alternate is KGSO. We will use Cowl Anti-ice for taxi and Wing and Cowl Anti-ice for takeoff. We will also use
Continuous ignition on takeoff. Any questions?
--------------------------------------------------------------------------If ACARS is INOP / unavailable, ensure weight and balance paperwork is completed and handed to a gate agent prior to
calling below the line.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-39
9 MAY 11
Before Start Flow (below the line) (C).

Trigger. When issued pushback clearance or clearance to start engine(s).
Captain (C)
R BOOST PUMP switchlight..........................................ON
Confirm the following Green Advisory message:
R FUEL PUMP ON
If both engines are required, also select the L BOOST
PUMP switchlight ON.
HYD PUMP switches 1B and 2B.............................. AUTO
HYD PUMP switch 3A and 3B.......................................ON
Doors ............................................................ Closed/Locked
Check that no red or amber EICAS door messages are

displayed.
Check that the crew escape hatch is secure, the locked
marks are aligned, and the handle is stowed
Confirm that the flight deck entry door is closed and
locked
The keyed deadbolt on the cockpit door is approved for
ground operations only.
Beacon .............................................................................ON
Ignition A or B switchlight......................................... ARM
Use ignition A on odd days, use ignition B on even days
L & R PACK switchlights ............................................. OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-40
30 AUG 10
Before Start Check (below the line) (C and FO).

CAS
VERIFY
Checked
The First Officer checks the EICAS messages to ensure that all displayed messages are normal for the current operational
configuration of the aircraft, then states Verify Checked. The Captain also makes a final scan of the EICAS messages and
states Checked.
Pushback Procedures.
Pushback will not commence prior to the completion of the Before Start Check. For pushback procedures, refer to the FOM.
Engine Start Procedures.
The Captain will perform the engine start with the parking brake set. If the aircraft parking brake is not set, the Captain will
direct the First Officer to perform the engine start. Engine starts will be accomplished when cleared by ground personnel
during pushback or with the parking brake set. However, certain airports throughout our system have specific pushback
procedures that must be followed. This information may be found in the station bulletins.
The engine(s) will be started after obtaining a start signal from the marshaller.
On the FFD, the fuel check valve check must be performed prior to starting the right engine. Reference the After Start Check
(Expanded) for the procedure.
The same procedures are used for the left engine start as were used for the right engine start.
Engine Starts.
The right engine is normally started first
L or R ENG START switchlight.....................................................Press and hold until the following messages are verified:
IGNITION A or B Green Advisory message

L or R ENGINE START White Status message
Note
Start the chronometer when the L or R ENGINE START White Status message appears.
The following engine instrument verification is required by the pilot performing the engine start (silent).
N2 ...................................................................................................................................................................Verify increasing
Oil Pressure ....................................................................................................................................................Verify increasing
N1 ...................................................................................................................................................................Verify increasing
ITT............................................................................................................................................................. Verify below 120C
N2 20% ...........................................................................................................................................L or R thrust lever to IDLE
Fuel Flow .......................................................................................................................................................Verify increasing
Light Off.................................................................................................................................................Verify increase in ITT
N2 55% ........................................................................................................................................Verify L or R ENG START
White Status message disappears
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-41
30 AUG 10
Engine Starts, Other Than Normal.

Accomplish the following procedures IAW the Supplemental Chapter of this POH or the Supplement Checklist (As Required).
External Air
Cross Bleed
Battery/External Air
Hot Start.
During an engine start, the HOT icon (ITT gauge) appears when ITT rapidly increases at 200C per second. Should the HOT
icon appear, immediately move the thrust lever to SHUT OFF and turn the ignition off.
Continue to motor the engine until ITT decreases below 120C, respecting starter engagement time limit. If the hot start
occurs after a starter cutout (55% N2), re-engagement of the starter motor will be required.
Refer to the Limitations Chapter of this POH for engine starter limitations.
A hot start can occur without the HOT icon. Monitor ITT closely during start to avoid an over temperature (900C maximum).
Always be vigilant of the peak ITT.
In addition to the hot start abnormal, a start sequence will also be aborted for any of the following abnormalities:
Hung start (N2 stagnation prior to engine stabilization)
No light off (no rise in ITT)

No N1 rotation (Do not introduce fuel until N1 rotation is verified)
No fuel flow
No IGNITION A or B Green Advisory message
No oil pressure indication by the time idle N2 RPM is achieved
If the start is aborted, the pilot starting the engine will announce that he is aborting the start and will state the reason that the
start was aborted.
The following actions will be accomplished immediately before referencing the QRH:
1.
Affected engine, thrust lever.................................................................................................................................. SHUTOFF
2.
Ignition..............................................................................................................................................................................OFF
3.
Dry motor............................................................................................................................................................. As Required
Starter Fails to Cutout.

It is imperative that starter cutout be observed at 55% N2. The NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message appears if
the starter does not cutout. The resultant high speed of the starter turbine could cause mechanical damage.
Pressing the applicable ENG STOP switchlight should be all that is required to close the start valve and stop airflow to the air
turbine starter (ATS).
On the ground, should the ENG STOP action not resolve the problem, you must shutdown the engine and turn off the air
source (APU, external air or other engine bleed).
Caution
During an engine start using external air, coordination with ground personnel will be required to shut
off the external air source during a NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message condition.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-42
9 MAY 11
4.6.4
After Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow).
General. This flow is used to configure the aircraft for taxiing.

Trigger. After the engine(s) are stabilized, accomplish the After Start Flow. After the ground equipment is clear and
acknowledgment of the ground crew signal, accomplish the After Start Checklist.
The First Officer will read the checklist and each crewmember will respond, verifying each switch is properly positioned.
After Start Flow (C & FO).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-43
9 MAY 11
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
GENS .............................................................................. ON
Packs................................................................................ON
Select engine generators on.

APU ....................................................................AS REQD
Ensure BLEEDS are set as required, L & R PACKS are

selected on and L PACK OFF and R PACK OFF White
Status messages are extinguished
If the APU will be shutdown, ensure the BLEEDS are set
ANTI-ICE........................................ Test (FFD)/AS REQD
as required
PROBES ..........................................................................ON
IGN ................................................................................OFF
APR........................................................... Test (FFD)/ARM The FO selects PROBES LH & RH switches to ON
Electrics .................................................................. Checked Transponder ........................................................ AS REQD
Using the AC and DC electrical synoptic pages, the

Captain verifies:
The FO will select the transponder to ON if the airport

requires the use of the transponder for ground operations
All buses are powered

The loads, voltages and frequencies are within
normal ranges
The flow lines are green
External electrics are selected off and
disconnected
No abnormal messages are displayed
After Start (Expanded).
Fuel Check Valve
[C]
Checked
On the first flight of the day (FFD), perform the fuel check valve verification after starting the left engine
Before starting the right engine:

Select both fuel pumps.............................................................................................................................................................OFF
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
R FUEL LO PRESS
Note
If after 2 minutes, the R FUEL LO PRESS Amber Caution message is still not displayed, dry motor
the right engine until the message appears, respecting starter limits.
Select both fuel boost pumps back ON and start the right engine
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-44
30 AUG 10
APR
[C]
TESTED/ARMED
APR Test (FFD).

Engine Control Panel
APR Switch ........................................................................................................................................................................... ARM
APR TEST switch .............................................................................................................................................................. TEST 1
Green APR icons are displayed in the center of both N1 gauges
Also verify the following Green Advisory message:
APR TEST 1 (2)

Repeat test for APR TEST 2
ANTI-ICE
[FO]
Checked/AS REQD
Anti-Ice Check (COWL/WING/14th-Stage Bleeds and ISOL Valve) (FFD).

The FO selects the L & R 14TH STAGE switchlights out and verifies the following White Status messages:
L 14TH SOV CLSD

R 14TH SOV CLSD
The FO selects the L & R 14TH STAGE switchlights in and verifies the previous Status messages are removed.
The FO selects LH & RH COWL ANTI-ICE ON, and verifies:
ITT increase on both engines
The FO selects the ANTI-ICE, WING to NORM and verifies:
ITT increase on both engines

N2 gauges change from green to amber in the 0-78% range
Note
The L or R WING or COWL A/ICE Amber Caution message may illuminate when the system is
selected ON due to low pressure or temperature. This does not indicate an invalid test. ITT rise is the
primary indication in determining test validity.
The FO selects the 14TH STAGE ISOL switchlight in and verifies the following White Status message:
14TH ISOL OPEN
The FO selects the 14TH STAGE ISOL switchlight out and verifies the previous Status message is removed.
The FO selects ANTI-ICE, WING switch to OFF and verifies:
ITT decrease on both engines
COWL ANTI-ICE ...................................................................................................................................................... As Required

If the FO selects COWL ANTI-ICE switches to OFF, verify:
ITT decrease on both engines
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Rudder
4a-45
9 MAY 11
[C]
Checked
EICAS control panel (ECP)............................................................................................................................................ F/CTL
The Captain moves the rudder pedals full travel and checks on the F/CTL synoptic page that maximum deflection is
obtained without binding
Nosewheel Steering
Thrust Reversers
[C]
ARMED
[FO]
Armed
Verify
Checked
L REV ARMED
R REV ARMED
CAS
configuration of the aircraft, then states Verify Checked. The Captain also checks the EICAS messages and states
Checked.
Taxi.
Prior to initial taxi, when the parking brake is first released, the Captain will state, Parking Brake Released, Sterile Cockpit.
This is to reinforce the beginning of sterile cockpit procedures.
Both pilots must verify the Jeppesen airport diagram is displayed and viewable. Any changes in the expected taxi route from
the Departure Briefing will be discussed and briefed at this time. Pilots should allow time for airplane response to each thrust
change.
To begin taxi, release the brakes and smoothly increase thrust to the minimum required for the airplane to roll forward. Once
taxi has commenced, idle thrust is more than adequate for most conditions. Do not start a turn until sufficient forward speed
has been attained to allow the airplane to turn at idle thrust (nosewheel should not be turned when aircraft is static).
Thrust use during ground operation demands sound judgement and techniques. The air blast effects at relatively low thrust can
be destructive and cause injury. Be aware of aircraft behind you and likewise avoid following other airplanes too closely. Jet
blast is a major cause of foreign object damage (FOD).
The tendency is to taxi faster than desired, especially during runway turnoff after landing. The appropriate taxi speed will
depend on turn radius and surface condition. Nosewheel scrubbing indicates excessive steering angle and/or excessive taxi
speed for surface condition. The normal straight-ahead taxi speed should not exceed 20 knots. When approaching a turn,
adjust speed for the surface condition.
At some taxi speeds, usually between 10 and 20 knots, an increase in airplane vibration can occur. If this occurs, a slight
increase or decrease in speed will reduce or eliminate the vibration, increasing passenger comfort.
Do not be diverted from the primary task of safely taxiing the airplane. The flight crew should avoid all unnecessary activity
and duties (including paperwork) that can be accomplished at another time.
No FMS entries will be performed while taxiing across runways, or if complex taxi instructions are issued.
Taxi Lights
RECOG/TAXI lights are used to taxi (day and night) and care should be exercised they do not distract other taxiing aircrew
and/or ground personnel. RECOG/TAXI lights are normally selected ON when the taxi commences and OFF if the aircraft is
stationary. The RECOG/TAXI lights must be selected off if the aircraft is stationary for more than 10 minutes (RECOG/TAXI
light stationary limitation).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4a-46
30 AUG 10

Normal Checklists
Nosewheel/Rudder Pedal Steering

During a turn, maintain positive pressure on the nose steering tiller to prevent the nose gear from returning to center abruptly.
Straight-ahead steering and large radius turns should be accomplished with rudder pedal steering only. Avoid stopping the
airplane in a turn, as excessive thrust will be required to start taxiing again. After completing a turn, and prior to stopping,
center the nosewheel and allow the airplane to roll straight ahead for a short distance.
Brakes
Avoid riding the brakes to control taxi speed. If taxi speed is too high, reduce speed with a steady brake application and then
release the brakes to permit brake cooling. Continuous braking should be avoided. Allow for decreased braking effectiveness
on slick surfaces.
Taxiing on Contaminated Surfaces
Taxiing in adverse weather conditions requires awareness of surface conditions. If the taxiways and runways are covered with
snow, slush, or ice, taxi with the flaps up.
Select takeoff flaps when nearing the departure end of the runway, then complete the Taxi and Before Takeoff Checks.
When taxiing on a slick surface at reduced speeds, the use of differential engine thrust may assist in maintaining airplane
trajectory through a turn. Differential braking may be more effective than nosewheel steering on very slick surfaces. Reduce
speed prior to initiating a turn.
FMS Entries (On Ground)
The First Officer will make all FMS entries during taxi, executing only after confirmation by the Captain.
No FMS entries will be performed during low visibility taxi operations unless taxiing straight ahead without complex
intersections or the aircraft is stopped.
Turning Radius
The following shows the minimum turning radius capability for the CRJ-200 aircraft:
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-47
9 MAY 11
Single - Engine Taxi.

Conditions.
Non-operating engine BOOST PUMP OFF
Jet blast will not present a hazard to personnel and equipment
Do not exceed a thrust setting of 80% N2
Prohibited when ramps or taxiways are contaminated with snow, slush, or ice
Prohibited during icing conditions
Preferred single engine taxi is with the right engine operating. If operationally necessary to single engine taxi out with
the left engine:
The APU must be running with the APU GEN supplying electrical power.
Prior to taxiing:
Hydraulic Pump 2B................................................................................................................................................................ON
After the right engine is started:
Hydraulic Pump 2B.......................................................................................................................................................... AUTO
Taxi-Out.
On first flight of the day, start the left engine first. Both engines must be started at the gate to accomplish FFD items.
Taxi-In.
Single engine taxi-in will be accomplished with the right engine operating. Conditions permitting, the APU should remain off.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-48
9 MAY 11
Delayed Start
Trigger. Before starting the left/right engine, the Captain will call for, Delayed engine start. The Delayed Start Flow
followed by the Before Start Check (D) item will be accomplished.
Delayed Start Flow.
Boost Pump switchlight ....................................................................................................................................................... ON

Ignition A or B switchlight................................................................................................................................................ ARM
* Use ignition A on odd days, use ignition B on even days.
L & R Pack switchlights......................................................................................................................................................OFF
Caution
Extreme caution must be exercised to ensure that the operating engines N2 does not exceed 70% while
starting the opposite engine using the APU bleed. (Reference Chapter 3: Limitations)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-49
9 MAY 11
Trigger. After both engines are operating, accomplish the Delayed After Start Flow followed by the After Start Check
(D) item.
Delayed After Start Flow.
Generator...............................................................................................................................................................................ON
Check Electric synoptic pages to ensure proper electrical power
Ignition switchlight ...............................................................................................................................................................Off
L & R Pack switchlights ........................................................................................................................................................On
Engine Shutdown After Gate Departure.
Select the AC electrics synoptic page and ensure the APU or Right Generator is available for electrical power.
Select L BOOST PUMP OFF

Shutoff the left engine
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-50
9 MAY 11
4.6.5
Taxi Check (Challenge & Response).
General. This check is used to configure the aircraft for departure.

Trigger. Once clear of ramp congestion and both engines are running, the First Officer will ensure the takeoff performance is
displayed on ACARS (or TLR performance is available) and set the takeoff data. The Captain will then call, (Departure
airport), Runway____, Flaps___, Taxi Check. The First Officer will select the takeoff Flap setting and then complete the Taxi
Check. When the checklist is complete, the First Officer will state: Runway ____, Flaps___, Taxi Check complete. If a
runway change is received, the Taxi Check must be re-accomplished.
Taxi (Expanded).
Flaps
Verify
____Set/Indicating
Verify the flaps are set for takeoff by pointing at the required Flap setting from ACARS or the TLR and the EICAS Flap
Position (8 or 20)
Takeoff Data
Verify
SET
The First Officer will request takeoff data via ACARS. If the ACARS is not available, reference the weight and balance form,
TLR, and speed cards. Once determined, the First Officer will set and read aloud from the ACARS Takeoff Data Page or the
TLR and speed cards the departure runway, flap setting, takeoff weight, V-speeds, and N1 takeoff setting. The First Officer
will also ensure the speed card displays the appropriate takeoff weight and that the PERF INIT page reflects the proper zero
fuel weight. The Captain will visually verify these items on the displays. Takeoff data can be entered any time after final
weight and balance is completed.
Example Takeoff Data.
Runway 18R, Flaps 20, 48,000 pounds, V1 is 133, VR is 133, V2 is 139, VT is 179 and FLEX N1 is 88.4.
Trims
Verify
Green, Centered, __.__
Verify the following, by pointing at:

Aileron and rudder trims are green and exactly centered to prevent an unwarranted T/O CONFIG Red Warning message
STAB trim indicator is green and set as per the ACARS data or SeeGee wheel
4.6.6
Before Takeoff Check (Challenge & Response, FO Flow).
General. This flow and check is used to ensure the aircraft and flight attendant are prepared for an imminent takeoff.
Note
If a runway change has been received, redo the Taxi Checklist.
Trigger. After the Flight Attendant notifies the crew that the cabin is secure for takeoff and when approaching the departure
end of the runway (i.e. approximately #1 or #2 for takeoff), the Captain will call for the Before Takeoff Check. When
cleared for takeoff or cleared on the runway for line up and wait, the Captain will call Below the line. When the checklist
is complete, the First Officer will state: Before Takeoff Check complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-51
9 MAY 11
Before Takeoff Flow (FO).
FUEL X-FLOW......................................................................................................................................................... MAN/OFF

WSHLD Switches .............................................................................................................................................................. LOW
The First Officer will ensure the Windshield Heat switches are LOW, then confirm that there are no L(R) WSHLD
HEAT or L(R) WINDOW HEAT Amber Caution messages displayed
Flight Controls....................................................................................................................................... Aileron/Elevator Check
Flight Attendant................................................................................................................................................................Advise
The First Officer will make the required PA announcement advising the Flight Attendant to prepare for departure
Example PA Announcement.
Ladies and gentlemen, we have been cleared onto the runway. Flight Attendant, please prepare for departure.
- OR Ladies and gentlemen, we are number one (or two) for the runway. Flight Attendant, please prepare for departure.
FAA regulations prohibit providing additional information to the passengers when the aircraft is moving (critical phase).
Save information regarding weather and arrival times for when the aircraft is parked.
TRANSPONDER/TCAS........................................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO
The First Officer selects the transponder on the PF side
If ALT OFF noted under transponder code on ATC Top Page, go to ATC Main Page and select ALT ON
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-52
9 MAY 11
Before Takeoff (Expanded).

T/O Configuration
Verify
Checked
The Captin and First Officer will verify the following Green Advisory message:
T/O CONFIG OK
T/O Fuel Qty/Balance
[FO]
Checked
All BTMS indicators must be green and are not increasing

FUEL X-FLOW
__ Req. __ OB/CHKD
Both pilots will state minimum takeoff fuel required then state actual fuel onboard. Both pilots will also ensure that fuel is
adequately balanced for takeoff and no unexpected asymmetry exists.
Brake Temp
Verify
[FO]
MAN/OFF
The First Officer presses in the XFLOW AUTO OVERRIDE switchlight. The First Officer then confirms that the MAN
XFLOW White Status message is displayed and that there is no GRAV XFLOW OPEN Green Advisory message or L
XFLOW ON/R XFLOW ON White Status message.
Flight Controls
[FO]
Checked
EICAS Control Panel (ECP) ...........................................................................................................................................F/CTL
Move the control wheel left and right to full deflection, and verify aileron and spoileron movement on the FLIGHT
CONTROLS synoptic page. Check for smooth movement without binding.
Move the control wheel back and forth to full deflection, and verify elevator movement on the FLIGHT
Ensure no abnormal Caution, Advisory, or Status messages on the FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic or status pages,
and no abnormal graphic indications or colors. Ensure that the left and right flap position indications on the
FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic page coincide with the indication on the primary page.
EICAS Control Panel (ECP) ............................................................................................................................................STAT

T/O Briefing
[PF]
RWY ___/COMPLETE
The pilot flying will verify the correct runway is selected from the FMS database by checking the actual takeoff runway
agrees with the runway displayed (the FROM waypoint) on the MFD. The FMS MAP format will normally be displayed
for all takeoffs.
The pilot flying will point to the MFD (runway displayed) and callout the T/O runway, initial heading, initial altitude, first
fix, Engine Failure Procedure and special considerations
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-53
9 MAY 11
Example Takeoff Briefing.

Runway 18C, RNAV JACAL FIVE departure, climb to 8,000, first fix is GIRGY,, Engine Failure Procedure is a direct
track on a 183 heading, no special considerations. Any questions? Runway 18C/complete.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Trigger. When the aircraft is cleared onto the runway for departure.
Ignition/Anti-Ice
AS REQD
The First Officer selects the IGNITION/ANTI-ICE as briefed for takeoff

Note
ANTI-ICE will be used any time that icing conditions are expected prior to setting climb thrust in the
After Takeoff Check.
CAS
[FO]
Verify
Checked
configuration of the aircraft, the states Verify Checked. The Captain also makes a final scan of the EICAS messages and
advises the First Officer to clear the messages by stating Checked. Before calling the checklist complete, both pilots
must verify that the T/O CONFIG OK Green Advisory message is displayed.
The First Officer will clear the CAS after verified Checked.
Runway Heading
Verify
Checked
Once the aircraft is lined up on the departure runway verify the compass heading and press the TOGA switches. Verify TO TO
in the FMA.
Takeoff.
WARNING
Failure to set the pitch trim appropriate to the computed center of gravity may result in
excessive rotation rate at takeoff.
Takeoff Roll (Normal).

Advance thrust levers to near vertical (just above 70% N1). This setting permits the engines to accelerate to a point from where
uniform acceleration to takeoff thrust will occur on both engines. The exact amount of the initial setting is not as important as
setting symmetrical thrust. After the engines are stabilized, the PF advances the thrust levers towards takeoff thrust and calls
Set thrust. The PM will set final takeoff thrust by 60 KIAS. The PM then calls Thrust set. The Captain will then put his
hand on the thrust levers until V1.
Above 60 KIAS, do not reduce thrust except as required to maintain engine parameters within operating limits (redline).
Thrust setting values for takeoff thrust and maximum continuous thrust are not considered limiting.
Keep the airplane on the runway centerline with rudder steering. The rudder becomes effective between 40 and 60 KIAS.
The maximum performance takeoff is the same as the normal takeoff except that the brakes are released only after takeoff
thrust N1 is achieved.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-54
9 MAY 11
Aft Center-of-Gravity Effects.

At aft CG and light weights, nosewheel steering effectiveness may be reduced. Hold the control wheel slightly forward to
improve nosewheel steering.
Rotation and Lift-off.
WARNING
Excessive rotation rates (exceeding 3 degrees per second) or overrotations may lead to
high pitch attitudes being attained while the aircraft is near the ground. This can reduce
stall margins significantly resulting in stick shaker / pusher activation and potentially loss
of control. Pilots must rotate smoothly towards the target pitch attitude then transition to
speed control.
At VR, rotate smoothly toward the target pitch attitude in one continuous motion. Use a rotation rate of approximately 3 per
second. Correct rotation technique is important to ensure that adequate performance is obtained. Lift-off will occur prior to
reaching initial climb target attitude. After lift-off and once a positive rate of climb has been established, select landing gear
up.
Crosswind Takeoff.
The aircraft demonstrates good crosswind control capability during the takeoff roll. Directional deviations should be corrected
immediately with smooth and positive control inputs.
The aileron becomes effective as the aircraft accelerates through approximately 80 KIAS. Use aileron as needed to maintain
wings level and rudder to maintain centerline.
Initial Climb.
With all engines operating, adjust the pitch attitude to maintain V2 + 10 to 15 knots to the Flap Retraction Altitude (FRA).
Obstruction clearance, noise abatement, or departure procedures may require an immediate turn after takeoff. Minimum
airspeed for a turn after takeoff is V2 + 10 knots with flaps 8 or flaps 20. Turns at speeds less than V2 + 10 require the selection
of bank (1/2 BNK) to ensure adequate overbank protection.
For performance and obstacle clearance requirements, turns may begin no sooner than 50 ft. AFE. Normally, all turns required
for SID compliance, ATC request, or noise abatement cannot be initiated prior to 400 ft. AFE (reference page 9-1). Any
planned early turns between 50 ft. and 400 ft. AGL require crew briefing prior to departure and will not exceed 15 of bank.
At FRA (normally 1,000 ft. AFE), adjust the pitch attitude to maintain a slight climb rate while accelerating.
For a flaps 8 takeoff, at VT - 10 and a positive airspeed trend, select flaps up
For a flaps 20 takeoff, at V2 + 12 and a positive airspeed trend, select flaps 8. At VT - 10 and a positive airspeed trend,
select flaps up
After calling Flaps up, call for the After Takeoff Check.
4.6.7
After Takeoff Check (Silent, PM Flow).
General. This flow and check is used to configure the aircraft for climb/cruise.
Trigger. After the flaps are selected up, and the PF has called for the After Takeoff Check, the PM will perform the After
Takeoff flow and then read the After Takeoff Check silently. When the checklist is complete, the PM will state: After Takeoff
Check complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-55
9 MAY 11
After Takeoff Flow (PM).
FUEL X-FLOW ................................................................................................................................................................ AUTO

Bleeds/APU..........................................................................................................................................................Set/AS REQD
Climb............................................................................................................................................... Select on Thrust Limit Page
Climb Thrust ........................................................................................................................................................................... Set
Thrust Reversers ...................................................................................................................................................................OFF
After Takeoff (Expanded).
Gear and Flaps
UP
FUEL X-FLOW
AUTO
XFLOW AUTO OVERRIDE switchlight ................................................................................................................. Select out

Bleeds/APU
Set/AS REQD
If the takeoff was done with the APU bleed supplying the ECS, transfer the bleeds to the engines
L & R 10TH STAGE bleed switchlights........................................................................................................ Select OPEN
APU LCV & 10TH STAGE ISOL switchlights........................................................................................ Select CLOSED
APU ..................................................................................................................................................................As Required
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-56
9 MAY 11
Climb Thrust
Set
Select CLB on the Thrust Limit page and set climb thrust
Thrust Reversers
OFF
Climb.
Initial Climb Speed Determination.
If considerable maneuvering is necessary during the departure, a flaps-up maneuvering speed (flaps 0 speed + 10 knots
minimum) is required until the maneuvering phase is complete, and the airplane is enroute towards the destination. This will
ensure 30-degree bank stall protection plus a 15-degree overbank.
If there are no altitude or airspeed restrictions, accelerate to the desired climb speed schedule.
The speed schedule that follows presents the recommended climb speeds to be flown once above 3,000 feet AGL.
3,000 AGL to 10,000
10,000 and above
250 KIAS
The KIAS/Mach speed listed on the flight release or the cost index
speed listed on the TLR or from the onboard ACARS system. (i.e.
290/.74 or CI001)
Climb at KIAS until it is equivalent to the desired climb Mach number, then transition to a Mach climb.
Recommended minimum climb airspeed below FL250 is 250 KIAS. Above FL250 consult the LOW AND HIGH SPEED
BUFFET BOUNDARIES charts in the SPEEDBOOK for minimum safe airspeeds.
Climbing Through 10,000 ft.
All non-essential external lights and the PED signs are turned off climbing through 10,000 feet. Turning off the PED signs is
the Flight Attendants indication that it is safe for him to stand and that sterile cockpit procedures no longer apply.
FMS Entries (In flight).
Normally the PF will request that the PM make the FMS entries in flight. Under low workload conditions, with the autopilot
ON, the PF may make FMS entries.
In order to maximize crew coordination and awareness, pilots are reminded to operate the FMS in a manner that guarantees
that one pilot is always alert to flight path control and traffic awareness. When the PF or PM edits the FMS, they must confirm
the accuracy of the modification before executing the change.
In order to maximize crew alertness and situational awareness, FMS editing should be kept to a minimum during the approach
phase.
Cruise.
The speed schedule that follows presents the recommended cruise speeds to be flown.
Cruise
290/.74 or CI001)
Cruise at the KIAS or Mach, whichever is less.
If ATC requests cruise speed other than 290/.74, reset Target Speed on VNAV CRUISE page to actual speed. When flying at
an altitude other than the filed cruise altitude, reset the Cruise Altitude on PERF INIT page.
Above FL250 consult the LOW AND HIGH SPEED BUFFET BOUNDARIES charts in the SPEEDBOOK for minimum safe
airspeeds.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-57
9 MAY 11
Recommended Holding Speeds.

A minimum speed of flaps 0 + 30 knots is recommended. Consult the LOW AND HIGH SPEED BUFFET BOUNDARIES
chart (1.5 G-LOAD) in the SPEEDBOOK for safe airspeed ranges.
Descent.
The speed schedule that follows presents the recommended descent speeds to be flown.
10,000 and Above
Below 10,000
Descend at a minimum VPA of 3.0.
The Mach/KIAS listed on the flight release or the cost index speed
listed on the TLR or from the onboard ACARS system. (i.e. .74/290
or CI001
250 KIAS
Descent Planning.
Good descent planning is necessary to arrive at the desired altitude at the correct speed and configuration while burning the
least amount of fuel. Typically, the distance used for a fuel efficient descent is 3 miles per 1,000 ft. of altitude. Starting your
descent later and using greater rates of descent is usually more fuel efficient, but passenger comfort and other factors must be
taken into consideration.
To determine your Top of Descent (TOD) point, multiply your altitude to lose (dropping the last 3 digits) by 3. Up to an
additional 5 miles may be needed to allow for the distance covered during a smooth entry into and exit from the descent. To
determine a rate of descent that will maintain a 3:1 ratio for the current flight conditions, divide your groundspeed by 2 and
then add an additional 0.
Example Descent Planning:
You are in cruise flight at 25,000 feet, 60 miles from MINGG intersection, at a groundspeed of 420 knots. ATC assigns
MINGG at 15,000 feet.
TOD = Altitude to Lose X 3 = 10(000) X 3 = 30
30 + 5 (for the transition distance) = 35
TOD = 35 miles from MINGG
Descent rate = Groundspeed 2 + 0
= 420 2 = 210 + 0 = 2100
Descent rate = 2100 fpm
If icing conditions are anticipated this may affect your ability to maintain a 3:1 descent. For a typical cruise altitude, 2 miles
for each 1,000 feet of anti-ice use may need to be added to the TOD point.
Descents will normally be initiated no earlier than the calculated or FMS generated TOD point. When using the FMS, a
minimum VPA (vertical path angle) of 3.0 should be used. If necessary to initiate a descent prior to the TOD point, descend at
a minimal rate (1000-1,500 fpm is usually acceptable to ATC) until leveling at the intermediate altitude or reaching the TOD
point. Once the TOD point is reached, resume the descent at the calculated optimal descent rate.
Arrival descents should normally be planned to arrive at 10,000 ft., 30 miles from the airport at a speed of 250 KIAS.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-58
9 MAY 11
Arrival Planning.
The crew should maintain an awareness of the destination weather and traffic situation and consider the requirements for a
potential diversion. The approach briefing should be completed as soon as practical, preferably before arriving at the TOD
point, so the crew may give full attention to airplane control.
As soon as practical, the crew will accomplish the following:
ATIS
Notify Flight Attendant
Notify Operations
Set V2GA, VT
Set up and brief planned approach

Preselect approach frequencies on both RTUs
Set DA (Precision Approach), MDA (Non-Precision Approach) or FRA (Visual Approach) on both PFDs as
applicable
Select bearing pointers (if required)
Note
To ensure positive aircraft control, the PF will either ask the PM to monitor the autopilot or transfer
aircraft control while the approach is being briefed. Do not transfer flight director.
Program FMS
Select STAR and approach and their respective transitions. Make any sequencing amendments necessary on the
LEGS page.
Insert VREF as a speed constraint on the LEGS page abeam the runway or MAP, dependent on the approach flown
With PF concurrence, execute the FMS modification (if appropriate)
Note
It is mandatory that both pilots verify all FMS lateral and vertical program information against the
current published procedures.
As a general rule, any time the NAV data is selected to FMS (white needles) the respective radio should
be in AUT (autotune).
Caution
If a discrepancy exists between the FMS and the published procedure, the published procedure must
be used. If time permits, modify the FMS data to conform to the published information. RNAV/GPS
approaches have restrictions based upon waypoints and ATD (Along Track Distance). Please see
FOM 5.10.16 for more details.
Stabilized Approach.
Approaches must be stabilized by 1000 AFE in IMC and VMC. A go-around must be initiated if any of the following
parameters are not met below the above altitudes:
Transitioning to 1000 fpm descent rate by 1000 ft. AFE (IMC or VMC)
On proper flightpath (visual or electronic) with only small changes in pitch and heading required to maintain that path
At a speed no less than VREF and not greater than VREF + 10 knots allowing for transitory conditions, with engines
spooled up
In trim
In an approved landing configuration
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4.6.8
4a-59
9 MAY 11
Descent Check (Challenge & Response, No Flow).
General. This checklist is used to prepare the aircraft for arrival.

Trigger. As soon as practical below FL180, accomplish the Descent Check. When the checklist is complete, the PM will
state: Descent Check complete.
Descent (Expanded).
Pressurization
PM
Set
The PM confirms that the destination airport landing field elevation is set
Altimeters
Verify
Landing Data
__.__ SET
PM
SET
The PM will request landing data for the estimated landing weight via ACARS. If the ACARS is not available, reference
the weight and balance form, TLR, and speed cards. Once determined the PM will set V2GA and VT for the estimated
landing weight on the ARP, and verify they are set on the PFDs.
Approach Briefing
PF
Complete
Comprehensive planning and a thorough briefing are key ingredients to a safe and professional approach. If the planned
approach runway is serviced by a Precision Approach, the instrument approach must be set up and briefed regardless of
weather conditions. If the planned approach runway is not serviced by a Precision Approach and IMC will not be encountered
during the approach, the Visual Approach from the FMS Database will be utilized and briefed.
The PFs instrument approach briefing must include these items:
1.
Identify the approach to be flown including Jeppesen page number (i.e. ILS 14R ORD page 21-6)
2.
Effective date and chart date
3.
Approach facility frequency
4.
Final approach course
5.
The Crossing Altitude on a Precision Approach or the minimum altitude at the FAF, as well as other expected step down
fixes, on a Non-Precision Approach and how the fix will be identified
6.
Decision Altitude or Minimum Descent Altitude and Height Above Touchdown with appropriate minimums
Note
The CRJ-200 is a category D aircraft for determining approach minimums.
7.
Touch Down Zone Elevation
8.
Highest MSA and navigation aid defining it
9.
Approach timing if applicable
10. Published or Planned Visual Descent Point (VDP) if applicable

11. Missed Approach Point and Instructions
12. Approach and Runway Lighting
13. Runway Length and Planned Route of Taxi to the Gate
The PF's Visual Approach briefing must include these items:
1.
Final Approach Course (from FMS Database)
2.
Airport Elevation
3.
Traffic Pattern Altitude, Entry Point and Direction of Turns
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-60
9 MAY 11
Note
Standard Traffic Pattern is 1500' AFE and left turns.
4.
Missed Approach Plan
5.
Approach and Runway Lighting
6.
Runway Length and Planned Route of Taxi to the Gate
The PF Instrument Approach and Visual Approach briefings will include specific references to weather, runway conditions,
and/or conditions that affect the controllability of the aircraft, as well as any information that needs clarification in order to
ensure that both pilots completely understand all aspects of the impending procedure. The following is a partial list of items to
be considered:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Ceiling and visibility

Windshear conditions/Recovery procedures (airspeed additives if required)
Icing conditions (need to start APU)
Runway conditions
Crosswind conditions
Aircraft configurations (Engine Out, Flapless Landing, etc.)
Significant terrain or obstacles in the terminal area
Example Instrument Approach Briefing.

This will be the ILS Approach for 14R at O'Hare page 21-6, dated 18 Aug 2000. Localizer frequency is 109.75. Inbound
course 142. Cross SEXXY at 2384 on glideslope. SEXXY is at 7.5 NM on the IORD DME. Decision altitude is 867. HAT
is 200. A minimum of 1800 RVR is required. TDZE is 667. The MSA around the OR outer marker is 2600. The missed
approach instructions are climb to 1200, then climbing right turn to 4000 inbound via DPA VOR R-085 to DPA VOR and
hold. The runway is equipped with ALSF-II approach lighting and a PAPI located on the right side of the runway. The
runway length is 13,000 long and plan to exit left at Tango 7, then taxi via Tango 7, Tango, and Alpha 10 to the gate. There
are no special considerations. Any questions?
CAS
Verify
Checked
The PM checks the EICAS messages to ensure that all displayed messages are normal for the current operational
configuration of the aircraft. The PM responds by saying Verify Checked. The PF also makes a final scan of the EICAS
messages and advises the PM to clear the messages by stating Checked.
Descending Through 10,000 ft.

The Captain will state, 10,000 feet, Sterile Cockpit. Turn on the external lights and PED signs. Turning on the PED sign is
the Flight Attendants indication that sterile cockpit procedures apply.
APU.
Note
Refer to Chapter 8 - Cold Weather Operations for APU usage when anti-ice is required during the
approach and landing.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-61
9 MAY 11
Approach Navigation Setup.

The recommended method of switching to green NAV data from FMS is as follows:
Heading bug.................................................................................................................................................................... SYNC
Heading mode.................................................................................................................................................................. Select
RTU ............................................................................................................................................. Select appropriate frequency
NAV source ................................................................................................................... Green needle-Confirm correct course
FCP ..................................................................................................................................................... Select appropriate mode
Note
All radio navigation aids used for final approach guidance must be identified. If the NAV SOURCE
block on the PFD displays the identifier (i.e. DME), there is no need to aurally identify the navaid.
Approach
ILS
LOC
LDA3
BCRS
VOR1
VOR2
GPS OR RNAV
4, 5
PF
LOC
LOC
LOC
PM
LOC
LOC
LOC
FCP Selection
APPR
NAV
NAV
LOC
FMS
LOC
VOR
B/C
NAV
VOR
VOR
NAV
FMS
FMS
NAV
If a VOR approach is retrieved from the FMS database, lateral navigation using the FMS is permitted, provided the off-side
RTU is tuned to the appropriate station frequency (AUTotune is not selected) and the off-side bearing pointer is displayed on
the PFs PFD at all times on the approach.
2To be used when the VOR approach is not retrieved from the database and/or FMS navigation is not used. There is no
requirement to display the off-side bearing pointer in this configuration.
3
If LDA approach has a glideslope AND has a published DA (not MDA), pilots may use the APPR mode.
4The database for a GPS or RNAV approach has restrictions based upon waypoints and ATD (Along Track Distance). Please
see FOM 5.10.16 for more details.
5
RNP approaches prohibited.
4.6.9
Before Landing Check (Challenge & Response, PM Flow).
General. This flow and check is used to ensure the aircraft is configured for landing.
Trigger. The before landing flow will be accomplished when the aircraft is cleared for approach. When the PF calls Flaps
45, Before Landing Check, the PM will complete the Before Landing Check and state: Before Landing Check complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-62
9 MAY 11
Before Landing Flow (PM).
Flight Attendant .......................................................................................................................................... Advise

PM cycles the NO PED switch OFF then ON slowly to give two chimes
Passenger Signs .................................................................................................................................................ON
The PM confirms that the SEAT BELTS White Status message is displayed
Thrust Reversers............................................................................................................................................ ARM
Before Landing (Expanded).
Thrust Reversers
Verify
Down, 3 Green
The PM selects the LDG GEAR lever to the DN position when directed by the PF. During the checklist, both pilots verify
that 3 green DN gear symbols are displayed.
Flaps
Armed
The PM confirms that the L REV ARMED and R REV ARMED Green Advisory messages are displayed.
Landing Gear
PM
Ensure the Flaps are at 45 for a normal landing.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Verify
__ Indicating

Normal Checklists
4a-63
9 MAY 11
4.6.10 After Landing Check (Silent, FO Flow).

General. This flow and check is used to ensure the aircraft is ready to taxi to parking.
Trigger. After the aircraft has cleared the active runway the Captain will call for "After Landing Checklist." The First Officer
will accomplish the after landing flow followed by the after landing checklist. When the checklist is complete the First Officer
will state, "After Landing Checklist Complete."
After Landing Flow (FO).
Lights/NO PED.............................................................................................................................. .As Req'd / Off

APU ....................................................................................................................................... ..As Req'd
FLAPS ...........................................................................................................................................Up
Transponder/Radar ........................................................................................................................... ..As Req'd / Off
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4a-64
9 MAY 11

Normal Checklists
After Landing (Expanded).

Lights/NO PED
AS REQ'D/OFF
LANDING LTS ................................................................................................................................................................. OFF

STROBES .......................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
RECOG/TAXI LTS .............................................................................................................................................. As Required
NO PED ............................................................................................................................................................................ OFF
APU
AS REQ'D
Start the APU, if required

If external AC power is available at the gate, the APU need not be started unless bleed air for ECS is required.
FLAPS
It may be necessary to limit flap retraction to 20 if the approach was made in icing conditions, or if the runway was
covered with slush or snow.
Transponder/Radars
UP
AS REQ'D/OFF
The FO will keep the transponder to ON if the airport requires the use of the transponder for ground operations
The FO will select the Radars to OFF
Single Engine Taxi in After Landing or Return to the Gate (FO)

The First Officer will complete the After Landing Flow and Checklist. The First Officer will notify the Captain when the
engines have been at or near idle for 2 minutes. Unless conditions require two engine taxi, the Captain will instruct the First
Officer to shutdown the left engine. The First Officer will select the AC electrics synoptic page and ensure GEN 2 is supplying
electrical power.
Operate engines at idle for 2 minutes prior to shutdown

Select GEN 1 OFF
4.6.11 Shutdown Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow).

General. This flow and check is used to shutdown and secure the aircraft at the gate for passenger deplaning. This is a flowpatterned Challenge and Response checklist with one FFD item. If the APU is not running, the crew will wait for external AC
power to be plugged in before shutting down the right engine.
Trigger. After the aircraft is parked at the gate.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-65
9 MAY 11
Shutdown Flow (C & FO).
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
PARKING BRAKE ............................................ SET/Check

Electrics............................................................................ Set
Fuel Check Valve............................................. Check (FFD)
Thrust Levers .......................................................SHUTOFF
PASSENGER SIGNS .................................................... OFF
HYDRAULIC Pump 3A & 3B ...................................... OFF
BEACON ....................................................................... OFF
N/W STRG..................................................................... OFF
Fuel Pumps .................................................................... OFF

ANTI-ICE...................................................................... OFF
WINDSHIELD HEAT .......................................... As Reqd
TRANSPONDER .......................................................... OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-66
9 MAY 11
Shutdown (Expanded).
PARKING BRAKE
SET/Checked
Verify PARKING BRAKE ON Green Advisory message is displayed

Electrics
[C]
[C]
SET
Ensure AC power is supplied from External Power or the APU by selecting the AC Synoptic Page
Select GEN 1 and GEN 2 switches OFF
Fuel Pumps
[FO]
OFF
L & R BOOST PUMP switchlights ...........................................................................................................................Select out

ANTI-ICE
[FO]
OFF
LH & RH PROBES switches............................................................................................................................................. OFF

WING ANTI-ICE switch ................................................................................................................................................... OFF
LH & RH COWL ANTI-ICE switches.............................................................................................................................. OFF
Windshield Heat
[FO]
As Reqd
If the OAT is in excess of 25C, select the LH and RH WSHLD HEAT switches to OFF
TRANSPONDER
[FO]
Fuel Check Valve
[C]
OFF
Checked
On the first flight of the day, perform the fuel check valve verification after shutting down the left engine
Left Engine ....................................................................................................................................................................SHUTOFF

Both fuel pumps....................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
L FUEL LO PRESS
Thrust Levers
[C]
SHUTOFF
The engines must be operated at or near IDLE for a minimum of 2 minutes prior to shutdown to dissipate heat. Taxi time is
usually sufficient to satisfy this requirement.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-67
9 MAY 11
Passenger Signs
[C]
OFF
Hydraulic Pump 3A and 3B
[C]
OFF
Turn off hydraulic pump 3A and 3B after the chocks are inserted to reduce pump wear
BEACON
[C]
OFF
Nosewheel Steering
[C]
OFF
4.6.12 Securing Check (Silent, No Flow).

General. This checklist is used to secure the aircraft during an extended period prior to the next flight, this includes
overnights. This is a Silent checklist that can be done by either pilot.
Trigger. When all passengers are off the aircraft and electrical power is no longer required.
Securing
Chocks/brakes ........................................................................................................................................................................ In/set
Thrust Reversers ....................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Stby Attitude Indicator................................................................................................................................. Caged (If Applicable)
Emergency Lights ..................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Windshield Heat........................................................................................................................................................................ Off
Cargo Fan .................................................................................................................................................................................. Off
Packs ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Bleeds........................................................................................................................................................................................ Off
Hydraulic/oxygen Quantity............................................................................................................................................... Checked
Check the level of all three hydraulic systems. This level should be in the range of 45% to 85%
If outside of this range, contact maintenance for specific pressure based upon temperature.
Check the oxygen level to ensure adequate level. (Ref 4.6.2)
Hydraulic Pumps....................................................................................................................................................................... Off
External Lights (Except Nav) ................................................................................................................................................... Off
Apu Generator........................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Apu Start/stop ........................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Apu Pwr/fuel ............................................................................................................................................................................. Off
Dc Service ................................................................................................................................................................................. Off
Battery Master........................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Dome Light ............................................................................................................................................................................... Off
External Power Switchlight ...................................................................................................................................................... Off
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4a-68
9 MAY 11
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Table of Contents
4b-i
9 MAY 11

4.1
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 4b-1
4.2
Checklists .............................................................................................................................................
4.2.1
Standardized Abbreviations ..............................................................................................................
4.2.2
Checklist Usage ................................................................................................................................
4.2.3
First Flight of the Day (FFD) .............................................................................................................
4.2.4
Delayed Start (D). .............................................................................................................................
4b-1
4b-1
4b-1
4b-2
4b-2
4.3
Types of Checklists .............................................................................................................................
4.3.1
Silent Checklist .................................................................................................................................
4.3.2
Challenge and Response Checklist ..................................................................................................
4.3.3
Flow ..................................................................................................................................................
4b-2
4b-2
4b-2
4b-2
4.4
Crew Communication .......................................................................................................................... 4b-3
4.4.1
Flight Mode Annunciation ................................................................................................................. 4b-3
4.5
Standards.............................................................................................................................................. 4b-3
4.5.1
Standard Flight Routine .................................................................................................................... 4b-3
4.5.2
Standard Callouts ............................................................................................................................. 4b-7
4.6
Normal Checklists................................................................................................................................ 4b-9
4.6.1
Safety & Power On Check (Silent, No Flow)..................................................................................... 4b-9
4.6.2
Acceptance Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow) ........................................................... 4b-16
4.6.3
Before Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response).................................................................. 4b-27
4.6.4
After Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow) .............................................. 4b-37
4.6.5
Taxi Check (Challenge & Response).............................................................................................. 4b-42
4.6.6
Before Takeoff Check (Challenge & Response, FO Flow) ............................................................. 4b-42
4.6.7
After Takeoff Check (Silent, PM Flow)............................................................................................ 4b-46
4.6.8
Descent Check (Challenge & Response, No Flow) ........................................................................ 4b-51
4.6.9
Before Landing Check (Challenge & Response, PM Flow) ............................................................ 4b-53
4.6.10 After Landing Check (Silent, FO Flow) ........................................................................................... 4b-55
4.6.11 Shutdown Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow) .............................................................. 4b-56
4.6.12 Securing Check (Silent, No Flow) ................................................................................................... 4b-58
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Table of Contents
4b-ii
9 MAY 11
PSA Airlines, Inc.

PSA CRJ-701
NORMAL CHECKLIST
Indented items are for first flight of the day only.
SAFETY AND POWER ON
BEFORE START
Aircraft Status ............................................................... Checked

Circuit Breakers ............................................................ Checked
Nosewheel Steering................................................................Off
Hydraulic Pumps.................................................................... Off
Probes.....................................................................................Off
Landing Gear Lever ........................................................... Down
Flight Spoiler Lever ................................................................... 0
Flaps Lever ................................................ Set to actual position
Radars ....................................................................................Off
ADG Manual Release ......................................................Stowed
Battery Master.........................................................................On
APU/AC Electrics ........................................... As req'd/Establish
AHRS (both)........................................................................ MAG
Emergency Equipment.................................................. Checked
When flight controls are confirmed clear:
Hydraulic Pump 3A .................................................................On
Logbook/Req'd Docs ..................Verify ......................... Onboard

Crew O2 & Masks ......................Verify ............... Checked/__psi
Parking Brake............................... [C] .................... Set/Checked
Fuel Qty......................................Verify ............... __Req'd,__OB
Altimeters ...................................Verify ................... _._Set/Chkd
Departure Briefing ....................... [PF] .........................Complete
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------(D) CAS ......................................Verify ......................... Checked
ACCEPTANCE
TAXI
Logbook/Forms/Manuals ........... Verify......................... Checked

Preflight Inspection .................... Verify........................ Complete
Gear & ADG Pins..........................[C]..............................Stowed
Audio Warning Panel........... [FO] .......................... Checked
Electrics ....................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Fire Test ............................... [C] .......................... Complete
Lights ................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Fuel Panel.................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Bleeds .......................................... [C] .................................... Set
APU.............................................. [C] ............................ As req'd
Start Panel ............................ [C] ........................... Checked
Hydraulics ............................. [C] ........................... Checked
ELT ...................................... [C] .....................ARM/RESET
Pressurization ....................... [C] ........................... Checked
Air Conditioning............................ [C] ........................... Checked
Ice Detector/ADS Test .......... [C] .......................... Complete
Emergency Lights ........................ [C] ..................................ARM
Standby Compass ................ [C] ........................... Checked
Clocks ........................................ Verify......................... Checked
Side Control Panels ............ Verify......................... Checked
CVR Test .............................. [C] .......................... Complete
Displays & Stby Instruments ...... Verify......................... Checked
Anti-Skid Test ....................... [C] .......................... Complete
MLG Overheat Test.............. [C] .......................... Complete
Upper Pedestal..................... [C] ........................... Checked
Thrust Lever Quadrant................. [C] ........................... Checked
TCAS Test ............................ [C] .......................... Complete
RTUs/TCAS/ACPs ...................... [C] ........................... Checked
Trims .................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Lower Pedestal ............................ [C] ........................... Checked
Stall Test............................... [C] .......................... Complete
Flaps...........................................Verify ............ __Set/Indicating

Takeoff Data...............................Verify ..................................Set
Trims ..........................................Verify ...... Green, Centered _._
SECURING
Chocks/Brakes................................................................... In/Set
Thrust Reversers ....................................................................Off
Emergency Lights ...................................................................Off
Windshield Heat......................................................................Off
Cargo Fan ...............................................................................Off
Hydraulic/Oxygen Quantity ........................................... Checked
Hydraulic Pumps.....................................................................Off
External Lights (Except NAV) .................................................Off
APU Start/Stop........................................................................Off
APU Pwr/Fuel .........................................................................Off
DC Service..............................................................................Off
Battery Master.........................................................................Off
Dome Light..............................................................................Off
External Power Switchlight .....................................................Off
AFTER START
Anti-ice ........................................[FO] ..........................As Reqd
Rudder.......................................... [C] ........................... Checked
Nosewheel Steering ..................... [C] ...............................Armed
Thrust Reversers.........................[FO] ..............................Armed
(D) CAS ......................................Verify ......................... Checked
BEFORE TAKEOFF
T/O Config ..................................Verify ......................... Checked
T/O Fuel Qty/Balance.................Verify ...... __ Req, __ OB/Chkd
Brake Temp.................................[FO] .......................... Checked
Fuel X-Flow .................................[FO] .......................... MAN/Off
Flight Controls .............................[FO] .......................... Checked
T/O Briefing ................................. [PF] ...........Rwy___/Complete
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ignition/Anti-ice............................[FO] ..........................As Reqd
Runway Heading ........................Verify ......................... Checked
AFTER TAKEOFF
Gear/Flaps...............................................................................Up
Fuel X-Flow ..........................................................................Auto
Bleeds/APU ............................................................ Set/As Reqd
Thrust .....................................................................................Set
Thrust Reversers.................................................................... Off
DESCENT
Pressurization..............................[PM] ...................................Set
Altimeters ...................................Verify ............................_._ Set
Landing Data ...............................[PM] ...................................Set
Approach Briefing........................ [PF] .........................Complete
BEFORE LANDING
Thrust Reversers.........................[PM] ..............................Armed
Landing Gear..............................Verify ............... Down, 3 Green
Flaps...........................................Verify ............... __ , Indicating
AFTER LANDING
Lights/NO PED ........................................................ As Req'd/Off
APU ...............................................................................As Req'd
FLAPS .....................................................................................Up
Transponder/Radar .................................................As Reqd/Off
SHUTDOWN
Parking Brake............................... [C] .....................Set/Checked
Electrics........................................ [C] ....................................Set
Fuel Pumps .................................[FO] ................................... Off
Anti-ice ........................................[FO] ................................... Off
Windshield Heat ..........................[FO] ..........................As Reqd
Transponder ................................[FO] ................................... Off
Thrust Levers ............................... [C] ..............................Shutoff
Passenger Signs .......................... [C] .................................... Off
Hydraulic Pump 3A....................... [C] .................................... Off
Lights............................................ [C] .................................... Off
Nosewheel Steering ..................... [C] .................................... Off

CCN: 7910004
REVISION 11
CRJ-701 SUPPLEMENTAL
CHECKLIST
Engine Start (Battery with External Air)

Note

prior to accomplishing this procedure.
Complete the After Start Check after
accomplishing this procedure.
Engine Start (External Air)

Note
Complete the Before Start Check prior to
accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After
L BOOST PUMP............................................................... ON
BLEED VALVES............................................................... ON
External air supply ................................................ Connected
CONT IGNITION .............................................................. ON
Note
Coordinate air supply with ground crew just prior
to engine start and to shut off external air source
during a NO STARTER CUTOUT.
Note
If the NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution
message appears, pressing the applicable ENG
STOP switchlight should be all that is required to
close the start valve and stop the airflow to the air
turbine starter (ATS). On the ground, should the
ENG STOP action not resolve the problem, you
must shutdown the engine and remove the external
air source.
BLEED VALVES........................................................... CLSD

R ENG ........................................................................ START
Right Thrust Lever....................................... Advance to IDLE

Note
If the ENG STOP switchlight does not clear a NO
STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message, you
must shut down the enigne and remove external air
pressure.
Caution
During an engine start using external air,
coordination with ground personnel will be
required to shut off the external air source during a
NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message
condition.
L ENG......................................................................... START
L ENG................................................................. As Required
After Start is complete:
BLEED VALVES........................................................... AUTO
Engine Start (Cross-Bleed)
Caution
Before attempting a cross-bleed start, do not
exceed 75% N1 for 2 minutes on operating engine
after start, or until all operating indications are in
the normal range, whichever is longer.
Note
prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete
the After Start Check after accomplishing this
procedure.
HYDRAULIC Pumps ....................................................All ON

BLEED VALVES...........................................................AUTO
ECS page .................................................... Select & Monitor
Thrust Lever (operating engine) ...............................Advance
To achieve a minimum 42 psi (maximum 80% N2)
ENG (L or R) .............................................................. START

Applicable Thrust Lever............................... Advance to IDLE
After Start is Complete
Thrust Levers ................................................................. IDLE
HYDRAULIC Pumps ............................................. AUTO/ON
Left Thrust Lever .........................................Advance to IDLE

External air supply .................................................... Remove
Prior to First Flight of the Day
CONT IGNITION ........................................................OFF
L& R BOOST PUMPs....................................................... ON
HYDRAULIC Pump 2B ..................................................... ON
R ENG ........................................................ Cross-bleed start
Unpressurized Takeoff or Landing

The procedures outlined below are recommended when:
When performing a zero-engine bleed takeoff or landing
Before Takeoff
EMER DEPRESS ............................................................. ON

PRESS CONT ..............................................................AUTO
RAM AIR VALVE ..........................................................OPEN
After Takeoff
Note
If an engine failure occurs, delay turning on the
bleeds until after obstacle clearance is assured.
At a safe altitude, preferably between 1,000' and 3,000' AFE:

AIR CONDITIONING PACKs ........................................... ON
RAM AIR VALVE ........................................................CLOSE
EMER DEPRESS ............................................................OFF
Landing
RAM AIR valve .............................................................OPEN
LDG ELEV ........ Set to 3,000 ft. above landing field elevation
Note

If you leave the aircraft while connected to External AC Power
and are not completing the Securing Checklist the following
Chocks/Brakes ............................................................. In/Set
CAPT, FO, PEDESTAL LIGHTING .................................OFF
Stby Attitude Indicator .......................... Caged (If Applicable)
EMER LTS ......................................................................OFF
DOME LIGHT ..................................................................OFF
DC SERVICE...................................................................OFF
BATTERY MASTER ........................................................OFF
If you arrive at the aircraft and the battery master is off and the
flight deck is dark, perform the Safety and Power On Checklist
then the Acceptance Checklist. Ensure that the flight deck
lighting is set to appropriate levels.
REVISION 11

CCN: 7910004

Introduction
4b-1
9 MAY 11

4.1
Introduction
These Normal Procedures have been developed to provide guidance for operating the Bombardier CRJ in a standardized
manner. These procedures have been compiled from various sources and consist of normal checklists, standard profiles and
standard callouts.
These Normal Procedures comply with the safety of flight issues dictated by the AFM. For this reason, compliance with the
procedures contained in this chapter is compulsory unless the situation requires modification for safety factors.
The Bombardier CRJ uses the dark cockpit philosophy. This is defined as normal flight with no EICAS messages displayed
or switchlights illuminated. Normal flight is defined as an aircraft in smooth air, utilizing normal bleed extraction, without
malfunction and clear of icing.
4.2
Checklists
4.2.1
Standardized Abbreviations.
The following abbreviations and symbols are used to identify which crew member is responsible for responding to a checklist
challenge.
C- - - FO - - VERIFY
PF - - PM - - -
4.2.2
- - - - - Captain
- - First Officer
- - - Both Pilots
- - - Pilot Flying
Pilot Monitoring
Checklist Usage.
All checklists performed are initiated at the command of the Captain on the ground and by the Pilot Flying (PF) in flight. The
Captain, however, still retains final authority for all actions directed or performed.
No checklist will be performed while taxiing across runways or if complex taxi instructions are issued.
When a checklist is completed, the pilot reading the checklist will state the name of the check and the word complete, i.e.,
Before Takeoff Check, Complete.
Some checklists contain a line. If the checklist contains a line, the first section is considered down to the line, and the second
section is below the line.
When the appropriate crewmember reads the checklist to the line, he will state, Down to the line. Crewmembers should not
call to the line when calling for a checklist, as it will always be read to the line until the appropriate crewmember calls for
Below the line.
At no time should a challenge be recited from memory. If a pilot incorrectly responds to a challenge, the pilot reading the
checklist will state the proper response and then wait for the corrected response before proceeding.
Example: (Challenge and Response)
FO
CFO
C-
- - - - - - - - Passenger Signs
- Set (Proper response is ON)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
When AS REQD is the checklist response, the responding pilot will state the actual position/condition of the item.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Types of Checklists
4b-2
9 MAY 11
4.2.3
First Flight of the Day (FFD).
Some aircraft systems require operational verification prior to the first flight of the day (FFD). These checklist items are
indented on the Acceptance Check, After Start Check, and Shutdown Check and must be completed and read on the FFD only.
For subsequent flights on the same day, these items may be omitted.
4.2.4
Delayed Start (D).
When the Captain is ready to start the left/right engine after utilizing single engine taxi, delayed start procedures will be used.
The items on the Before Start and After Start Checklists that need to be read aloud are marked with a (D).
4.3
Types of Checklists
There are two types of checklists: Silent Checklists, and Challenge and Response Checklists.
4.3.1
Silent Checklist.
Silent Checklists may be preceded by a flow, and the items will be verified complete using the checklist after the flow is done.
In the absence of a flow, the designated crewmember will read the checklist item and carry out the appropriate action. A Silent
Checklist is indicated by the absence of a response designator. When a pilot completes a silent checklist, he will state aloud,
(Checklist Title) Check Complete.
The following checklists are Silent:
Safety & Power On Check

After Takeoff Check (PM flow)
After Landing Check (FO flow)
Securing Check
4.3.2
Challenge and Response Checklist.
Challenge and Response Checklists may be preceded by a flow that will contain some of the checklist items. These checklists
are read aloud, and the applicable pilot shall respond to the challenge after having verified or changing the existing
configuration. Both pilots shall cross-check, whenever feasible, the validity of the response. The pilot reading the checklist
shall wait for the response before proceeding with the next item. If the actual configuration is not in accordance with the
checklist requirement, corrective action shall be initiated.
The following checklists are Challenge and Response:
Acceptance Check (C and FO flow)

Before Start Check (C flow)
After Start Check (C and FO flow)
Taxi Check
Before Takeoff Check (FO flow)
Descent Check
Before Landing Check (PM flow)
Shutdown Check (C and FO flow)
4.3.3
Flow.
Flow patterns are established to configure aircraft systems or accomplish required tasks in an organized manner without
reference to a checklist. There are some flow items that are not directly backed up with a checklist reference. These items
show what is accomplished / checked in the flow box. The items that are backed up with a checklist reference show what is
accomplished / checked in the expanded section.
When accomplishing flows, pilots are expected to complete all items in order from memory. Applicable checklist (except
Safety & Power On and Securing) are initiated after the flow pattern is completed.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Crew Communication
4.4
Crew Communication
4.4.1
Flight Mode Annunciation.
4b-3
9 MAY 11
Reference to the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) as well as a thorough understanding of all armed and engagement
indications is essential to the successful operation of the autoflight system.
It is imperative to visually confirm all FMA changes. Below 3,000 ft. AGL callouts of all FMA changes are required. The
pilot making the FCP selection will make the FMA callout.
4.5
Standards
4.5.1
Standard Flight Routine.
General. This shows the normal procedures for airport surface operations.
Captain
First Officer
Preflight
45 minutes prior to departure obtain Flight Release and weather package

Report to aircraft at least 35 minutes prior to scheduled departure time
The first pilot on the flight deck will determine the aircraft maintenance status prior to actuating switches and controls
Accomplish Crew Briefing when originating trip, or a crew
change
Participate in Crew Briefing
If electrical power is not already on, read and do Safety & Power On Checklist
Accomplish Captains Acceptance Flow
Accomplish First Officers Exterior Preflight

Record current ATIS information
Accomplish First Officers Acceptance Flow
Acceptance Checklist
Accomplish Acceptance Checklist
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4b-4
9 MAY 11
Captain
First Officer
Before Start
At least 25 minutes prior to departure when fueling is complete:

Verify actual fuel load is within limits of RAMP fuel
Check ACARS. Insert flight number, departure and

destination airport identifiers and employee numbers
Obtain ATC clearance. If done verbally, both pilots will listen to clearance
Verify the proper altitude and transponder code is set
Set the proper altitude in altitude alerter and verify on the

FMA
Accomplish Captain's Before Start Flow (to the line)
Accomplish First Officer's Before Start Flow (to the line)
Ensure that the FMS and ACARS initialization is complete. Ensure that the ATIS, Clearance, FMS, RTUs, and PFDs are set
up as prescribed in the Departure Setup section of this chapter.

Both pilots will review the expected taxi route, hot spots, any airport contruction, and applicable NOTAMS for taxiway
closures. Both pilots will confirm all taxi instructions, especially hold short clearances. When crossing an active runway,
each pilot shall confirm the runway is clear and there is a clearnace to cross. Vigilance shall be used when the first officer
is performing Heads Down tasks such as checlist and FMS inputs.
Cleared SID or departure runway
information, etc.)
Approximately 20 minutes prior to departure: Before Start

Checklist
Accomplish Before Start Checklist to the line Down to the

line
Initiated by Captain approximately 10 minutes prior to departure:

Accomplish Welcome Aboard announcement
Just prior to pushback - or engine start at gate - after agent provides count:
Ensure Cabin Ready Notification is received from flight
attendant and relay short taxi, or other pertinent information
Obtain pushback clearance, if required
Pushback/Engine Start
Normal starting procedure is to start Engine 2 and single engine taxi out.
When issued pushback clearance or cleared to start engine(s):
Accomplish Before Start Flow (below the line)
Below the line
Accomplish Before Start Checklist below the line
If the Captain performs the engine start the aircraft must be stopped with the parking brake set. If the Captain elects to have
the engine started while the aircraft is in motion, the First Officer must perform the engine start.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4b-5
9 MAY 11
Captain
First Officer
After Start
After engine(s) are started.

When ground equipment is clear and acknowledgment of the ground crew signal:
After Start Checklist
Accomplish After Start Checklist

When the delayed sengine start is accomplished:

Accomplish the Delayed Engine Start Flow

Accomplish the Before Start Checklist, (D) items
Start the engine
Accomplish the Delayed Engine After Start Flow
Accomplish the After Start Checklist, (D) items
Taxi
Upon initial parking brake release for taxi: Parking Brake

Released. Sterile Cockpit.
Once Captain is able to monitor ATC communications,

request Taxi Clearance

instructions

short instructions
Turn taxi light on when aircraft is moving

Crosscheck HSI, airport diagram, and airport signage to confirm aircraft position while taxiing.
Approaching the entrance to an active runway, ensure compliance with hold short or crossing clearance before continuing
with non-monitoring tasks. Visually scan runway and approach areas.
When clear of ramp congestion and both engines are running:
(State departure airport) Runway___, Flaps___, Taxi
Check
Accomplish Taxi Checklist
Before Takeoff
When cabin secure notification is received and when number approximately 1 or 2 for the departure runway:
Before Takeoff Checklist
Accomplish Before Takeoff Flow and checklist to the line

Down to the line
PF accomplish Takeoff Briefing:

The pilot flying will point to the MFD (runway displayed) and callout the T/O runway, initial heading, initial attitude,
first fix, Engine Failure Procedure and special considerations
Accomplish Before Takeoff Checklist to the line
Cleared onto the active runway:
Verbally confirm ATC clearance onto active runway with other crewmembers and confirm proper runway selection using
airport signs and markings and the airport diagram.
Visually scan runway and approach areas.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4b-6
9 MAY 11
Captain
First Officer
Turn on wing, logo, landing and taxi lights

Below the line
Complete Before Takeoff Checklist
When cleared for takeoff:
Turn on all remaining exterior lights
Taxi In
When clear of active runway:
instructions
Request taxi clearance

short instructions
Crosscheck HSI, airport diagram, and airport signs to confirm aircraft position while taxiing.
When approaching the entrance to an active runway, ensure compliance with hold short or crossing clearance before
continuing with non-monitoring tasks. Visually scan runway and approach areas.
When clear of landing runway and compliance with any runway hold short clearances can be assured.
After Landing Checklist
Accomplish After Landing Flow
Turn taxi light on when the aircraft is moving
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4.5.2
4b-7
30 AUG 10
Standard Callouts.
General. The following are sample callouts and are not all-inclusive.
Conditions
Brake Release
Thrust Set
At 80 knots
At V1-5
At VR
Positive Climb
Takeoff
Select Gear Up
V2 + 10 to 15
400 ft. AFE
Above 600 ft. AFE
Flaps Selection
Transition Altitude/Level
1,000 ft. to Level-Off
Climb & Descent
New Altitude
Assignment
Significant
Deviation from
Briefed Profile
PF selecting Speed mode to climb or

descend below 3,000 ft. AFE
PF or PM sets new altitude and both pilots
point to it
IAS > Bug (+/-) 5
Pilot Flying
Set Thrust
-
Pilot Monitoring
Thrust Set
80 knots
Checks
-
V1
Rotate
Positive Rate
Gear Up
Speed Mode
Gear Up
Climb
Heading, or FMS
Heading Mode, or
Nav Mode
Autopilot On
Flaps 8
Flaps Up
xx.xx set
Checks
Autopilot On
Flaps 8
Flaps Up
xx.xx set
9,000 for 10,000
280 for 290
Climb, or Descent
15,000
310
15,000
310
Airspeed
Correcting
VSI > 1,000/min
below 1,000 AFE
1 dot GS or LOC
Sink Rate
Correcting
Correcting
Localizer
Glideslope
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Standards
4b-8
30 AUG 10
Conditions
Localizer Alive/Captured
Glide Slope Alive/Captured
Pilot Flying
Checks
Checks
Pilot Monitoring
Localizer Alive,
Localizer Captured
Glideslope Alive,
Checks
Glideslope Captured
Checks
1,000 ft. AFE
1,000 feet
Checks
IFR Approach
Callouts
500 ft. AFE

(not required for non-precision
approaches)
100 ft.
above minimums
DA (Runway environment in sight)
Checks
Checks
Landing
MAP (Runway environment NOT in

sight)
MDA
500 feet,
Bug +/- ___,
Sink ___
100 above
Go Around
Checks,
Set Missed
Approach Altitude
Approach Lights in Sight
Minimums, Runway in
sight
Missed Approach Point,
No contact
ALTS
(or MDA without Flight
Director)
Lights in sight
Continuing
Runway in Sight
On Landing or
Rejected Takeoff
At 90 knots &
at 60 knots
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Runway in sight
Landing
-
90 knots
60 knots

Normal Checklists
4.6
Normal Checklists
4.6.1
Safety & Power On Check (Silent, No Flow).
4b-9
9 MAY 11
General. This checklist safely configures the aircraft for application of electrical power and / or air conditioning. This is a
read and do checklist. Each item is read and accomplished silently.
Safety & Power On (Expanded).
Aircraft Status
Checked
Verify maintenance, flap, and APU exhaust area status prior to applying power to the aircraft
Circuit Breakers (Panels 1-2)
Checked
Circuit breakers should be either in (closed) or out (open) and collared
Note
PSAs philosophy and policy with respect to the resetting of tripped circuit breakers (In flight/On
ground) is given in Chapter 11 of the FOM.
Nosewheel Steering
OFF
Hydraulic Pumps
OFF
Probes
OFF
Landing Gear Lever
Down
Flight Spoiler Lever
Slats/Flaps Lever
Set to Actual Position
Lever and slat/flap surface positions should agree. If not, reposition slat/flap lever to actual surface position.
Radars
OFF
Verify that both control panels are selected OFF
ADG Manual Release

Emer Flap
Stowed
NORMAL
Battery Master
ON
With BATTERY MASTER selected ON, verify on the DC ELECTRICAL synoptic page that both batteries indicate
22 volts DC minimum (CHARGER messages may be displayed)
Note
EICAS display cooling is not available when the battery bus is powered and normal AC power is not
available. DO NOT remain on battery power for more than 5 minutes.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4b-10
30 AUG 10
APU/AC Electrics

Normal Checklists
AS REQD/Establish
AC power will be obtained from a jetway or ground power unit (GPU). If ground power is not available, start the APU.
Prior to starting the APU on the FFD, carry out the APU portion of the Fire Detection/Firex Monitor test.
Note
To prevent an AFT CARGO DET nuisance Amber Caution message, wait at least 30 seconds after
selecting the BATTERY MASTER ON before starting this test.
TEST switch ..................................................................................................................................Press for 2 seconds and release
Both master warnings flash for the duration of the test

FWD & AFT CARGO and BOTTLE ARMED PUSH TO DISCH switchlights illuminated
FIRE SYS OK
After approximately 30 seconds, the test will be complete, and all fire detection indications are removed. Any malfunctions
will be shown in the form of Caution or Status messages.
APU Starting Sequence.
Note
The APU PWR/FUEL switchlight must be selected OFF between each APU start. The APU PWR/
FUEL switchlight should be firmly pressed only once. If pressed twice, an immediate reset of the
starting process and shutdown (if running) will occur.
If starting the APU in flight, press the APU PWR/FUEL switch light then press the APU START/
STOP switch light. The APU inlet door position will NOT be displayed until the APU START/STOP
switch light is pressed. All bleed switching is normally automatic.
APU PWR/FUEL switch light...............................................................................................................................................Select
Note the following is displayed on the status page:
APU gauges
APU DOOR OPEN message (ground only)
APU SOV OPEN

APU IN BITE (for approximately 5 seconds)
APU START/STOP switch light.......................................................................................................................................Select in

White START portion of the switchlight illuminates

APU DOOR OPEN
APU start and acceleration
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-11
30 AUG 10
And the following White Status message:
APU START
Prior to 60% rpm, START light extinguishes, and APU START White Status message is removed.
At 99% rpm + 2 seconds, AVAIL indication in the APU START/STOP Green switchlight illuminates.
Note
The green AVAIL light indicates that the APU is available for electrical loading.
With the APU GEN in AUTO, the BLEED VALVES in AUTO, and the PACKs on, the APU generator
will automatically take over the buses, and the APU bleed will feed both PACKs.
Select the AC ELECTRICAL synoptic page to verify that voltage, frequency, and load indications are normal and all AC buses
are powered.
Select the DC ELECTRICAL synoptic page to verify that TRU voltage and load indications are normal and all DC buses are
powered.
Establishing Air Conditioning (APU bleed air).
BLEED VALVES switch...................................................................................................................................... Confirm AUTO
L & R PACK switchlights ........................................................................................................................................... Confirm IN
RECIRC FAN .............................................................................................................................................................Confirm ON
Note the following White Status messages:
APU LCV OPEN

ISOL OPEN
L ENG BLEED CLSD
R ENG BLEED CLSD
AHRS (Both)
MAG
AHRS initialization takes 30 to 70 seconds. Alignment in DG mode can take up to 11 minutes.

Emergency Equipment
Checked
Escape rope
Escape hatch
Visually check that the escape hatch is closed and locked (two green witness marks are correctly aligned).
Flashlights (2)
Crash Axe
Halon 1211 portable fire extinguisher
Check indicator is in green band
Smoke hood (PBE)

Check condition of seal
Life preservers (3)

Oxygen masks/Smoke goggles (3)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-12
30 AUG 10
WARNING
Ensure flight control areas are clear before turning ON hydraulic system 3 ACMP.
Hydraulic Pump 3A
ON
Note
When ambient temperatures are greater than 40C (104F), avoid prolonged ground operations with
any hydraulic system(s) operating.
Note
The Safety and Power On checklist must be complete prior to the external walkaround.
The external walkaround is primarily a visual check to ensure that the overall condition of the airplane and its visible
components and equipment are safe for flight.
Proximate area is free of potential FOD items

Passenger walkway and boarding stairs are safe and clear
Flight control surfaces are unobstructed and free from ice, frost, or snow
All vents, ports, intakes, and exhausts are unobstructed
Tire condition and pressure are acceptable
Note
All tires should be inspected for evidence of bulges, cuts, bruises, embedded foreign objects,
underinflation, excessive wear, or visible cord. The Captain will contact Maintenance Control and
have the tire inspected when any doubt exists as to its serviceability.
All covers, plugs, picket/mooring lines are removed

Pay particular attention to any evidence of fluid leaks from components, drains, panels, and airplane skin
Condition of skin (visible damage) on radome section, fuselage, wings, nacelles, pylons, and empennage
All access panels and doors not actually involved in maintenance are secured
Pitot static probes for evidence of freezing, severe discoloration, condition, and security
The word CHECK is used throughout this walkaround procedure to describe a visual examination that will detect obvious
unsatisfactory condition/discrepancies.
Start at the top of the boarding stairs, proceed in the direction indicated in the external walkaround sequence illustration, and
terminate at the bottom of the boarding stairs.
During cold weather operations, the flight crew must ensure that the fuselage, wings and tail surfaces are free from ice, snow or
frost.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-13
30 AUG 10
Note
Refer to Chapter 8 - Cold Weather Operations for cold weather external walk around requirements.
Left Forward Fuselage.
(1) Passenger door emergency light......................................................................................................................................Check
(2) Alternate static port .......................................................................................................................................................... Clear
(3) AOA vane........................................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Oxygen blowout plug ....................................................................................................................................................... Intact
(5) Standby pitot probe .........................................................................................................................................................Check
(6) Ice detector probe ............................................................................................................................................................. Clear
(7) Pitot static probe ..............................................................................................................................................................Check
(8) Windshields, Windows....................................................................................................................................................Check
(9) Wipers (2)........................................................................................................................................................................Check
Nosewheel and Gear.
(1) Wheel chocks .............................................................................................................................................................. Installed
(2) Nose landing light ...........................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Nosewheel scissors................................................................................................................................................ As Required
(5) Tires.................................................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
Refer to note on page 4b-12 concerning tire wear limits.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-14
30 AUG 10
(6) Nose gear pin ............................................................................................................................................................. Removed

(7) ADG safety pin .......................................................................................................................................................... Removed
(8) Bay maintenance light........................................................................................................................................................ OFF
Right Forward Fuselage.
(1) External AC power service door........................................................................................................................... As Required
(2) Pitot Static Probe............................................................................................................................................................. Check
(3) Ice detector probe............................................................................................................................................................ Check
(4) TAT probe.........................................................................................................................................................................Clear
(5) AOA vane ....................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(6) Alternate static port...........................................................................................................................................................Clear
(7) Galley service door and emergency light........................................................................................................................ Check
(8) Antennae ......................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(9) Beacon light .................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(10) Wing inspection lights .................................................................................................................................................. Check
(11) Landing/taxi lights ........................................................................................................................................................ Check
(12) Overwing emergency lights (3) .................................................................................................................................... Check
(13) Overwing emergency exit ...........................................................................................................................................Secured
Right Main Gear.
(2) Oleo extension ................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(3) Downlock safety pin .................................................................................................................................................. Removed
(4) Tires ................................................................................................................................................................................ Check
Note
(5) Brake wear pins............................................................................................................................................................... Check
Note
Right Wing.
(1) Leading edge/slats........................................................................................................................................................... Check
(3) Winglet............................................................................................................................................................................ Check
Note
(5) Aileron ............................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(6) Lower wing surface......................................................................................................................................................... Check
(7) Spoilers ........................................................................................................................................................................... Check
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-15
30 AUG 10
(8) Flaps ................................................................................................................................................................................Check

(10) Wing anti-slip surface .................................................................................................................................................... Intact
Right Rear Fuselage.
(1) Engine cowl .....................................................................................................................................................................Check
(2) Thrust reverser............................................................................................................................................................... Stowed
(3) Right pylon ......................................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Antennae..........................................................................................................................................................................Check
Empennage.
(1) Horizontal stabilizer ........................................................................................................................................................Check
Note
(2) Elevators ..........................................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Navigation and strobe lights............................................................................................................................................Check
(5) Antennae..........................................................................................................................................................................Check
Left Rear Fuselage.
(1) Left pylon ........................................................................................................................................................................Check
(2) Thrust reverser............................................................................................................................................................... Stowed
(3) Engine cowl .....................................................................................................................................................................Check
Left Wing.
(1) Wing anti-slip surface ...................................................................................................................................................... Intact
Note
(3) Flaps ................................................................................................................................................................................Check
(4) Spoilers ............................................................................................................................................................................Check
(5) Aileron.............................................................................................................................................................................Check
(6) Lower wing surface .........................................................................................................................................................Check
(8) Winglet ............................................................................................................................................................................Check
(9) Navigation and strobe lights............................................................................................................................................Check
(10) Leading edge/slats .........................................................................................................................................................Check
(11) Landing/Taxi lights .......................................................................................................................................................Check
(12) Wing inspection light ....................................................................................................................................................Check
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-16
9 MAY 11
Left Main Gear.

(2) Oleo extension ................................................................................................................................................................ Check
(3) Downlock safety pin .................................................................................................................................................. Removed
(4) Tires ................................................................................................................................................................................ Check
Note
(5) Brake wear pins............................................................................................................................................................... Check
Note
Entering Airplane.
(1) Stairs ............................................................................................................................................................................... Check
(2) Door area security ........................................................................................................................................................... Verify
4.6.2
Acceptance Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow).
Acceptance Flow (C & FO).

General. This flow ensures all systems and equipment are operating properly.
Trigger. Accomplish on the first flight of the day, after a crew change, or if maintenance has been performed in the flight
deck. Start early enough to ensure all equipment is operating properly and to allow maintenance sufficient time to correct any
irregularities.
The crew will accomplish the entire flow on the FFD.
Indented items need not be completed on receiving flights (i.e. crew swap or depowered aircraft).
Logbook / Forms /
Manuals
Gear & ADG Pins
External Walkaround
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-17
30 AUG 10
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
Logbook/Forms/Manuals ............................................Check
Electrics.......................................................................Check
Fire Test ........................................................... Complete
Lights (NAV always ON) ...........................................Check
Fuel Panel....................................................................Check
Bleeds..........................................................................Set
APU.....................................................................AS REQD
Start Panel ...................................................................Check
Hydraulics ..............................................................Check
ELT ................................................................ ARM/RESET
PASS OXY switch ......................................................Check
Pressurization ..............................................................Check
Air Conditioning .........................................................Check
Anti-Ice ..................................................................Check
Probes.............................................................................OFF
Misc. lights/PAX signs ...................................... Check/OFF
Emergency Lights ........................................................ARM
STBY Compass...........................................................Check
Glareshield ..................................................................Check
Flight Control Panel ....................................................Check
NWS...............................................................................OFF
Clock ...........................................................................Check
Side Control Panels................................................Check
Instrument Panel .........................................................Check
CVR Test ......................................................... Complete
EICAS & STBY INST ................................................Check
ANTI-SKID Test................................................... Complete
MLG OVHT Test............................................. Complete
Upper Pedestal ............................................................Check
Thrust Lever Quadrant ................................................Check
RTUs/TCAS/ACPs ................................................Check
Trims ...........................................................................Check
Yaw Dampers....................................................... ENGAGE
Source Select Panel ...........................................4 NORMAL
Lower Pedestal ............................................................Check
Stall Test .......................................................... Complete
Logbook/Forms/Manuals............................................ Check
External Walkaround.............................................Complete
Gear & ADG Pins..................................................... Stowed
Audio Warning Panel ................................................. Check
Clock........................................................................... Check
Side Control Panels ............................................... Check
Instrument Panel ......................................................... Check
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-18
9 MAY 11
Acceptance (Expanded).
Logbook/Forms/Manuals
Verify
Checked
Confirm all manuals are current using the DRS.

Verify the following items are onboard:
Airworthiness certificate
Aircraft registration
FCC operating license
Maintenance logbook and MEL stickers
Normal checklists (2 normal, 1 required)*
MEL/CDL
QRH
POH (1 must be onboard the aircraft)
FOM (1 must be onboard the aircraft)
Speed Books (2 normal, 1 required)*
Weight and balance forms
SeeGee calculator
Jumpseat briefing card (a verbal briefing of ACM may be substituted)*
* Before departing a maintenance base, a full supply of aircraft forms and manuals must be obtained if available.
Preflight Inspection
Gear & ADG Pins
Verify
Complete
[C]
Stowed
Confirm 3 landing gear pins and 1 ADG pin are onboard
Note
Insertion or removal of gear or ADG pins requires a logbook entry. If pins are not onboard contact
Maintenance Control.
Audio Warning Panel
[FO]
Checked
DCU switches...............................................................................................................................................Guarded, no lights

Electrics
[C]
Checked
DC Service switch.............................................................................................................................................................. OFF

BATTERY MASTER switch...............................................................................................................................................ON
IDG Disconnects ..........................................................................................................................................Guarded, no lights
GEN 1, APU GEN, and GEN 2 switches....................................................................................................................... AUTO
Switchlights.......................................................................................................................................................Flush, no lights
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Fire Test
4b-19
30 AUG 10
[C]
Complete
Note
If this test was completed in the Safety & Power On Check, it may be omitted at this point.
TEST switch.................................................................................................................................. Press for 2 seconds and release
Both master warnings flash for the duration of the test
FWD & AFT CARGO and BOTTLE ARMED PUSH TO DISCH switchlights illuminated
FIRE SYS OK
After approximately 30 seconds, the test will be complete, and all fire detection indications are removed.
malfunctions will be shown in the form of Caution or Status messages.
Any
Hydraulic SOV Panel

L & R HYD SOV switchlights ..........................................................................................................Selected out and guarded
Lights
[C]
Checked
All external lights will be checked for operation prior to the first flight of the day.
NAV lights........................................................................................................................................................................... ON
NAV lights should always be left in the ON position
BEACON............................................................................................................................................................................OFF
STROBE .............................................................................................................................................................................OFF
LOGO .................................................................................................................................................................... As Required
WING INSP........................................................................................................................................................... As Required
LANDING LTS (LEFT, NOSE, RIGHT) ..........................................................................................................................OFF
RECOG/TAXI LTS ............................................................................................................................................................OFF
Fuel Panel
[C]
Checked
L & R BOOST PUMP switchlights....................................................................................................................... Selected out
INOP lights (amber) are illuminated
GRAVITY XFLOW switchlight ........................................................................................................................... Selected out

L & R XFLOW and AUTO OVERRIDE switchlights ......................................................................................... Selected out
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-20
30 AUG 10
Bleeds
[C]
Set
WING A/I CROSS BLEED ..................................................................................................................................... NORMAL

BLEED VALVES .......................................................................................................................................................... AUTO
ISOL ................................................................................................................................................................................ CLSD
BLEED SOURCE ................................................................................................................................................. BOTH ENG
APU
[C]
AS REQD
Start the APU approximately 10 minutes prior to door closure unless passenger comfort warrants otherwise.
Start Panel
[C]
Checked
L & R ENG START switchlights ..........................................................................................................................Selected out

IGNITION CONT switchlight ...............................................................................................................................Selected out
Hydraulics
[C]
Checked
Caution
Ensure that all flight control surfaces are clear before powering any hydraulic system.
EICAS Control Panel (ECP)................................................................................................................. Select HYD synoptic page
AC Motor Pump (ACMP) sws .................................................................................................. 1B ON, 3A OFF, 3B ON, 2B ON
Fluid quantities ................................................................................................................................................... Normal (45-85%)
Note
If quantity is outside of this range contact Maintenance Control for an accurate quantity percentage
related to temperature.
Reservoir output lines............................................................................................................................................................Green
System pressure .........................................................................................................................................Normal (3000+200 psi)
ACMP switches ...........................................................................................................1B AUTO, 3A ON, 3B AUTO, 2B AUTO
System 3 pressure (HYD synoptic page)...................................................................................................Normal (3000+200 psi)
ACMP switches ................................................................................................................................................................. 3A OFF
ELT
[C]
ARM/RESET
Also verify PASS OXY switchlight is guarded and no light

Pressurization
[C]
Checked
MAN ALT switch ....................................................................................................................................................... Centered

EMER DEPRESS switchlight...................................................................................................................... Guarded, light out
PRESS CONT switchlight .............................................................................................................................. AUTO, light out
MAN RATE knob ................................................................................................................................................... Full DECR
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Air Conditioning
4b-21
30 AUG 10
[C]
Checked
L & R PACK switchlights ..................................................................................................................................... As Required

RECIRC FAN...................................................................................................................................................................... ON
RECIRC FAN should always be left ON
RAM AIR switchlight ..................................................................................................................................Guarded, light out

Temp control MAN switchlights ................................................................................................................... AUTO, lights out
CARGO fan switch............................................................................................................................................................ FAN
Anti-Ice Control Panel
ANTI-ICE, WING switch...................................................................................................................................................OFF
ANTI-ICE, COWL LH & RH switches .............................................................................................................................OFF
LH and RH PROBES switches...........................................................................................................................................OFF
Ice Detector Test
[C]
Complete
Ice Detector/ADS Test.

DET TEST switchlight........................................................................................................................................................ Hold in

ICE switchlight illuminated
ICE
ADS HEAT TEST OK

Emergency Lights
[C]
ARM
Passenger Signs Panel

NO PED ..............................................................................................................................................................................OFF
SEAT BLTS .......................................................................................................................................................................OFF
Standby Compass
[C]
Checked
Compare headings with Captain and First Officers HSIs on the PFD and MFD, and ensure the compass card is in place
Note
AHRS heading information may be inaccurate due to ground equipment magnetic disturbance at the
gate. This can cause an EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution message with an accompanying HDG
comparator box on the PFDs.
Glareshield
ROLL SEL, PLT & CPLT switchlights ..................................................................................................................... No lights
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-22
30 AUG 10
Flight Control Panel (FCP)

AP DISC switch-bar.....................................................................................................................................................Engaged
Clocks
VERIFY
Checked
VERIFY
Checked
Ensure that the UTC time and date are accurate

Side Control Panels
Wiper Switches
WIPERS...............................................................................................................................................................Both OFF/PARK
Side Panel Lighting Controls
Side LIGHTING panels.............................................................................................................................................. As Required
DH .................................................................................................................................................. Ensure removed from PFD
RA Test.
RA TEST ..................................................................................................................................................................Push and hold
50 ft. RA on the PFD
RA TEST ............................................................................................................................................................................ Release

Verify the RA indication on the PFD returns to 0.
Note
EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution message and RA flag may appear in dual radar altimeter
configuration.
Display Reversionary Panel.................................................................................................................................................NORM
CVR Test
[C]
Complete
Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) Test.

TEST switch ......................................................................................................................................Press and hold for 5 seconds
Verify that the green light illuminates

Displays & STBY Instruments
[VERIFY]
Checked
Displays (PFD, MFD, ED1 and ED2)
Confirm that no abnormal indications are present
Standby Instruments (ISIS)

Standby attitude indicator ................................................................................................................................................. Erect
Standby altimeter ..................................................................................................................................... Set to field elevation
Standby airspeed indicator .....................................................................................................................................................40
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Anti-Skid Test
4b-23
30 AUG 10
[C]
Complete
Anti-Skid Test.
ANTI-SKID switch ..................................................................................................................................................................OFF

A/SKID OUTBD
A/SKID INBD
ANTI-SKID switch ...........................................................................................................................................................ARMED
The Caution messages disappear after approximately 6 seconds.
MLG Bay Overheat Test
[C]
Complete
MLG Overheat Test.

MLG BAY switch ................................................................................................................................................... Hold at OVHT

GEAR BAY OVERHEAT aural
MLG BAY OVHT
MLG BAY switch ...............................................................................................................................................................Release
Warning message is removed
OVHT TEST switch..................................................................................................................................... Hold at WARN FAIL

MLG OVHT FAIL
OVHT TEST switch............................................................................................................................................................Release

Caution message is removed
Upper Pedestal
[C]
Checked
MUTE HORN switchlight.......................................................................................................................... Guarded, lights out

ENGINES SYNCH................................................................................................................................................................N1
HIGH PWR SCHEDULE switchlight ........................................................................................................ Guarded, lights out
ANTI-SKID switch......................................................................................................................................................ARMED
IND LTS switch.....................................................................................................................................................As Required
GRND PROX-TERRAIN, OFF & FLAP, OVRD switchlights................................................................. Guarded, lights out
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-24
30 AUG 10
Thrust Lever Quadrant
[C]
Checked
PITCH DISC handle ...............................................................................................................................................In (vertical)

ROLL DISC handle............................................................................................................................................ In (horizontal)
GND LIFT DUMPING switch....................................................................................................................................... AUTO
LH & RH THRUST REVERSER switches ................................................................................................................ ARMED
FLIGHT SPOILER lever .........................................................................................................................................................0
Thrust Levers ...........................................................................................................................................................SHUTOFF
TCAS Test
[C]
Complete
TCAS Test.
Radio Tuning Unit (RTU)
TCAS line key .......................................................................................................................................................................Select
TEST line key........................................................................................................................................................................Select
On the VSI: TRAFFIC, TCAS test & red/green bands

On the MFD: Four levels of targets (hollow cyan diamond, solid cyan diamond, solid yellow circle, and solid red square)
TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK aural

RTUs/TCAS/ACPs
[C]
Checked
Radio tuning units (both) .............................................................................................................................................. Normal

TCAS Main Page .................................................................................................................................................. As Required
Audio Control Panel
All receive and transmit switches ......................................................................................................................... As Required
VOICE/BOTH switch .....................................................................................................................................................BOTH
MASK/BOOM switch....................................................................................................................................................BOOM
EMER/NORM switch ....................................................................................................................................................NORM
Public Address System Test.
ACP transmit knob ..........................................................................................................................................................Select PA
Interphone control unit ...................................................................................................................................Push PA switchlight
Green PA Switchlight remains ON

Transmit a test message
Note
Ensure that the public address test message is heard by the cabin crew.
ACP transmit knob ..................................................................................................................................................... As Required
Weather Radars
Weather radars ................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-25
30 AUG 10
Backup Tuning Panel

1 & 2 RTU INHIB PUSH switchlights ................................................................................................................. Selected out
FMS TUNE INHIBIT switch ...................................................................................................................................... Forward
ATC SEL knob ................................................................................................................................................................STBY
Mode selector knob .........................................................................................................................................................STBY
Verify that the frequencies displayed are the same on COM1 and NAV1 on RTU 1
STAB and MACH TRIM

Note the following Amber Caution messages:
STAB TRIM
MACH TRIM
STAB TRIM CH1 & CH2................................................................................................................................................ Press
After pressing one STAB TRIM button, the STAB TRIM Amber Caution message should be removed, and a STAB
CH 1 (or 2) INOP White Status message will appear until the other STAB TRIM button is pressed
CAPTAINS STAB TRIM DISCONNECT..................................................................................................................... Press

STAB TRIM
Repeat procedure using First Officer stab trim disconnect.

STAB TRIM CH1 & CH2.................................................................................................................................................Press
MACH TRIM ....................................................................................................................................................................Press
Confirm that all messages are removed
Display/ARINC Fans
DISPLY & ARINC FAN switches ................................................................................................................................ NORM
Trims
[C]
Checked
AIL TRIM, ELV TRIM & RUD TRIM ..............................................................................................Move in both directions
On the status page, verify free and correct movement in both directions, then set exactly centered
Lower Pedestal
[C]
Checked
Interior Lighting
LIGHTING knobs.................................................................................................................................................. As Required
YAW DAMPER
YD1 & YD2...............................................................................................................................................................ENGAGE
After engaging one YD, the YAW DAMPER Amber Caution message and amber YD indication on both PFDs
should be removed, and a YD 1 (or 2) INOP White Status message will appear until the other YD is engaged
Confirm YD 1 INOP and YD 2 INOP White Status messages are not displayed
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-26
30 AUG 10
Source Select Panel

ATT HDG knob .............................................................................................................................................................NORM
AIR DATA knob............................................................................................................................................................NORM
EICAS knob ...................................................................................................................................................................NORM
DSPL CONT knob .........................................................................................................................................................NORM
Observers ACP .................................................................................................................................................... As Required
LANDING GEAR manual release handle .....................................................................................................................Stowed
ADG manual deploy handle...........................................................................................................................................Stowed
AHRS ............................................................................................................................................................................... MAG
EMER FLAP............................................................................................................................................................ NORMAL
Stall Test
[C]
Complete
Stall Protection System Test.

WARNING
Both STALL PTCT PUSHER switches must remain ON for all phases of flight.
STALL PTCT PUSHER switches.............................................................................................................................................ON
Either STALL switchlight .......................................................................................................................................................Push
Stick shaker activates

CONT IGNITION White Status message and CONT switchlight ON illuminates
Stick pusher activates and STALL switchlights flash
Stick pusher deactivates and STALL switchlights extinguish
Stick shaker deactivates
CONT IGNITION White Status message is removed and CONT switchlight ON extinguishes
Note
Stick pusher deactivation and contol column return to the neutral position is slower in ISIS equipped
aircraft and does not necessarily indicate an unsatisfactory test. This is due to the fact that the pusher
motor clutch does not disengage until approximately 5 seconds after the test is complete.
Note
STALL FAIL Amber Caution message appears if either AP/SP DISC switch is depressed for more
than 3 seconds.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4.6.3
4b-27
30 AUG 10
Before Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response).
General. This flow and checklist is used to prepare for starting the engines.
Trigger. Approximately 25 minutes prior to departure.
For the first flight of the day, the Before Start Check will be executed following the completion of the Acceptance Check. On
turn-around flights when the aircraft remains powered, crews will go directly to the Before Start Check when preparing for the
next flight. When the aircraft is depowered between flights or there is a crew swap, crews will begin with the Acceptance
Check.
Departure Setup.
The following items will be completed and reviewed aloud by both pilots prior to calling for the Before Start Check.
1.
ATIS
2.
ATC Clearance
3.
FMS Setup
4.
RTU Setup
5.
PFD Setup
Departure Setup (Expanded).

Prior to calling for the Before Start Check, either crewmember will have received the ATIS and ATC clearance for the leg to be
flown. Once these are received, the initial altitude, frequencies (COM and NAV on RTUs 1 & 2), transponder code, and
altimeters should be set accordingly. TCAS should be set to AUTO & REL. The WX/TERR selection on the DCP should be
set to terrain unless weather radar is expected to be used for departure.
Note
Primary ATC communications will normally be conducted using COM 1. COM 2 will be used for
Company, Maintenance, ATIS, etc.
Both the Captains and First Officers PFDs and the FMS will be set in the following manner so that these settings can be
reviewed and confirmed without delay prior to the Before Start Check.
1.
Both pilots will select and identify the respective appropriate navigation source. The PF must be in short range (green
needles) if the departure procedure or the engine failure procedure requires localizer tracking, VOR tracking, or DME
identification.
Note
If the waypoint or DME required turn is preloaded from the FMS database both pilots may be in
white needles.
2.
Set Flap Retraction Altitude (FRA) on the MDA bug to 1000 ft. above field elevation or as published in the Takeoff
Report, whichever is higher.
3.
Set airspeed bug to 200 knots.
4.
Set heading bug to runway heading.
5.
Set the initial altitude in ALT preselect.
6.
Set up the assigned departure and route in the FMS.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4b-28
30 AUG 10

Normal Checklists
FMS Initialization (If required).

Confirm the following on the STATUS page:
ACTIVE DATA BASE
UTC and DATE
PERF DATA BASE on page 2 (confirm engine type)
On the INDEX page select:
POS INIT
Enter the airport ICAO identifier in the scratchpad
Press the airport line key. Verify that the FMS airport reference position is correct by referring to the latitude and
longitude coordinates on the airport chart.
Press the airport reference position (lat & long) line key
Press the SET POS line key
Note
If this position disagrees by more than 40 nm from the position last known by the FMS, the message
RESET INITIAL POSITION is displayed on the FMS annunciator line. Verify the entry and re-enter
the position.
VOR CONTROL
Ensure that the VOR and DME USAGE line is ENABLED
Up to eight VORs can be inhibited
GPS CONTROL
Ensure that GPS is ENABLED

Deselect satellites, as appropriate
FMS CONTROL
Select FMS DATA KEY to LEFT

DEFAULTS (page 2)
Enter climb speed of 290/.70-.74

Enter cruise speed of 290/.74
Enter descent speed of .74/290
Enter descent angle of 3.0
Enter Fuel flow correction of 0.0 (page 3)
FMS Flight Plan Programming

If destination airport is served by RNAV or GPS approaches only, the following procedure is mandatory:
Select INDEX
Select GPS CONTROL
Enter the four letter ICAO airport identifier
Enter destination airport ETA in Zulu
Ensure APPR RAIM is AVAILABLE
If APPR RAIM is UNAVAILABLE, contact Dispatch.

FLPN
Insert route (manually or company). Ensure origin, destination, alternate, and flight number are entered.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-29
30 AUG 10
DEP/ARR
Runway, SID, and STAR with applicable transitions.
FLPN
Pilots will verbally review the flight plan by verifying each leg of the route with the ATC clearance, dispatch flight
release and Jeppesen Airway charts. Verify the total distance, confirm and EXEC the flight plan, and COPY
ACTIVE.
RADIO
Select as required
PROG
Select NEXT PAGE to view 2/2
Enter RNP 1.0 in position R6 to ensure GPS coverage during entire flight (N/A if GPS and/or FMS is deferred)
MFD MENU
Select PF window to VNAV
Select PM window to ON
Select SPEED, ALTITUDE, and RNG TO ALT (this allows for any constraints in the flight plan to appear on the
MFD).
PERF
Temporarily select proper bleed configuration expected for takeoff (this will cause MCT value to be displayed).
Enter MCT value into the scratchpad and line select it into TGT (Target N1), then reselect the bleed configuration to
OFF. This will be the crews MCT reference prior to switching the bleeds after takeoff.
Ensure TO is active on Thrust Limit page 1 for normal takeoff
Exception: If a FLX takeoff is planned, enter FLX temp and ensure FLX is active on Thrust Limit page 2.
PERF MENU
Advisory VNAV, enable
If fuel is not in the PREDICTED performance mode (as indicated on the MFD window), carry out the following steps:
Select PERF MENU
Select FUEL MANAGEMENT
Select PREDICTED performance mode
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-30
30 AUG 10
PERF INIT
Insert cruise altitude to destination
Confirm BOW with release
Enter actual fuel onboard
Enter the average wind component from the release into Climb, Cruise and Descent
Enter the ISA deviation using the following chart:
Airport Elevation
Standard ISA C
15.0
1000
13.0
2000
11.1
3000
9.1
4000
7.1
5000
5.1
6000
3.1
7000
1.1
8000
-0.8
Example
ATIS temp = 18 C

VNAV
On VNAV page 1:
Enter TGT SPEED of 290/.70-.74 or cost indexing speed
Confirm SPD/ALT LIMIT 250/10000 and TRANS ALT 18000
On VNAV page 2:
Enter TGT SPEED of 290/.74 or cost indexing speed
On VNAV page 3:
Enter TGT SPEED of .74/290 or cost indexing speed
Confirm SPEED/ALT LIMIT of 250/10000 and TRANS FL of FL180
EXEC after verification
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-31
9 MAY 11
The Captain will ensure that the ATIS and ATC clearance have been reviewed, the PFDs and RTUs have been set, and the FMS
flight plan has been reviewed.
Example ATIS, Clearance, RTU, FMS, and PFD Review.
The ATIS is CHARLEY, wind is 200 at 5 knots, visibility is mile in heavy rain, ceiling 200 overcast, temperature 8,
dewpoint 7, altimeter 29.75. Runways 18L/C/R are in use, 18C RVR is 1200. We are cleared to PIT via the JACAL FIVE
Departure NALEY transition, as filed. Squawk 5432 is set. RTU #1 is set to North Ramp and Outbound Ramp, Nav is
Autotune. RTU #2 is set to OPS and Departure, Nav is autotune. The FMS has been reviewed (if the FMS route has not
been reviewed, BOTH pilots will review it at this point). Both PFDs are set, speed bug 200 knots, Left NAV source is FMS,
Right source is FMS, heading 183, flap retraction altitude 1,750, initial altitude 8,000, flight director coupled left. Any
questions?
The crew will then complete the DEPARTURE BRIEFING as detailed in the Before Start Check (Expanded).
After the departure setup is complete and the aircraft has been fueled, the Captain will call for the Before Start Check.
Note
The Captain will not call for the Before Start Check until the fueling is complete.
Before Start Flow (C & FO).
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
Crew O2 & Masks .................................................. Checked

Nosewheel Steering ....................................................... OFF
LH & RH WSHLD Switches.............................. AS REQD
With OAT in excess of 25C, the Windshield Heat should
remain OFF until the Before Takeoff Check.
Crew O2 & Masks ...................................................Checked

Pressurization....................................................................Set
Set the destination elevation on the status page using the
LDG ELEV knob on the CABIN PRESS control panel.
Passenger Signs ............................................................... ON
SEAT BELTS White Status message will be displayed
on ED2.
After the Captain calls Before Start Checklist

Accomplish the Before Start Checklist (to the line)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-32
30 AUG 10
Before Start Check (Expanded).

LOGBOOK/REQD DOCS
VERIFY
Verify that the maintenance logbook and all other required documents are onboard
Crew O2 & Masks
ONBOARD
VERIFY
Checked/__psi
Check EICAS for oxygen pressure. Oxygen supply for crew must comply with minimum requirements in the table below.
Minimum Pressure (psi)
2 Crewmembers
1410
3 Crewmembers
1630
Note
EICAS OXY pressure readout is automatically corrected for OAT in the CRJ-701.
Oxygen Mask Test.
Oxygen Mask Regulator Storage Compartment
Oxygen mask regulator flow selector .................................................................................................................................... 100%
PRESS TO TEST......................................................................................................................Push and hold down for entire test
Listen for oxygen flow
Verify that the yellow cross located on the compartment door appears and then disappears as flow sound decreases
Harness inflation plates (red)............................................................................................................................................. Squeeze
Verify that the yellow cross (oxygen flowing, harness inflated) appears and then disappears as flow sound decreases
Harness inflation plates (red).............................................................................................................................................. Release

Emergency flow control ..........................................................................................................................................................Push
Verify that the yellow cross (oxygen flowing) is visible
Emergency flow control ..................................................................................................................................................... Release
Verify that the yellow cross appears and then disappears as flow sound decreases
PRESS TO TEST................................................................................................................................................................ Release

Audio Control Panel (ACP)
INT SVC speaker switch ................................................................................................................................................ Select ON
BOOM/MASK switch ......................................................................................................................................................... MASK
SPKR switch................................................................................................................................................................... Select ON
I/C-R/T switch ........................................................................................................................................................................... I/C
PRESS TO TEST..................................................................................................................................................Push and release
Verify mask mic operation by oxygen flowing sound over speaker
I/C-R/T switch ......................................................................................................................................................................... OFF

SPKR switch............................................................................................................................................................... As Required
BOOM/MASK switch .........................................................................................................................................................BOOM
Parking Brake
[C]
Set/Checked
Confirm that the parking brake is set and that the PARKING BRAKE ON Green Advisory message is displayed
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
Fuel Qty.
4b-33
9 MAY 11
VERIFY
__ Reqd, __ OB
Confirm that the quantity is balanced and corresponds with the Ramp Fuel on the dispatch release. The aircraft may be
over- or under-fueled by 500 lbs. (but in no case may the aircraft be under-fueled below MIN T/O FUEL plus TAXI FUEL),
as long as it is reflected in the Weight & Balance. If this is exceeded, an update to the release must be obtained by notifying
the dispatcher via phone, radio, or ACARS (with a subsequent acknowledgement), or a new release must be obtained.
Note
The center tank fuel limitation (500 lbs. max in the center tank with <4400 lbs. in each wing tank)
ONLY applies for takeoff. Starting engines at the gate will start the fuel transfer process to correct the
imbalance.
Note
When referencing fuel quantities, pilots may omit the last 2 digits of the fuel quantity (i.e., if the ramp
fuel load is 12,386, pilots can state the required quantity as 12.3 or 12,300).
Altimeters
VERIFY
__.__ Set/Chkd
The Captain sets left and standby altimeters and the First Officer sets the right altimeter
Ensure that all three altimeters are within 75 ft. of published field elevation. Also ensure that the Captains and First
Officers altimeters are within 50 ft. of each other (RVSM requirements)
Departure Briefing
[PF]
Complete
Ensure that the FMS and ACARS initialization is complete. Ensure that the ATIS, Clearance, FMS, RTUs, and PFDs are set up
as prescribed in the Departure Setup section of this chapter.

Both pilots will review the expected taxi route, hot spots, any airport construction, and applicable NOTAMS for taxiway
closures. Both pilots will confirm all taxi instructions, especially hold short clearances. When crossing an active runway
each pilot shall confirm the runway is clear and there is clearance to cross. Vigilance shall be used when the First Officer is
performing Heads Down tasks such as checklist and FMS inputs.

Cleared SID or departure procedure
information, etc.)
Example Departure Briefing.

We are planning to depart Runway 18C, JACAL FIVE, NALEY transition. Planned taxi route from gate E18 to runway
18R is via the north ramp to the main ramp spot 2, then via Taxiway Echo to 18C. The JACAL FIVE SID is a RNAV
departure. We will fly in NAV (FMS) mode and use of the flight director is required, climb and maintain 8,000 feet. We will
not exceed 280 knots until advised by ATC. The Engine Failure Procedure is to fly a direct track on a 183 heading. Our
takeoff alternate is KGSO. We will use Cowl Anti-ice for taxi and Wing and Cowl Anti-ice for takeoff. We will also use
Continuous ignition on takeoff. Any questions?
--------------------------------------------------------------------------If ACARS is INOP / unavailable, ensure weight and balance paperwork is completed and handed to a gate agent prior to
calling below the line.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-34
9 MAY 11
Before Start Flow (below the line) (C).

Trigger. When issued pushback clearance or clearance to start engine(s).
Captain (C)
R BOOST PUMP switchlights ....................................... ON
Confirm the following Green Advisory messages:
R FUEL PUMP ON
If both engines are required, also select the L BOOST
PUMP switchlight ON.
HYD PUMP switches 1B, 3B, and 2B ...................... AUTO
HYD PUMP switch 3A .................................................. ON
Doors ............................................................ Closed/Locked
Check that no red or amber EICAS door messages are

displayed.
Check that the crew escape hatch is secure, the locked
marks are aligned, and the handle is stowed
Confirm that the flight deck entry door is closed and
locked
The keyed deadbolt on the cockpit door is approved for
ground operations only.
Beacon ............................................................................ ON
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-35
9 MAY 11
Before Start Check (below the line) (C and FO).

CAS
VERIFY
Checked
configuration of the aircraft, then states Verify Checked. The Captain also makes a final scan of the EICAS messages and
states Checked.
Pushback Procedures.
Pushback will not commence prior to the completion of the Before Start Check. For pushback procedures, refer to the FOM.
Engine Start Procedures.
The Captain will perform the engine start with the parking brake set. If the aircraft parking brake is not set, the Captain will
direct the First Officer to perform the engine start. Engine starts will be accomplished when cleared by ground personnel
during pushback or with the parking brake set. However, certain airports throughout our system have specific pushback
procedures that must be followed. This information may be found in the station bulletins.
The engine(s) will be started after obtaining a start signal from the marshaller.
On the FFD, the fuel check valve check must be performed prior to starting the right engine. Reference the After Start Check
(Expanded) for the procedure.
The same procedures are used for the left engine start as were used for the right engine start.
Engine Starts.
The right engine is normally started first
L or R ENG START switchlight .................................................... Press and hold until the following messages are verified:
L or R ENGINE START White Status message
Note
Start the chronometer when the L or R ENGINE START White Status message appears.
The following engine instrument verification is required by the pilot performing the engine start (silent).
N2 ................................................................................................................................................................... Verify increasing
Oil Pressure.................................................................................................................................................... Verify increasing
ITT .............................................................................................................................................................Verify below 120C
N2 20% .......................................................................................................................................... L or R thrust lever to IDLE
Fuel Flow ....................................................................................................................................................... Verify increasing
Light Off ................................................................................................................................................ Verify increase in ITT
N1 ................................................................................................................................................................... Verify increasing
N2 50% ....................................................................................................................................... Verify L or R ENG START
White Status message disappears
Engine Starts, Other Than Normal.
Accomplish the following procedures IAW the Supplemental Chapter of this POH or the Supplement Checklist (As Required).
External Air
Cross Bleed
Battery/External Air
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-36
30 AUG 10
Hot Start.
During an engine start, the HOT icon (ITT gauge) appears when the FADEC system detects ITT greater than 815C. Should
the HOT icon appear, immediately move the thrust lever to SHUT OFF.
Note
On the ground, the FADEC will automatically terminate an engine start (fuel and ignition removed)
upon recognition of a HOT or HUNG start condition.
Continue to motor the engine until the ITT decreases below 120C respecting starter engagement time limit. If the hot start
procedure is begun after a starter cutout (50% N2), re-engagement of the starter motor will be required.
Caution
Starter re-engagement is prohibited above 45% N2.
Refer to the Limitations Chapter of this POH for engine starter limitations.
A hot start can occur without the HOT icon. Monitor ITT closely during start to avoid an over temperature. Always be vigilant
of the peak ITT.
In addition to the hot start abnormal, a start sequence will also be aborted for any of the following abnormalities:
No N1 rotation after approximately 33% N2
Hung start (N2 stagnation prior to engine stabilization)
No light off (no rise in ITT)

No fuel flow
No L or R AUTO IGNITION Green Advisory message
No oil pressure indication by the time idle N2 RPM is achieved
If the start is aborted, the pilot starting the engine will announce that he is aborting the start and will state the reason that the
start was aborted.
The following actions will be accomplished immediately before referencing the QRH:
1. Affected engine, thrust lever ....................................................................................................................................SHUTOFF
2. Dry motor .............................................................................................................................................................. As Required
Starter Fails to Cutout.
It is imperative that starter cutout be observed at 50% N2. The NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message appears if
the starter does not cutout. The resultant high speed of the starter turbine could cause mechanical damage.
Pressing the applicable ENG STOP switchlight should be all that is required to close the start valve and stop airflow to the air
turbine starter (ATS).
On the ground, should the ENG STOP action not resolve the problem, you must shutdown the engine and turn off the air source
(APU, external air or other engine bleed).
Caution
off the external air source during a NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message condition.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4.6.4
4b-37
9 MAY 11
After Start Flow and Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow).
General. This flow is used to configure the aircraft for taxiing.

Trigger. After the engine(s) are stabilized, accomplish the After Start Flow. After the ground equipment is clear and
acknowledgment of the ground crew signal, accomplish the After Start Checklist.
The First Officer will read the checklist and each crewmember will respond, verifying each switch is properly positioned.
After Start Flow (C & FO).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-38
9 MAY 11
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
APU.................................................................... AS REQD
ANTI-ICE ...........................................................AS REQD

The APU will be shutdown unless its use is required, PROBES ......................................................................... ON
ensure the BLEEDS are set as required
The FO selects PROBES LH & RH switches to ON
Electrics...................................................................Checked Transponder ........................................................AS REQD
Using the AC and DC electrical synoptic pages, the

Captain verifies:
The FO will select the transponder to ON if the airport

requires the use of the transponder for ground operations
All buses are powered

The loads, voltages and frequencies are within
normal ranges
The flow lines are green
External electrics are selected off and
disconnected
No abnormal messages are displayed
After Start (Expanded).
Fuel Check Valve
[C]
Checked
On the first flight of the day (FFD), perform the fuel check valve verification after starting the left engine
Before starting the right engine:

Select both fuel pumps ............................................................................................................................................................ OFF
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
R FUEL LO PRESS
Note
If after 2 minutes, the R FUEL LO PRESS Amber Caution message is still not displayed, dry motor
the left engine until the message appears, respecting starter limits.
Select both fuel boost pumps back ON and start the right engine
ANTI-ICE
[FO]
AS REQD
Note
The COWL A/ICE Amber Caution message may illuminate when the system is selected ON due to low
pressure or temperature.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-39
9 MAY 11
COWL ANTI-ICE....................................................................................................................................................... As Required

Rudder
[C]
Checked
EICAS control panel (ECP)............................................................................................................................................ F/CTL
The Captain moves the rudder pedals full travel and checks on the F/CTL synoptic page that maximum deflection is
obtained without binding
Nosewheel Steering
Thrust Reversers
[C]
ARMED
[FO]
Armed
Verify
Checked
L REV ARMED
R REV ARMED
CAS
configuration of the aircraft, then states Verify Checked. The Captain also checks the EICAS messages and states
Checked.
Taxi.
Prior to initial taxi, when the parking brake is first released, the Captain will state, "Parking Brake Released, Sterile Cockpit."
This is to reinforce the beginning of sterile cockpit procedures.
Both pilots must verify the Jeppesen airport diagram is displayed and viewable. Any changes in the expected taxi route from
the Departure Briefing will be discussed and briefed at this time. Pilots should allow time for airplane response to each thrust
change.
To begin taxi, release the brakes and smoothly increase thrust to the minimum required for the airplane to roll forward. Once
taxi has commenced, idle thrust is more than adequate for most conditions. Do not start a turn until sufficient forward speed
has been attained to allow the airplane to turn at idle thrust (nosewheel should not be turned when aircraft is static).
Thrust use during ground operation demands sound judgement and techniques. The air blast effects at relatively low thrust can
be destructive and cause injury. Be aware of aircraft behind you and likewise avoid following other airplanes too closely. Jet
blast is a major cause of foreign object damage (FOD).
The tendency is to taxi faster than desired, especially during runway turnoff after landing. The appropriate taxi speed will
depend on turn radius and surface condition. Nosewheel scrubbing indicates excessive steering angle and/or excessive taxi
speed for surface condition. The normal straight-ahead taxi speed should not exceed 20 knots. When approaching a turn,
adjust speed for the surface condition.
At some taxi speeds, usually between 10 and 20 knots, an increase in airplane vibration can occur. If this occurs, a slight
increase or decrease in speed will reduce or eliminate the vibration, increasing passenger comfort.
Do not be diverted from the primary task of safely taxiing the airplane. The flight crew should avoid all unnecessary activity
and duties (including paperwork) that can be accomplished at another time.
No FMS entries will be performed while taxiing across runways, or if complex taxi instructions are issued.
Taxi Lights
RECOG/TAXI lights are used to taxi (day and night) and care should be exercised they do not distract other taxiing aircrew
and/or ground personnel. RECOG/TAXI lights are normally selected ON when the taxi commences and OFF if the aircraft is
stationary. The RECOG/TAXI lights must be selected off if the aircraft is stationary for more than 10 minutes (RECOG/TAXI
light stationary limitation).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4b-40
30 AUG 10

Normal Checklists
Nosewheel/Rudder Pedal Steering

During a turn, maintain positive pressure on the nose steering tiller to prevent the nose gear from returning to center abruptly.
Straight-ahead steering and large radius turns should be accomplished with rudder pedal steering only. Avoid stopping the
airplane in a turn, as excessive thrust will be required to start taxiing again. After completing a turn, and prior to stopping,
center the nosewheel and allow the airplane to roll straight ahead for a short distance.
Brakes
Avoid riding the brakes to control taxi speed. If taxi speed is too high, reduce speed with a steady brake application and then
release the brakes to permit brake cooling. Continuous braking should be avoided. Allow for decreased braking effectiveness
on slick surfaces.
Taxiing on Contaminated Surfaces
Taxiing in adverse weather conditions requires awareness of surface conditions. If the taxiways and runways are covered with
snow, slush, or ice, taxi with the flaps up.
Select takeoff flaps when nearing the departure end of the runway, then complete the Taxi and Before Takeoff Checks.
When taxiing on a slick surface at reduced speeds, the use of differential engine thrust may assist in maintaining airplane
trajectory through a turn. Differential braking may be more effective than nosewheel steering on very slick surfaces. Reduce
speed prior to initiating a turn.
FMS Entries (On Ground)
The First Officer will make all FMS entries during taxi, executing only after confirmation by the Captain.
No FMS entries will be performed during low visibility taxi operations unless taxiing straight ahead without complex
intersections or the aircraft is stopped.
Turning Radius
The following shows the minimum turning radius capability for the CRJ-701 aircraft:
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-41
9 MAY 11
Single - Engine Taxi.

Conditions.
Non-operating engine BOOST PUMP OFF
Jet blast will not present a hazard to personnel and equipment
Do not exceed a thrust setting of 80% N2
Prohibited when ramps or taxiways are contaminated with snow, slush, or ice
Prohibited during icing conditions
Preferred single engine taxi is with the right engine operating. If operationally necessary to single engine taxi out with
the left engine:
The APU must be running with the APU GEN supplying electrical power.
Prior to taxiing:
Hydraulic Pump 2B................................................................................................................................................................ON
After the right engine is started:
Hydraulic Pump 2B.......................................................................................................................................................... AUTO
Taxi-Out.
On first flight of the day, start the left engine first.
Taxi-In.
Single engine taxi-in will be accomplished with the right engine operating. Conditions permitting, the APU should remain off.
Delayed Start.
Trigger. Before starting the left/right engine, the Captain will call for, Delayed engine start. The Delayed Start Flow
followed by the Before Start Check (D) item will be accomplished.
Delayed Start Flow.
Boost Pump Switchlight
ON
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-42
9 MAY 11
Delayed After Start Flow.

Trigger. After both engines are operating, accomplish the Delayed After Start Flow followed by the After Start Check (D)
item.
Select AC synoptic to ensure both engine generators are supplying electrical power.
Engine Shutdown After Gate Departure.
Select the AC electrics synoptic page and ensure the APU or Right Generator is available for electrical power.

4.6.5
Taxi Check (Challenge & Response).
General. This flow and check is used to configure the aircraft for departure.
Trigger. Once clear of ramp congestion and both engines are running, the First Officer will ensure the takeoff performance is
displayed on ACARS (or TLR performance is available) and set the takeoff data. The Captain will then call, (Departure
airport), Runway___, Flaps___, Taxi Check. The First Officer will select the takeoff Flap setting and then complete the Taxi
Check. When the checklist is complete, the First Officer will state: Runway ____, Flaps___, Taxi Check complete. If a
runway change is received, the Taxi Check must be re-accomplished.
Taxi (Expanded).
Flaps
Verify
____Set/Indicating
Verify the flaps are set for takeoff by pointing at the required Flap setting from ACARS or the TLR and the EICAS Flap
Position (8 or 20)
Takeoff Data
Verify
SET
The First Officer will request takeoff data via ACARS. If the ACARS is not available, reference the weight and balance form,
TLR, and speed cards. Once determined, the First Officer will set and read aloud from the ACARS Takeoff Data Page or the
TLR and speed cards the departure runway, flap setting, takeoff weight, V-speeds, and N1 takeoff setting. The First Officer
will also ensure the speed card displays the appropriate takeoff weight and that the PERF INIT page reflects the proper zero
fuel weight. The Captain will visually verify these items on the displays. Takeoff data can be entered anytime after final
weight and balance is compeleted.
Example Takeoff Data.
Runway 18R, Flaps 8, 68,000 pounds, V1 is 128, VR is 128, V2 is 139, VT is 189 and FLEX N1 is 88.4.
Trims
Verify
Green, Centered, __.__
Verify the following, by pointing at:

Aileron and rudder trims are green and exactly centered to prevent an unwarranted T/O CONFIG Red Warning message
STAB trim indicator is green and set as per the ACARS data or SeeGee wheel
4.6.6
Before Takeoff Check (Challenge & Response, FO Flow).
General. This flow and check is used to ensure the aircraft and flight attendant are prepared for an imminent takeoff.
Note
If a runway change has been received, redo the Taxi Checklist.
Trigger. After the Flight Attendant notifies the crew that the cabin is secure for takeoff and when approaching the departure
end of the runway (i.e. #1 or #2 for takeoff), the Captain will call for the Before Takeoff Check. When cleared for takeoff or
cleared on the runway for line up and wait, the Captain will call Below the line. When the checklist is complete, the First
Officer will state: Before Takeoff Check complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Normal Checklists
4b-43
9 MAY 11
Before Takeoff Flow (FO).
FUEL X-FLOW......................................................................................................................................................... MAN/OFF

WSHLD Switches .............................................................................................................................................................. LOW
The First Officer will ensure the Windshield Heat switches are LOW, then confirm that there are no L(R) WSHLD
HEAT or L(R) WINDOW HEAT Amber Caution messages displayed
Flight Controls....................................................................................................................................... Aileron/Elevator Check
Flight Attendant................................................................................................................................................................Advise
The First Officer will make the required PA announcement advising the Flight Attendant to prepare for departure
Example PA Announcement.
Ladies and gentlemen, we have been cleared onto the runway. Flight Attendant, please prepare for departure.
- OR Ladies and gentlemen, we are number one (or two) for the runway. Flight Attendant, please prepare for departure.
FAA regulations prohibit providing additional information to the passengers when the aircraft is moving (critical phase).
Save information regarding weather and arrival times for when the aircraft is parked.
TRANSPONDER/TCAS........................................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO
The First Officer selects the transponder on the PF side
If ALT OFF noted under transponder code on ATC Top Page, go to ATC Main Page and select ALT ON
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-44
9 MAY 11
Before Takeoff (Expanded).

T/O Configuration
Verify
Checked
The Captain and First Officer will verify the following Green Advisory message:
T/O CONFIG OK
T/O Fuel Qty/Balance
[FO]
Checked
All BTMS indicators must be green and are not increasing

FUEL X-FLOW
__ Req. __ OB/CHKD
Both pilots will state minimum takeoff fuel required then state actual fuel onboard. Both pilots will also ensure that fuel is
adequately balanced for takeoff and no unexpected asymmetry exists.
Brake Temp
Verify
[FO]
MAN/OFF
Prior to selecting XFLOW AUTO OVERRIDE, the First Officer will check the automatic fuel transfer status. Verify that
AUTO transfer has either terminated more than 15 seconds prior to selecting XFLOW AUTO OVERRIDE, or will not
terminate immediately
After selecting XFLOW AUTO OVERRIDE the First Officer then confirms that the MAN XFLOW White Status message
is displayed and that there is no GRAV XFLOW OPEN Green Advisory message or L XFLOW ON/R XFLOW ON
White Status message
Flight Controls
[FO]
Checked
EICAS Control Panel (ECP) ...........................................................................................................................................F/CTL
Move the control wheel left and right to full deflection, and verify aileron and spoileron movement on the FLIGHT
Ensure no abnormal Caution, Advisory, or Status messages on the FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic or status pages,
EICAS Control Panel (ECP) ............................................................................................................................................STAT

T/O Briefing
[PF]
RWY ___/COMPLETE
The pilot flying will verify the correct runway is selected from the FMS database by checking the actual takeoff runway
agrees with the runway displayed (the FROM waypoint) on the MFD. The FMS MAP format will normally be displayed
for all takeoffs.
The pilot flying will point to the MFD (runway displayed) and callout the T/O runway, initial heading, initial altitude, first
fix, Engine Failure Procedure and special considerations
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-45
9 MAY 11
Example Takeoff Briefing.

Runway 18C, RNAV JACAL FIVE departure, climb to 8,000, first fix is GIRGY,, Engine Failure Procedure is a direct
track on a 183 heading, no special considerations. Any questions? Runway 18C/complete.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Trigger. When the aircraft is cleared onto the runway for departure.
Ignition/Anti-Ice
AS REQD
The First Officer selects the IGNITION/ANTI-ICE as briefed for takeoff

Note
ANTI-ICE will be used any time that icing conditions are expected prior to setting climb thrust in the
After Takeoff Check.
CAS
[FO]
Verify
Checked
configuration of the aircraft, the states Verify Checked. The Captain also makes a final scan of the EICAS messages and
advises the First Officer to clear the messages by stating Checked. Before calling the checklist complete, both pilots
must verify that the T/O CONFIG OK Green Advisory message is displayed.
The First Officer will clear the CAS after verified Checked.
Runway Heading
Verify
Checked
Once the aircraft is lined up on the departure runway verify the compass heading and press the TOGA switches. Verify TO TO
in the FMA.
Takeoff.
WARNING
Failure to set the pitch trim appropriate to the computed center of gravity may result in
excessive rotation rate at takeoff.
Takeoff Roll (Normal).

Advance thrust levers to near vertical (just above 70% N1). This setting permits the engines to accelerate to a point from where
uniform acceleration to takeoff thrust will occur on both engines. The exact amount of the initial setting is not as important as
setting symmetrical thrust. After the engines are stabilized, the PF advances the thrust levers towards takeoff thrust and calls
Set thrust. The PM will set final takeoff thrust by 60 KIAS. The PM then calls Thrust set. The Captain will then put his
hand on the thrust levers until V1.
Above 60 KIAS, do not reduce thrust except as required to maintain engine parameters within operating limits (redline).
Thrust setting values for takeoff thrust and maximum continuous thrust are not considered limiting.
Keep the airplane on the runway centerline with rudder steering. The rudder becomes effective between 40 and 60 KIAS.
The maximum performance takeoff is the same as the normal takeoff except that the brakes are released only after takeoff
thrust N1 is achieved.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-46
30 AUG 10
Aft Center-of-Gravity Effects.

At aft CG and light weights, nosewheel steering effectiveness may be reduced. Hold the control wheel slightly forward to
improve nosewheel steering.
Rotation and Lift-off.
WARNING
Excessive rotation rates (exceeding 3 degrees per second) or overrotations may lead to
high pitch attitudes being attained while the aircraft is near the ground. This can reduce
stall margins significantly resulting in stick shaker / pusher activation and potentially loss
of control. Pilots must rotate smoothly towards the target pitch attitude then transition to
speed control.
At VR, rotate smoothly toward the target pitch attitude in one continuous motion. Use a rotation rate of approximately 3 per
second. Correct rotation technique is important to ensure that adequate performance is obtained. Lift-off will occur prior to
reaching initial climb target attitude. After lift-off and once a positive rate of climb has been established, select landing gear
up.
Crosswind Takeoff.
The aircraft demonstrates good crosswind control capability during the takeoff roll. Directional deviations should be corrected
immediately with smooth and positive control inputs.
The aileron becomes effective as the aircraft accelerates through approximately 80 KIAS. Use aileron as needed to maintain
wings level and rudder to maintain centerline.
See Limitations chapter of this book concerning thrust limits and brake release in crosswind conditions.
Initial Climb.
With all engines operating, adjust the pitch attitude to maintain V2 + 10 to 15 knots to the Flap Retraction Altitude (FRA).
Obstruction clearance, noise abatement, or departure procedures may require an immediate turn after takeoff. Minimum
airspeed for a turn after takeoff is V2 + 10 knots with flaps 8 or flaps 20. Turns at speeds less than V2 + 10 require the selection
of bank (1/2 BNK) to ensure adequate overbank protection.
For performance and obstacle clearance requirements, turns may begin no sooner than 50 ft. AFE. Normally, all turns required
for SID compliance, ATC request, or noise abatement cannot be initiated prior to 400 ft. AFE (reference page 9-1). Any
planned early turns between 50 ft. and 400 ft. AGL require crew briefing prior to departure and will not exceed 15 of bank.
At FRA (normally 1,000 ft. AFE), adjust the pitch attitude to maintain a slight climb rate while accelerating.
For a flaps 8 takeoff, at VT - 10 and a positive airspeed trend, select flaps up
For a flaps 20 takeoff, at V2 + 12 and a positive airspeed trend, select flaps 8. At VT - 10 and a positive airspeed trend,
select flaps up
After calling Flaps up, call for the After Takeoff Check.
4.6.7
After Takeoff Check (Silent, PM Flow).
General. This flow and check is used to configure the aircraft for climb/cruise.
Trigger. After the flaps are selected up, and the PF has called for the After Takeoff Check, the PM will perform the After
Takeoff flow and then read the After Takeoff Check silently. When the checklist is complete, the PM will state: After Takeoff
Check complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-47
9 MAY 11
After Takeoff Flow (PM).
FUEL X-FLOW ................................................................................................................................................................ AUTO

Bleeds/APU..........................................................................................................................................................Set/AS REQD
Thrust Reversers ...................................................................................................................................................................OFF
After Takeoff (Expanded).
Gear and Flaps
FUEL X-FLOW
UP
AUTO
XFLOW AUTO OVERRIDE switchlight ................................................................................................................. Select out

Bleeds/APU
Set/AS REQD
BLEED VALVES set (normally AUTO), and the APU as required
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-48
30 AUG 10
Thrust
Set
PM will confirm that the PF has placed the thrust levers in the CLIMB detent
Thrust Reversers
OFF
Climb.
Initial Climb Speed Determination.
If considerable maneuvering is necessary during the departure, a flaps-up maneuvering speed (flaps 0 speed + 10 knots
minimum) is required until the maneuvering phase is complete, and the airplane is enroute towards the destination. This will
ensure 30-degree bank stall protection plus a 15-degree overbank.
If there are no altitude or airspeed restrictions, accelerate to the desired climb speed schedule.
The speed schedule that follows presents the recommended climb speeds to be flown once above 3,000 feet AGL.
3,000 AGL to 10,000
10,000 and above
250 KIAS
290/.74 or CI001)
Climb at KIAS until it is equivalent to the desired climb Mach number, then transition to a Mach climb.
Recommended minimum climb airspeed below FL250 is 250 KIAS. Above FL250 consult the LOW AND HIGH SPEED
BUFFET BOUNDARIES charts in the SPEEDBOOK for minimum safe airspeeds.
Climbing Through 10,000 ft.
All non-essential external lights and the PED signs are turned off climbing through 10,000 feet. Turning off the PED signs is
the Flight Attendants indication that it is safe for him to stand and that sterile cockpit procedures no longer apply.
FMS Entries (In flight).
Normally the PF will request that the PM make the FMS entries in flight. Under low workload conditions, with the autopilot
ON, the PF may make FMS entries.
In order to maximize crew coordination and awareness, pilots are reminded to operate the FMS in a manner that guarantees
that one pilot is always alert to flight path control and traffic awareness. When the PF or PM edits the FMS, they must confirm
the accuracy of the modification before executing the change.
In order to maximize crew alertness and situational awareness, FMS editing should be kept to a minimum during the approach
phase.
Cruise.
The speed schedule that follows presents the recommended cruise speeds to be flown.
Cruise
290/.74 or CI001)
Cruise at the KIAS or Mach, whichever is less.
If ATC requests cruise speed other than 290/.74, reset Target Speed on VNAV CRUISE page to actual speed. When flying at
an altitude other than the filed cruise altitude, reset the Cruise Altitude on PERF INIT page.
Above FL250 consult the LOW AND HIGH SPEED BUFFET BOUNDARIES charts in the SPEEDBOOK for minimum safe
airspeeds.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-49
30 AUG 10
Recommended Holding Speeds.

A minimum speed of flaps 0 + 30 knots is recommended. Consult the LOW AND HIGH SPEED BUFFET BOUNDARIES
chart (1.5 G-LOAD) in the SPEEDBOOK for safe airspeed ranges.
Descent.
The speed schedule that follows presents the recommended descent speeds to be flown.
10,000 and Above
Below 10,000
Descend at a minimum VPA of 3.0.
The Mach/KIAS listed on the flight release or the cost index speed
listed on the TLR or from the onboard ACARS system. (i.e. .74/290
or CI001
250 KIAS
Descent Planning.
Good descent planning is necessary to arrive at the desired altitude at the correct speed and configuration while burning the
least amount of fuel. Typically, the distance used for a fuel efficient descent is 3 miles per 1,000 ft. of altitude. Starting your
descent later and using greater rates of descent is usually more fuel efficient, but passenger comfort and other factors must be
taken into consideration.
To determine your Top of Descent (TOD) point, multiply your altitude to lose (dropping the last 3 digits) by 3. Up to an
additional 5 miles may be needed to allow for the distance covered during a smooth entry into and exit from the descent. To
determine a rate of descent that will maintain a 3:1 ratio for the current flight conditions, divide your groundspeed by 2 and
then add an additional 0.
Example Descent Planning:
You are in cruise flight at 25,000 feet, 60 miles from MINGG intersection, at a groundspeed of 420 knots. ATC assigns
MINGG at 15,000 feet.
TOD = Altitude to Lose X 3 = 10(000) X 3 = 30
30 + 5 (for the transition distance) = 35
TOD = 35 miles from MINGG
Descent rate = Groundspeed 2 + 0
= 420 2 = 210 + 0 = 2100
Descent rate = 2100 fpm
If icing conditions are anticipated this may affect your ability to maintain a 3:1 descent. For a typical cruise altitude, 2 miles
for each 1,000 feet of anti-ice use may need to be added to the TOD point.
Descents will normally be initiated no earlier than the calculated or FMS generated TOD point. When using the FMS, a
minimum VPA (vertical path angle) of 3.0 should be used. If necessary to initiate a descent prior to the TOD point, descend at
a minimal rate (1000-1,500 fpm is usually acceptable to ATC) until leveling at the intermediate altitude or reaching the TOD
point. Once the TOD point is reached, resume the descent at the calculated optimal descent rate.
Arrival descents should normally be planned to arrive at 10,000 ft., 30 miles from the airport at a speed of 250 KIAS.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-50
9 MAY 11
Arrival Planning.
The crew should maintain an awareness of the destination weather and traffic situation and consider the requirements for a
potential diversion. The approach briefing should be completed as soon as practical, preferably before arriving at the TOD
point, so the crew may give full attention to airplane control.
As soon as practical, the crew will accomplish the following:
ATIS
Notify Flight Attendant
Notify Operations
Set V2GA, VT
Set up and brief planned approach

Preselect approach frequencies on both RTUs
Set DA (Precision Approach), MDA (Non-Precision Approach) or FRA (Visual Approach) on both PFDs as
applicable
Select bearing pointers (if required)
Note
To ensure positive aircraft control, the PF will either ask the PM to monitor the autopilot or transfer
aircraft control while the approach is being briefed. Do not transfer flight director.
Program FMS
Select STAR and approach and their respective transitions. Make any sequencing amendments necessary on the
LEGS page.
Insert VREF as a speed constraint on the LEGS page abeam the runway or MAP, dependent on the approach flown
With PF concurrence, execute the FMS modification (if appropriate)
Note
It is mandatory that both pilots verify all FMS lateral and vertical program information against the
current published procedures.
As a general rule, any time the NAV data is selected to FMS (white needles) the respective radio should
be in AUT (autotune).
Caution
If a discrepancy exists between the FMS and the published procedure, the published procedure must
be used. If time permits, modify the FMS data to conform to the published information. RNAV/GPS
approaches have restrictions based upon waypoints and ATD (Along Track Distance). Please see
FOM 5.10.16 for more details.
Stabilized Approach.
Approaches must be stabilized by 1000 AFE in IMC and VMC. A go-around must be initiated if any of the following
parameters are not met below the above altitudes:
Transitioning to 1000 fpm descent rate by 1000 ft. AFE (IMC or VMC)
On proper flightpath (visual or electronic) with only small changes in pitch and heading required to maintain that path
At a speed no less than VREF and not greater than VREF + 10 knots allowing for transitory conditions, with engines
spooled up
In trim
In an approved landing configuration
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4.6.8
4b-51
30 AUG 10
Descent Check (Challenge & Response, No Flow).
General. This checklist is used to prepare the aircraft for arrival.

Trigger. As soon as practical below FL180, accomplish the Descent Check. When the checklist is complete, the PM will
state: Descent Check complete.
Descent (Expanded).
Pressurization
PM
Set
The PM confirms that the destination airport landing field elevation is set
Altimeters
VERIFY
Landing Data
__.__ SET
PM
SET
The PM will request landing data for the estimated landing weight via ACARS. If the ACARS is not available, reference
the weight and balance form, TLR, and speed cards. Once determined the PM will set V2GA and VT for the estimated
landing weight on the ARP, and verify they are set on the PFDs.
Approach Briefing
PF
Complete
Comprehensive planning and a thorough briefing are key ingredients to a safe and professional approach. If the planned
approach runway is serviced by a Precision Approach, the instrument approach must be set up and briefed regardless of
weather conditions. If the planned approach runway is not serviced by a Precision Approach and IMC will not be encountered
during the approach, the Visual Approach from the FMS Database will be utilized and briefed.
The PFs instrument approach briefing must include these items:
1.
Identify the approach to be flown including Jeppesen page number (i.e. ILS 14R ORD page 21-6)
2.
Effective date and chart date
3.
Approach facility frequency
4.
Final approach course
5.
The Crossing Altitude on a Precision Approach or the minimum altitude at the FAF, as well as other expected step down
fixes, on a Non-Precision Approach and how the fix will be identified
6.
Decision Altitude or Minimum Descent Altitude and Height Above Touchdown with appropriate minimums
Note
The CRJ-701 is a category C aircraft for determining approach minimums.
7.
Touch Down Zone Elevation
8.
Highest MSA and navigation aid defining it
9.
Approach timing if applicable
10. Published or Planned Visual Descent Point (VDP) if applicable

11. Missed Approach Point and Instructions
12. Approach and Runway Lighting
13. Runway Length and Planned Route of Taxi to the Gate
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-52
9 MAY 11
The PF's Visual Approach briefing must include these items:

1.
Final Approach Course (from FMS Database)
2.
Airport Elevation
3.
Traffic Pattern Altitude, Entry Point and Direction of Turns
Note
Standard Traffic Pattern is 1500' AFE and left turns.
4.
Missed Approach Plan
5.
Approach and Runway Lighting
6.
Runway Length and Planned Route of Taxi to the Gate
The PF Instrument Approach and Visual Approach briefings will include specific references to weather, runway conditions,
and/or conditions that affect the controllability of the aircraft, as well as any information that needs clarification in order to
ensure that both pilots completely understand all aspects of the impending procedure. The following is a partial list of items to
be considered:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Ceiling and visibility

Windshear conditions/Recovery procedures (airspeed additives if required)
Icing conditions (need to start APU)
Runway conditions
Crosswind conditions
Aircraft configurations (Engine Out, Flapless Landing, etc.)
Significant terrain or obstacles in the terminal area
Example Instrument Approach Briefing.

This will be the ILS Approach for 14R at O'Hare page 21-6, dated 18 Aug 2000. Localizer frequency is 109.75. Inbound
course 142. Cross SEXXY at 2384 on glideslope. SEXXY is at 7.5 NM on the IORD DME. Decision altitude is 867. HAT
is 200. A minimum of 1800 RVR is required. TDZE is 667. The MSA around the OR outer marker is 2600. The missed
approach instructions are climb to 1200, then climbing right turn to 4000 inbound via DPA VOR R-085 to DPA VOR and
hold. The runway is equipped with ALSF-II approach lighting and a PAPI located on the right side of the runway. The
runway length is 13,000 long and plan to exit left at Tango 7, then taxi via Tango 7, Tango, and Alpha 10 to the gate. There
are no special considerations. Any questions?
CAS
VERIFY
Checked
The PM checks the EICAS messages to ensure that all displayed messages are normal for the current operational
configuration of the aircraft. The PM responds by saying Verify Checked. The PF also makes a final scan of the EICAS
messages and advises the PM to clear the messages by stating Checked.
Descending Through 10,000 ft.

The Captain will state, 10,000 feet, Sterile Cockpit. Turn on the external lights and PED signs. Turning on the PED sign is
the Flight Attendants indication that sterile cockpit procedures apply.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-53
9 MAY 11
Approach Navigation Setup.

The recommended method of switching to green NAV data from FMS is as follows:
Heading bug.................................................................................................................................................................... SYNC
Heading mode.................................................................................................................................................................. Select
RTU ............................................................................................................................................. Select appropriate frequency
NAV source ................................................................................................................... Green needle-Confirm correct course
FCP ..................................................................................................................................................... Select appropriate mode
Note
All radio navigation aids used for final approach guidance must be identified. If the NAV SOURCE
block on the PFD displays the identifier (i.e. DME), there is no need to aurally identify the navaid.
Approach
ILS
LOC
LDA3
BCRS
VOR1
VOR2
GPS OR RNAV
4, 5
PF
LOC
LOC
LOC
PM
LOC
LOC
LOC
FCP Selection
APPR
NAV
NAV
LOC
FMS
LOC
VOR
B/C
NAV
VOR
VOR
NAV
FMS
FMS
NAV
If a VOR approach is retrieved from the FMS database, lateral navigation using the FMS is permitted, provided the off-side
RTU is tuned to the appropriate station frequency (AUTotune is not selected) and the off-side bearing pointer is displayed on
the PFs PFD at all times on the approach.
2To be used when the VOR approach is not retrieved from the database and/or FMS navigation is not used. There is no
requirement to display the off-side bearing pointer in this configuration.
3
If LDA approach has a glideslope AND has a published DA (not MDA), pilots may use the APPR mode.
4The database for a GPS or RNAV approach has restrictions based upon waypoints and ATD (Along Track Distance). Please
see FOM 5.10.16 for more details.
5
RNP approaches prohibited.
4.6.9
Before Landing Check (Challenge & Response, PM Flow).
General. This flow and check is used to ensure the aircraft is configured for landing.
Trigger. The Before Landing Flow will be accomplished when the aircraft is cleared for the approach. When the PF calls
Flaps 45, Before Landing Check, the PM will complete the Before Landing Check state: Before Landing Check complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-54
9 MAY 11
Before Landing Flow (PM).
Flight Attendant .......................................................................................................................................... Advise

PM cycles the NO PED switch OFF then ON slowly to give two chimes
Passenger Signs .................................................................................................................................................ON
The PM confirms that the SEAT BELTS White Status message is displayed
Thrust Reversers ........................................................................................................................................ Arm
Before Landing (Expanded).

Thrust Reversers
Verify
Down, 3 Green
The PM selects the LDG GEAR lever to the DN position when directed by the PF. During the checklist, both pilots verify
that 3 green DN gear symbols are displayed.
Flaps
Armed
The PM confirms that the L REV ARMED and R REV ARMED Green Advisory messages are displayed
Landing Gear
PM
Verify
Ensure the Flaps are at 45 and the slats are full at 25 for a normal landing.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

__ Indicating

Normal Checklists
4b-55
9 MAY 11
4.6.10 After Landing Check (Silent, FO Flow).

General. This flow and check is used to ensure the aircraft is ready to taxi to parking.
Trigger. After the aircraft has cleared the active runway the Captain will call for After Landing Checklist. The First Officer
will accomplish the after landing flow followed by the after landing checklist. When the checklist is complete the First Officer
will state, After Landing Checklist Complete.
After Landing Flow (FO).
Lights/NO PED.............................................................................................................................. .As Req'd / Off

APU ....................................................................................................................................... ..As Req'd
FLAPS ...........................................................................................................................................Up
Transponder/Radar ........................................................................................................................... ..As Req'd / Off
PSA Airlines, Inc.


4b-56
9 MAY 11

Normal Checklists
Single Engine Taxi in After Landing or Return to the Gate (FO)

The First Officer will complete the After Landing Flow and Checklist. The First Officer will notify the Captain when the
engines have been at or near idle for 2 minutes. Unless conditions require two engine taxi, the Captain will instruct the First
Officer to shutdown the left engine. The First Officer will select the AC electrics synoptic page and ensure GEN 2 is supplying
electrical power.
Operate engines at idle for 2 minutes prior to shutdown

4.6.11 Shutdown Check (Challenge & Response, C & FO Flow).

General. This flow and check is used to shutdown and secure the aircraft at the gate for passenger deplaning. This is a flowpatterned Challenge and Response checklist with one FFD item. If the APU is not running, the crew will wait for external AC
power to be plugged in before shutting down the right engine.
Trigger. After the aircraft is parked at the gate.
Shutdown Flow (C & FO).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-57
9 MAY 11
Captain (C)
First Officer (FO)
PARKING BRAKE ............................................ SET/Check

Electrics............................................................................ Set
Fuel Check Valve............................................. Check (FFD)
Thrust Levers .......................................................SHUTOFF
PASSENGER SIGNS .................................................... OFF
HYDRAULIC Pump 3A................................................ OFF
BEACON ....................................................................... OFF
N/W STRG..................................................................... OFF
Fuel Pumps .................................................................... OFF

ANTI-ICE...................................................................... OFF
WINDSHIELD HEAT .......................................... As Reqd
TRANSPONDER .......................................................... OFF
Shutdown (Expanded).
PARKING BRAKE
SET/Checked

Electrics
[C]
[C]
SET
Ensure AC power is supplied from External Power or the APU by selecting the AC Synoptic Page
Fuel Pumps
[FO]
OFF
L & R BOOST PUMP switchlights........................................................................................................................... Select out

ANTI-ICE
[FO]
OFF
LH & RH PROBES switches .............................................................................................................................................OFF

WING ANTI-ICE switch....................................................................................................................................................OFF
LH & RH COWL ANTI-ICE switches ..............................................................................................................................OFF
Windshield Heat
[FO]
As Reqd
If the OAT is in excess of 25C, select the LH and RH WSHLD HEAT switches to OFF
TRANSPONDER
[FO]
Fuel Check Valve
[C]
OFF
Checked
On the first flight of the day, perform the fuel check valve verification after shutting down the right engine
Right Engine ................................................................................................................................................................. SHUTOFF

Both fuel pumps .......................................................................................................................................................................OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Normal Checklists
4b-58
30 AUG 10
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
R FUEL LO PRESS
Thrust Levers
[C]
SHUTOFF
The engines must be operated at or near IDLE for a minimum of 2 minutes prior to shutdown to dissipate heat. Taxi time is
usually sufficient to satisfy this requirement.
Passenger Signs
[C]
OFF
Hydraulic Pump 3A
[C]
OFF
Turn off hydraulic pump 3A after the chocks are inserted to reduce pump wear
BEACON
[C]
OFF
Nosewheel Steering
[C]
OFF
4.6.12 Securing Check (Silent, No Flow).

General. This checklist is used to secure the aircraft during an extended period prior to the next flight, this includes
overnights. This is a Silent checklist that can be done by either pilot.
Trigger. When all passengers are off the aircraft and electrical power is no longer required.
Securing
Chocks/brakes.........................................................................................................................................................................In/set
Thrust Reversers ........................................................................................................................................................................ Off
Emergency Lights...................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Windshield Heat ........................................................................................................................................................................ Off
Cargo Fan .................................................................................................................................................................................. Off
Hydraulic/oxygen Quantity ...............................................................................................................................................Checked
Check the level of all three hydraulic systems. This level should be in the range of 45% to 85%
If outside of this range, contact maintenance for specific pressure based upon temperature.
Check the oxygen level to ensure adequate level. (Ref 4.6.2)
Hydraulic Pumps ....................................................................................................................................................................... Off
External Lights (Except Nav) .................................................................................................................................................... Off
Apu Start/stop ............................................................................................................................................................................ Off
Apu Pwr/fuel.............................................................................................................................................................................. Off
Dc Service.................................................................................................................................................................................. Off
Battery Master ........................................................................................................................................................................... Off
Dome Light................................................................................................................................................................................ Off
External Power Switchlight ....................................................................................................................................................... Off
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental Procedures
Table of Contents
5-i
12 FEB 10
Chapter 5: Supplemental Procedures

5.1
Engine Start (External Air) <-200> ........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2
Engine Start (External Air) <-701> ........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3
Engine Start (Cross-Bleed) <-200> ....................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4
Engine Start (Cross-Bleed) <-701> ....................................................................................................... 5-3
5.5
Engine Start (Battery with External Air) <-200> .................................................................................. 5-4
5.6
Engine Start (Battery with External Air) <-701> .................................................................................. 5-5
5.7
Unpressurized Takeoff or Landing <-200> .......................................................................................... 5-5
5.8
Unpressurized Takeoff or Landing <-701> .......................................................................................... 5-6
5.9
Single Engine Turn Procedures............................................................................................................ 5-7
5.10 RNAV OPERATIONS ..............................................................................................................................

5.10.1 Required Equipment ...........................................................................................................................
5.10.2 Inoperative Equipment ........................................................................................................................
5.10.3 Altitude Restrictions ............................................................................................................................
5.10.4 RNP ....................................................................................................................................................
5.10.5 Waypoints ...........................................................................................................................................
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5.11
Fuel Balance And Gravity Crossflow Procedure ................................................................................ 5-9
5.12
AHRS Operation in Localized Magnetic Field Anomalies ................................................................ 5-11
5.13
External AC Power Procedures .......................................................................................................... 5-12
5.14
Flaps Fail Ferry information................................................................................................................ 5-12
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental Procedures
Table of Contents
5-ii
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
Engine Start (External Air) <-200>
5-1
30 AUG 10
Chapter 5: Supplemental
5.1

Note
Complete the Before Start Check prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After Start Check after
IGNITION (A or B)..........................................................................................................................................................ARM
14TH STAGE BLEED AIR switchlights......................................................................................................................... Open
APU LCV .........................................................................................................................................................................Close
Note
Coordinate air supply with ground crew just prior to engine start and to shut off external air source during a
NO STARTER CUTOUT.
R ENG .......................................................................................................................................................................... START

Right Thrust Lever........................................................................................................................................ Advance to IDLE
Engine instruments ................................................................................................................... Monitor until start is complete
Note
If the ENG STOP switchlight does not clear a NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message, you must shut
down the enigne and remove external air pressure.

Before starting other engine:
Fuel Check Valve Operational Check....................................Complete
L ENG......................................................................................................................................................................AS REQD
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
5-2
30 AUG 10
5.2

Note
Complete the Before Start Check prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After Start Check after
Note
Coordinate air supply with ground crew just prior to engine start and to shut off external air source during a
NO STARTER CUTOUT.
BLEED VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................... CLSD

R ENG...........................................................................................................................................................................START
Right Thrust Lever ........................................................................................................................................ Advance to IDLE
Engine instruments....................................................................................................................Monitor until start is complete
Note
If the ENG STOP switchlight does not clear a NO STARTER CUTOUT Amber Caution message, you must shut
down the enigne and remove external air pressure.

Fuel Check Valve Operational Check ................................... Complete
L ENG ..................................................................................................................................................................... AS REQD
After start is complete:
BLEED VALVES .......................................................................................................................................................... AUTO
5.3
Engine Start (Cross-Bleed) <-200>

Caution
Before attempting a cross-bleed start, do not exceed 75% N1 for 2 minutes on operating engine after
start, or until all operating indications are in the normal range, whichever is longer.
Note
Complete the Before Start Check in its entirety prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the
After Start Check after accomplishing this procedure.
HYDRAULIC Pumps ................................................................................................................................................... All ON
IGNITION (A or B) ......................................................................................................................................................... ARM
10TH STAGE BLEED (operating engine) .......................................................................................................................Open
APU LCV......................................................................................................................................................................... Close
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
5-3
12 FEB 10
14TH STAGE BLEED AIR switchlights......................................................................................................................... Open

ECS page .......................................................................................................................................................Select & Monitor
Thrust Lever (operating engine) ..................................................................................................................................Advance
To achieve 60 psi (approximately 85% N2)
ENG (L or R) ................................................................................................................................................................ START

Applicable Thrust Lever ............................................................................................................................... Advance to IDLE

Thrust Levers ....................................................................................................................................................................IDLE
HYDRAULIC Pumps..............................................................................................................................................AUTO/ON
5.4

Caution
Before attempting a cross-bleed start, do not exceed 75% of N1 for 2 minutes on operating engine after
start, or until all operating indications are in the normal range, whichever is longer.
Note
Complete the Before Start Check in its entirety prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the
After Start Check after accomplishing this procedure.
HYDRAULIC Pumps.................................................................................................................................................... All ON
BLEED VALVES...........................................................................................................................................................AUTO
ECS page .......................................................................................................................................................Select & Monitor
Thrust Lever (operating engine) ..................................................................................................................................Advance
To achieve a minimum of 42 psi (maximum 80% N2)
ENG (L or R) ................................................................................................................................................................ START

Applicable Thrust Lever ............................................................................................................................... Advance to IDLE

Thrust Levers ....................................................................................................................................................................IDLE
HYDRAULIC Pumps..............................................................................................................................................AUTO/ON
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
Engine Start (Battery with External Air) <-200>
5-4
12 FEB 10
5.5

Note
Complete the Before Start Check prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After Start
Check after accomplishing this procedure.
L BOOST PUMP .................................................................................................................................................................ON

IGNITION B .................................................................................................................................................................... ARM
L ENG ...........................................................................................................................................................................START
IGNITION B Green Advisory message on

L ENGINE START White Status message on
10TH ISOL OPEN White Status message on
L & R 10TH SOV CLSD White Status messages out
Left Thrust Lever .......................................................................................................................................... Advance to IDLE
IGNITION B Green Advisory message out

L ENGINE START White Status message out
ITT is 450C - 600C
N1 stabilizes and does not drop below 22 - 25%
N2 is between 62.9 - 64.0%
Gen 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................ON
L ENG OIL PRESS normal (above 25 psi)
External air supply ....................................................................................................................................................... Remove
Note
If the NO STRTR CUTOUT Amber Caution message appears, pressing the applicable ENG STOP
switchlight should be all that is required to close the start valve and stop the airflow to the air turbine
starter (ATS). On the ground, should the ENG STOP action not resolve the problem, you must
shutdown the engine and remove the external air source.
Caution
off the external air source during a NO STRTR CUTOUT Amber Caution message condition.
Fuel Check Valve Operational Check ................................... Complete
L & R BOOST PUMPs ........................................................................................................................................................ON
HYDRAULIC Pump 2B ......................................................................................................................................................ON
R ENG............................................................................................................................................................ Cross-bleed start
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
5.6
5-5
12 FEB 10

Note
Complete the Before Start Check prior to accomplishing this procedure. Complete the After Start
Check after accomplishing this procedure.
L BOOST PUMP................................................................................................................................................................. ON
BLEED VALVES............................................................................................................................................................CLSD
External air supply....................................................................................................................................................Connected
CONT IGNITION ............................................................................................................................................................... ON
Note
If the NO STRTR CUTOUT Amber Caution message appears, pressing the applicable ENG STOP
switchlight should be all that is required to close the start valve and stop the airflow to the air turbine
starter (ATS). On the ground, should the ENG STOP action not resolve the problem, you must
shutdown the engine and remove the external air source.
Caution
off the external air source during a NO STRTR CUTOUT Amber Caution message condition.
L ENG........................................................................................................................................................................... START
Left Thrust Lever.......................................................................................................................................... Advance to IDLE
External air supply........................................................................................................................................................Remove
CONT IGNITION ............................................................................................................................................................... Off
Fuel Check Valve Operational Check....................................Complete
L & R BOOST PUMPs ....................................................................................................................................................... ON
HYDRAULIC Pump 2B...................................................................................................................................................... ON
R ENG ............................................................................................................................................................Cross-bleed start
5.7
Unpressurized Takeoff or Landing <-200>
The procedures outlined below are recommended when performing a zero-engine bleed takeoff or landing with the APU
inoperative.
Before Takeoff.
AIR CONDITIONING PACKs..........................................................................................................................................OFF
10TH STAGE ISOL valve .............................................................................................................................................Closed
10TH STAGE L & R BLEED AIR switchlights....................................................................................................... CLOSED
PRESS CONT....................................................................................................................................................................Auto
RAM AIR VALVE......................................................................................................................................................... OPEN
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
5-6
12 FEB 10
After takeoff.
Note
If an engine failure occurs, delay turning on the bleeds until after obstacle clearance is assured.
At a safe altitude, preferably between 1,000 and 3,000 AFE:
10TH STAGE L & R BLEED AIR switchlights ..............................................................................................................Open
AIR CONDITIONING PACKs ........................................................................................................................................... On
RAM AIR VALVE .......................................................................................................................................................... Close
Landing.
AIR CONDITIONING, L PACK ...................................................................................................................................... OFF
AIR CONDITIONING, R PACK ...................................................................................................................................... OFF
10TH STAGE, L & R BLEED AIR switchlights ......................................................................................................CLOSED
RAM AIR valve .............................................................................................................................................................. OPEN
Note
5.8
The procedures outlined below are recommended when performing a zero-engine bleed takeoff or landing with the APU
inoperative.
Before Takeoff.
PRESS CONT ................................................................................................................................................................... Auto
L & R PACKs .................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
After takeoff.
Note
If an engine failure occurs, delay turning on the PACKs until after obstacle clearance is assured.
At a safe altitude, preferably between 1,000 and 3,000 AFE:
RAM AIR valve ............................................................................................................................................................... Close
L & R PACKs ...................................................................................................................................................................... On
Landing.
When below 10,000 ft.:
PRESS CONT .....................................................................................................................................................Confirm Auto
L & R PACKs .................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
LDG ELEV ........................................................................................................ Set to 3,000 ft. above landing field elevation
Note
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Supplemental
Single Engine Turn Procedures
5.9
5-7
12 FEB 10
Single Engine Turn Procedures
With an inoperative APU or APU load control valve, external air will be required for engine starts. Single engine turn
procedures will only be used in the unlikely event that external air is not available. Upon reaching the destination airport gate,
do NOT shut down the right engine prior to reviewing the 'single engine turn procedures.' This process must be coordinated
with maintenance control and one pilot must remain in the flight deck. There must be enough ramp agents at the aircraft to
ensure that passengers are not allowed aft of the main entry door or past the nose of the aircraft.
If operations advises upon in-range call that external air will not be available for engine start, the crew must notify them of the
following:
An engine will be running at all times during the turn process;
Aircraft must be parked in an area where it is safe for an engine to remain running at all times AND a cross bleed start can
be performed. (i.e. not too close to terminal building, parked equipment etc.);
Station personnel must advise refueling personnel not to hook-up or begin fueling process until after plane is completely
unloaded and right engine is shut down.
The process will be accomplished as follows:
1. Upon reaching the gate DO NOT immediately shut down right engine. Leave the right engine running until all passengers
and bags have been unloaded.
Note
If a quick turn is desired and the station is prepared to board the outgoing flight, passengers and bags
may be loaded. This will eliminate the need for the last crossbleed start.
2. After confirming the left side of the plane is clear of all passengers, bags and ground personnel, start left engine via Engine
start (cross-bleed) in POH Chapter 5.
3. Upon completion of step 2, right engine may be shut down to accomplish fueling process.
4. After fueling is complete, re-start right engine via Engine start (crossbleed) in POH Chapter 5 and shut down left engine.
5. Once left engine is secure, notify station personnel they may begin loading of passengers and baggage for departure with
right engine operating for bleed air and electrical power.
5.10
RNAV OPERATIONS
5.10.1 Required Equipment. To file for and fly Q routes and Type 1 and 2 procedures, the following equipment is
required:
Type 1 procedures GPS and flight director. Pilots must use the flight director if hand flying, or engage the autopilot.
Type 2 procedures GPS or dual DME receivers. Pilots are encouraged to use the flight director and autopilot.
Q routes GPS.
5.10.2 Inoperative Equipment. Should the FMS, GPS, or flight director be inop/deferred, pilots must ensure that
no route or procedure requiring their operation be filed or flown. If the FMS, for whatever reason, is not using GPS position
data as part of its own position calculations, a GPS NOT AVAILABLE message will be displayed in the FMS CDU. This
message can be either white or yellow for different phases of flight, but in either case pilots must advise ATC and request an
amended clearance as necessary. Currently PSA aircraft use the equipment suffix Q when filing flight plans. Any loss of GPS
capability will result in changes to both the equipment suffix and routing filed by dispatch on subsequent flights.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
RNAV OPERATIONS
5-8
30 AUG 10
5.10.3 Altitude Restrictions. If an RNAV DP contains altitude restrictions, the Ops Spec requires that the flight
crew be able to determine if altitude restrictions can be satisfied given the ambient conditions at the time of departure. The
method of compliance is listed below, and is only required when flying DPs containing altitude restrictions.
Determine ISA deviation for takeoff using the following chart:
Airport Elevation
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
Standard ISA C
15.0
13.0
11.1
9.1
7.1
5.1
3.1
1.1
-0.8
Example:
ATIS temp = 18 C

During the preflight performance initialization, go to PERF INIT page 2. Enter the calculated ISA deviation in the
corresponding field. This will allow the FMS to compare known aircraft performance at the planned takeoff weight
with charted altitude restrictions to determine if the altitude restrictions can be satisfied given the ambient
conditions at departure. Inability to meet any altitude restriction(s) will present as a yellow UNABLE FPLN ALT
message on the FMS CDU and the associated altitude turning yellow on the LEGS page. If unable to comply with
charted altitude restrictions, pilots will advise ATC and request an amended clearance as necessary.
5.10.4 RNP. Each Type 2 procedure will specify the RNP to be used. Prior to beginning the procedure, enter the required
RNP value on PROG page 2. Once the aircraft has completed the procedure, go to PROG page 2 and replace the RNP value
with 1.0 for enroute GPS coverage.
5.10.5 Waypoints. Some RNAV procedures contain flyover waypoints. As the name implies, pilots must fly over
these waypoints before turning versus allowing the aircraft to lead the turn past the waypoint. This is accomplished by adding
/0 (slash zero) to a waypoint name in the FMS. The map will show the waypoint with an arrow after it pointing to the
subsequent route reflecting that the point will be flown over before a turn on course is initiated. If a flyover is no longer
necessary, pilots must delete and re-enter the waypoint (minus the /0 suffix) and execute the route change.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
Fuel Balance And Gravity Crossflow Procedure
5.11
5-9
12 FEB 10
Fuel balance awareness is critical when powered crossflow in not available to balance fuel. It is important that crews know
how to maintain a balanced fuel system, know how to correct a fuel imbalance, and how to apply the QRH Fuel Imbalance
procedure properly.
To maintain fuel balance:
After fueling, assure fuel is properly balanced

Use symmetrical engine thrust during flight
No single engine taxi if APU/XFLOW pump is deferred
Restrict the use of the APU to operational necessity when the APU/XFLOW pump is inoperative
During single engine operations with the powered XFLOW inoperative it will be necessary to monitor the fuel balance and
correct any imbalances with the gravity XFLOW
Note
With the powered XFLOW system inoperative, APU operation will be sustained through fuel feed
from the right hand engine. With the left hand engine operating APU may fluctuate or flame out.
To correct a fuel imbalance:
If a fuel imbalance of 200 lbs. or greater exists, the FSC automatically initiates fuel crossflow between wing tanks. Use
manual XFLOW or Gravity XFLOW, as necessary, when auto system is inoperative.
Fuel should be balanced manually anytime the fuel imbalance is 200 lbs. or greater and the Auto X/FLOW system is
inoperative
When the powered crossflow (auto/manual) system is inoperative, the flight crew can select the GRAVITY XFLOW
switchlight on the Fuel Control Panel. This will open the gravity X/FLOW shutoff valve to allow fuel transfer, by gravity,
between wing tanks.
Note
When performing fuel balance using gravity X/FLOW system the transfer is not immediate and the
rate of transfer can vary. Gravity X/FLOW can be enhanced by using a steady heading side-slip
maneuver. A steady heading side-slip maneuver is recommended to provide a positive fuel flow to the
low fuel tank.
To correctly accomplish the steady heading side-slip maneuver during flight:
GRAVITY X/ FLOW SWITCHLIGHT...................................................................................................................PRESS IN
GRAV XFLOW INHIB White Status message on, and

OPEN light on
RUDDER PRESSURE ..............................................................................................APPLY ON SIDE WITH MORE FUEL
Note
This will position the SLIP/SKID indicator brick towards the low fuel tank side.
Caution
Steady heading side-slip maneuvers should NOT exceed one half brick of uncoordinated flight, and
should NOT be attempted when flaps are extended, when in icing conditions or above FL 250.
CLOCK......................................................................................................................................................................... START
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
5-10
12 FEB 10
AFTER ONE MINUTE:
RUDDER PRESSURE.............................................................................................................................................RELEASE
AFTER 30 SECONDS:
FUEL QUANTITY/BALANCE ........................................................................................................................... RE-CHECK
REPEAT AS NECESSARY TO BALANCE FUEL
When fuel is balanced:
GRAVITY FLOW SWITCHLIGHT ................................................................................................................... PRESS OUT
GRAV XFLOW INHIB White Status message out, and

OPEN light off
Fuel transfer rates may vary when using the steady heading side-slip maneuver. It is recommended to recheck fuel quantity
and balance after one minute of gravity crossflow in uncoordinated flight. To check quantity and balance maintain level
coordinated flight for 30 seconds. Repeat procedure as needed to balance fuel.
QRH Fuel Imbalance procedure:
The QRH procedure will be completed any time a FUEL IMBALANCE Amber Caution message appears on the EICAS. The
following information is supplemental to the QRH Fuel Imbalance procedure and only attempts to provide a better
understanding of the procedure.
For steady heading side slip maneuvers, see the supplemental procedure above
If gravity crossflow does not correct the imbalance:
Do not attempt to balance fuel with the use of asymmetrical thrust unless the gravity cross flow method is deemed
ineffective
Caution
The decision to shutdown an engine due to a fuel imbalance situation should be carefully considered.
Lateral controllability problems may occur, but at fuel imbalance levels greater than the 800 lb. fuel
balance limitation. Pilots must weigh all factors when deciding to continue to the closest available
airport with a fuel imbalance or with an engine shutdown. Idle thrust on the low tank side should be
sufficient to correct a fuel imbalance in the event all other methods of fuel crossflow fail.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Supplemental
AHRS Operation in Localized Magnetic Field Anomalies
5.12
5-11
12 FEB 10
AHRS Operation in Localized Magnetic Field Anomalies
When the EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution message is displayed in conjunction with the HDG comparator flag(s) during
ground operations, magnetic interference with the wing mounted AHRS flux valves from proximate ground equipment or
localized magnetic field anomalies may be responsible. In most cases, as the aircraft taxis away from the gate area and
associated ground equipment the Caution message disappears. If the message persists, apply the following procedure:
Caution
At any time during this procedure, if the crew is certain that the aircraft has been removed from all
sources of magnetic anomalies and the discrepancies still persist, a system failure has occurred. Do
not takeoff. Contact Maintenance and enter discrepancy in aircraft logbook.
Once clear of the gate area:
EFIS and standby instruments .......................................................................................................... Cross check to determine
which AHRS has been affected.
Affected AHRS.......................................................................................................Slew to standby compass heading (MAG)
Verify EFIS COMP MON
Amber Caution message is no longer displayed.
Note
It may be necessary to perform this procedure for both of the AHRS as the anomalies may have
affected both systems, although to different degrees.
If the EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution message/significant different between AHRS heading and standby compass
heading reoccurs or if departing from specific runways where known local magnetic fields or magnetic anomalies cause EFIS
COMP MON Amber Caution message and the HDG comparator flag(s) to appear, the following procedure may be used
within 10 minutes of departure:
PFD1 and PFD2........................................................................................................... Cross check displayed heading(s) with
the standby compass. Switch the affected
AHRS compass switch(es) to DG mode
and slew to standby compass heading.
Verify EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution
message is not displayed.
On the runway ............................................................................................................ Cross check PFD1 and PFD2 displayed
heading(s) with known runway heading
and re-slew as required. Verify no
EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution
message is displayed.
After takeoff, when established in straight and level flight at a constant airspeed:
COMPASS switch(es) ................................................................................................................. MAG mode (one at a time if
both in DG mode). Verify that
neither the EFIS COMP MON Amber Caution
message or HDG comparator flag(s)
are displayed.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


5-12
30 AUG 10
5.13
Supplemental
If you leave the aircraft while connected to External AC Power and are not completing the Securing Checklist the following
CHOCKS/BRAKES...................................................................................................................................................... IN/SET
CAPT, FO, PEDESTAL LIGHTING (DSPL, INTEG, FLOOD)...................................................................................... OFF
STBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR............................................................................................... CAGED (IF APPLICABLE)
EMER LTS......................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
DOME LIGHT ................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
DC SERVICE..................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
BATTERY MASTER ........................................................................................................................................................ OFF
If you arrive at the aircraft and the battery master is off and the flight deck is dark, perform the Safety and Power On Checklist
then the Acceptance Checklist. Ensure that the flight deck lighting is set to appropriate levels.
5.14
Flaps Fail Ferry information
In the event of the need for a ferry flight with Flaps selected to the 8 or 20 position, this will provide information to verify that
the ferry flight is performed complete and accurate. This information is compliant with Bombardier Service Letter RJ-SL-27077 Rev A.
Maximum airspeed with Flaps at 8 or 20 degrees is 230 KIAS.

Maximum altitude is 15,000 ft.
Do not hold in icing conditions.
All Hydraulic B pumps must be selected ON before each takeoff and landing.
As far as it is practical, avoid the following environmental conditions:
1. Severe turbulence during flight.
2. Moderate or severe icing during cruise or holding.
3. Severe icing during climb or descent.
Normal mission fuel requirements based on normal flight altitudes and speeds are increased as follows:
1. By 25% for flights at 8 degrees flaps.
2. By 90% for flights at 20 degrees flaps.
3. This increase in fuel will be included in the HOLD fuel section of the release. The dispatcher will document the number
of pounds added to the holding section in the remarks section.
The time enroute will be computed at 220 KIAS and the dispatcher will document this time in the remarks section of the
release.
For climb performance with one engine inoperative, maintain a speed of V2, flaps at 8 or 20 degrees, APR thrust on the live
engine.
The vertical descent rate should be < 360 ft/min at touchdown.
Landing with 8 or 20 degrees flaps should be in accordance with the QRH FLAPS FAIL procedure.
Landing gear and flap indication will remain posted on the EICAS for entire flight.
FLAPS FAIL message may remain posted on the EICAS for entire flight.
EICAS/AURAL warning message CONFIG FLAPS will be posted during takeoff.
T/O CONFIG OK advisory message will not be posted prior to takeoff.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Ground Low Pressure Air
01-11
1 JUNE 11
CRJ POH Bulletin 01-11

Instructions: Insert POH Bulletin 01-11 in the CRJ Pilot Operating Handbook facing page 5-12.
Purpose. To Clarify door position when aircraft is left unattended with ground LOW pressure air hooked up.
Effective: Immediately Upon receipt
Applicability: All PSA Airlines Inc. CL600-2B19 (CRJ-200) aircraft and CL600-2C10 (CRJ-701).
5.15 Ground Low Pressure Air

WARNING
To prevent the aircraft from being pressurized on the ground, make sure the outer handle of the main
cabin door is in the NOT STOWED position when Ground Low Pressure Air is connected to the
aircraft and the main cabin door is closed.
Do not open the passenger door if Ground Low Pressure Air is supplying air to the aircraft and the
door handle is stowed. Contact maintenance on guidance opening the aircraft. The aircraft may be
pressurized and the door can open with explosive force. Injuries to persons and/or damage to
equipment can occur.
When the aircraft is left unattended (without crew) it must be secure. (See FOM 4.8.6.) The CRJ can remain hooked up with
ground LOW pressure air with the aircraft secure. When the main cabin door is closed, ensure that the door is in the "not
stowed" position prior to leaving the aircraft (Figure 2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
(Figure 1) The handle of the door is flush in the "Stowed" position; the aircraft is Secure and may be Pressurized.
(Figure 2) The handle of the door is extended to the first notch, "Not Stowed"; the pressurization flap will be open. This
allows any pressure in the cabin to escape while the door latch mechanism is still secure. The door will be flush with the
fuselage. The aircraft is Secure and will not be Pressurized.
(Figure 3) The handle of the door is fully extended. The aircraft is not secure and the aircraft will not pressurize.
This manual may contain Sensitive Security Information that is controlled under 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. No portion of this
manual may be disclosed to persons without a need to know, as defined in 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520, except with the written
permission of the Administrator of the Transportation Security Administration or the Secretary of Transportation. Unauthorized
release may result in civil penalty or other action. For U.S. government agencies, public disclosure is governed by 5 U.S.C.
552 and 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. PSA Airlines, Inc
PSA Airlines, Inc.


01-11
1 JUNE 11

Note
This procedure does NOT apply to leaving the aircraft with the APU operating and supplying bleed
air. The main cabin door must NOT be closed, stowed or not stowed, if the APU is operating. (See
FOM 4.8.6)
Bombardier has approved this procedure to comply with the requirements of the door open placard
located on the Low Pressure Air access door.
This manual may contain Sensitive Security Information that is controlled under 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. No
portion of this manual may be disclosed to persons without a need to know, as defined in 49 CFR parts 15 and
PSA Airlines, Inc.
1520, except with the written permission of the Administrator of the Transportation Security Administration or the
of Transportation. Unauthorized release may result in civil penalty or other action. For U.S. government
CRJ Pilot Operating HandbookSecretary
agencies, public disclosure is governed by 5 U.S.C. 552 and 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. PSA Airlines, Inc.

Immediate Actions
Table of Contents
6-i
12 FEB 10
Chapter 6: Immediate Actions

6.1
Crew Coordination ................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2
Passenger Evacuation........................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3
Immediate Action Items.........................................................................................................................
6.3.1
BRAKING LOSS/ASYMMETRY .......................................................................................................
6.3.2
CABIN ALT Msg or EMERGENCY DESCENT PROCEDURE ..........................................................
6.3.3
DOUBLE-ENGINE FAILURE ..............................................................................................................
6.3.4
SMOKE/FUMES ................................................................................................................................
6.3.5
<200> STAB TRIM RUNAWAY ..........................................................................................................
6.3.6
<701> STAB TRIM RUNAWAY ..........................................................................................................
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
Table of Contents
6-ii
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
Crew Coordination
6-1
12 FEB 10
Chapter 6: Immediate Actions

6.1
Crew Coordination
General.
Well-executed procedures are the best defense against emergency or abnormal conditions when they arise. While the Quick
Reference Handbook (QRH) establishes a foundation for these procedures, this section incorporates additional operational
details necessary to insure a standardized crewmember response.
Emergency and abnormal situations are rare occurrences. Unlike normal procedures, there are few opportunities to practice
emergencies during the daily flight routine. The strategies outlined in this section should be reviewed regularly to insure a safe
outcome should an emergency or abnormal situation arise.
The basic rules stated below can be applied to the majority of emergency or abnormal conditions:
1. PF Maintains Aircraft Control
2. Identify the Non-normal
Either pilot can state the malfunction or problem
Either pilot cancels the warning
3. Accomplish Immediate Action Items
4. Captain Assigns PF duties
5. Complete QRH Procedures
6. Establish and Communicate a Plan
Maintain Aircraft Control.
This duty is assigned to the PF as a primary duty regardless of the type of condition. Depending on the nature of the condition,
the autopilot should be used to ease pilot workload. If the autopilot is utilized, the PF is always responsible for monitoring its
functions.
Identify and Communicate the Non-normal Condition.
Effective teamwork in the cockpit begins with good communication skills. Ensure that your fellow crewmembers are aware of
the problem. A non-normal condition should be announced clearly and concisely by the first pilot that recognizes the
condition. The initial announcement should be confirmed aloud by the other pilot so that each crewmember has acknowledged
the condition.
Crewmembers should silence any aural or visual warning as soon as the cause of the warning is recognized.
Accomplish Immediate Action Items.
In all cases when airborne, the following shall be confirmed by the PF before the PM takes action:
Thrust levers
Engine fire push switchlights
Generator switches
Fuel boost pump switchlights
All other guarded switchlights
The PF will repeat the response for these items when an action is to be performed.
The PM will read aloud and either verify or perform all immediate action items, this includes both memory and non-memory
items. The PM will then state: Immediate action items complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


6-2
12 FEB 10
Immediate Actions
Crew Coordination
Captain Assigns PF.

In most cases, the Captain should ask the First Officer to become the PF so that the Captain can better manage the cockpit
without the distraction of pilot flying duties.
Complete the QRH Procedure.
The PM will accomplish the appropriate QRH procedure.
Establish and Communicate a Plan.
1. Evaluate the situation using the following guidelines:
Does a safety of flight/passenger issue exist?
If the successful completion of the flight or the health of passengers is in jeopardy, it will be necessary to divert to
the nearest suitable airport. Whether an airport is considered suitable will depend on runway length and condition,
rescue equipment, airport facilities, weather, etc.
How will the passengers be affected?
If two equally safe alternatives are available, always choose the one which will best serve the passengers.
How will your decision affect the company operations?
The last consideration should be the efficiency of the operation. After safety issues and passenger considerations
have been addressed, determine how your decision will impact the operation as a whole.
2. Determine the appropriate course of action. Both pilots should agree on the plan and understand what their individual
duties will be; however, the ultimate authority rests with the Captain.
3. Communicate your intentions with the following people, workload permitting:
Air Traffic Control
Flight Attendants
TEST Items should be covered at this time if required.
Company Operations
This can be accomplished either through ACARS, ARINC or use of the Company Operations frequency if available.
Passengers
4. If needed, prepare for and brief the upcoming approach and landing.
5. Conduct a review to ensure that no steps have been overlooked and address any questions at this time.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
Passenger Evacuation
6-3
30 AUG 10
Crew Coordination Example (Captain is PF).
DOUBLE ENGINE FAILURE

PF
PM
Either pilot can cancel the Warning and state the emergency.
Selects continuous ignition to ON
Continuous ignition, ON
Adjust pitch to maintain 240 KIAS
I have the radios, immediate action items,
Double Engine Failure
Reads Double Engine Failure

immediate action items out loud via the
QRH
Immediate action items complete
Captain Assigns PF Duties

Completes appropriate QRH procedure
6.2
Passenger Evacuation
A passenger evacuation is initiated for a condition potentially endangering the life or physical well-being of passengers or
crew.
PASSENGER EVACUATION (CHALLENGE, RESPONSE, RESPONSE)
Once the Captain gives the evacuation command, the First Officer will open the QRH to the first page (Passenger Evacuation)
and read the checklist to the Captain who performs each item. In this checklist, the First Officer will read the challenge and the
response, and the Captain will respond to each item by repeating the appropriate response AFTER the item is completed.
Upon evacuation command:
EVACUATION
1.
PARKING BRAKE ................................................................................................................................... ON
2.
ATC ................................................................................................... State condition and advise evacuating
3.
SPOILERS..............................................................................................................................MAN DISARM
4.
Thrust Levers .................................................................................................................................SHUTOFF
5.
EMER DEPRESS ...................................................................................................................................... ON
6.
EMER LTS ................................................................................................................................................. ON
7.
Evacuation ............................................................................................................... Initiate using PA system
8.
Left and Right ENG FIRE, APU FIRE switchlights ..........................................................................PUSH
9.
BATTERY MASTER .............................................................................................................................. OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
Immediate Action Items
6-4
12 FEB 10
6.3
Immediate action items must be done in an expeditious manner. The CRJ-200 and CRJ-701 have 5 (ea) immediate action
items.
Note
All immediate action items are not considered complete until verified via the IMMEDIATE
ACTIONS tab in the QRH.
The following immediate action items have steps which must be accomplished from memory. This will be indicated by bold
print in the POH and red print in the QRH:
1. BRAKING LOSS/ASYMMETRY
2. CABIN ALT Msg or EMERGENCY DESCENT PROCEDURE
3. DOUBLE-ENGINE FAILURE
4. SMOKE/FUMES
5. <200> STAB TRIM RUNAWAY
<701> STAB TRIM RUNAWAY
Upon completion of the memory item(s), the PM will reference the IMMEDIATE ACTIONS tab in the QRH. The PM will
read aloud and either verify or perform all immediate action items, memory and non-memory. The PM will then state:
Immediate action items complete.
6.3.1
BRAKING LOSS/ASYMMETRY
Braking Loss / Asymmetry

1. Wheel brakes........................ Release momentarily
2. PM will select ANTI-SKID to OFF
3. Wheel brakes........................ Re-apply as required
Extreme caution is required during braking to avoid tire damage
4. Reverse Thrust ............................ Apply maximum

until stopping assured
5. Immediate Action Items complete.
Upon completion of this procedure the aircraft will be brought to a complete stop and the parking brake should be set. The
First Officer will then reference the QRH and read the immediate action items and verify that they are complete.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
6.3.2
6-5
12 FEB 10
CABIN ALT Msg or EMERGENCY DESCENT PROCEDURE
CABIN ALT Msg

- OR Emergency Descent Procedure
1. Oxygen masks ...................................Don and 100%
2. Crew communication .................................Establish
3. Captain assumes PF duties
4. PASS SIGNS ..........................................................ON
5. ATC .......................................Declare Emergency and
Advise of Descent
6. Autopilot.............................................. Recommended
7. Altitude preselector .....................Set to 10,000 feet or
lowest safe altitude
8. SPEED Mode......................................................Select
9. Thrust Lever ....................................................... IDLE
10.FLIGHT SPOILER leverMAX Deploy
11.Immediate Action Items complete, go to page 5-1.
The CABIN ALT or emergency descent maneuver is designed to descend the airplane smoothly to a safe cabin altitude in the
minimum amount of time with the least possible passenger discomfort.
If the descent is performed because of a rapid loss of cabin pressure, oxygen masks are donned and crew communication is
established at the first indication of a pressurization problem.
The autopilot should remain engaged to accomplish the descent. Although a turn is not required when initiating an emergency
descent, it may be performed using heading mode.
Note
If cabin pressure is verified to be uncontrollable (no P) and the airplane structural integrity is in
doubt, it is preferable to maintain at or below the speed at which the malfunction occurred and avoid
high maneuvering loads.
The Captain, unless incapacitated, will perform the PF duties during a CABIN ALT or emergency descent. If the First Officer
is the PF, the Captain will assume PF duties after O2 masks are donned and crew communication is established. The PM will
read the immediate action items via the QRH. The PF will perform the immediate action items when directed via the QRH.
The PM will check the minimum en route altitude, notify ATC and obtain the local altimeter setting. Level-off altitude should
be chosen based upon the passenger oxygen system capacity or the lowest safe altitude, whichever is higher. The lowest safe
altitude is the minimum en route altitude (MEA), minimum obstruction clearance altitude (MOCA), or any other altitude based
on terrain clearance, navigation aid reception or other appropriate criteria.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
6-6
12 FEB 10
When turbulent air is encountered or expected, the airspeed should be reduced to the maximum turbulent air penetration speed
(280 KIAS or .75 MACH, whichever is lower).
If descending into icing conditions, cowl and wing anti-ice are used as required.
Once reaching level-off altitude, the pressurization system should be rechecked and the situation reevaluated. When removing
oxygen masks, the Captain will direct the First Officer to remove his own mask first, transfer aircraft control, then remove his
own mask. Establish communication with the Flight Attendant for passenger/cabin status.
6.3.3
DOUBLE-ENGINE FAILURE
Double Engine Failure

1. CONT IGNITION.............................................. ON
2. Airspeed ..................................240 KIAS minimum
3. Engine Instruments....................Monitor N1, N2, ITT
If engines continue to run down:
4. Thrust Levers (both) ........................... SHUTOFF
5. ADG manual deploy handle .......................PULL
When ADG power is established:
6. STAB TRIM CH 2............................... ENGAGE
WARNING
Maintain airspeed until ready to restart

engines. Failure to maintain at least 4%
N2 may preclude a successful relight. If
required, increase airspeed to maintain
at least 4% N2 indication.
7. Immediate Action Items complete, assign PF, go
to page 2-1.
The Captain, unless incapacitated, will perform the PF duties during a double engine failure. This is because the First Officer's
PFD and MFD are inoperative. If the First Officer is the PF, the Captain will assume PF duties after Continuous Ignition is
selected ON. The PM will read and perform the immediate action items via the QRH.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
6.3.4
6-7
12 FEB 10
SMOKE/FUMES
Smoke / Fumes
1. Oxygen masks ...................................Don and 100%
2. Crew communication .................................Establish
3. Immediate Action Items complete, assign PF, go to
page 1-1.
The SMOKE/FUMES QRH checklist will be accomplished for any smoke or fumes related malfunction without an associated
CAS message.
6.3.5
Stab Trim Runaway

1. Control wheel .....................Assume manual control
and override runaway
2. Both STAB TRIM DISCs ... Push, hold and release
3. Captain assumes PF duties
4. STAB CH1 cb (2F5).......................................... Open
5. STAB CH2 cb (4A1) ......................................... Open
page 9-1.
If the horizontal stabilizer is in motion for more that 3 seconds, a clacker is activated to alert the crew of a possible horizontal
stabilizer trim runaway condition. The trim position indicator on the EICAS screen will also show runaway trim movement.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Immediate Actions
6-8
12 FEB 10
6.3.6
Stab Trim Runaway

1. Control wheel .....................Assume manual control
and override runaway
2. STAB TRIM DISC...............Push, hold and release
page 9-1.
If the horizontal stabilizer is in motion for more that 3 seconds, a clacker is activated to alert the crew of a possible horizontal
stabilizer trim runaway condition. The trim position indicator on the EICAS screen will also show runaway trim movement.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Maneuvers & Profiles
Table of Contents
7-i
30 AUG 10
Chapter 7: Maneuvers & Profiles

7.1
Takeoffs ..................................................................................................................................................
7.1.1
Normal Takeoff ...................................................................................................................................
7.1.2
Rejected Takeoff.................................................................................................................................
7.1.3
Engine Failure After V1.......................................................................................................................
7.1.4
Engine Fire After V1............................................................................................................................
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7.2
Maneuvers ..............................................................................................................................................
7.2.1
Steep Turns ........................................................................................................................................
7.2.2
Stalls ...................................................................................................................................................
7.2.3
Windshear Recovery...........................................................................................................................
7.2.4
TCAS Resolution Advisory (RA) .........................................................................................................
7.2.5
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS)...................................................................
7.2.6
Unusual Attitudes................................................................................................................................
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7.3
Approaches ............................................................................................................................................ 7-9
7.3.1
Precision Approach (2-Engine) ......................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.2
Precision Approach (Single-Engine) ................................................................................................. 7-12
7.3.3
Nonprecision Approach (2-Engine)................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.4
Nonprecision Approach (Single-Engine)........................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.5
Flaps Inoperative and/or Slats Inoperative Approach ....................................................................... 7-15
7.3.6
ILS PRM Breakout Maneuver ........................................................................................................... 7-16
7.4
Landings ...............................................................................................................................................
7.4.1
Normal Landing <-200> ....................................................................................................................
7.4.2
Normal Landing <-701> ....................................................................................................................
7.4.3
Overweight Landing ..........................................................................................................................
7.4.4
Bounced Landing ..............................................................................................................................
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7.5
Go-Around ............................................................................................................................................
7.5.1
Go-Around (2-Engine).......................................................................................................................
7.5.2
Go-Around (Single-Engine)...............................................................................................................
7.5.3
Rejected/Balked Landing ..................................................................................................................
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-22
7.6
Profiles .................................................................................................................................................. 7-22
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Table of Contents
7-ii
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Takeoffs
7-1
12 FEB 10
Chapter 7: Maneuvers & Profiles

7.1
Takeoffs
7.1.1
Normal Takeoff.
Reference
Commencing
takeoff roll
PF
PM
Press either TOGA button

Advance thrust levers to near vertical (just
above 70% N1) and allow engines to stabilize
<-200> Advance thrust levers to within 10% of
takeoff thrust setting
<-701> Advance thrust levers to TOGA detent
SET THRUST
Set/verify thrust to takeoff N1 setting prior to

60 knots
Verify proper FMA indications

Prior to 60 knots
THRUST SET
Captain assumes/maintains control of thrust levers
at 80 knots
80 KNOTS
CHECKS
V1
5 knots prior to
V1
at VR
Captain removes hand from thrust levers

ROTATE
Rotate to FD commanded attitude

(approximately 12.5 pitch)
Positive rate of
climb
Verify positive rate of climb

POSITIVE RATE
Position gear lever up

GEAR UP
Select speed mode

Verifies CLB on FMA
CLIMB
Select HDG or NAV

Verifies HDG or appropriate NAV mode on
FMA
HEADING, or FMS
Engage autopilot
AUTOPILOT ON
GEAR UP
at V2 + 10 to
15 knots
SPEED MODE
above 400 AGL
HEADING MODE, or NAV MODE as

appropriate
above 600 AGL
AUTOPILOT ON
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Takeoffs
7-2
30 AUG 10
Reference
PF
PM
ONE THOUSAND FEET
at FRA
Bug speed to 200 knots
Flaps 20 T/O
@ V2 + 12: FLAPS 8
@ VT - 10: FLAPS UP
Flaps 8 T/O
Retract flaps
FLAPS 8
FLAPS UP
@ VT - 10: FLAPS UP
FLAPS UP
<-701 only> Set thrust levers to CLIMB detent

AFTER TAKEOFF CHECK
at 3000 AFE
7.1.2
Complete After Takeoff Check

AFTER TAKEOFF CHECK
COMPLETE
Accelerate to 250 knots
Rejected Takeoff.
Either crewmember has the authority to call for a rejected takeoff by stating: REJECT.
If the takeoff is rejected with both engines operating, the Captain will retard the thrust levers to reverse while using maximum
braking. If the takeoff is rejected due to a power failure of either engine, extreme caution must be exercised in the use of
reverse thrust on the operating engine due to the yawing tendency which will be created. Maximum braking will be necessary.
PSA Airlines recommends an RTO for any malfunction below 80 knots. Above 80 knots, an RTO is recommended for items
such as:
Engine failure
Fire warning
Aircraft is considered unsafe or unable to fly
Loss of directional control
As the aircraft accelerates towards V1, the decision-making process shifts in favor of the Go decision. As airspeed
approaches V1, the stopping margin decreases until after V1 when it may not be possible to stop the aircraft on the runway. The
decision to reject the takeoff must be made prior to V1 so the rejected takeoff maneuver can be initiated no later than V1.
If the takeoff is rejected because of a fire warning or other such critical circumstances that may warrant an emergency
evacuation, the Captain will immediately bring the aircraft to a complete stop and will set the parking brake.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Takeoffs
7-3
12 FEB 10
Captain
First Officer
Either pilot calls REJECT
Simultaneously:
Thrust levers idle
Apply maximum brakes
Apply maximum reverse thrust consistent with directional
control
Make standard landing callouts

Notify ATC
Verify the problem
Verify the problem
At Captains discretion, clear the runway

When the aircraft is brought to a complete stop, set the parking
brake
If no evacuation is planned, complete PA to passengers,
PLEASE REMAIN SEATED
The Captain will call for the appropriate checklist
Perform appropriate checklist requested by the

Captain
7.1.3
Engine Failure After V1.

Note
<-701 only> The PM will advise the PF of a FADEC initiated auto-relight.
Reference
PF
PM
First pilot noting engine failure/flameout:
Engine failure/
flameout after V1
ENGINE FAILURE
at VR
Verify green APR icon in operating engines N1

gauge
If no APR icon present, set APR thrust
<-200 only> Achieved by increasing thrust 2%
N1
ROTATE
Rotate to FD commanded attitude

(approximately 10 pitch up)
Positive rate of
climb
GEAR UP
at V2
SPEED MODE, BUG V2
above 400 AGL
HEADING MODE, BANK, or NAV

MODE, BANK as appropriate

POSITIVE RATE
GEAR UP
Select speed mode and adjust bug to V2

Verify CLB on FMA
CLIMB
Select HDG or NAV

Select BANK
Verify HDG or appropriate NAV mode on the
FMA
HEADING, BANK, or
FMS, BANK
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Takeoffs
7-4
15 MAR 10
Reference
PF
above 600 AGL
PM
AUTOPILOT ON
Engage autopilot
AUTOPILOT ON
Note: When autopilot is selected ON, the airspeed bug resets to present speed.
Advise ATC
ONE THOUSAND FEET
at FRA
Select ALT
Verify ALT on FMA
ALT
Flaps 20 T/O
@ V2 + 12 FLAPS 8
@ VT - 10 FLAPS UP
Flaps 8 T/O
@ VT - 10 FLAPS UP
at VT
Select speed mode

Verify CLB on FMA
CLIMB
SET MCT
Select BANK OFF
Verify the problem
LEFT ENGINE FAILURE
Retract flaps
FLAPS 8
FLAPS UP
FLAPS UP

THRUST SET
Confirm the problem

LEFT ENGINE FAILURE
Captain assigns PF duties

After Captain
assigns PF duties:
7.1.4
Call for appropriate QRH
Complete the appropriate QRH procedure
Engine Fire After V1.
If the engine fire warning activates after reaching V1, continue the takeoff and follow the normal takeoff procedures up to FRA.
Upon reaching the FRA, accelerate to and climb at VT, then complete the Engine Fire QRH procedure.
Note
If an engine failure occurs after V1 and simultaneously the engine fire warning light illuminates, follow
the engine failure after V1 profile. Apply the Engine Fire QRH procedure after reaching VT.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Maneuvers
7.2
Maneuvers
7.2.1
Steep Turns.
7-5
15 MAR 10
The objective of the steep turn maneuver is to familiarize pilots with the airplane handling characteristics and improve the
instrument panel scan. Steep turns will be done with the autopilot and flight director off.
Entry:
Stabilize the aircraft at 250 knots

Increase N1 approximately 2 to 3%
Smoothly roll the aircraft into a 45-degree bank turn
Use approximately 3 degrees nose-up pitch to maintain altitude
Recovery:
15 degrees prior to desired heading, start rollout and reduce thrust as necessary to maintain 250 knots
7.2.2
Stalls.
Introduction.
The wing stalls when it reaches its critical angle of attack. An aircraft can be stalled at any attitude, at any thrust setting and at
any airspeed. The Stall Protection System is unable to detect or compensate for wing contamination. Under such
circumstances, an aerodynamic stall may occur before the SPS is able to provide any warning.
If the nose attitude at high altitude is excessively high, performance may be so limited that the aircraft will not be capable of
maintaining altitude and airspeed will decrease. Under these circumstances, a descent must be initiated immediately to prevent
a stall.
Stick Shaker Recovery.
When approaching a stall, recovery should always be initiated at the stick shaker. The pilot is to ensure positive aircraft control
by reducing the AOA, using the control column, and applying maximum thrust. This will help to minimize altitude lost.
Stick Pusher Recovery.
If the approach to stall continues to the stick pusher, the aircraft energy needs to be re-established by sacrificing significantly
more altitude. Do not prevent the stick pusher from lowering the nose of the aircraft and reduce the AOA.
Any stall may be conducted in a turn for training or checking purposes.
Clean Stall.
Entry:
Establish level flight at a safe altitude and 200 knots using the FD in HDG mode and ALTS
Set speed bug to flap 0 speed + 5 knots
Disengage autopilot
Retard thrust levers to 45% N1
Deploy flight spoilers (optional)
Do not trim past the speed bug
Initiate recovery at the stick shaker
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-6
15 MAR 10

Maneuvers
Recovery:
Simultaneously:
Set max thrust (or firewall, if required)
Ensure spoilers are retracted
Level the wings
Maintain pitch attitude (or slightly less) to minimize altitude loss

Climb to a safe altitude, respecting the stick shaker
Accelerate to 200 knots
Reduce thrust
Maneuvering Stall.
Entry:
Establish level flight at a safe altitude and 200 knots

Set speed bug at flap 20 speed + 5 knots
Set VT (VFTO) for the aircraft weight and adjust V2GA on the PFD
Configure to flaps 20 on schedule
Select landing gear down
Select autopilot and FD off
Enter a 20-degree bank turn
Do not trim past the speed bug
Recovery:
Simultaneously:
Level the wings

Once a positive rate of climb is established, the aircraft is clear of stick shaker, and a positive airspeed trend is observed,
select flaps 8 and landing gear up
Reconfigure as required while accelerating to 200 knots
Reduce thrust
Landing Stall.
Entry:
Establish level flight at a safe altitude and 200 knots with autopilot engaged in HDG mode and ALTS
Set speed bug at VREF + 5 knots
Set VT (VFTO) for the aircraft weight and adjust V2GA on the PFD
Configure to flaps 45 and landing gear down on schedule
Allow the aircraft to stall with the autopilot engaged
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Maneuvers
7-7
15 MAR 10
Recovery:
Simultaneously:
Level the wings

Once a positive rate of climb is established, the aircraft is clear of stick shaker, and a positive airspeed trend is observed,
select flaps 8 and landing gear up
Reconfigure as required while accelerating to 200 knots
Reduce thrust
7.2.3
Windshear Recovery.
Whenever flight path control becomes marginal at low altitude or when a WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR,
WINDSHEAR aural warning occurs accompanied by the PFD indications (flight director, AMI, and WINDSHEAR Red
Warning), the crew will perform the following:
Immediately set maximum thrust

Follow the flight director (FD) commands smoothly and precisely (DO NOT FOLLOW THE AMI)
The stick shaker may come on intermittently during the commanded maneuver
Do not attempt to regain lost airspeed until terrain contact is no longer a factor
Do not change landing gear or flap configuration until the vertical flight path is under control and the AMI has been
removed, indicating the end of the windshear condition
The PM will callout heights above terrain (RA) and climbing/descending throughout the windshear encounter
Example: 400 feet, descending or 300 feet, climbing
The PM will notify ATC of the windshear condition as soon as practical
Note
A PFD amber WINDSHEAR caution indication does not necessitate an immediate recovery, but a red
WINDSHEAR warning indication may be imminent, and the crew should prepare for a windshear
recovery.
7.2.4
TCAS Resolution Advisory (RA).
Compliance with a TCAS RA is mandatory, regardless of conditions. Whenever an RA is indicated, the PF will perform the
following actions:
Disconnect the autopilot

Adjust pitch and power as required
Adjust vertical rate promptly and smoothly to comply with the guidance indicated on the VSI
The PM will notify ATC of the RA and altitude deviation as soon as practical
Note
Most TCAS RAs are resolved with altitude changes of 300-500 feet.
Note
Regulations permit deviation from assigned altitude to comply with a TCAS RA.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-8
15 MAR 10
7.2.5

Maneuvers
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS).
Refer to the Systems Manual, Chapter 17-Navigation for a description of the EGPWS.
Flight crews can select the terrain display on their MFD by pushing the RDR/TERR button on their respective DCP. The
terrain function displays the highest and lowest terrain/obstacle value of the selected range setting in the upper left corner of
the map display.
Flight crews should respond to Ground Proximity aural and visual warnings in the following manner:
When an aural PULL UP or TERRAIN warning occurs:
Autopilot disconnect
Set max thrust
Retract spoilers
Rotate smoothly toward best angle of climb (approximately 15 degrees)
Respect stick shaker
Note
When flying under Day VMC conditions, should an EGPWS warning occur and the terrain and/or
obstacles are clearly in sight, immediately take positive corrective action until the EGPWS warning/
alert stops and terrain clearance is assured. At night or in IMC, perform the above EGPWS escape
maneuver.
When an aural warning other than PULL UP occurs, initiate the corrective action to remove the cause of the warning.
Note
To permit maneuvering on final approach or backcourse approach to an unreliable ILS glideslope, at
RA<1000 ft., the glideslope aural and visual alert can be canceled by pressing the G/S switchlight on
the glareshield. The cancel function is automatically reset upon capturing the proper glide path.
Subsequent deviations will cause the aural and visual alerts to reoccur.
Flight crews should respond to the Windshear aural and visual warnings in accordance with the procedures outlined in the
Windshear Recovery section of this chapter.
Deactivation of the EGPWS for abnormal and emergency conditions is accomplished with a GPWS/FLAP override guarded
switchlight on the center pedestal. It can be used to deactivate flap warnings when landings are to be performed with a less
than normal landing flap position. Flight crews will deactivate this system when specific abnormal or emergency procedures in
the QRH call for this action to be performed.
7.2.6
Unusual Attitudes.
If an unusual attitude is encountered, quick and accurate pilot response is paramount. Although impossible to write a
procedure for every conceivable situation, the following guidance should be considered:
An extreme nose-up or nose-down attitude may be determined by use of the red pitch echelons on the ADI and the trend
vector on the airspeed tape
Extreme bank angles may be determined by the top portion of the ADI and heading changes on the PFDs, MFDs, or
standby compass
If an extreme airspeed excursion has occurred, pilots must use the thrust levers and/or flight spoilers in addition to pitch
changes to return to a safe airspeed
Pilot should consider aircraft loading when making all control inputs
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Approaches
7.3
7-9
30 AUG 10
Approaches
Approach Profiles.
These profiles may be modified to suit local traffic, ATC requirements, and for fuel conservation measures.
It is not uncommon to intercept the localizer and glideslope above the published glide slope interception altitude and be
cleared for the ILS approach while still a considerable distance from the runway. When it is prudent to delay configuring the
aircraft for landing, the following general guidelines should be used. The distance is in relation to the final approach
verification altitude fix on the Jeppesen approach chart.
Aircraft distance (nm) from the reference fix
Accomplish the procedure associated with
1 1/2 dots
1/2 dot
On G/S
Capture Glideslope from Above

With the APPR (LOC/GS) mode armed, set vertical speed as required to capture the glideslope. Once captured, GS will
become active and the missed approach altitude may now be set. If the aircraft can not meet stabilized approach criteria,
execute a missed approach.
Maneuvering Speeds.
Minimum maneuvering speeds are calculated by adding 10 knots to the applicable flap setting speed, as indicated in the speed
book. This 10 knot additive provides adequate speed margin to stick shaker actuation for an inadvertent 15-degree overshoot
beyond the normal autopilot banked turn.
Aircraft Approach Category.
The CRJ-200 is a category D aircraft and the CRJ-701 is a category C aircraft for determining straight-in approach minimums.
Approach Speed Additive (Gust Factor).
Final approach speed (Bug) is obtained by adding a speed factor to VREF. This factor prevents airspeed excursion below VREF
while ensuring reasonable pilot workload. A speed additive of 5 knots is considered the minimum factor while an additive of
10 knots is considered maximum.
The factor is adjusted for wind gusts. To calculate, add of the gust factor to VREF using a minimum of 5 knots and a
maximum of 10 knots to be flown for the approach.
EXAMPLE: Wind 280 at 15 gusting 23 knots.
Gust Factor is 8 knots (23-15 = 8).
of Gust Factor is 4 knots. Minimum additive is 5 knots.
Bug should be set to VREF + 5 knots.
FMS.
Whenever possible, crews should make maximum use of the FMS during transition to the precision approach.
Initial Approach.
The initial approach phase is common to all approaches. Normally set flaps 20 at the initial approach fix outbound or an
equivalent position for a radar vectored or visual approach.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-10
30 AUG 10

Approaches
Approach Facility Identification.

If the approach navaid to be used does NOT have DME, the PM must audibly verify the navaid Morse code identification prior
to approach. If the approach navaid to be used DOES have DME, pilots may visually confirm the navaid identification on their
respective PFD prior to approach.
DA/MDA References.
All DA/MDA approach minimum references on the PFDs will be done using MDA set via the Air Data Reference Panel
(ARP). All nonprecision approaches will be flown to an adjusted MDA, which is the charted MDA rounded up to the nearest
100 (i.e. a published MDA of 610 is set to 700 and flown to 700 minimums).
Threshold Height.
Height over the threshold is a function of glide path angle and glide path intercept point. During a typical 3-degree approach
with a 1,000 ft. touchdown point, the main landing gear will cross the threshold at approximately 50 feet.
Special attention must be given to establishing a final approach that will assure safe threshold clearance and touchdown 1,000
ft. down the runway and within the touchdown zone. Deviation from the visual glide path is not permitted in an attempt to
touch down shorter than normal. A go-around should be executed if threshold clearance is doubtful.
Missed Approach
A missed approach is executed for many reasons including: unstable, runway environment not in sight, loss of runway
environment, etc.
Either the pilot flying or the pilot monitoring may make a go-around callout. The pilot flying will immediately execute a
missed approach.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Approaches
7.3.1
7-11
30 AUG 10
Precision Approach (2-Engine).
Reference
Initial segment or
entering
downwind
PF
Verify airspeed and select flaps 8

FLAPS 8
FLAPS 20
Slow to 170 knots

FLAPS 20
Select APPR on FCP
Base leg
When cleared for
approach
PM
FLAPS 8
Slow to 180 knots
Localizer alive
LOCALIZER ALIVE
CHECKS
Localizer
captured
LOCALIZER CAPTURED
CHECKS
Glideslope alive
GLIDESLOPE ALIVE
CHECKS
at 1 dot
Select gear down

GEAR DOWN
FLAPS 30
Slow to 160 knots

FLAPS 30
FLAPS 45, BEFORE LANDING CHECK
at dot
Glideslope
captured
GEAR DOWN
Slow to VREF plus additive

FLAPS 45
Complete the Before Landing Check
BEFORE LANDING CHECK
COMPLETE
GLIDESLOPE CAPTURED
CHECKS, SET MISSED APPROACH

ALTITUDE
at 1,000 AFE
Set and verify missed approach altitude on FCP

1,000 FEET
CHECKS
at 500 AFE
500 FEET, Bug +/-__, SINK___

CHECKS
at 100 above DA
100 ABOVE
CHECKS
at DA (runway
environment in
sight)
LANDING
at DA (runway
environment
NOT in sight)
GO AROUND
Divide time between monitoring instruments

and scanning outside for runway environment
MINIMUMS, RUNWAY IN SIGHT
MINIMUMS, NO CONTACT
See Go-Around (2 Engine) procedure
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Approaches
7-12
30 AUG 10
7.3.2
Precision Approach (Single-Engine).
Comprehensive planning is the key to a safe, unhurried, single-engine approach. Every attempt should be made to complete
the approach preparations before arrival in the terminal area.
Adequate thrust and normal maneuvering margins are available if the approach is flown in accordance with the standard
profile.
The single-engine approach profile is the same as for 2 engines except that the final flap setting is 20-degrees with
approximately 5% higher N1 thrust on the operating engine. When the landing gear is selected down, set the final approach
speed. The landing flare is reduced due to the flatter approach attitude.
Reference
Initial segment or
entering
downwind
PF
FLAPS 8
Slow to 180 knots

FLAPS 8
FLAPS 20
Slow to 170 knots

FLAPS 20
Select APPR on FCP
Base leg
When cleared for
approach
PM
Localizer alive
LOCALIZER ALIVE
CHECKS
Localizer
captured
LOCALIZER CAPTURED
CHECKS
Glideslope alive
GLIDESLOPE ALIVE
CHECKS
at 1 dot
Glideslope
captured
GEAR DOWN
Select gear down

GEAR DOWN
SINGLE ENGINE LANDING

CHECKLIST
Complete the Single Engine Landing Checklist

CHECKLIST COMPLETE
GLIDESLOPE CAPTURED
CHECKS, SET MISSED APPROACH

ALTITUDE
at 1,000 AFE

1,000 FEET
CHECKS
at 500 AFE
CHECKS
500 FEET, Bug +/-__, SINK___
at 100 above DA
100 ABOVE
CHECKS
at DA (runway
environment in
sight)
LANDING
at DA (runway
environment
NOT in sight)
GO AROUND

MINIMUMS, RUNWAY IN SIGHT
MINIMUMS, NO CONTACT
PSA Airlines, Inc.

See Go-Around (Single-Engine) procedure

Approaches
7.3.3
7-13
30 AUG 10
Nonprecision Approach (2-Engine).
The initial portion of the nonprecision approach is similar to the precision approach.
At the final approach fix (FAF), descend at an appropriate rate to arrive at MDA prior to the visual descent point (VDP) or
planned descent point (PDP). VDP/PDP is the point from which a normal descent from MDA may be commenced. When the
runway is in sight, adjust the profile as required and continue visually for landing.
Reference
Initial segment or
entering
downwind
PF
FLAPS 8
Slow to 180 knots

FLAPS 8
FLAPS 20
Slow to 170 knots

FLAPS 20
Select NAV (or B/C if applicable) on FCP
Base leg
When cleared for
approach
Course (or
localizer) alive
COURSE (or LOCALIZER) ALIVE

CHECKS
COURSE (or LOCALIZER)
CAPTURED
Course (or
localizer)
captured
CHECKS
3-5 miles from

FAF
GEAR DOWN
Select gear down

GEAR DOWN
FLAPS 30
Slow to 160 knots

FLAPS 30
FLAPS 45, BEFORE LANDING CHECK
1-2 miles from

FAF
(If GPS or RNAV
approach, verify
GPS APPR is
displayed at the
bottom of the NAV
source block on
both PFDs by the
FAF)
PM

FLAPS 45
Complete the Before Landing Check
COMPLETE
Set stepdown altitude or adjusted MDA, if
requested
SET NEXT ALTITUDE, or SET MDA

Update each stepdown altitude until adjusted MDA is set
at FAF
Start timing and/or notify ATC, if appropriate
Select/request V/S
Initiate descent
at 1,000 AFE
Select V/S, if requested

Monitor descent
1,000 FEET
CHECKS
at 100 above
adjusted MDA
CHECKS
at adjusted
MDA
100 ABOVE
Verify ALTS active in FMA

ALTS
Level off, if appropriate

SET MISSED APPROACH ALTITUDE
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Approaches
7-14
30 AUG 10
Reference
runway
environment in
sight
PF
PM
LANDING
Select/request FD off
RUNWAY IN SIGHT
Turn off FD, if requested
Monitor speed and sink rate
See Landing procedure

runway
environment
NOT in sight
MISSED APPROACH POINT, NO

CONTACT
GO AROUND
See Go-Around (2 Engine) procedure
7.3.4
Nonprecision Approach (Single-Engine).
Reference
Initial segment or
entering
downwind
PF

FLAPS 8
FLAPS 20
Slow to 170 knots

FLAPS 20
Select NAV (or B/C if applicable) on FCP
Base leg
When cleared for
approach
PM
FLAPS 8
Slow to 180 knots
Course (or
localizer) alive
COURSE (or LOCALIZER) ALIVE

CHECKS
Course (or
localizer)
captured
COURSE (or LOCALIZER) CAPTURED

CHECKS
3-5 miles from

FAF
GEAR DOWN
Select gear down

GEAR DOWN

CHECKLIST
SET NEXT ALTITUDE, or SET MDA
Complete the Single Engine Landing Checklist

CHECKLIST COMPLETE
Set stepdown altitude or adjusted MDA, if

requested
Update each stepdown altitude until adjusted MDA is set

Start timing and/or notify ATC, if appropriate
at FAF
(If GPS or RNAV
approach, verify
GPS APPR is
displayed at the
bottom of the NAV
source block on
both PFDs)
Select/request V/S
Initiate descent
at 1,000' AFE
Select V/S, if requested

Monitor descent
1,000 FEET
CHECKS
at 100' above
adjusted MDA
100 ABOVE
CHECKS
PSA Airlines, Inc.



Approaches
Reference
7-15
30 AUG 10
PF
PM
at adjusted
MDA
runway
environment in
sight
Verify ALTS active in FMA

ALTS
Level off, if appropriate

SET MISSED APPROACH ALTITUDE
RUNWAY IN SIGHT
LANDING
Select/request FD off
Turn off FD, if requested

Monitor speed and sink rate
See Landing procedure

MISSED APPROACH POINT, NO
CONTACT
runway
environment
NOT in sight
GO AROUND
See Go-Around (Single-Engine) procedure
7.3.5
Flaps Inoperative and/or Slats Inoperative Approach.
The following procedures should be used when carrying out a flaps and/or slats inoperative approach and landing:
Complete appropriate QRH procedures

Select the longest runway available, considering wind and braking action, preferably with an ILS or VASI
A straight-in precision approach, using autopilot, is recommended
If necessary, burn off fuel to reduce landing weight
When setting landing data, set VREF (for appropriate failed flap setting) and VT only. If a go-around is required, climb at
VREF to 1000 AFE.
Use standard terminal area speeds and establish final approximately 10 miles from the runway. This will allow time to extend
the gear and decelerate to the target speed while in level flight. Attempt to be in the landing configuration prior to descending
on the glideslope. Due to the higher energy on approach, ensure accurate flight path and speed control.
With a zero flap approach, the landing will tend to be firmer than normal as very little flare is desired. With a zero slat
approach, the approach attitude will be steeper and the flare is more pronounced. Allowing the airplane to float in ground
effect will greatly increase landing distance, which could be critical on a short runway. Verify landing distance requirements
and compare to available runway length.
After main gear touchdown, gently lower the nose to the runway. Apply brakes only after nosewheel touchdown.
Note
Improper landing technique during flap failure can generate loads on the nose gear sufficient to cause
structural damage.
Reference
Prior to
Glideslope
capture or
predetermined
descent point
PF
GEAR DOWN, BEFORE LANDING

CHECK
PM
Select gear down

GEAR DOWN
Complete Before Landing Check
COMPLETE
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Approaches
7-16
30 AUG 10
7.3.6
ILS PRM Breakout Maneuver.
If ATIS broadcasts or ATC advises ILS/PRM approaches are in progress and approach will be accepted, accomplish the
following:
Note
Inform ATC on initial contact if unable to meet approach requirements.
Review the Attention All Users Route Manual page. Include minimum vectoring altitude (MVA) in the approach briefing.
Captain assumes PF duties prior to commencing approach OR reaching 3000 AGL whichever occurs first.
Use flight director (autopilot recommended).
If a Resolution Advisory (RA) is received without an ATC Traffic Alert, accomplish TCAS Warning RA procedure.
Review ILS/PRM Breakout Actions and Callouts. If breakout initiated by:
ATC Traffic Alert - follow controllers vertical and lateral instructions.
ATC Traffic Alert and TCAS RA - follow RA vertical guidance and controller's lateral instructions.
Note
If the controller's instructions include vertical guidance that conflicts with RA vertical guidance,
follow RA vertical guidance while complying with controller's lateral instructions.
ILS/PRM Climbing Breakout
Trigger
Capt (PF)
FO (PM)
Alert
Simultaneously:
Breakout
Disconnect autopilot, if required
Turn to heading
Establish climb (follow RA, if received)
Call for changes in vertical mode, as desired
Simultaneously:
Breakout
Turn PF FD OFF
Set heading on FCP
Set altitude on FCP
Select HDG Mode on FCP
Select Speed Mode or
Vertical Speed as directed
Monitor flight path; call out deviations
Established on
heading
Reconfigure aircraft, as desired
ILS/PRM Descending Breakout

Trigger
Capt (PF)
FO (PM)
Alert
Simultaneously:
Breakout
Disconnect autopilot, if required
Turn to heading
Establish descent (follow RA, if received), not
to exceed 1000 FPM (unless directed by RA)
Call for changes in vertical mode, as desired
Simultaneously:
Breakout
Turn PF FD OFF
Set heading on FCP
Set altitude on FCP
Select HDG Mode on FCP
Select Speed Mode or
Vertical Speed as directed
Monitor flight path; call out deviations
Established on
heading
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Landings
7.4
Landings
7.4.1
Normal Landing <-200>.
7-17
30 AUG 10
The normal approach pitch attitude is approximately 3-degrees nose down with flaps set at 45 degrees. At 50 AGL, reduce the
thrust levers to idle and guard against the nose up tendency due to the thrust reduction. This technique will permit sufficient
deceleration to ensure touchdown at VREF or slightly less. It is imperative that the touchdown occur at VREF or less, since
landing at speeds greater than VREF may result in the nose gear touching first.
Initiate the flare when the main gear is approximately 10 above the runway by increasing pitch attitude very slightly.
At touchdown, the ground lift dumpers will extend automatically. If the GLDs fail to extend automatically, the PM will move
the GLD switch to the MAN ARM position (forward). If the GLDs still fail to extend, the PM will move the Flight Spoiler
lever to MAX (aft).
Select the thrust reversers and gently lower the nosewheel onto the runway. Smoothly apply wheel braking by steadily
increasing pedal pressure, adjusted for runway condition and length available. Do not attempt to modulate or pump the brakes.
Maintain deceleration rate until stopped or desired taxi speed is reached.
Note
It is not necessary to wait for thrust reverser deployment before braking.
Note
Reverse thrust is limited to idle reverse with the nosewheel off the runway.
Reverse Thrust Operation.
Reverse thrust reduces the airplanes stopping distance compared to using brakes alone. Reverse thrust is most effective at
high speeds.
Raise the thrust reverser levers to the interlock/deploy position and observe the amber REV icons on N1 gauges. After reverser
interlocks release and REV icons change to green, pull thrust reverser levers to the maximum position if required. The PM
monitors engine indications and calls any engine abnormalities.
At 90 knots, start reducing reverse thrust to achieve 60% N1 by 75 knots and idle reverse by 60 knots.
Note
During landing, application of reverse thrust above 60% N1 is not permitted at airspeeds below 75
knots. Below 60 knots, reverse thrust must reduced to idle (not above 30% N1). If reverse thrust
above idle reverse is used at speeds less than 60 knots, foreign object damage to the engines may occur.
Crosswind Landing.
The recommended crosswind landing technique is to combine crab and sideslip.
On final approach, a crab angle is established with wings level to hold the airplane on the desired course.
When starting the flare, gently apply rudder to align the aircraft with the runway centerline while applying aileron to prevent a
sideways drift.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Landings
7-18
30 AUG 10
Reference
PF
50 AGL
Gradually reduce thrust to idle
approximately
10 AGL
Initiate flare
Main gear
touchdown
Deploy thrust reversers
PM
Nosewheel
touchdown
Apply brakes as required
Reduce reverse thrust to achieve 60% N1 by 75

knots and idle reverse by 60 knots
Ensure reverse thrust not above 30% N1
Confirm GND SPLR DEPLOY Green

Advisory message
SPOILERS
Confirm 2 Amber then Green REV icons in N1
gauges
2 REVERSE
90 KNOTS
90 knots
60 knots
60 KNOTS
If FO is PF, at a safe taxi speed, the Captain will assume control and state, MY CONTROLS
7.4.2
Normal Landing <-701>.
The approach pitch attitude is approximately level to one (1) degree nose up at VREF with flaps 45 set. At 50 feet AGL, slowly
begin reducing the thrust to be at IDLE when established in the landing flare. This technique will permit sufficient
deceleration to ensure touchdown at VREF or slightly less. Landing at speeds greater than VREF may result in the nose gear
touching first. This could result in a porpoising bounce causing structural damage if the descent rate is high.
Initiate the flare when the main gear is approximately 20 to 30 feet above the runway by increasing pitch attitude very slightly.
At touchdown, the ground lift dumpers will extend automatically. If the GLDs fail to extend automatically, the PM will move
the GLD switch to the MAN ARM position (forward). If the GLDs still fail to extend, the PM will move the Flight Spoiler
lever to MAX (aft).
Select the thrust reversers and gently lower the nosewheel onto the runway. Smoothly apply wheel braking by steadily
increasing pedal pressure, adjusted for runway condition and length available. Do not attempt to modulate or pump the brakes.
Maintain deceleration rate until stopped or desired taxi speed is reached.
Note
It is not necessary to wait for thrust reverser deployment before braking.
Note
Reverse thrust is limited to idle reverse with the nosewheel off the runway.
Reverse Thrust Operation.
Reverse thrust reduces the airplanes stopping distance compared to using brakes alone. Reverse thrust is most effective at high
speeds.
Raise the thrust reverser levers to the interlock/deploy position and observe the amber REV icons on N1 gauges. After reverser
interlocks release and REV icons change to green, pull thrust reverser levers to the maximum position if required. The PM
monitors engine indications and calls any engine abnormalities.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Landings
7-19
30 AUG 10
At 90 knots, start reducing reverse thrust to achieve 60% N1 by 75 knots and idle reverse by 60 knots.
Note
During landing, application of reverse thrust above 60% N1 is not permitted at airspeeds below 75
knots. Below 60 knots, reverse thrust must reduced to idle (not above 30% N1). If reverse thrust
above idle reverse is used at speeds less than 60 knots, foreign object damage to the engines may occur.
Crosswind Landing.
The recommended crosswind landing technique is to combine crab and sideslip.
On final approach, a crab angle is established with wings level to hold the airplane on the desired course.
When starting the flare, gently apply rudder to align the aircraft with the runway centerline while applying aileron to prevent a
sideways drift.
Rudder control is effective down to approximately 60 knots. Rudder pedal steering is sufficient for maintaining directional
control during the rollout. During a crosswind, displace aileron into the wind.
Reference
PF
50 AGL
Gradually reduce thrust to idle
approximately
10 AGL
Initiate flare
Main gear
touchdown
Deploy thrust reversers
PM
Nosewheel
touchdown
Apply brakes as required
Reduce reverse thrust to achieve 60% N1 by 75

knots and idle reverse by 60 knots
Ensure reverse thrust not above 30% N1
90 knots
Confirm GND SPLR DEPLOY Green

Advisory message
SPOILERS
Confirm 2 Amber then Green REV icons in N1
gauges
2 REVERSE
90 KNOTS
60 KNOTS
60 knots
If FO is PF, at a safe taxi speed, the Captain will assume control and state, MY CONTROLS
7.4.3
Overweight Landing.
Overweight landings up to maximum takeoff weight may be safely accomplished by using normal landing procedures and
techniques. There are no adverse handling characteristics associated with heavier than normal landing weights. Compute the
landing distance required to assure that the runway length is adequate for the higher threshold speed. Observe maximum flap
speeds and do not maintain excess airspeed on final. This technique is especially important when landing with flaps 20
degrees during an engine inoperative or other abnormal condition.
A smooth landing is desirable but avoid the tendency of a long flare, as this will considerably increase the landing distance.
Apply maximum reverse thrust promptly after touchdown to help prevent brake temperatures from becoming excessive.
Note
An overweight landing requires a maintenance logbook entry along with an inspection by the
Maintenance Department.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Go-Around
7-20
30 AUG 10
7.4.4
Bounced Landing.
The GLD system is very effective in preventing bounced landings. Its automatic deployment requires that the thrust levers be at
IDLE prior to touchdown, as they should be for all landings. If the pilot believes that thrust must be added and maintained until
touchdown to salvage a landing, then a balked/rejected landing should be executed.
Should the aircraft experience a bounced landing and become airborne, a balked/rejected landing should be executed.
7.5
Go-Around
The go-around procedure is accomplished by simultaneously applying go-around thrust, pressing either TOGA button, and
rotating toward the flight director target attitude (10 degrees). Once the descent is arrested and the airplane is accelerating,
select flaps 8. When a positive rate of climb is established, select the gear up.
Climb out speed is flown as per the normal go-around profile using the V2 marker (which was preset prior to descent) as a
reference. If the flaps are failed, climb at VREF to 1000 AFE.
If a turning missed approach is required, the minimum airspeed is V2 + 10 with flaps 8. Turns at speeds less than V2 + 10
require the selection of BANK to ensure adequate overbank protection.
7.5.1
Go-Around (2-Engine).
Reference
at minimums, no
contact or goaround is called
Positive rate
PF
GO-AROUND, SET THRUST, FLAPS 8
<-200> Set thrust levers close to go-around
thrust
<-701> Advance thrust levers to TOGA detent

Rotate to FD commanded pitch (approximately
10 degrees pitch up)
at V2 + 10 to 15
GEAR UP
SPEED MODE
above 400 AGL
HEADING MODE, or NAV MODE (as

appropriate)
above 600 AGL
Set/verify thrust to carats on N1 gauges

Set flaps 8
THRUST SET, FLAPS 8
POSITIVE RATE
Positions gear lever up
GEAR UP
Select speed mode

Verify CLB on FMA
CLIMB
Select HDG or NAV

Verify HDG or appropriate NAV mode on FMA
HEADING, or FMS
Engage autopilot
AUTOPILOT ON
Advise ATC, if applicable
ONE THOUSAND FEET
AUTOPILOT ON
at FRA
Set speed bug to 200 knots
@ VT - 10 FLAPS UP
AFTER TAKEOFF CHECK
3,000 AFE
PM
Accelerate as required
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Retract flaps
FLAPS UP
AFTER TAKEOFF CHECK
COMPLETE

Go-Around
7.5.2
7-21
30 AUG 10
Go-Around (Single-Engine).
Reference
at minimums, no
contact or goaround is called
PF
GO-AROUND, SET THRUST, FLAPS 8

<-200> Set thrust lever close to go-around
thrust
<-701> Advance thrust lever to TOGA detent
Rotate to FD commanded pitch (approximately
10 degrees pitch up)
Positive rate
PM
Set/verify thrust to carat on N1 gauge

Set flaps 8
THRUST SET, FLAPS 8

POSITIVE RATE
GEAR UP
GEAR UP
SPEED MODE,
BUG V2
at V2
Select speed mode
If airspeed above V2+10, set speed bug to

V2+10
If airspeed between V2 and V2+10, maintain
airspeed
If airspeed below V2, set speed bug to V2
Verify CLB on FMA
CLIMB
above 400 AGL
HEADING MODE, BANK or NAV

MODE BANK (as appropriate)
above 600 AGL
Select HDG or NAV

Select BANK
Verify HDG or appropriate NAV mode on FMA
HEADING BANK, or FMS BANK
Engage autopilot
AUTOPILOT ON
AUTOPILOT ON
Note: When autopilot is selected ON, the airspeed bug resets to present speed.
at FRA
ONE THOUSAND FEET
Select ALT
Verify ALT on FMA
ALT
Retract flaps
FLAPS UP

THRUST SET

AFTER TAKEOFF CHECK
COMPLETE
@ VT - 10 FLAPS UP
at VT
Advise ATC if applicable
Select speed mode

Verify CLB on FMA
CLIMB
SET MCT
Select BANK OFF
AFTER TAKEOFF CHECK
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-22
30 AUG 10
7.5.3

Profiles
Rejected/Balked Landing.
It is a common belief that an aircraft can successfully complete a go-around, without ground contact, from any point during the
approach or landing phase. This is definitely not the case. In general, no aircraft is certified to successfully complete a goaround without ground contact once it has entered the low-energy landing regime.
In this flight regime, the aircraft is in a state of very low kinetic and potential energy. The hazardous situation is compounded
by the fact that turbofan engines can require up to 8 seconds to accelerate from idle to full go-around power.
The low-energy regime occurs when the following conditions are met:
Landing gear and flaps set for landing

Aircraft is descending
Thrust is stabilized in the idle range
Airspeed is decreasing
Aircraft is 50 ft. or less
The decision to place an aircraft into the low-energy regime is a decision to land. If there are any doubts regarding the
probability of completing a safe landing, a go-around must be initiated prior to entry into the low-energy regime.
Rejected/Balked Landing Recovery Maneuver.
When a rejected/balked landing is initiated:
Fly the aircraft

Set maximum thrust and ensure flight spoilers are retracted
Ensure that the aircraft is not stalled - respect the stick shaker
Use ailerons and rudder to level and maintain wings level
Rotate smoothly to arrest the descent while respecting the stick shaker - continue the rotation as the aircraft begins to
accelerate
Be aware that the aircraft may make ground contact
Be aware of a possible loss of lift leaving ground effect
Do not change configuration until a positive climb and acceleration is achieved
Do not overcontrol pitch - stay just above the shaker
When clear of obstacles, lower the nose and transition to a standard go-around flight profile
7.6
Profiles
The following profiles are visual aids to supplement the profile dialogue boxes, callouts, and procedures.
The profiles covered in this section are:
1. Normal Takeoff
2. Engine Failure During Takeoff (after V1)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Precision Approach
Precision Approach - Single-Engine
Nonprecision Approach
Nonprecision Approach - Single-Engine
Visual Approach (Pattern)
Visual Approach (Straight-in)
Normal Go-Around
Go-Around (Single-Engine)
Emergency Descent
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Profiles
7-23
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-24
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Profiles

Profiles
7-25
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-26
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Profiles

Profiles
7-27
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-28
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Profiles

Profiles
7-29
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


7-30
30 AUG 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Profiles

Adverse Weather
Table of Contents
8-i
12 FEB 10
Chapter 8: Adverse Weather

8.1
Operation on Contaminated Surfaces.................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1
Definitions ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2
Hydroplaning....................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3
Taxi ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4
Takeoff ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.5
Landing ............................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.6
After Landing....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2
Cold Weather Operations ......................................................................................................................
8.2.1
Airframe De-Icing/Anti-Icing ................................................................................................................
8.2.2
De/Anti-Icing Application.....................................................................................................................
8.2.3
Phase of Flight Procedures.................................................................................................................
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-8
8.3
Hot Weather Operations ......................................................................................................................
8.3.1
Taxi ...................................................................................................................................................
8.3.2
Takeoff ..............................................................................................................................................
8.3.3
Landing .............................................................................................................................................
8.3.4
Brake Cooling ...................................................................................................................................
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8.4
Weather Radar......................................................................................................................................
8.4.1
Power Output ....................................................................................................................................
8.4.2
Display Calibration ............................................................................................................................
8.4.3
Flat-Plate Antenna ............................................................................................................................
8.4.4
TILT Control ......................................................................................................................................
8.4.5
Operating Tip ....................................................................................................................................
8.4.6
Autotilt (AUTO) Switch ......................................................................................................................
8.4.7
GAIN Control.....................................................................................................................................
8.4.8
Ground Clutter Suppression .............................................................................................................
8.4.9
RANGE Control.................................................................................................................................
8.4.10 Transfer Mode...................................................................................................................................
8.4.11 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................
8.4.12 Summary...........................................................................................................................................
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-17
8.5
Windshear............................................................................................................................................. 8-17
8.5.1
Airplane Performance in Windshear ................................................................................................. 8-17
8.5.2
Avoidance ......................................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.5.3
Precautions - Takeoff........................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.5.4
Precautions - Approach and Landing................................................................................................ 8-18
8.5.5
Recovery Maneuver.......................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.6
Takeoff Alternate / Takeoff Minimums ...............................................................................................
8.6.1
Takeoff Alternate...............................................................................................................................
8.6.2
Takeoff Minimums.............................................................................................................................
8.6.3
Approach Minimums .........................................................................................................................
8.6.4
Braking Action Takeoff & Landing Wind Component Guidelines......................................................
8-19
8-19
8-19
8-20
8-20
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Table of Contents
8-ii
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Operation on Contaminated Surfaces
8-1
12 FEB 10
Chapter 8: Adverse Weather

8.1
Experience with operations conducted from contaminated runways has shown that standing water, slush, snow or ice causes a
deteriorating effect on takeoff and landing performance.
During takeoff on a contaminated runway, airplane acceleration is reduced. Energy normally available for acceleration is
dissipated in compression or displacement of the contaminant and the resulting impingement of the contaminant onto the
airplane can aggravate this energy loss. Reference the chart on page 9-19 for more information on contamination levels for
takeoff.
Stopping distance is dependent upon many factors; one of which is depth of runway contaminant. Braking effectiveness is
reduced due to low tire-to runway friction and is further reduced if tire hydroplaning occurs. In some cases, stopping distances
will decrease as contamination depth increases; however, the risk of hydroplaning is significantly greater and longer distances
normally result. In either situation the aircraft could experience directional control difficulties.
8.1.1
Definitions.
Contaminated.
A runway or taxiway is considered contaminated when it is neither wet nor dry.
Wet.
A runway is considered to be wet when there is sufficient moisture on the runway surface to cause it to appear reflective with a
water depth less than 1/8 inch covering 100% of the runway surface. If there are dry spots showing on a drying runway with
no standing water, the runway is not considered to be wet.
Standing Water.
Standing water is usually caused by heavy rainfall and/or insufficient runway drainage with a depth of more than 1/8 inch and
covering more than 25% of the runway.
Slush.
Slush is snow saturated with water, which displaces with a splatter when stepped on firmly. It is encountered at temperatures
around 5C (41F).
Wet/Compacted Snow.
Wet snow will easily stick together and tend to form a snowball when compacted by hand.
Dry/Loose Snow.
Dry light snow is loose and can easily be blown. If compacted by hand, it will readily fall apart again.
Ice.
A runway surface condition where braking action is expected to be very low, due to the presence of ice with a dull weathered
appearance or a shiny wet appearance.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


8-2
12 FEB 10
8.1.2
Adverse Weather
Hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning can occur on runways contaminated with standing water or slush and results when hydrodynamic lift forces
generated between the tires and the contaminant are sufficient to lift the tires and airplane clear of the runway surface. In this
condition, the tires are no longer capable of providing directional control or effective braking.
Hydroplaning does not normally occur in water depths of less than 1/5 inch, although under some conditions the minimum
depth may be as low as 1/10 inch. Once hydroplaning has commenced, it can be sustained over areas where the water depth
and/or speeds are lower than those required for initiation.
8.1.3
Taxi.
Refer to the POH Limitations, for operations in icing conditions.

Always taxi at a manageable speed (10 knots maximum is recommended).
Maintain a greater distance than normal between aircraft when taxiing on contaminated surfaces.
Application of brakes should be kept to a minimum during turns. Anticipate increased stopping distances and be aware of the
additional hazard of operating on icy surfaces with crosswind conditions.
Reverse thrust should be used with extreme caution and only when necessary to prevent nosewheel skidding or departure from
the intended taxi path.
Do not use thrust reversers if ground surfaces are covered with slush, ice, standing water or snow except in the interest of
safety.
Be aware of other aircrafts jet blast, obscured runways and taxi/ramp markings, and snowbanks.
When moderate to severe icing conditions are present during prolonged ground operations, periodic engine run-ups to as high
a thrust setting as practical are recommended (70% N1 maximum recommended). This run-up should be done for a minimum
of 15 seconds at 10 minute intervals and within 5 minutes prior to takeoff. This action is effective in dissipating fan blade
icing.
Prior to positioning for takeoff, ensure that the airplanes surfaces are aerodynamically clean.
Engine power check should be accomplished prior to takeoff.
8.1.4
Takeoff.
Takeoff on contaminated runways is prohibited when contamination levels exceed the values given in the Limtations Chapter
of this POH. The use of reduced thrust settings is prohibited if the runway is contaminated or if wing and/or cowl anti-icing is
being used. Continuous ignition must be used for takeoff and landing on contaminated runways.
Apply brakes and advance thrust levers. If the aircraft starts to creep or slide during engine power check, release the brakes
and begin the takeoff roll. Anticipate a lag in nosewheel steering response and possible nosewheel skidding. Apply
corrections as necessary.
Directional control can be improved by employing a light but firm forward pressure on the control column to increase
nosewheel steering effectiveness.
Use aerodynamic control as soon as it becomes available. Ailerons can increase directional control in the 60 to 100 knot range.
Avoid large or rapid rudder inputs.
<-200 only>
When conducting takeoff with the wing and/or cowl anti-icing selected on, the engine 10th stage bleed air valves must be
closed. Use APU bleed air for air conditioning and pressurization or conduct an unpressurized takeoff as outlined in the
Supplemental Chapter of this POH.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
8-3
12 FEB 10
Rejected Takeoff.
If the decision is made to reject the takeoff, maximum deceleration is achieved by using maximum reverse thrust and
maximum braking, also:
During the rejected takeoff anticipate the possibility of skidding

Keep the nosewheel centered and maintain directional control with the rudder and small inputs of the nosewheel steering
If a skid develops, reduce thrust to idle reverse and, if necessary, return the engines to idle forward thrust to return to the
centerline. Regain the centerline with nosewheel steering, rudder and/or differential braking.
Directional control problems on slick runways could also be encountered due to excessive cycling of the anti-skid system.
To correct the condition, reduce brake pressure.
8.1.5
Landing.
Landing on contaminated runways is prohibited when contamination levels exceed the values given in the Limitations Chapter
of this POH.
For landing on a contaminated runway, lower the nosewheel immediately and maintain light forward control column pressure.
Thrust reversers are most effective at high speed. At low speed, minimize the intensity and duration of reverse thrust.
However, in an emergency situation, maximum reverse thrust may be used to a complete stop.
Do not pump the brakes; pumping the brakes will only diminish braking effectiveness. Apply brakes normally with steadily
increasing pressure.
Anticipate skidding and hydroplaning and be prepared to take the following necessary actions:
If a skid develops, reduce thrust to idle reverse and if necessary, return the engines to idle forward thrust to return to the
centerline. Regain the centerline with nosewheel steering, rudder and/or differential braking.
Directional control problems on slick runways could also be encountered due to excessive cycling of the anti-skid system.
To correct the condition, reduce brake pressure.
Do not attempt to turnoff from a icy runway until the speed is reduced to prevent skidding. Anticipate low friction when
approaching the touchdown zone at the far end of the runway due to heavy rubber and/or oil deposits.
<-200 only>
When conducting a landing with the wing and/or cowl anti-icing selected ON, the engine 10th stage bleed air valves must be
CLOSED. Prior to the approach, start the APU and transfer the bleed air loading to the APU, or land unpressurized if APU is
unavailable as outlined in the Supplemental Chapter of this POH.
Crosswind Landings.
In crosswind conditions, the crosswind crab angle should be maintained for as long as possible prior to touchdown. Aim for
the centerline or slightly on the upwind side and avoid touching down on the downwind side of the runway. This technique
will minimize the possibility of the airplane weathervaning into the wind after touchdown and drifting toward the downwind
side of the runway.
Use of Reverse Thrust.
The intensity and duration of reverse thrust used at low speeds should be minimized. Using reverse thrust at low speeds on
snow and/or ice covered runways can cause foreign object damage (FOD) to the engines and possibly lead to loss of forward
visibility due to whiteout.
It should be noted that maximum reverse thrust may be used to a full stop during emergencies.
The use of reverse thrust during crosswind conditions may aggravate directional control of the aircraft. If the airplane is
allowed to weathervane into the wind, drifting may occur toward the downwind side of the runway at a faster rate than normal.
To correct the situation, it will be necessary to move the thrust levers out of reverse thrust and go to forward idle thrust. Use
rudder steering and differential braking as required to prevent over correcting past the runway centerline. When reestablished
on the runway centerline, reapply steady brakes and reverse thrust as required to stop the airplane.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Cold Weather Operations
8-4
12 FEB 10
8.1.6
After Landing.
Do not retract the flaps further than 20 degrees if ice accumulation on the flaps is suspected. This will prevent possible damage
to the structure and mechanism.
Anticipate that ramps can be iced over and that the use of reverse thrust for stopping the airplane may be necessary.
8.2
The winter seasons low temperatures and potentially hazardous freezing precipitation present additional problems when
operating the aircraft both in-flight and on the ground. Although many highly qualified people prepare the aircraft for flight, it
is the ultimate responsibility of the pilot-in-command to ensure that the airplane is in a condition for safe flight prior to takeoff.
Cold weather operations refer to ground handling, takeoffs and landings conducted on surfaces where frozen moisture is
present. These conditions are typically encountered when the surface temperature is at or below 0C (32F), although frozen
moisture may be present and persist for a significant time at higher temperatures. Supplementary procedures are provided to
account for two categories of operational hazards associated with frozen contamination, which are:
Performance losses and degradation of the aircrafts handling characteristics caused by contamination of aerodynamically
critical surfaces
Ground handling difficulties and performance penalties on takeoff and landing caused by the contamination of runways and
airplane movement areas
In all cases, it is assumed that the decision to operate the aircraft in cold weather conditions will be based on sound airmanship.
8.2.1
Airframe De-Icing/Anti-Icing.
General Procedures.
The following precautions must be observed when operating in cold weather conditions:
Before entering the airplane, the pilot-in-command or qualified delegate must complete a thorough inspection of the critical
surfaces to determine the extent of contamination
After de-icing, confirm that all surfaces are clean
If the takeoff cannot be started before the holdover time has expired, the airplane must again be inspected and, if necessary,
de-iced and anti-iced before attempting takeoff
WARNING
Takeoff is prohibited with frost, ice, snow or slush adhering to any critical surface, (wings,
upper fuselage, horizontal stabilizer, vertical stabilizer, control surfaces and engine inlets).
Note
Takeoff is permitted with frost adhering to:
The underside of the wing, that is caused by cold soaked fuel.
WARNING
Even small amounts of frost, ice, snow, or slush on the wing leading edges and forward
upper wing surface may adversely change the stall speeds, stall characteristics, and the
protection provided by the stall protection system, which may result in loss of control on
takeoff.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
8-5
12 FEB 10
De-Icing/Anti-Icing Fluids.
The application of de-icing/anti-icing fluid is the most common means of cleaning and protecting the airplane surfaces. These
fluids are broadly classified as Type I, Type II, Type III and Type IV.
Type I Fluids.
Type I fluid is a heated water/glycol solution that is used for de-icing of the aircraft. In concentrated form, these fluids contain
glycols to a minimum of 80% with no thickening agents. Their resulting low viscosity and very short holdover time provide
very limited anti-icing protection.
Type II Fluids.
Type II fluid provides anti-icing protection and is applied after the aircraft has been de-iced. Type II fluid can be applied
neat (100% glycol) or mixed with water to a minimum concentration of 50/50. The fluids relatively high viscosity
(thickening agent) is effective in improving the anti-icing holdover time. During takeoff, the slipstream imparts a shear stress
to the fluid layer causing it to flow off the surface to which it was applied.
Type III Fluids.
Type III fluid is a thickened fluid which has properties that lie between Types I and II. Therefore, it provides a longer holdover
time than Type I but less than Type II.
Type IV Fluids.
Type IV fluid provides superior anti-icing protection and is applied after the aircraft has been de-iced. This fluid is normally
applied neat (100%), and cold. Type IV fluid uses thickening agents to increase the viscosity of the fluid and consequently,
Type IV fluid provides significantly longer holdover time. During takeoff, the slipstream imparts a shear stress to the fluid
layer, causing it to flow off the surface to which it was applied. Type IV fluid can be applied heated with no change in
performance.
It is essential to takeoff with an aerodynamically clean airplane. All surfaces of the airplane (wing, vertical and horizontal
stabilizers, flight control surfaces, spoilers and flaps) must be free of frost, ice and snow before takeoff. De-icing/anti-icing
must be accomplished as close as practical to takeoff to maximize the time that anti-icing will be able to provide protection.
The Quick Reference Handbook (QRH) provides a de-icing/anti-icing checklist for use before and after spraying the airplane.
The calculation of the anti-icing holdover time is of fundamental concern to the flight deck crew. The QRH provides holdover
time tables for various kinds of freezing precipitation based on the de-icing/anti-icing fluid used.
8.2.2
De/Anti-Icing Application.
Notify passengers.
Configure the Aircraft.
PARKING BRAKE ................................................................................................................................................... SET/CHKD
THRUST LEVERS ................................................................................................................................................................ IDLE
PACKS.....................................................................................................................................................................................OFF
BLEEDS.......................................................................................................................................................................... ALL OFF
ANTI-ICE ................................................................................................................................................................................OFF
WIPERS ....................................................................................................................................................................... OFF/PARK
FLAPS........................................................................................................................................................................................ UP
ENGINES......................................................................................................................................................................AS REQD
APU...............................................................................................................................................................................AS REQD
If Engine shutdown is required:
ELECTRICS ..................................................................................................................................................................SET
THRUST LEVERS............................................................................................................................................. SHUTOFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


8-6
12 FEB 10
Adverse Weather
Configure the Aircraft (Expanded).

PARKING BRAKE
SET/Checked

THRUST LEVERS
IDLE
PACKS
OFF
Ensure L & R PACKS are selected OFF and L PACK OFF and R PACK OFF White Status messages are displayed
BLEEDS
All OFF
<-200>
APU LCV &
10TH STAGE ISOL switchlights ................................................................................................................... Select CLOSED
L & R 10TH STAGE switchlights .................................................................................................................. Select CLOSED
L & R 14TH STAGE switchlights .................................................................................................................. Select CLOSED
<-701>
BLEED VALVES ........................................................................................................................................................... CLSD
ANTI-ICE
Verify wings and cowl switches are selected OFF

WIPERS
OFF
OFF/PARK
Verify windshield wiper switch is selected OFF/PARK. Wipers should be OFF/PARK during the fluid application but may
be used if de/anti-ice fluid is inadvertently sprayed on the windshield.
FLAPS
UP
Prevents ice and slush from accumulating in the flap cavities
Engines
AS REQD
Normal de/anti-icing configuration will be:
Engines........................................................................................................................................................................Idling
Some stations may require engine shutdown for de/anti-icing. In this case, the APU must remain on.
Note
If the APU or APU generator is inoperative, then alternating start and shutdown of the engines must
be accomplished.
APU
AS REQD
Normal de/anti-icing configuration will be:

APU............................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
8-7
12 FEB 10
If engine shutdown is required:

ELECTRICS
SET
<-200 only>
When the APU generator is providing AC power, select GEN1 and GEN 2 switches OFF
THRUST LEVERS
SHUTOFF
Post Application Check.

This check will be accomplished by qualified ground personnel after de/anti-icing fluid has been applied to the aircraft. The
verbal or written report from de/anti-icing personnel also confirms that the Post Application Check is complete in accordance
with the FOM and all critical surfaces are free of adhering contamination.
Obtain De/Anti-Icing Report.
In accordance with the FOM, obtain the de/anti-icing report.
Obtain Clearance and Reconfigure.
Engines
Start if Required
If engines were running then shutdown before fluid application, only the (D) items on the Before Start and After Start
Checks need to be accomplished
Flight Controls
Checked
EICAS Control Panel (ECP)........................................................................................................................................... F/CTL
Move the control wheel both left and right to full deflection. Verify smooth and correct movement without binding
on the FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic page.
Ensure no abnormal caution, status or advisory messages on the FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic or status pages,
EICAS Control Panel (ECP)............................................................................................................................................ STAT

BLEEDS/PACKS
SET/ON
Ensure all BLEEDS are correctly re-configured, L & R PACKS are selected ON, and L PACK OFF and R PACK OFF
White Status messages extinguish
ANTI-ICE
Refer to Chapter 3: Limitations Operation in Icing Conditions for specific anti-icing system operation
STAB TRIM
AS REQD
Set for T/O
STAB trim indicator is green and set as per the SeeGee wheel.
Prior to taxi, obtain de/anti-icing crew and ATC clearance.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
8-8
12 FEB 10
8.2.3
Phase of Flight Procedures.
The company will always adhere to the Clean Aircraft Concept. To avoid APU start malfunctions, the area in the vicinity of
the APU intake must be clear of heavy snow buildup.
In addition to a visual check, a tactile check of the wing leading edge, wing forward upper surface and wing rear upper surface
is required during the External Walkaround inspection to determine that the wing is free from frost, ice, snow or slush when the
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is 5C (41F) or less or the wing fuel temperature is 0C (32F) or less AND
Visible moisture in any form (such as clouds, fog, mist, rain, snow, sleet or ice crystals), is present, or
Water is present on the wings, or
The atmospheric conditions have been conducive to frost formation.
Note
Ice and frost may continue to adhere to wing surfaces for some time even at outside air temperatures
above 5C (41F).
Clear ice is most likely to form when the aircraft is operated in an environment of high humidity and the upper surfaces of the
wing are in contact with the cold fuel in the wing tanks. This can occur at temperatures up to 10C (50F). Takeoff is
permissible with the following accumulations on the underside of the wing surfaces associated with the fuel tanks:
1/8 inch layer of frost

1/16 inch layer of ice
As ice from a previous flight may be difficult to detect on the unheated tail section, examine the winglet to assist in
determining whether ice may be present on the tail.
During the First Flight of the Day walkaround, stand in the aircraft main doorway to look into the engine inlet for possible
build up of snow or ice in the bottom of the cowl. If ice or snow is visible, you may not get N1 rotation upon startup.
Before Engine Start.
Before starting the engines, the Captain should assess the surface conditions of the ramp. Special considerations should be
given to problems that could be encountered during the engine start and pushback.
Caution
Under no circumstances is it permissible to use de-icing fluid in the intake area.
<-200 only>
Caution
N1 fan rotation must be confirmed prior to fuel introduction. Water may pool and freeze the lower
intake jamming the adjacent fan blades.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
8-9
12 FEB 10
Engine Start.
During cold weather starts, initial oil pressure response may be slow. As the engine accelerates, the oil pressure may rapidly
increase then exceed the normal range. The high oil pressure should progressively reduce to normal as the engine achieves
normal operating temperatures. Refer to the Chapter 3: Limitations for oil pressure limitations.
Caution
If oil pressure is not indicated by the time idle rpm is achieved, conduct an immediate shutdown of the
engine.
Expect generators to be slow in producing steady power due to cold oil in the IDGs. Five minutes may be required for the
IDGs to stabilize sufficiently.
Takeoff.
Refer to Chapter 3: Limitations for operations in icing conditions.
<-200>
Note
The 10th-stage engine bleeds must be CLOSED for takeoff when the cowl and/or wing anti-ice systems
are in use.
If wing and/or cowl anti-ice will be used for takeoff:
APU operative:
APU LCV and 10TH STAGE ISOL valve........................................................................................................... select OPEN

10TH STAGE L & R BLEED AIR ................................................................................................................. select CLOSED
APU inoperative:
Conduct an unpressurized takeoff

<-701>
With the bleeds in AUTO, selection of wing and/or cowl anti-ice forces all bleed demands (PACKs and anti-ice) to the engines.
It is recommended that once anti-ice is selected on (and APU electrical power is no longer required) that the APU be
shutdown.
In Flight.
Refer to Chapter 3: Limitations for operations in icing conditions.
Flaps should not be extended in icing conditions except when required for takeoff, approach and landing. If flaps are deployed
in icing conditions for extended periods or in severe icing, light to moderate buffet may be encountered. No handling
difficulties will result.
WARNING
Small accumulations of ice on the wing leading edge can change stall speed and stall
characteristics or warning margin provided by the stall protection system. Do not reduce
speed below VREF or land with visible ice on the wing except under failure conditions.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Hot Weather Operations
8-10
12 FEB 10
Landing.
<-200>
Note
The 10th-stage engine bleeds must be CLOSED for landing when the cowl and/or wing anti-ice
systems are in use.
If wing and/or cowl anti-ice will be used for landing, prior to selecting flaps 8:
APU operative:
Start the APU

APU LCV and 10TH STAGE ISOL valve ........................................................................................................... select OPEN
10TH STAGE L & R BLEED AIR..................................................................................................................select CLOSED
APU inoperative:
Conduct an unpressurized landing

<-701>
With the bleeds in AUTO, selection of wing and/or cowl anti-ice forces all bleed demands (PACKs and anti-ice) to the engines.
Unless required for electrical power, the APU need not be started prior to landing.
8.3
Hot Weather Operations
Extremely hot environments present operational problems of a different nature than those associated with cold weather
operations. The main concerns focus primarily on passenger and crew comfort and the significant decrease in airplane
performance which high ground temperatures can effect.
The following recommended procedures have been provided to supplement the normal operating procedures:
APU air/ground air ......................................................................................................................................................Establish
Note
During airplane operations when the flight deck and cabin temperatures are above 30C (86F), the
air conditioning system must be operated or low-pressure ground conditioned air must be supplied to
the aircraft. Conditioned air is required to maintain EICAS and EFIS display temperatures within a
range that prevents display shutdown.
10TH STAGE ISOL VALVE ............................................................................................................................... As Required

10TH STAGE engine bleeds...................................................................................................................................... CLOSED
L & R PACKS......................................................................................................................................................................ON
Auto cockpit & cabin temperature controls ....................................................................................................................COLD
Cargo switch........................................................................................................................................................................AIR
Display fan .....................................................................................................................................................................NORM
ARINC fan .....................................................................................................................................................................NORM
Windshield heat.................................................................................................................................................................. OFF
Weather Radar.................................................................................................................................................................... OFF
Nonessential cockpit lighting............................................................................................................................................. OFF
CRT Displays ..................................................................................................................................................................... Dim
All air outlets & gaspers....................................................................................................................................................Open
Window shades ................................................................................................................................................................ Close
Note
The importance of keeping the interior of the airplane as cool as possible cannot be overemphasized.
All entrances and access doors to the airplane should be kept closed as much as possible and the cargo
bay should not be left open any longer than is necessary. Every effort to reduce the heat being
generated in the flight deck while the airplane is on the ground should be made.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Adverse Weather
Weather Radar
8.3.1
8-11
12 FEB 10
Taxi.
Operating in areas of high ambient temperatures may cause brake temperature limits to be exceeded. This condition would
lead to fusible plugs melting and deflation of the overheated tires involved.
Runway and taxiway surface temperatures often exceed the ambient temperature. Consideration for brake cooling should
always be taken into account. Excessive use and riding the brakes should be avoided. Minimize braking when possible to
allow ample time for cooling between applications. The recommended technique is to allow the airplane to accelerate, then
brake to a very slow taxi speed and release the brakes completely.
8.3.2
Takeoff.
High ambient temperatures in combination with short runways or high elevation airports could cause substantial penalties to
airplane performance. Special attention must be given to the restriction imposed on the maximum takeoff weight. The
penalties should be taken into account early in the preflight preparations.
8.3.3
Landing.
The landing phase of flight during high ambient temperature conditions is not as demanding as with cold weather operations.
It should be noted that runway conditions, particularly at the touchdown area could be slick due to heavy deposits of melted
rubber.
8.3.4
Brake Cooling.
For quick turnaround operations, the energy absorbed by the brakes following each landing may cause considerable delays
between flights. Overheating of the brakes may cause the wheel fusible plugs to heat up and result in tire deflation.
The brake cooling times in the Performance section of the Pilot Operating Handbook (POH) must be adhered to.
Note
A minimum of 15 minutes must be observed between a landing or rejected takeoff and a subsequent
takeoff with the BTMS operative to allow the brakes to reach maximum temperature. BTMS
readings must be 5 or less and not increasing prior to takeoff.
During landing, excessive braking should be avoided and the thrust reversers should be used to their full advantage.
8.4
Weather Radar
The primary function of the WXR-840 weather radar system is to aid pilots in the detection and avoidance of areas of
precipitation in and around thunderstorms.
The WXR-840 cannot detect clear air turbulence, windshear, clouds or lightning. However, rain, wet hail, moderate to heavy
wet snow - and in some cases, possible icing conditions - can be detected by the system.
The WXT-840 can also be used to map-read the terrain.
The basic characteristics of the X-band radar system are:
Low-power transmitter (25 watts)

Flat-plate antenna (14 inches)
Digital processing
Relatively narrow beam width, and
Color screen imagery
This new-technology solid-state radar requires different operating techniques when compared to older parabolic-antenna radar.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Weather Radar
8-12
12 FEB 10
8.4.1
Power Output.
The WXR-840 weather radar system uses digital-signal processing which has allowed transmitter power requirements to be
reduced to 25 watts.
The use of digital-signal processing and low power optimizes the performance of the radar system.
8.4.2
Display Calibration.
The colors on this radar represent variations in rainfall rate and create a display which is easier to interpret than the older
monochrome sets. Detectable weather appears as one of the following colors - least reflective to most reflective: Black,
Green, Yellow, Red, and Magenta.
Another significant difference is the way the picture is painted on the screen. In previous analog weather radar, new returns
were added by each sweep of the antenna while old returns gradually bled away.
The new radar display is generated in the same way as a TV screen; each new sweep is a totally new picture - the old picture is
completely erased. Thus, color changes can occur quickly if a return is close to the threshold between rainfall-rate categories.
Digital weather radar incorporates hypersensitive receivers and sensitivity time control (STC) circuitry to present a true
calibrated image within a range of approximately 60 miles. Therefore, a yellow storm return at 60 miles will still be yellow at
10 miles.
WARNING
Sunglasses with polarized lenses that are designed to filter specific colors/frequencies of
light may adversely affect a pilots ability to see some colors shown on radar and EFIS
displays. Some elements on the display could be completely invisible while wearing these
types of sunglasses.
Also, the color of some elements may be changed. For example, some blue light filtering lenses can change magenta to red.
For a radar target, this represents a reduction in the actual level of intensity of the target.
Storm
Category
-
VIP*
Level
Weak1
Moderate2
Strong3
Very
Strong4
Intense5
Extreme6
Precipitation Rate
in/hr
mm/hr
Less
Less
than 0.03
than 0.8
0.03
0.8
to 0.07
to 1.8
0.07
1.8
to 0.2
to 5.1
0.2
5.1
to .52
to 13.2
0.52
and greater
13.2
and greater
Color
BLACK
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
MAGENTA
* Video Integrated Processor

Weak Storm - Light to moderate turbulence, possible lightning
2
Moderate Storm - Light to moderate turbulence, possible lightning
3 Strong Storm - Severe turbulence, possible lightning
4
Very Strong Storm - Severe turbulence, likely lightning
5 Intense Storm - Severe turbulence, lightning, wing gusts, hail
6
Extreme Storm - Severe turbulence, large hail, lightning, extensive wind gusts.
1
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Weather Radar
8.4.3
8-13
12 FEB 10
Flat-Plate Antenna.
Some energy from the older parabolic antenna was lost in the side lobes. This resulted in more ground clutter at low altitudes
and more close-range weather returns around the periphery of the main beam. The flat-plate antenna transmits a narrow-focus,
long-range beam which greatly reduces the side lobes and focuses much more energy into the main lobe.
With the loss of the side lobes, TILT control becomes more critical. As you approach storms and reduce the range, the tilt must
be adjusted downward to avoid overscanning significant returns.
When using a flat-plate antenna for the first time, some pilots have expressed doubts about the lack of weather targets
displayed, pointing out that they could see clouds that were not shown on the radar. Since radar display of clouds is dependent
upon moisture content, clouds with low moisture may not have enough reflectivity to be displayed. This misunderstanding has
been aggravated by use of the flat-plate antenna.
The flat-plate antenna exhibits characteristics different from the parabolic antenna. A great reduction in side-lobe energy
results in the tilt setting being very sensitive, and its adjustment is critical to effective weather detection. It is recommended
that the PM coordinate tilt and range selections with the PF to detect and avoid weather.
8.4.4
TILT Control.
The TILT control allows the radar beam to be moved up +15or down -15 to aid the pilot in interpreting storm activity. Proper
use of the TILT control allows the pilot to achieve the best picture of storm-cell size, height, and relative direction of
movement. Procedures for adjusting the TILT control vary depending on user requirements. Proper use requires experience
and practice.
8.4.5
Operating Tip.
Maximum rainfall rates in a thunderstorm usually occur about mid level in the storm. This is normally the area that will paint
the strongest returns. If the airplane is below that altitude, some antenna uptilt will be needed. Conversely, if the airplane is
above that altitude, some degree of down-tilt will be needed.
The amount of tilt needed varies with the estimated distance of the storm, the closer the storm, the more tilt required. In either
instance, it is good practice to periodically move the TILT control throughout its range to reduce the possibility of missing
close-in targets.
When operating over land, the best general guideline is to select a range that is within the line-of-sight distance to the horizon
and adjust the antenna tilt until a small amount of ground clutter appears at about the outer third of the display.
An aircraft at 10,000 ft. AGL, with the 300 nm range selected, will not be able to paint ground clutter much beyond 123 nm. A
better range selection at this altitude may be the 100 nm setting.
Once weather activity is identified, it is important to keep the radar beam pointed to the liquid portion of the cell. As discussed
earlier, ice crystals reflect less energy than liquid precipitation. Tilting the beam above the freezing level may result in an
underestimation of the cells intensity. Move the TILT control up and down to determine the most reflective portion of the cell.
8.4.6
Autotilt (AUTO) Switch.
Autotilt is designed to reduce pilot workload by automatically adjusting the antenna tilt angle to maintain to ratio tilt/angle
following altitude or range changes.
Autotilt is selected with the PUSH AUTO switch (push ON/push OFF). On the weather radar mode line, active autotilt is
indicated by a suffix A at the angle readout.
When autotilt is selected ON, manual tilt commands from the TILT control remain operational.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Weather Radar
8-14
12 FEB 10
8.4.7
GAIN Control.
The GAIN control is a seven-position switch that allows manual GAIN control of the radar system when operating in the MAP
and WX modes. When placed in the NORM position, the gain is preset to a value that allows the radar receiver to calibrate its
operation to the actual reflectivity level.
To aid pilots in making correct weather judgements, the GAIN control may be adjusted to higher or lower gain settings. The
high settings (+1, +2, +3) may be chosen to identify the highest levels of precipitation, while the lower settings (-1, -2, -3) may
be temporarily chosen to allow a more in-depth study of the most intense weather targets.
Each of the minus settings (-1, -2, -3) reduces the sensitivity of the radar system below that of the NORM setting by
approximately one color level.
Each of the plus settings (+1, +2, +3) increases the sensitivity of the radar system through a combination of lengthening the
transmitted pulse-width and increasing the receiver gain. The effective gain increase with each setting can be as much as one
color level when the target is in close (out to approximately 65 nm) and less than one color level at longer ranges.
The greatest utility offered by the plus gain setting is the ability to display light precipitation that otherwise would be just under
the green level threshold on the NORM setting. In many cases, these light levels still cause turbulence and can be avoided by
use of the plus gain feature.
Proper use of of the GAIN control allows a pilot, with weather radar operating experience, to estimate rainfall rates greater
than a VIP level 3 (red) or 5 (magenta) return. Targets that show in a reduced gain condition indicate that severe turbulence,
hail, and heavy rainfall is likely.
Caution
Although proper use of the GAIN control can provide added knowledge of the targets being displayed,
the pilot should always return the GAIN control to the NORM position when finished analyzing the
display. Failure to do so may result in missing significant targets at any range when operating in one
of the minus settings (-1, -2, -3).
8.4.8
Ground Clutter Suppression.
Ground clutter suppression (GCS) is operable only in the WX mode. When selected, GCS reduces the intensity of ground
returns and makes the precipitation returns easier to interpret. When selected, GCS is annunciated in cyan in the upper left
corner of the MFD.
GCS should only be used to identify ground clutter. Continuous operations with the GCS feature turned on is not
recommended because some precipitation returns may also be reduced in intensity or eliminated from the display.
If the antenna is excessively tilted down and GCS is turned on, a phenomenon knows as a GCS wedge may occur. This
wedge is represented as a black area (an area showing no return) located approximately +/- 10 degrees from the aircrafts nose,
and of the same depth of the ground return that was being painted prior to turning on GCS. To eliminate the wedge, turn GCS
off or raise the tilt angle until the wedge disappears.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Weather Radar
8.4.9
8-15
12 FEB 10
RANGE Control.
The RANGE control is a rotary knob that is used to select the maximum display range. For all of the selectable ranges, one
cyan or white (white for MAP mode only) half-range arc is shown in the center of the MFD.
Extending outward from the aircraft symbol is a blanked ranged area. The size of this blanked range area equals one eighth of
the selected range. The pilot should remember that the area between the airplane symbol and the perimeter of the blanked
range does not show any targets. The selectable ranges, range-arc annunciations and blanked range are shown on the MFD.
Selected Range
(NM)
Half-Range ARC
Annunciation
* Blanked
Range (nm)
2.5
0.6
10
1.2
20
10
2.5
40
20
80
40
10
160
80
20
320
160
40
640
320
80
* The blanked range is equal to one-eigth of the selected range
Note
The pilot must always keep in mind the blanked area of the radar display during and after airplane
maneuvers in the presence of potential weather. If one of the longer ranges is selected during and
after airplane maneuvers, it is possible for weather targets to slip within the blanked range area and
therefore not shown on the display. The shortest practical range should be momentarily selected both
during and following airplane maneuvers to ensure close-in weather shows on the display.
8.4.10 Transfer Mode.
In dual-radar control installations, the radar works in the split-scan mode. In the split-scan mode, the radar display on one side
can be completely different from the one on the other side except for the scan width (SEC). Selecting the XFR switch will
cause the system to operate as if it was a single-radar installation.
In single-radar installations, the XFR push button determines which display control panel (DCP) has control of the radar range.
If both sides have selected the radar format on the multifunction display and the ranges are the same, the display mileage on
the side controlling the radar range will be white; it will be yellow on the side not in control. A push on the XFR switch will
cause the other DCP to assume control of the radar range.
When the radar range is different than the one on the MFD, the annunciation RADAR NOT AT THIS RANGE will be
displayed.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Weather Radar
8-16
12 FEB 10
8.4.11 Operation.
Ground Operation.
The description of operation that follows has been derived from the vendors Pilots Guide. For a complete description of
operation, refer to the Collins WXR-840 Weather Radar System, Pilots Guide-Operation.
Switch the system to STBY mode when on the ground, unless you are using WX mode to check the terminal area prior to
departure.
WARNING
The safe distance for human exposure to radar radiation of the WXR-840 weather radar
system is 2 feet. Users should take necessary and reasonable precautions to ensure that
personnel and equipment sensitive to microwave radiation are kept safely beyond this
distance.
Takeoff and Climb.
Prior to takeoff, a short range selection such as 20 nm scale should be used. Tilt the antenna up to approximately +5 degrees to
scan for weather along the departure path. Select autotilt to compensate for the initial altitude and range changes during
climbout. As the airplane climbs, the tilt should be gradually decreased to aim at the regions of maximum precipitation while
avoiding ground clutter, and the range should be increased. To reduce pilot workload, the use of autotilt during ascents and
descents is encouraged.
Cruise.
For cruise, the tilt should be adjusted so that the ground returns are barely visible at the outer edge of the screen. Ground
returns are displayed in arcs, paralleled to range marks. They merge together as the tilt is brought down and cause shadowing
behind prominent features. They are generally smaller, sharper, and more angular than weather returns. To avoid
overscanning, the tilt will have to be adjusted more frequently as storms are approached or range is changed.
Having once adjusted the tilt setting, pilots should not be content with just an occasional glance at the screen. Failure to
periodically down-tilt leads to disappearing targets.
Middle Altitudes.
Antenna tilt for airplane flying at 20,000 ft. should be set near 0 degrees or slightly down.
Higher Altitudes.
This radar detects only liquid moisture in the form of raindrops, wet hail or wet snowflakes. Unless the beam is aimed at or
below the freezing level of weather cells, there may not be sufficient moisture to paint a return on the display.
TILT Control at High Altitudes (Above FL350).
The tilt used for the middle altitudes is not effective for flight above 35,000 feet. Typically, at high altitudes, a longer range is
selected and the tilt is adjusted slightly down. When selecting the operating range, keep in mind the line-of-sight distance to
the horizon. When operating at the higher altitudes, it is particularly easy to scan over the top of significant storm cells.
Do not attempt to overfly targets. It is possible that dry hail (which generally cannot be detected) and severe turbulence may be
present far above (radar) top of any areas of detected precipitation. The pilot should always remember that the weather radar
system is an avoidance tool. It is strongly recommended that pilots never attempt to overfly, underfly, or penetrate storm cells
or squall lines. For the safest operation, it is suggested that the pilot plan ahead to establish a flight path that avoids all returns
by the distance established in the FOM.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Windshear
8-17
12 FEB 10
Descent.
Antenna tilt has to be raised approximately one degree per 10,000 ft. of descent down to 15,000 ft., then one degree per 5,000
ft. below 15,000 ft. Range should be adjusted as necessary to scan the arrival route adequately. In heavy weather, the longest
appropriate range should be used to plan a safe avoidance route; the selection of shorter ranges will show greater details as you
enter the affected area. Remember that more tilt adjustment will be required each time the range is switched. Only very small
corrections will be required when using autotilt.
8.4.12 Summary.
Experience enables the pilot to properly analyze various types of storm displays. The key to avoiding detected weather is to
first determine the heading change needed to bypass a storm safely. Once established on the appropriate heading, recheck the
weather radar display to determine if further heading changes are required. The pilot should remember that the weather radar
system was designed as a weather avoidance tool.
The pilot has the sole responsibility to decide how close to approach the various types of storms shown on the displays. Most
convective weather systems in North America travel from south/southwest to north/northeast. The areas ahead of these storms
(north/northeast) can then be expected to contain gust fronts, turbulence, heavy rain, and possibly hail. It is suggested that
these areas be avoided by no less than the minimum distance established in the FOM.
8.5
Windshear
Improper or ineffective flight path control has been shown to be a primary factor in cases of flight into terrain. Low-altitude
windshear encounters are especially significant because windshear can place the crew in a situation that will require the
maximum performance capability of the airplane.
Windshear is a weather phenomenon of sudden wind speed and/or direction changes over a short distance. It can occur in both
the vertical and horizontal plane. The downburst is the most dangerous type of windshear, and studies have confirmed the
existence of a more hazardous form of downburst known as microburst.
Microbursts are intense downdrafts that, upon reaching the surface, spread outward from the downdraft center. This rapidly
flowing air can produce extreme vertical and horizontal windshear.
The duration of a microburst from the initial downburst to dissipation seldom exceeds 15 minutes. The maximum-intensity
winds typically last for about 2 to 4 minutes. Multiple microbursts have been known to occur in the same general area;
therefore when microburst activity starts, pilots should be prepared for further windshear encounters.
8.5.1
Airplane Performance in Windshear.
Knowledge of how windshear affects airplane performance is essential to the successful application of proper control
techniques.
The wind component is mostly horizontal at altitudes below 500 feet. Horizontal windshear may either improve or degrade
vertical flight path performance. Windshear that improves performance will be first indicated by an increasing airspeed. This
type of windshear may be a precursor of a shear that will decrease airspeed and degrade vertical flight path performance.
Increasing performance windshear is annunciated on the PFD by a flashing amber WINDSHEAR caution indication and the
alpha margin indicator (AMI).
Decreasing performance windshear is annunciated on the PFD by a flashing red WINDSHEAR warning indication and the
alpha margin indicator (AMI). COMPLIANCE WITH ALL WINDSHEAR WARNINGS IS MANDATORY.
In critical low-altitude situations, flight path control must be maintained by adjusting the pitch and thrust. An increase in pitch
attitude, even though the airspeed may be decreasing, will increase the lifting force and improve the flight path angle.
Maximum available thrust, combined with proper pitch control, will utilize the total airplane performance capability.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Windshear
8-18
12 FEB 10
8.5.2
Avoidance.
Windshear conditions that exceed the performance capabilities of commercial transport airplanes have been observed below
500 feet. The flight crew should be vigilant for the presence of windshear along the intended flight path. Pilots must avoid
areas of known severe windshear. If severe windshear has been reported, pilots must delay takeoff or approach until conditions
improve.
Assist other pilots by reporting windshear encounters precisely and promptly. Accurate pilot reports can be a valuable clue to
the severity of a windshear condition. If windshear is suspected, the crew must be especially alert in order to be prepared for
an inadvertent encounter.
The flight crew must make the determination of marginal flight path control using all of the information available. This
determination is subjective and based on the pilots judgement of the situation.
As a guideline, marginal flight path control may be indicated by uncontrolled changes from normal steady-state flight
conditions in excess of:
15 knots indicated airspeed

500 feet per minute vertical speed
5 degrees pitch attitude
1 dot displacement from the glideslope
Note
EGPWS will detect and warn of Windshear conditions at altitudes below 1500 ft. AGL.
8.5.3
Precautions - Takeoff.
If windshear is suspected, do not use reduced thrust. Use the longest suitable runway provided it is clear of areas of known
windshear. Flaps 8 is recommended for takeoff.
Do not engage the autopilot below 1500 ft. AGL if windshear is reported or suspected in the area.
The aircraft is equipped with a windshear detection and recovery guidance system. Windshear flight director escape guidance
is available at all times below 1500 ft. AGL.
Pilots should be alert to airspeed fluctuations during takeoff and initial climb. Such fluctuations may be the first indication of
windshear. Control wheel forces may be different from those expected during a normal takeoff especially if airspeed is below
in-trim speed.
Closely monitor vertical flight path information such as those displayed by the vertical speed indicators and altimeters. The
PM should be especially aware of vertical flight path indications and call out any deviations from normal.
If windshear is encountered near the normal rotation speed and the airspeed suddenly decreases, there may not be sufficient
runway remaining to accelerate back to normal takeoff speeds. If there is insufficient runway remaining to stop, initiate a
normal rotation at least 2,000 ft. before the end of the runway. Ensure maximum engine thrust is set.
8.5.4
Precautions - Approach and Landing.
Avoid large thrust reductions or trim changes when responding to sudden airspeed increases as these may be followed by rapid
airspeed decreases.
In suspected windshear conditions, continuously crosscheck flight director commands using the vertical flight path
information available. Reading the vertical speed indication and glide slope displacement accurately, the PF can be pre-warned
of windshear activity. Either pilot should call out any deviation from normal.
Use of the autopilot on approach improves monitoring and recognition time.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
Takeoff Alternate / Takeoff Minimums
8.5.5
8-19
12 FEB 10
Recovery Maneuver.
See POH Chapter 7 for the Windshear Recovery Maneuver.
8.6
8.6.1
Takeoff Alternate.
If the departure airport visibility is below CAT I landing minimums for all usable runways, call Dispatch for a takeoff
alternate.
8.6.2
Takeoff Minimums.
No pilot may begin a takeoff in an airplane under IFR unless the reported prevailing visibility or the RVR equivalent is at or
above:
1. Refer to the Jeppesen Airport page, Takeoff Block for appropriate runway RVR/Visibility requirement. Takeoff minimums
shall be as published or as depicted in table below, whichever is higher. When takeoff weather minimums are not
published, use the standard takeoff minimums (The standard for aircraft with two engines is RVR 5000 or 1 mile).
Canada
All
Except
Canada
All
2. Use table below to confirm operable RVR and Runway Lighting/Marking requirements.
TDZ
MID
RO
Lighting/Markings
RC
1600 (500m)
HIRL or CL or RCLM1
RC2
1200 (350m)
RC2
1200 (350m)
RC2
1000 (300m)
RCLM (day only) or

HIRL or CL
RC2
1000 (300m)
RC2
1000 (300m)
RC2
1000 (300m)
HIRL and RCLM, or CL
RC2
500 (150m)
RC2
500 (150m)
RC2
500 (150m)
HIRL and CL
RC
600 (175m)
RC3
600 (175m)
A3
HIRL and CL and

RCLM
R - Required; C - Controlling visibility; S - May substitute for controlling visibility if C is not available; A - Advisory, if
reported
1
Takeoff is allowed without these, as long as other runway markings or lighting provide sufficient visual reference to identify
the takeoff surface and maintain directional control throughout the takeoff roll.
2
All are controlling, but one may be inoperative or not available. If four RVR systems are installed, the fourth far end sensor
is not controlling and not to be used as one of the required operative systems.
3 If MID RVR is OTS, TDZ and RO are required and controlling.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Adverse Weather
8-20
12 FEB 10
8.6.3
Approach Minimums.
Approach minimums for precision and non-precision shall be as published or as depicted in the following table, whichever is
higher. For this table, visibility is in statute miles, RVR is in feet, and where both visibility and RVR are shown, they are
depicted as RVR-Vis, (e.g. 1800 - ).
Min Alt
TDZ
MID
RO
Remarks
Circling
1000 ft. HAA or MDA
(whichever is higher)
Min ceiling
1000 ft.
3 sm
CAT I Non-Precision
MDA/DA
R,C
2400-
Use MID if
TDZ inop
Use MID if
TDZ inop
CAT I ILS
DA
8.6.4
R,C
1800-
Braking Action Takeoff & Landing Wind Component Guidelines.
Note
No correlation has been established between MU values and the braking action reports.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Table of Contents
9-i
12 FEB 10
Chapter 9: Performance
9.1
General.................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
Normal Takeoff Path .............................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3
Standard Engine Failure Takeoff Path ................................................................................................. 9-2
9.4
Sample Optimized Takeoff and Landing Report ................................................................................. 9-3
9.5
Optimized Takeoff and Landing Report ............................................................................................... 9-7
9.5.1
Rules for Reading the TLR ................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.5.2
TLR Layout ......................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.6
Speed Cards ......................................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.7
Reduced Thrust (FLEX) Takeoff ......................................................................................................... 9-23
9.8
ACARS Performance/Weight and Balance ........................................................................................ 9-24
9.8.1
PREFLIGHT...................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.8.2
TAKEOFF ......................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.8.3
WEIGHT AND BALANCE ................................................................................................................. 9-26
9.8.4
LANDING .......................................................................................................................................... 9-28
9.8.5
COST INDEXING.............................................................................................................................. 9-30
9.8.6
ERROR MESSAGES........................................................................................................................ 9-34
9.9
Thrust Limit Charts .............................................................................................................................. 9-38
9.9.1
<-200> Thrust Limit Charts ............................................................................................................... 9-38
9.9.2
<-701> Thrust Limit Charts ............................................................................................................... 9-50
9.10 Brake Cooling Requirements ..............................................................................................................
9.10.1 BTMS Operative ...............................................................................................................................
9.10.2 BTMS Inoperative <-200>.................................................................................................................
9.10.3 BTMS Inoperative <-701>.................................................................................................................
9-56
9-56
9-56
9-59
9.11 Landing Tables.....................................................................................................................................

9.11.1 <-200> Landing Data ........................................................................................................................
9.11.2 Contaminated Runway Data .............................................................................................................
9.11.3 <-701> Landing Data ........................................................................................................................
9.11.4 <-701> Contaminated Runway Data.................................................................................................
9-61
9-61
9-61
9-64
9-64
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Table of Contents
9-ii
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
General
9-1
12 FEB 10
Chapter 9: Performance
9.1
General
Source: FAR 121.189, 121.191, 121.195, and 121.197

PSA Airlines, Inc. has contracted with AeroData Corporation to provide comprehensive real-time aircraft performance data
through their Internet Aircraft Performance Data Compute Server System. The AeroData Performance Information is found in
two places, the Takeoff and Landing Report (TLR) located directly below the flight release and through the ACARS system.
As a backup, the system also generates and updates a library of paper takeoff charts that are maintained in Dispatch. In case of
Internet failure, this information will be relayed verbally to the flight crew.
One of the greatest advantages of the compute server system is that all performance calculations are computed in real-time,
using the fewest possible conservatisms and generalizations. As a result, the highest possible performance values are
provided.
Performance data for PSA flights is provided from three sources:
Speed Cards Contain V-speeds and landing data, which are onboard the aircraft
TLR Contains takeoff and landing data tailored to each specific flight and is printed as part of the flight release and
weather package
ACARS Contains takeoff and landing data tailored to each specific flight and is displayed through ACARS
Note
All examples displayed in this chapter are for training purposes only. A complete sample takeoff and
landing report is included.
9.2
Normal Takeoff Path
A normal takeoff path assumes that no turns shall be commenced below 400 ft. AFE. Turns between 50 ft. and 400 ft. AFE
require crew briefing prior to departure and will not exceed 15 of bank.
Minimum Flap Retraction Altitude (FRA) for all takeoffs is 1,000 ft. AFE unless a TLR Special Departure Procedure
prescribes otherwise.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Standard Engine Failure Takeoff Path
9-2
12 FEB 10
9.3
Standard Engine Failure Takeoff Path
The following path will be flown whenever an engine failure occurs during takeoff and no Special (Simple or Complex)
Procedure exists:
Engine Failure
Altitude
IMC
VMC
Below 400 ft.

AFE
Climb straight ahead to 400 ft. AFE, then commence turn to

NAVAID or heading as listed using up to 15 bank angle until VT
climb is established. Radar vectors may be accepted when available
after reaching 400 ft.
Climb straight ahead to 400 ft.

AFE. Return to land visually or
complete IMC procedure.
400 ft. or more

AFE
Commence turn to navaid or heading as listed using maximum bank

angle for appropriate aircraft speed. If navaid is listed, hold on the
inbound radial using a direct entry and standard holding procedures.
If heading is listed, fly heading until a minimum safe altitude is
attained. Radar vectors may be accepted when available.
Return to land visually or

complete IMC procedure.
This path will allow the aircraft to safely attain an altitude and position where radar vectors can be provided, or a minimum
enroute approach altitude. This path is an extension of the CAs emergency authority and must be stated as such to ATC as
soon as practical.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Sample Optimized Takeoff and Landing Report
9.4
9-3
12 FEB 10
TAKEOFF AND LANDING REPORT JIA 5502 DCA-CLT 17JAN09

TLR-1 SEQ-22568483 17JAN09 1028Z
A/C 999 CL600-2B19 CF34-3B1
/// TAKEOFF DATA ///

APT
DCA
PRWY
01
POAT PWIND PQNH PMRTW FLP MAXV1 PTOW MFPTW 2

-2.0 000/00 30.65 492
20 123
375 49482
RMKS ENGINE AND WING ANTI-ICE ON

DRY SNOW - LEVEL 1
------ --- ------ ----- ------ --- ----- --- ---------------- 4

RWY
OAT WIND
QNH
MRTW
FLP MAXV1 PWR CONFIG/CONDITION
----------------------- ACARS RUNWAYS ----------------------5
RWY
ACARS LENGTH PMTOW EFP
NOTES
01
6869
492 SPECIAL
04
4911
422 SPECIAL
15
5204
436 DT H153
19
6869
492 DT H186
22
4911
424 DT H216
33
5204
428 DT H333
------------ SPECIAL ENG FAIL TAKEOFF PROCEDURES ------------ 6
RWY CLB VIA
REACHING
OR
TURN
FRA
HOLD
01 V2
D0.4 DCA
D0.4 IDCA -LT H310 1015
-INTRCPT DCA R328 AND CONT-IF DCA OTS LT H320 - EARLY ALL
ENG OP TURN ABOVE 400 OK
04
RWY END
RT H080
1015
------ FLEX - DRY RWY - ROLLING
01
04
6869 FT
4911 FT
SPECIAL
SPECIAL
AT N1 FLP 8
AT N1
FLP 20
39 -------- -- 39 -------- -37 -------- -- 37 -------- -35 -------- -- 35 -------- -33/85.2 460F39 33 85.2 418F20
31 86.0 467F40 31/86.0 425F21
HW/10KT
13 3
13 3
TW/10KT
-42 -9
-44-10
BL CL .8
7 1
.8
3 1
22
4911 FT
DT H216
AT N1 FLP 20
39 -------- -37 -------- -35 -------- -33 85.2 418F20
31/86.0 425F21
HW/10KT
14 3
TW/10KT
-44-10
BL CL .8
3 1
- BLDS OPEN - A/I OFF ------- 7

15
19
5204 FT
6869 FT
DT H153
DT H186
AT N1
FLP 20 AT N1
FLP 8
39 -------- -- 39 -------- -- 8
37 -------- -- 37 -------- -35 -------- -- 35 -------- -33/85.2 431F23 33/85.2 461F39
31 86.0 438F24 31 86.0 468F40
14 3
13 3
-44-10
-42 -9
.8
3 1
.8
7 1
33
5204 FT
DT H333
AT N1
FLP 20
39 -------- -37 -------- -35 -------- -33/85.2 424O22
31 86.0 431O23
13 3
-40 -9
.8
4 1
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-4
12 FEB 10
-------- WET RWY - ROLLING - BLDS CLSD - A/I AS RQRD -------01

04
15
19
6869 FT
4911 FT
5204 FT
6869 FT 9
SPECIAL
SPECIAL
DT H153
DT H186
OAT N1
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
02 88.3 530 O 40
472 F 29
486 F 32
551 A 42
00 88.0 530 O 40
473 F 29
487 F 32
551 A 42
/-02 86.6 515 O 37 / 467 F 28 / 481 F 31 / 549 F 43
-04 86.6 520 O 38
471 F 29
485 F 31
551 A 42
-06 86.6 524 O 38
474 F 30
489 F 32
551 A 41
HW/10KT
6
1
15
3
16
3
0
-2
TW/10KT
-22
-5
-48 -11
-48 -11
-48
-9
STATIC
0
0
5
1
8
2
0
-2
OAT N1
02 88.3
00 88.0
/-02 86.6
-04 86.6
-06 86.6
HW/10KT
TW/10KT
STATIC
22
4911 FT
DT H216
FLAP 20
471 F 29
472 F 29
466 F 28
470 F 29
474 F 30
15
3
-48 -11
9
2
33
5204 FT
DT H333
FLAP 20
479 O 31
481 O 31
/ 473 O 30
477 O 30
480 O 31
14
3
-44 -10
0
0
-------- WET RWY - STATIC - BLDS CLSD - A/I AS RQRD --------01

04
15
19
OAT N1
FLAP 8
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
02 88.3 528 F 50
478 O 30
495 F 33
551 A 41
00 88.0 529 F 50
479 O 31
496 F 34
551 A 40
/-02 86.6 521 F 48 / 473 O 29 / 490 F 32 / 551 A 42
-04 86.6 525 F 49
476 O 30
494 F 33
551 A 41
-06 86.6 529 F 50
480 O 31
498 F 34
551 A 40
HW/10KT
14
3
16
3
16
3
0
-1
TW/10KT
-45
-9
-47 -10
-48 -10
-42
-7
22
OAT N1
FLAP 20
02 88.3 480 F 31
00 88.0 482 F 31
/-02 86.6 476 F 30
-04 86.6 479 F 31
-06 86.6 483 F 31
HW/10KT
16
3
TW/10KT
-48 -11
33
FLAP
480
481
/ 473
477
481
14
-44
20
O 31
O 31
O 30
O 31
O 31
3
-10
---- SLUSH/SNOW
N1 86.6 01
LEVEL 1
F20
LEVEL 2
F20
LEVEL 3
F20
--- CMPCTD SNOW
F20
- STATIC - BLDS CLSD

04
492F23 F20 422O07
471F26 F20 407O10
430F24 F20 365F11
- STATIC - BLDS CLSD
512O28 F20 450O15
---- SLUSH/SNOW
N1 86.6 22
LEVEL 1
F20
LEVEL 2
F20
LEVEL 3
F20
--- CMPCTD SNOW
F20
- STATIC - BLDS CLSD - EWAI ON - OAT -2C ---33

424F08 F20 428O09
408F11 F20 413O13
365F11 F20 375F13
- STATIC - BLDS CLSD - EWAI ON - OAT -2C ---453F15 F20 454O16
PSA Airlines, Inc.

- EWAI ON - OAT -2C ---15

19
F20 436F10 F20 492F23
F20 419F14 F20 471F26 10
F20 375F13 F20 430F24
- EWAI ON - OAT -2C ---F20 466F18 F20 532F31

Performance
9-5
12 FEB 10
/// LANDING DATA ///

APT
CLT
PRWY
36C
POAT PWIND PQNH PMRLW FLP PLDW 11

-2.0 000/00 30.53 551
45 350
RMKS WET RUNWAY

------ --- ------ ----- ------ --- ----- --- ---------------RWY
OAT WIND
QNH
MRLW
FLP VREF PWR CONFIG/CONDITION
--------- BLEEDS ON OR OFF - A/I OFF
DRY RWY / WET RWY - LOW VIS
05
18C
7502 FT
10000 FT
OAT N1
FLAP 45
FLAP 45
04 88.7 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
02 88.4 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
00 88.1 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
/-02 87.8 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
-04 87.4 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
-06 87.1 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
-08 86.8 551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
HW/10KT
0/
0
0/
0
TW/10KT
0/
-8
0/
0
EAI
.0
0/
0
0/
0
EWAI -1.1
0/
0
0/
0
ICE
0/
0
0/
0
OAT N1
04 88.7
02 88.4
00 88.1
/-02 87.8
-04 87.4
-06 87.1
-08 86.8
HW/10KT
TW/10KT
EAI
.0
EWAI -1.1
ICE
36C
10000 FT
FLAP 45
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
- MIN LDG DIST

LDW
DRY
380 4183
370 4102
360 4022
/ 350 3953
350 3950
340 3882
330 3879
HW/KT
-24
TW/KT
75
- NO ICE ACCUM --------- 12

18L
8676 FT
FLAP 45
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
23
7502 FT
FLAP 45
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A13
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
0/
0
0/
-8
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
36R
8676 FT
FLAP 45
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
- FLAPS 45 - NO THR REV CREDIT - NORMAL VIS -- 14

WET
CS
SN/SL/SW ICE
FAIR
POOR
4810
5955
7611
14473
5955
7611
4717
5845
7443
14183
5845
7443
4625
5736
7275
13893
5736
7275
4546
5628
7113
13613
5628
7113
4543
5623
7107
13602
5623
7107
4464
5511
6938
13310
5511
6938
4461
5505
6930
13296
5505
6930
-28
-30
-50
-97
-30
-50
86
108
162
330
108
162
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-6
12 FEB 10
--- MIN
LDW
380
370
360
/ 350
350
340
330
HW/KT
TW/KT
LDG DIST - FLAPS 45 - NO THR REV CREDIT - LOW VIS --DRY

WET
CS
SN/SL/SW ICE
FAIR
POOR
4810
4810
5955
7611
14473
5955
7611
4717
4717
5845
7443
14183
5845
7443
4625
4625
5736
7275
13893
5736
7275
4546
4546
5628
7113
13613
5628
7113
4543
4543
5623
7107
13602
5623
7107
4464
4464
5511
6938
13310
5511
6938
4461
4461
5505
6930
13296
5505
6930
-28
-28
-30
-50
-97
-30
-50
86
86
108
162
330
108
162
--- MIN
LDW
380
370
360
/ 350
350
340
330
HW/KT
TW/KT
LDG DIST - FLAPS 45 - THR REV CREDIT

DRY
WET
CS
SN/SL/SW ICE
4183
4810
5046
5768
7316
4102
4717
4955
5643
7175
4022
4625
4863
5519
7033
3953
4546
4773
5399
6897
3950
4543
4769
5394
6891
3882
4464
4676
5269
6749
3879
4461
4671
5263
6742
-24
-28
-25
-37
-47
75
86
90
120
161
---- MIN LDG DIST - FLAPS 45

LDW
DRY
WET
CS
380 4810
4810
5046
370 4717
4717
4955
360 4625
4625
4863
/ 350 4546
4546
4773
350 4543
4543
4769
340 4464
4464
4676
330 4461
4461
4671
HW/KT
-28
-28
-25
TW/KT
86
86
90
- THR REV CREDIT - LOW

SN/SL/SW ICE
FAIR
5768
7316
5046
5643
7175
4955
5519
7033
4863
5399
6897
4773
5394
6891
4769
5269
6749
4676
5263
6742
4671
-37
-47
-25
120
161
90
/// COST INDEX - ECON SPEEDS ///

100
FL
410
390
370
350
330
310
290
270
250
KNOT
380
.732
.760
.737
.701
238
239
242
245
247
- NORMAL VIS --FAIR

POOR
5046
5768
4955
5643
4863
5519
4773
5399
4769
5394
4676
5269
4671
5263
-25
-37
90
120
VIS ----POOR
5768
5643
5519
5399
5394
5269
5263
-37
120
15
TAILWIND
360
.758
.751
.727
233
235
237
239
242
245
END TAKEOFF AND LANDING REPORT JIA 5502 DCA-CLT 17JAN09 16
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Optimized Takeoff and Landing Report
9.5
9-7
12 FEB 10
The TLR is prepared for each flight based on the meteorological conditions, runway conditions, and aircraft configuration
anticipated by the dispatcher at the time of departure. The TLR provides takeoff & landing data for the planned conditions as
well as a range of data surrounding planned conditions. The TLR includes takeoff and landing data for all runways authorized
for use by PSA Airlines.
The TLR is divided into two sections:
Takeoff Data - Takeoff Report

Landing Data - Landing Report
9.5.1
Rules for Reading the TLR.
1. Interpolation is allowed between temperatures.

2. Interpolation is allowed between winds. Tailwind adjustments are mandatory. Headwind adjustments are optional.
3. If the surface temperature is colder than the lowest value shown in the applicable table, use the lowest temperature shown.
4. When adjustments are required, all adjustment values shown (except an increase in performance) must be applied.
5. For the purposes of this section, cowl anti-ice is referred to as EAI (engine anti-ice).
9.5.2
TLR Layout.
Header / Title
TAKEOFF AND LANDING REPORT JIA 2385 DCA-ORF 25SEP05

TLR-1 SEQ-5108075 26SEP05 1651Z
A/C 226 CL600-2B19 CF34-3B1
The header contains the parameters that were used by the dispatcher for planning the flight. The first line lists the flight
number, city pairing and departure date. The second line contains the TLR-#, SEQ-#, and the date and time the report was
generated. The TLR-# represents the run number and is used to match the flight release and takeoff report versions. If the
dispatcher re-runs the report, the TLR-# will increase by one. The SEQ-# is a unique identifier given to each takeoff report.
The last line states the three letter aircraft SABRE code, airframe designation and the engine type.
Planned Conditions (Takeoff)
/// TAKEOFF DATA ///

APT
DCA
PRWY
15
POAT PWIND PQNH PMRTW FLP MAXV1 PTOW MFPTW

0.0 000/00 29.90 424
20 115
424 48455
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-8
12 FEB 10
Caution
This is a Dispatch planning tool only, stating the conditions used by the Dispatcher at the time the
report was generated. Actual takeoff conditions will be controlling and will most likely differ from
planned conditions.
APT - Airport identifier

PRWY - Planned runway. The runway that was used by the dispatcher planning the flight.
Intersection departure runways are designated by the / symbol between the runway and intersecting taxiway or
runway. For example, 26L/A designates runway 26L at the intersection of taxiway ALPHA.
Shortened runways are designated using the following code: 26L-E2000F, where 26L indicates the runway, -
indicates that the runway has been shortened; E indicates the east end of the runway was shortened. (Possible values
include N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW) 2000 indicates the shortened distance, and F is the unit in feet.
For large airports (PIT, CLT, PHL, CVG, etc.), with many intersection takeoff options, the report will reflect only one
departure point.
EXAMPLE: If departing runway 28L in PIT, the Takeoff Report will depict only 28L/F5 since the Maximum
Structural Limit Weight may be used from this intersection.
Takeoff from any intersection on the same runway (providing greater available runway length, up to and including full length)
is authorized, even though it may not be depicted on the Takeoff Report.
POAT - Planned Outside Air Temperature

PWIND - Planned Wind Direction / Speed (typically zero)
PQNH - Planned QNH (altimeter setting). The entire Takeoff Report is based on this QNH. The Takeoff Report is valid
when the actual QNH is no less than 0.10 below PQNH. For example, if the dispatcher planned for a PQNH of 29.44, the
report is valid if the actual QNH is no lower than 29.34. If the actual QNH falls below 29.34, then a new Takeoff Report
must be generated or a radio revision may be received and entered in the condition change note section. A new Takeoff
Report is never required when the actual QNH exceeds the planned QNH, but additional payload capacity may be gained by
using an actual QNH that is higher than PQNH.
PMRTW - Planned Maximum Allowable Runway Takeoff Weight
FLP - Takeoff flap setting (8 or 20)
MAXV1 - The Max V1 associated with Planned Maximum Runway Takeoff Weight (PMRTW), and is only adjusted for
runway slope
PTOW - Planned Takeoff Weight divided by 100. The Planned Takeoff Weight is the Basic Operating Weight (BOW),
booked passengers, estimated bags/cargo, and fuel requirements.
MFPTW - Maximum Flight Plan Takeoff Weight divided by 100. This is the maximum takeoff weight for which the flight
plan is valid when considering all flight planning limits except Maximum Runway Takeoff Weight (MRTW). These limits
include the structural Maximum Takeoff Weight (MTOW) and the Maximum Landing Weight (MLDW) + planned fuel
burn. MRTW for actual conditions can exceed PMRTW, however the final MTOW can NEVER exceed MFPTW.
Compare MFPTW to MRTW on shorter runways. MFPTW does not include Max Runway Structural Takeoff
Weight as a factor.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-9
12 FEB 10
Remarks Section
RMKS ENGINE AND WING ANTI-ICE ON

SLUSH - LEVEL 2
RMKS - Uses the aircraft configuration and runway condition selected by the dispatcher to compute the Planned
Maximum Runway Takeoff Weight (PMRTW), MAXV1, and MFPTW
Note
MEL and CDL - Items that degrade performance are included in the remarks section, and are used by the
dispatcher and transferred to the Takeoff Report. Listed configuration changes are applied to the entire
report unless otherwise specified in a Data Header.
Examples of possible remarks are:
BLEEDS OPEN
ENGINE ANTI-ICE ON (A/I ON)
SLUSH LEVEL 2
NONE
If remarks indicate a wet runway, and a Data Header includes the word DRY RWY, that section is based on a dry runway.
Generally, inoperative components (MELs/CDLs) apply to the entire report, while pilot selectable options (BLDS OPEN,
ENGINE ANTI-ICE ON (A/I AS RQRD)) are overridden by the Data Header.
Condition Change Note Section
------ --- ------ ----- ------ --- ----- --- ---------------RWY

OAT WIND
QNH
MRTW
FLP MAXV1 PWR CONFIG/CONDITION
The Condition Change Note Section provides a space for the crew to record revised performance data received verbally from
dispatch. It can be used in cases where the Takeoff Report does not contain data for the current conditions or when fine-tuning
of the Maximum Runway Takeoff Weight (MRTW) is required to obtain maximum payload capability. The Dispatcher can
quickly make a single point calculation for exact conditions that can be relayed to the flight crew.
Crews must contact dispatch for any condition that will adversely affect aircraft performance when information is not provided
on the release. Typical scenarios for its use are last minute MEL/CDL items that were not included in the original report,
actual OAT exceeding the scale, actual QNH greater than 0.10 below PQNH, or any other additional refinements required.
ACARS Selectable Runways
----------------------- ACARS RUNWAYS ----------------------RWY

NOTES
01
6869
476 SPECIAL
04
4911
411 SPECIAL
15
5204
424 DT H153
19
6869
476 DT H186
22
4911
412 DT H216
33
5204
418 DT H333
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-10
12 FEB 10
ACARS RUNWAYS
Each Takeoff Report will include an ACARS RUNWAYS section that gives an overview of the ACARS selectable runways,
PMTOW and Engine Failure Procedures (EFP).
RWY - ACARS selectable departure runways

ACARS - Gives an ACARS runway alias to comply with any NOTAMS that might shorten the available landing distance
Example 1: Runway 01 is shortened on the N end by 1000 ft.
Runway 01 would have an additional line as follows:
01-N1000F
01/ABC
6869
418 SPECIAL
The ACARS input would be 01/ABC denoting an alias runway.

Example 2: An intersection departure runway alias would be selected as it is depicted on the TLR.
Example from CLT:
36L/E2
9650
551 DT H003
The ACARS input would be 36L/E2.
LENGTH - Length of runway in feet
PMTOW -The Planned Max Takeoff Weight is limited by MFPTW as well as MRTW. This number is given here as a
quick reference for the pilot.
EFP - Engine Failure Procedures are provided here for quick reference as well as in the first Takeoff Data Section. Refer to
the Special Engine Failure Procedures for guidelines.
NOTES - Used to display any extra information to the pilot. i.e. EARLY ALL ENG OPERATING TURN AT 400 FT
AFE OK. In the example above, this same note is not shown because it is displayed in the Special Engine Failure
Procedures section.
Special Engine Failure Procedures
------------ SPECIAL ENG FAIL TAKEOFF PROCEDURES -----------RWY CLB VIA

REACHING
OR
TURN
FRA
HOLD
01 V2
D0.4 DCA
D0.4 IDCA -LT H310 1015
-INTRCPT DCA R328 AND CONTINUE / IF DCA OTS LT H320 / EARLY
ALL ENG OPERATING TURN ABOVE 400 FT OK
04
RWY END
RT H080
1015
Below the Data Section are the Special Engine Failure Procedures. This section specifies an engine out departure track, if
required, and its associated procedure.
Simple-Special Procedures
Simple-Special Procedures are designed to provide information that differs from standard procedures. Simple-Special
Procedures will be provided anytime a turn is required below 400 ft. AFE, and single-engine standard operating procedures
cannot be used due to obstacle requirements. These procedures will be presented at the bottom portion of the Takeoff Report in
table format.
Complex-Special Procedures
The Complex-Special Procedure is issued when an engine failure procedure is too complex to fit in the Simple-Special table
and/or other considerations must be taken into account. Often, all-engine procedures are also specified in order to ensure that
the aircraft will remain in the obstacle-protected area until reaching a safe engine failure altitude. MFRA remains at 1,000 ft.
AFE unless otherwise specified in the procedure.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-11
12 FEB 10
Complex-Special Procedures are mandatory in IMC and VMC.

Caution
In the event of an engine failure after takeoff, the abbreviated engine failure procedure, SimpleSpecial, or Complex-Special Procedure MUST be followed in lieu of published IFR departure
procedure or Graphic Departure Procedure.
RWY - Departure Runway

CLB - Engine failure climb speed
VIA - Initial heading or course. Listed if different from runway heading. Turns can be made at 50' AFE or upon engine
failure when above 50' AFE, unless otherwise restricted.
REACHING - Turn point. Altitude is MSL for an altitude turn point and DME or radial for geographic turn points.
OR - Alternate turn point for redundancy and/or convenience
TURN - Turn direction and/or heading
LT - Left Turn
RT - Right Turn
DT - Direct
H - Heading
FRA - Flap Retraction Altitude remains at 1,000' AFE unless specified here
HOLD - Holding procedures at NAVAID. Unless otherwise noted, hold on the inbound radial using a direct entry with
right turns and one-minute legs. This may not be a published holding pattern - NOTIFY ATC.
Takeoff Data Header
------ FLEX - DRY RWY - ROLLING - BLDS OPEN - A/I OFF -------
The title line describes the base conditions and airplane configuration (FLEX, DRY/WET, ROLLNG, BLDS CLSD/OPEN, A/
I OFF/AS RQRD) for which the data was calculated. The conditions and configuration listed override any in the remarks
section.
FLEX - Reduced thrust takeoff (If not listed, assume full-power takeoff). FLEX Takeoff is the preferred takeoff at PSA
Airlines when conditions allow.
ROLLING Takeoff - Takeoff N1 is set between brake release and 60 KIAS
STATIC - Takeoff N1 is set prior to brake release
DRY RWY - Runway that is neither wet nor contaminated

WET RWY - A runway is considered wet when there is sufficient moisture on the runway to cause it to appear reflective
BLEEDS OPEN - Engines supplying bleed air to the air conditioning system for takeoff
BLEEDS CLSD - APU supplying bleed air to the air conditioning system for takeoff or bleeds selected CLOSED for
takeoff (unpressurized)
A/I AS RQRD (ON) - For Temperatures of 10C to 6C the Performance given includes EAI (Cowl Anti-Ice). For Temps
of 5C and below, the Performance includes EWAI (Cowl and Wing Anti-Ice).
A/I OFF - Engine Anti-Ice is not required for takeoff
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-12
12 FEB 10
Flex Takeoff Data Section
A Takeoff Report will start with a data section for reduced power (FLEX) takeoffs. FLEX Takeoff is the preferred takeoff at
PSA Airlines when conditions allow. Reduced Power Section formatting is similar to the Max Thrust Section shown on the
following pages except that each runway has its own temperature scale and power setting. There are two columns of data for
each runway. The left column shows assumed temperature and the right shows maximum takeoff weight. The OAT label is
replaced with the AT (Assumed Temperature) label.
A sample Reduced Power Takeoff Section follows. It gives reduced thrust takeoff information for four runways: 1, 4, 15, and
19.
The maximum takeoff weight is shown as a six-character code. This gives the same information that is shown on the fullpower takeoff section. This is:
First three characters:
Maximum Runway Takeoff Weight (MRTW), in hundreds of pounds.
Fourth character:
Limit code
Last two characters:
Maximum V1
For example, the characters 491F44 represents:

MRTW
49,100 lbs.
Limit Code
F (Field Limit)
Maximum V1:
144
One temperature in each column is marked with a / symbol. This is used to indicate a reference temperature. In a Full
Power Takeoff Section, the / is shown at the planned OAT (POAT). However, in a Reduced Power Section, the / is shown
at the highest temperature that will permit the planned takeoff weight (PTOW). If a given runway cannot permit the PTOW at
any temperature above POAT, then / is not displayed. When the reduced power settings reach the maximum reduction
allowed, the temperature at which this occurs becomes the upper limit of the scale.
------ FLEX - DRY RWY - ROLLING 1 01
04
4911 FT
2 6869 FT
SPECIAL
3 SPECIAL
AT N1
FLP 8 AT N1
FLP 20
39 -------- -- 39 -------- -37 -------- -- 37 -------- -35 -------- -- 35 -------- -33/85.2 460F39 33 85.2 418F20
31 86.0 467F40 31/86.0 425F21
HW/10KT
13 3
13 3
TW/10KT
-42 -9
-44-10
BL CL .8
7 1
.8
3 1
BLDS OPEN - A/I OFF ------15

19
5204 FT
6869 FT
DT H153
DT H186
AT N1
FLP 20 AT N1
FLP 8
39 -------- -- 39 -------- -37 -------- -- 37 -------- -35 -------- -- 35 -------- -33/85.2 431F23 33/85.2 461F39
31 86.0 438F24 31 86.0 468F40
14 3
13 3
-44-10
-42 -9
.8
3 1
.8
7 1
Takeoff Runway - Runway designation
Runway Length - Distance in feet
3 Engine Failure Procedure - Either the Abbreviated Engine Failure procedure or the Simple or Complex-Special
procedure. This information will ONLY appear under the first Takeoff Data Header, but will apply to all Takeoff Data
Headers.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-13
12 FEB 10
Abbreviated Engine Failure Procedures - An Abbreviated Engine Failure Procedure in the heading of the data section
provides guidance for the first turn.
Abbreviated Engine Failure Procedure codes include:
RT - Right Turn
LT - Left Turn
H - Heading (RT H180)
DT - Direct (turn to NAVAID or heading in direction of shortest distance)
Caution
In the event of an engine failure after takeoff, the abbreviated engine failure procedure, SimpleSpecial, or Complex-Special Procedure MUST be followed in lieu of published IFR departure
procedure or Graphic Departure Procedure.
AT Assumed Temperature
N1 - Takeoff N1 setting
FLAP - Takeoff Flap Setting (8 or 20)
MRTW - Max Runway Takeoff Weight divided by 100
Note
Dashes in lieu of MRTW indicate takeoff is not allowed under those specific conditions.
Limit Codes - Defines limiting factors for MRTW
C - Climb
B - Brakes
O - Obstacle
T - Tires
F - Field
V - VMCG
A - Maximum AFM Chart Weight

D - Dry Runway Weight (Wet MRTW cannot exceed dry MRTW)
MAXV1 - The MAXV1 is the V1 associated with Maximum Runway Takeoff Weight (MRTW). This number is adjusted
for runway slope ONLY, and must be corrected for Tailwind, Bleeds Open, and Engine and/or Wing Anti-Ice, if applicable.
HW/10KT - Headwind correction - Increase MRTW by the value listed x 100 per 10 knots of headwind. Increase MAXV1
by the value listed for each 10 knots of headwind.
Note
This correction is OPTIONAL.
EXAMPLE: RW 01 - 9 knots of headwind would increase MRTW by 1170 lbs. (13 x 100 x .9) and increase
MAXV1 by 2 knots.
TW/10KT - Tailwind Correction - Reduce MRTW by the penalty value listed x 100 per 10 knots of tailwind up to a
maximum of 10 knots. Reduce MAXV1 by the penalty value listed per 10 knots of tailwind.
Note
This correction is MANDATORY.
EXAMPLE: RW 01 - 6 knots of tailwind would reduce MRTW by 2520 lbs. (-42 x 100 x .6) and reduce MAXV1
by 6 knots.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-14
12 FEB 10
Max Thrust Takeoff Section
---------- DRY RWY - ROLLING - BLDS CLSD - A/I OFF ---------01

04
15
19
OAT N1
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
FLAP 20
04 88.6 539 O 41
475 F 30
489 F 32
551 A 42
02 88.3 539 O 41
476 F 30
491 F 32
551 A 41
/ 00 88.0 540 O 41 / 478 F 30 / 492 F 33 / 551 A 41
-02 87.6 540 O 41
480 F 30
494 F 33
551 A 40
-04 87.3 541 O 41
481 F 31
496 F 33
551 A 39
HW/10KT
7
2
15
3
15
3
0
-1
TW/10KT
-27
-6
-49 -11
-49 -11
-38
-5
STATIC
0
0
6
1
9
2
0
0
EAI
.0 -10
-2
-6
-1
-6
-1
0
2
EWAI
.0 -26
-4
-13
-2
-14
-2
-3
3
If the Takeoff Data Header does not specify FLEX, then assume the section is for a max thrust takeoff. The corrections that are
described above for FLEX are applied in the same manner for Max Thrust. Additional corrections that could also be seen are
as follows:
OAT - Outside Air Temperature (the / indicates planned OAT).
Note
If the actual OAT is greater than the highest temperature in the section, a new Takeoff Report or radio
revision is required.
STATIC Static Takeoff Correction- Increase MRTW by the value listed multiplied by 100. Increase MAXV1 by the
value listed.
EXAMPLE : RW 15 - Increase MRTW by 900 lbs (9x100), and Increase MAXV1 by 2 knots.
EAI - ENGINE ANTI-ICE ON
- Reduce N1 by value listed
- Reduce MRTW by value listed multiplied by 100.
- Reduce MAXV1 by value listed
EXAMPLE : RW 01 - Reduce N1 by .0%, reduce MRTW by 1000 lbs. (-10 x 100), reduce MAXV1 by 2 knots.
EWAI - Engine and Wing ANTI-ICE ON
- Reduce N1 by value listed
- Reduce MRTW by value listed multiplied by 100
- Reduce MAXV1 by value listed
EXAMPLE : RW 01 - Reduce N1 by .0%, reduce MRTW by 2600 lbs. (-26 x 100), reduce MAXV1 by 4 knots
10
Contaminated Runway Section
---- SLUSH/SNOW - STATIC - BLDS CLSD - EWAI ON - OAT 0C ----N1 88.0 01

04
15
19
LEVEL 1
F20 498F24 F20 427O08 F20 440F11 F20 498F24
LEVEL 2
F20 476F27 F20 411O11 F20 424F15 F20 476F27
LEVEL 3
F20 435F25 F20 369F12 F20 380F14 F20 435F25
---- CMPCTD SNOW - STATIC - BLDS CLSD - EWAI ON - OAT 0C ---F20 526O30 F20 456O16 F20 472F19 F20 539F33
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-15
12 FEB 10
Note
Contaminated data is only valid for calm wind or headwind situations. Tailwind penalties must be
applied by the Dispatcher.
Performance information for contaminated runway takeoffs are for a single OAT and no wind. The TLR is valid if the actual
OAT is at or below the listed OAT. If the actual OAT is above the listed OAT, then a new TLR must be obtained.
The reference OAT is displayed in the title of the section. The power setting for the section is displayed in the upper left
corner.
<-200>All contaminated performance data will be for STATIC takeoffs due to AFM limitations.
<-701>All contaminated performance data will be for ROLLING takeoffs due to AFM limitations.
Ice protection systems corrections will be automatically applied depending on the OAT, as noted in the section title.
The report contains two columns for each runway. The columns show a flap setting and corresponding maximum takeoff
weight for each of three levels of runway contamination. The contamination levels are described in the chart labeled
contaminant below.
As in the reduced power takeoffs, each takeoff weight is encoded with six characters (MRTW, Limit Code, and Maximum V1).
Since the data is calculated for only one temperature, the flap setting is displayed before the corresponding MRTW. The flap
setting is preceded with the F symbol. For example, F20 means Flaps 20.
Takeoff Report - Contaminated Runway Section.
Runway Contamination Levels (Takeoff)
The runway contamination shown in the Contaminated Runway Section is divided into three levels. The runway
contaminants are defined as follows:
Water - Standing water

Slush - Snow mixed with water
Dry/Loose Snow - Snow that cannot be easily compacted by hand
Wet/Compacted Snow - Snow that is easily compacted by hand
Contaminant
Water
Slush
Wet/Compacted Snow Dry/Loose Snow
Level 1
Heavy rain with up to 1/8
Up to 1/8
Up to 1/4
Up to 1
Level 2
Greater than
1/8 and up to 1/4
Greater than
1/8 and up to 1/4
Greater than
1/4 and up to 1/2
Greater than 1 and up to 2
Level 3
Greater than
1/4 and up to 1/2
Greater than
1/4 and up to 1/2
Greater than
1/2 and up to 1
Greater than 2 and up to 3
Example ATIS:
Wind 160 at 5 knots, 1/2 FG OVC 005 0/M1 2992. RWY 15 AND 19 IN USE. ALL RWYS COVERED WITH 1/2
SNOW.
Crew determines wet snow using the above definition, then contamination level 2 using the contamination chart. MRTW from
the Takeoff Report for RW 19 is 47,600 lbs, MAXV1 is 127 knots.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-16
12 FEB 10
11
Planned Conditions (Landing)
/// LANDING DATA ///

APT
ORF
PRWY
23
POAT PWIND PQNH PMRLW FLP PLDW

0.0 000/00 29.90 551
45 409
Caution
This is a dispatch planning tool only, stating the conditions used by the dispatcher at the time the
report was generated. Actual landing conditions will be controlling and will most likely differ from
planned conditions.
APT - Airport identifier

PRWY - Planned runway. The runway that was used by the dispatcher for planning the flight.
POAT - Planned outside temperature
PWIND - Planned wind direction/speed (typically zero)
PQNH - Planned QNH (altimeter setting) at landing destination
PMRLW - Planned Maximum Allowable Runway Landing Weight divided by 100
FLP - Landing flap setting is always 45, unless single engine operations are encountered
PLDW - Planned Landing Weight divided by 100. The Planned Landing Weight is the Planned Takeoff Weight minus
planned en route fuel.
12
Landing Data Header
--------- BLEEDS ON OR OFF - A/I OFF - NO ICE ACCUM ---------
The title line describes the base conditions and airplane configuration (BLEEDS ON or OFF, A/I ON or OFF, No ICE
ACCUM, DRY or WET RWY) for which the data was calculated. The conditions and configuration listed override any in the
remarks section.
NO ICE ACCUM - No residual ice accumulating on unprotected surfaces of the aircraft
13
DRY RWY / WET RWY - LOW

05
8001 FT
OAT N1
FLAP 45
06 89.0 551A/ 551A
04 88.6 551A/ 551A
02 88.3 551A/ 551A
/ 00 88.0 551A/ 551A
-02 87.7 551A/ 551A
-04 87.4 551A/ 551A
-06 87.0 551A/ 551A
HW/10KT
0/
0
TW/10KT
0/
0
EAI
.0
0/
0
EWAI
.0
0/
0
ICE
0/
0
VIS
14
4662 FT
FLAP 45
445F/ 366F
445F/ 366F
445F/ 366F
445F/ 366F
445F/ 366F
445F/ 366F
445F/ 366F
37/
33
-99/ -104
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
PSA Airlines, Inc.

Landing Data Section
23
9001 FT
FLAP 45
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
551A/ 551A
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0
32
4875 FT
FLAP 45
473F/ 389F
473F/ 389F
473F/ 389F
473F/ 389F
473F/ 389F
473F/ 389F
473F/ 389F
37/
35
-103/ -100
0/
0
0/
0
0/
0

Performance
9-17
12 FEB 10
In the normal section, a line of landing data consists of temperature, power setting, MRLW (Maximum Runway Landing
Weight), and limit code. Dashes in place of MRLW or MRLW adjustment indicate that landing data is not available for the
special condition. The / symbol is used to indicate a POAT.
Limit codes are as follows:
C - Climb
B - Brakes
T - Tires
F - Field
A - Maximum AFM Chart Weight
Following the base landing data is adjustment data. Adjustments are used to modify base landing data for non-standard
configurations or conditions. Adjustment data may contain adjustments to N1 and MRLW, as required. Wind adjustments are
in terms of weight x 100 per 10 knots of wind. Adjustments are cumulative.
Adjustment abbreviations are:
TW - Tailwind
HW - Headwind
EAI - Engine Anti-Ice
EWAI - Engine and Wing Anti-Ice
ICE - Ice Accumulation
BL CL - Bleeds Closed
BL OP - Bleeds Open
N1 - Go Around N1 thrust setting.
Max runway landing weight dry runway (left column)
Max runway landing weight wet runway (right column)
HW/10KT - Headwind correction - Increase MRLW by the value listed x 100 per 10 knots of headwind.
Note
Adjusted landing weight will never exceed max structural landing weight.
TW/10KT - Tailwind Correction - Reduce MLTW by the penalty value listed x 100 per 10 knots of tailwind up to a
maximum of 10 knots.
EAI - Engine Anti-Ice - Reduce GA N1 setting by value listed. Reduce MRLW by the value listed multiplied by 100 if
engine anti-ice is used on landing.
EWAI - Engine and Wing Anti-Ice - Reduce GA N1 setting by value listed. Reduce MRLW by the value listed multiplied
by 100 if engine and wing anti-ice are used on landing.
ICE - Reduce MRLW by the value listed multiplied by 100 if residual ice has accumulated on the unprotected surfaces of
the aircraft.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-18
12 FEB 10
14
- MIN LDG DIST

LDW
DRY
380 4183
370 4102
360 4022
/ 350 3953
350 3950
340 3882
330 3879
HW/KT
-24
TW/KT
75
Minimum Landing Distance
- FLAPS 45 - NO THR REV CREDIT - NORMAL VIS -WET

CS
SN/SL/SW ICE
FAIR
POOR
4810
5955
7611
14473
5955
7611
4717
5845
7443
14183
5845
7443
4625
5736
7275
13893
5736
7275
4546
5628
7113
13613
5628
7113
4543
5623
7107
13602
5623
7107
4464
5511
6938
13310
5511
6938
4461
5505
6930
13296
5505
6930
-28
-30
-50
-97
-30
-50
86
108
162
330
108
162
--- MIN
LDW
380
370
360
/ 350
350
340
330
HW/KT
TW/KT
LDG DIST - FLAPS 45 - NO THR REV CREDIT - LOW VIS --DRY

WET
CS
SN/SL/SW ICE
FAIR
POOR
4810
4810
5955
7611
14473
5955
7611
4717
4717
5845
7443
14183
5845
7443
4625
4625
5736
7275
13893
5736
7275
4546
4546
5628
7113
13613
5628
7113
4543
4543
5623
7107
13602
5623
7107
4464
4464
5511
6938
13310
5511
6938
4461
4461
5505
6930
13296
5505
6930
-28
-28
-30
-50
-97
-30
-50
86
86
108
162
330
108
162
--- MIN
LDW
380
370
360
/ 350
350
340
330
HW/KT
TW/KT
LDG DIST - FLAPS 45 - THR REV CREDIT

DRY
WET
CS
SN/SL/SW ICE
4183
4810
5046
5768
7316
4102
4717
4955
5643
7175
4022
4625
4863
5519
7033
3953
4546
4773
5399
6897
3950
4543
4769
5394
6891
3882
4464
4676
5269
6749
3879
4461
4671
5263
6742
-24
-28
-25
-37
-47
75
86
90
120
161
---- MIN LDG DIST - FLAPS 45

LDW
DRY
WET
CS
380 4810
4810
5046
370 4717
4717
4955
360 4625
4625
4863
/ 350 4546
4546
4773
350 4543
4543
4769
340 4464
4464
4676
330 4461
4461
4671
HW/KT
-28
-28
-25
TW/KT
86
86
90
PSA Airlines, Inc.

- NORMAL VIS --FAIR

POOR
5046
5768
4955
5643
4863
5519
4773
5399
4769
5394
4676
5269
4671
5263
-25
-37
90
120
- THR REV CREDIT - LOW

SN/SL/SW ICE
FAIR
5768
7316
5046
5643
7175
4955
5519
7033
4863
5399
6897
4773
5394
6891
4769
5269
6749
4676
5263
6742
4671
-37
-47
-25
120
161
90
VIS ----POOR
5768
5643
5519
5399
5394
5269
5263
-37
120

Performance
9-19
12 FEB 10
The Distance section display is used for presenting landing distances based on aircraft weight. The data presented is for a large
range of landing weights (LDW) above and below the planned landing weight (PLDW). Dashes in place of a distance or
distance adjustment indicate that landing data is not available for the special condition. The / symbol is used to indicate a
PLDW within the weight scale. Landing distance data is based on crossing the beginning of the available landing distance at
50 at VREF with the flaps in the landing configuration. Distance data includes both the air and ground distances from a height
of 50 feet. Below the weight scale are adjustments for factors that affect landing distance. Wind adjustments are in terms of
distance per knot of wind. Adjustments are cumulative.
MIN LDG DIST - This is the minimum landing distance when calculated using SAFO performance calculations. This is the
actual landing distance x 1.15 +500 feet.
NO THR REV CREDIT - This section will be used if landing without thrust reverse is anticipated.
THR REV CREDIT - This section will be used when the use of thrust reverser(s) is needed. If a thrust reverser is deferred the
data will be for the use of one thrust reverser.
NORMAL VIS - The visibility is SM / 4000 RVR or greater.
LOW VIS - The visibility is less than SM / 4000 RVR.
CS - Wet/Compacted Snow
SN - Dry/Loose Snow
SL - Slush
SW - Standing Water
ICE - Ice
Note
At temperatures of 15C or higher, frozen contaminants and braking distances are not displayed.
15
Cost Index-ECON Speeds
/// COST INDEX - ECON SPEEDS ///

100
FL
410
390
370
350
330
310
290
270
250
KNOT
380
.732
.760
.737
.701
238
239
242
245
247
TAILWIND
360
.758
.751
.727
233
235
237
239
242
245
These are planned cost indexing speeds. These numbers are used by dispatch in preflight planning and should be used inflight
only if ACARS cost indexing is not available.
To use: Determine actual wind during flight. Use applicable chart based on winds, current weight and cruise altitude to
determine CI cruise speed. As fuel is burned off, CI speed is reduced.
16
End of Report
END TAKEOFF AND LANDING REPORT JIA 2385 DCA-ORF 25SEP05
The last line signals the end of the TLR, includes the flight number and the date of the flight.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Speed Cards
9-20
12 FEB 10
9.6
Speed Cards
The Speed Book V1/R is based on a ratio of 1 and will be different than numbers that are retrieved from the ACARS
performance page. This is because ACARS uses the exact weight and is a more precise number. In the absence of ACARS,
reference the Speed Book.
<-200>
1
50,000
CL 600-2B19 CF34-3B1
TAKEOFF
FLAPS 8
145
154
FLAPS 0
VFTO
OVERWEIGHT LANDING
FLAPS 20
V1
VR
V2
136
142
183
FLAPS 8 & 20 V1 VR ADDITIVES

PRESS
OAT oC
ALT (FT) -40 0 10 20 30 40 50
10,000 5 5 6 7 7 8 9
8,000
4 4 5 6 6 7 8
6,000
3 3 4 4 5 6 7
4,000
2 2 3 3 4 5 6
2,000
1 1 2 2 3 4 5
0
0 0 0 0 1 3 4
APR OFF: Add 1 kt to V1 VR
Wing & Cowl A/I ON: Add 1 kt to V1 VR
FLAPS 20 V1 VR V2 ADDITIVES
PRESS ALT (FT)
4000
6000
8000 10000
1
2
3
3
PSA Airlines, Inc.

FLAPS
0
8
20
Engine Out
VREF
30
45
VREF
V2GA
FL 250
175
163
157
153
145
154
DRIFTDOWN SPEEDS
FL 300
FL 350
FL 410
194 204 215 230

Performance
Speed Cards
1
9-21
12 FEB 10
Header - Aircraft and Engine Configuration and Weight
Note
Use actual weight for takeoff and estimated weight for landing rounded to the nearest 1000 lbs. For
weight below 34000 lbs, use 34000 lbs.
2 TAKEOFF V-Speeds - V1, VR, V2, VFTO. V1, VR and V2 speeds are provided for both flaps 8 and flaps 20. VFTO (final
takeoff climb speed) is provided for flaps 0 and defined as the climb speed scheduled for the final takeoff climb.
Note
V1 for takeoff is the lesser of the speedbook V1 or the Takeoff Report V1 (MAXV1) for the
appropriate runway condition and aircraft condition. This condition may cause a split between V1
and VR.
3
V1 and VR ADDITIVES - Used to correct takeoff V-speeds for density altitude.
Note
Make V1 and VR density altitude adjustments from the table using the temperature at which thrust
will be set (use the assumed temperature if making a FLEX takeoff).
EXAMPLE : OAT 20C, pressure altitude 4000, flaps 20, V1 and VR will be increased by 3 knots (V1, VR 136 +
3 = 139).
4
FLAPS 20 V1 VR V2 ADDITIVES - Used to correct flaps 20 takeoff V-speeds for pressure altitude.
Note
If a flaps 20 takeoff is planned, a pressure altitude adjustment may be required in addition to a density
altitude adjustment.
EXAMPLE : Pressure altitude 4000, Flaps 20, V1, VR, V2 will be increased by 1 knot (adjusted V1, VR 139 + 1 =
140, V2 142 + 1 = 143).
5
Flap Settings and Reference Speeds - Reference speeds given for specific flap configuration.
V2GA - V2 speed for a go-around.
7 DRIFTDOWN SPEEDS - Speed to be maintained should an engine failure occur above the single-engine service ceiling
and a driftdown is required. A driftdown assumes max continuous thrust is set on the operative engine.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Speed Cards
9-22
12 FEB 10
The CRJ-701 speed cards are slightly different than the CRJ-200. The following example explains the differences.
<-701>
59,000
CL 600-2C10 CF34-8C1
FLAPS 8
TAKEOFF
1
124
138
LANDING
FLAPS 20
121
133
V1
VR
V2
176
FLAPS 0
VFTO
8,000
6,000
4,000
2,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
45
8,000
6,000
4,000
2,000
0
V2GA
OAT oC
-40 0 10 20 30
122 122 122 122 121
122 122 122 122 122
123 123 123 123 122
123 123 123 123 123
123 123 123 123 123
40 50
121
121
122 121
122 122
122 122
Engine Out
VREF
30
FLAPS 20 MIN V1 VR
PRESS
ALT (FT)
0
0
0
0
0
0
20
FLAPS 8 & 20 V1 VR ADDITIVES

PRESS
OAT oC
ALT (FT) -40 0 10 20 30 40 50
FLAPS
VREF
135
167
145
139
135
127
V2GA ADDITIVE
if <35C
SL
>1000
+0
+1
DRIFTDOWN SPEEDS
FL 250
FL 300
FL 350
FL 410
189 192 198 208
1 Shaded V1, VR speeds (Flaps 20 only) indicate that these speeds may be less than minimum. When shaded, compare the
density altitude adjusted V1 & VR to the minimum speed found on the appropriate weight page. If density altitude adjusted
V1 & VR are less than the minimum speed, increase density altitude V1 & VR to equal the minimum speed. Increase V2 by
the same amount.
2
Note the Additives for APR off and Wing & Cowl Anti-Ice has been removed for the 701.
FLAPS 20 Min V1, VR Use only if performing a flaps 20 takeoff and the V1, VR block is shaded.
EXAMPLE: OAT 30C, pressure altitude 1000, flaps 20,
V1 and VR will increase to a minimum of 123
V2GA ADDITIVE Used to correct V2GA for density altitude. Not all weights have this additive.
EXAMPLE: OAT 30C, pressure altitude 500, V2GA will be increased by 1 knot ( knot rounded up).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Reduced Thrust (FLEX) Takeoff
9.7
9-23
12 FEB 10
Reduced Thrust (FLEX) Takeoff
Any amount of reduced thrust for takeoff is desirable to reduce engine wear and minimize the likelihood of an engine failure.
The greatest benefit is realized in the first 5% of thrust reduction, as this brings peak ITT out of the most critical range,
although thrust reduction in excess of 5% is still of considerable benefit. The assumed temperature method is used to calculate
reduced thrust.
The following limitations apply to reduced thrust takeoff:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Anti-skid must be operative

PROHIBITED on contaminated runways
PROHIBITED if the airplane has been de-iced
PROHIBITED if wing and/or cowl anti-icing bleeds are in use
PROHIBITED if warnings of windshear or downdrafts have been forecast
PROHIBITED with an engine that cannot achieve full-rated thrust
PROHIBITED when a special departure procedure specifies full thrust for takeoff
If a FLEX takeoff is to be performed, enter the assumed temperature retrieved from the ACARS performance into the FMS.
The FMS will then determine the reduced thrust N1 and the FLX bugs will be displayed. If the ACARS is inoperative, the
assumed temperature is determined using the TLR. To determine, find the weight that is nearest to, but greater than or equal
to, your actual takeoff weight in the applicable takeoff data section. The temperature that corresponds to this weight is the
assumed temperature.
<-200 only>
If this reduced thrust N1 is equal to or greater than 83.5%, set the displayed value for takeoff. If the displayed N1 is less than
83.5%, select a lower assumed temperature until a minimum value of 83.5% is achieved.
------ FLEX - DRY RWY - ROLLING
01
4
6869 FT
4911 FT
SPECIAL
SPECIAL
AT N1
FLP 8 AT N1
FLP 8
31 -------- -- 39 -------- -29 87.4 478F42 37 -------- -27 87.9 482F42 35 -------- -25 88.3 487F43 33 85.2 418F20
23 88.6 491F40 31 88.8 425F21
HW/10KT
13 3
13 3
TW/10KT
-42 -9
.8 -44-10
BL CL .8
7 1
.8
3 1
- BLDS OPEN - A/I OFF ------15

19
5204 FT
6869
DT H153
DT H186
AT N1
FLP 20 AT N1
FLP 8
39 -------- -- 39 -------- -37 -------- -- 37 -------- -35 -------- -- 35 -------- -33/85.2 431F23 33/85.2 461F39
31 88.8 438F24 31 86.0 468F40
14 3
13 3
-44-10
-42 -9
.8
3 1
.8
7 1
EXAMPLE : Actual takeoff weight obtained from weight and balance is 48,950 lbs. Actual takeoff weight
rounded up to the nearest weight (49100). Assumed temperature to be entered in the FMS CDU is 23C.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
ACARS Performance/Weight and Balance
9-24
12 FEB 10
9.8
9.8.1
PREFLIGHT
There are several things to be aware of when using the ACARS electronic Performance/Weight and Balance.
It is imperative that both pilots confirm all data prior to acceptance for input into the FMS
Empty boxes in a field are required inputs
Performance and W & B requests can be made as many times as needed. For example, holding or delay vectors change
your landing weight, you simply resubmit the request and retrieve up to date numbers.
In the case of a MEL/CDL item, Aerodata's computer system will be updated automatically. Remember to check the
release with the MX Log, if it is not on the release it will not be in the Aerodata database.
V speeds will be calculated for the exact weight requested from the loading information given by the pilot. The speeds will
differ from the speed book. In the case of an inoperative ACARS or FMS, revert to the speed book and TLR for V speeds.
Note that split V1/R speeds will be a norm and additives are already applied.
Electronic Perf/W&B may be completed after push back and on taxi out. In the case of a possible CG issue, ensure there is
an area where you could park the aircraft and move people, or simply resolve the issue before push back.
At stations where there are no ACARS Remote Communications Outlets, or when the FMS is INOP you will be required to
complete a load manifest and compute the CG with the SEE GEE wheel. This may be indicated by a NO COMM
message on the ACARS.
9.8.2
TAKEOFF
To begin the ACARS Perf/Weight and Balance program, select PERF/W&B (L2) on the ACARS-PREFLT MENU. (Figure 1)
On the ACARS-PERF/W&B menu select TAKEOFF CONDITIONS (L1). (Figure 2)
As seen in Figure 3, the WIND (R1), OAT/QNH (R2), and PTOW (R3) default to zero. If the QNH and OAT are left blank,
Aerodata will retrieve the most current weather available. When Aerodata does not have a specific WX condition a message
will appear asking the pilot to input that condition. The wind will remain calm unless a pilot input is made. You must select at
least one runway, but up to three runways can be requested (L1,2,3). If you are going to use a shortened runway, you will need
to enter an ACARS alias. This can be found on the TLR under ACARS runways. It will be the runway plus the three letters
following the runway. In the example below, Runway 23 is shortened on the NE end by 920 feet. The ACARS alias would be
23/BAJ.
----------------- ACARS RUNWAYS -------------------RWY
NOTES
05
8102 520
DT H055
14
6441 520
LT H030
23
8102 520
DT H235
23-NE920F
23/BAJ
7182 520
DT H235
23/B
7052 520
DT H235
32
6841 520
RT H100
Input the surface conditions by selecting SURFACE (L4) on the ACARS-T/O CONDITIONS menu (Figure 3). Select the type
of condition you will encounter for the specific airport.
Selecting DRY, WET, CMPCT SNOW, or ICE (Figure 4) will bring you back to the ACARS-T/O CONDITIONS (Figure 3)
menu. The selections of STND WATER, SLUSH, DRY SNOW or WET SNOW will give you the option of levels 1, 2, or 3 as
displayed in Figure 5.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-25
12 FEB 10
Once the level has been loaded, select RETURN (L6) (Figure 5). This will take you back to the T/O CONDITIONS menu
(Figure 3). Select A/C CONFIG (L5) to select A/I: AUTO, ENG, or ENG/WING and THRUST: NORMAL, MAX or
WINDSHEAR as shown (Figure 6 and 7). NORMAL allows Aerodata logic to determine FLEX or MAX T/O thrust; MAX
does not consider reduced thrust; WINDSHEAR results in a solution, if weight allows, that will use flaps 8 and max thrust.
Note
If desired, after entering all applicable fields, you may enter the planned takeoff weight (PTOW) and a
SEND prompt (not shown) will be selectable at R5 (see Figure 3). This allows the pilot to request
Takeoff data without completing the LOADSHEET. By utilizing this option it allows crews to plan for
expected runway assignments and gives planned V speeds before the LOADSHEET is completed.
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-26
12 FEB 10
Figure 7
9.8.3
WEIGHT AND BALANCE.
Once the configuration has been selected you will need to press L6 (Figure 6) to return to the T/O CONDITIONS menu
(Figure 3) and select LOADSHEET (R4) as displayed in Figure 8.
Once the LOADSHEET menu is displayed (Figure 8) input the necessary information from the EX-0011 and Cabin Loading
form.
FA/ACM - The FA defaults to 1 or 2 depending on 200 or 701. In the case of a ferry flight and there are no FA's, simply
delete the number from L1. Enter /1 if there is an ACM. Note that ACM is not included in the Total Pax count.
PAX SECT A - Enter total passengers for Section A. If a possible weight or CG problem exists, select PAX DETAIL (R4
on Figure 8). This allows the pilot to enter adults and children. In the case of a CG issue, you may enter each adult or child
according to their row. This row per zone only applies to the 200 aircraft.
Once on the PAX DETAIL menu select the appropriate section and enter adults and children per row. You may also enter a
total weight for that Section in the case of a Charter. To get back to the PAX DETAIL menu select RETURN (L6) to access
another section or to go back to the LOADSHEET menu.
PAX SECT B - Enter total passengers for Section B. The PAX DETAIL for Section B will only allow you to enter Adults
and Children and not row per zone
PAX SECT C - Enter total passengers for Section C. The PAX DETAIL for Section C will only allow you to enter Adults
and Children and not row per zone
LAPS - Enter total number of lap children. This will be included in the total number of passengers but will not add
additional weight. As a reminder, lap children are not currently required to be accounted for on the load manifest or EX0011.
FOB - Enter the fuel expected at T/O. AeroData will add the planned taxi fuel in order to check for maximum taxi/ramp
weight. 8530 lbs of fuel can be entered as 85. This should be rounded to the nearest hundred. No decimal is required.
A BAGS/CGO - When entering A BAGS/CGO, select R3 which takes you to the ACARS-AFT CARGO (Figure 10) menu.
Enter the number of checked bags in L1, heavy bags in L2, carry-on bags in L3, ballast weight in L4. If you have other
such as freight or PDQ simply enter the weight in L5. Once completed select return in order to access the ACARSLOADSHEET screen.
F BAGS/CGO - This will be present for 701 aircraft only (Figure 11) and will be entered in the same manner as the A
BAGS/CGO field.
Note that the CHECKED BAGS field for the FWD CARGO (701) and AFT CARGO compartments have empty boxes. This
means that it is a required field. If no checked bags are carried then you must select zero (R5, Figure 8).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-27
12 FEB 10
Selecting SEND will take you to TAKEOFF DATA page 1 of 5 (Figure 12) after about 20 to 40 seconds. Takeoff data or an
error message will be displayed. Once you receive the results, page 1 will display weather, passengers, cargo weights, FOB,
etc.
Page 2 (Figure 13) will give you any remarks related to the flight. This may include but is not limited to; MEL/CDL items,
contaminated runway level, or simply NO TAKEOFF DATA AVAIL. Contact Dispatch if this message persists.
Pages 3, 4, and 5 are data pages for the runway(s) that you entered (Figure 14). Displayed at the top of each page will be the
runway, runway length, runway shift, (runway shift is the amount in feet the runway was shortened-for example an intersection
departure) type of takeoff, and Simple engine failure procedures. Simple and Complex engine failures procedures will still be
found on the TLR. Below the runway information is Weight and Balance calculations displayed for takeoff such as FLEX
(dashed if no flex), FLAP setting, TRIM setting, Weights, V1, VR, V2, VFTO (VFTO is the same as VT), and FRA.
In the case of any violation, such as a ramp weight or a MRTW exceedance, a message will appear.
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-28
12 FEB 10
Figure 14
9.8.4
LANDING.
When using the ACARS for landing, start on the ACARS-PERF/W&B menu (As seen in Figure 2). Select LANDING
CONDITIONS (R1). This will take you to the L/D CONDITIONS page 1 (Figure 15). Enter the required info such as
AIRPORT (L1), RUNWAY(s) (L2, 3) (you can select up to two runways), SURFACE conditions (L4), BRK ACTION RPT as
reported (L5). WIND (R1), and OAT/ QNH (R2) are optional. Again, Aerodata will use actual OAT and QNH. WIND will
remain calm unless actual wind is entered by the crew. Zero Fuel Weight (ZFW, R3) and Estimated Fuel on Arrival (EFOA,
R4) will be automatically generated based on FOB from the FMS. This number accounts for taxi and enroute burn, it can be
manually updated by the crew during flight.
Landing SURFACE conditions (Figure 17) will be entered in the same manner as in the T/O Surface conditions.
LD-CONDITIONS, Page 2 (Figure 16). ANTI-ICE-Enter appropriate configuration (L1). ICE-ACCUM (L2). VISIBILITYDependent on whether visibility is expected to be below 4000 RVR or statute mile (L3). THRST REVERSER CREDIT- For
thrust reverser credit, consider equipment malfunctions and/or meteorological conditions that may negate the use of reverse
thrust.
Once all landing fields have been entered and/or verified to be correct, use RETURN (L6) to go back to LD-CONDITIONS
Page 1 (Figure 14) and select SEND (R5). After 20 to 40 seconds either landing results or an error message will be displayed.
Page 1 will display flight number, LDW, time and weather (Figure 18).
Page 2 will show any remarks for the flight (Figure 19).
Pages 3 and 4 are the data pages for the runway(s) that you entered. (Figure 20) Displayed at the top of each page will be the
runway, runway length, and runway slope. Below this will be your calculated landing data such as the FLAP setting, Vref,
V2GA, VFTO, max landing weight, quick turn weight and time and landing distances.
Actual Landing Distance is the landing distance for the reported meteorological and runway surface conditions, airplane
weight, airplane configuration, approach speed and ground deceleration devices planned to be used for the landing. It does not
include any safety margin and represents the best performance the airplane is capable of for the conditions. Runway slope and
temperature are not considered in this calculation. This is the landing distance that will be found on the aircraft speed cards.
Landing Safety Margin is a prescribed additive to actual landing distance based on current runway conditions.
Minimum Landing Runway Length is the actual landing distance plus the landing safety margin additive.
Factored Landing Distance is the landing distance required by 14 CFR part 25, section 25.125 increased by the preflight
planning safety margin additives required by the applicable operating rules. This is the landing distance that is listed on the
TLR to be used if ACARS is unavailable.
Note
Except under emergency conditions flight crews should not attempt to land on runways that do not
meet the MIN LDG RWY LEN provided by ACARS, or TLR if ACARS is not available.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-29
12 FEB 10
WARNING
ACARS will display landing data any time ACTUAL LDG DIST is within the available runway
length. Make sure MIN LDG RWY LEN does not exceed the available runway length. Dashes
will only appear if ACTUAL LDG DIST exceeds available runway length.
Figure 15
Figure 16
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19
Figure 20
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-30
12 FEB 10
9.8.5
COST INDEXING.
Cost Indexing is a method used to determine the aircraft speeds and cruising altitudes that will produce the least overall trip
cost. This method balances the costs of time and the cost of fuel. The Cost Index (CI) Speed will sometimes be referred to as
the Econ speed.
Note
It is important to note that the CI speeds may not always result in the least fuel burn on a given trip,
but are intended to provide the least total cost of the trip when considering all expenses.
Note
Not all flights will be dispatched using Cost Indexing. Look at the CRUISE speed on the release; fly
the published cruise speed if it is listed. If either CI001 or CI000 is listed use ACARS to
determine cruise speed; reference the Econ Speed Table in the TLR if ACARS is inoperative. Do not
use the Econ Speed Table unless CI001 or CI000 is on the release.
Note
Fuel load is based on flying Econ speeds. When CI001 or CI000 is not on the release, fuel load is
based on standard cruise speeds.
There are two elements of Cost Indexing. Dispatch uses Planned CI and pilots normally use Dynamic CI. Planned Cost
Indexing bases cruise altitude and cruise speed on forecast conditions. Pilots will use Planned CI in flight only when ACARS
is not available. Dynamic Cost Indexing utilizes ACARS to update the Planned CI and provide optimum altitudes and
airspeeds using real-time weather and aircraft conditions.
Planned Cost Indexing.
The flight release will have a Cost Index number which appears below the fuel schedule, followed by a COST INDEX-ECON
SPEEDS speed table. The sample release below shows a CI value of 19; this is the CI number that will be entered into
ACARS.
Sample release:
FLIGHT DATE ORG DEST ALT1 ALT2 A/C TYPE
ENGINES
2597 06NOV08 CLT TYS
CL600-2B19 CF34-3
N226JS
OP INDEX -00006.9
SPEED SCHEDULE CLIMB 290/74
BURN
RESERVE
ALT/MSAP
HOLD
T/OFUEL
TANKER
TAXI
RAMP
FUEL
1792
2205
0
0
3997
0
336
4333
TIME
00.35
00.45
00.00
00.00
01.20
00.00
00.21
BOW
PYLD
ZFW
FOB
TOW
BURN
LGW
FOD
COST INDEX 19
CLB TEMP DEV P00
CRZ TEMP DEV P07
DSC TEMP DEV P04
PSA Airlines, Inc.

CRUISE CI001 DESCENT 290/74
PLAN
ACT STRUC
31987...... LIMIT
12013......
44000...... 44000
3997...... 14518
47997...... 53000
1792
46205...... 47000
2205

Performance
9-31
12 FEB 10
Sample Speed Table:
Using the Planned Cost Indexing-Econ Speeds Table.

Find the wind speed in the table closest to actual current wind. Find current flight level on left side of chart. Find current
weight along top of chart. Use these current conditions to derive an updated CI speed. Interpolate as necessary.
Example: Reference the sample Econ Speed Table: you are flying at FL350 in a 100-knot tailwind, and the aircraft weight is
59,000 pounds. Instead of flying the standard cruise speed of .77 or .80, you would optimize cost savings if you slowed to
Mach .754. Notice as fuel is burned off the CI speed is reduced.
Dynamic / Real Time Cost Indexing.
Current conditions updating
The ACARS system will not update the Econ Speeds between takeoff and 10,000' MSL, because the climb speed is assumed to
be 250 KIAS. Once the aircraft climbs through 10,000' MSL, ACARS will automatically transmit the current conditions to
Aerodata. Additional automatic updates occur when:
Aircraft climbs through FL200

Aircraft levels off at the cruise altitude
Aircraft descends from cruise altitude
Aircraft descends through FL200
Aircraft weight changes by a predetermined amount
Wind component or velocity changes by a predetermined amount
Utilizing these real-time numbers, AeroData will recompute the CI / Econ speeds and transmit them to the aircraft.
Econ Speed page details. (See Figures 21, 22, and 23)
TGT ALT (L1 key) - This is the target altitude (planned cruise altitude). It is a mandatory entry.
OPT/MAX - Optimum Flight Level / Maximum Flight Level for the current conditions and aircraft weight. Optimum flight
level is the minimum cost altitude for the current conditions. Maximum Flight Level is the highest altitude that ensures
minimum climb capabilities, and ensures low and high-speed margin requirements are met. Generated data.
STEP (R1 key) - Step Flight Level can be used for cost comparison purposes. Optional entry.
WIND (L2 key) - Wind direction and speed as calculated by the FMS. No entry allowed or required.
TGT N1 - Target N1 setting to achieve the Cost Indexing / Econ Speed displayed. Generated data.
WIND (R2 key) - Wind direction and speed for comparison only. This is the wind for the step altitude. Optional entry.
GWT - Current aircraft weight: appears after ZFW and FUEL are entered on the PERF INIT page. Generated data.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


9-32
12 FEB 10
Performance
SPEED - Econ Speed (KIAS/Mach) to be flown during the current phase of flight (climb/cruise/descent). Note: If using CI
speeds, ensure that the CI speeds have been entered in the appropriate FMS VNAV pages to ensure accurate FMS calculations.
Generated data
SAVINGS - Cost savings realized (positive number) or additional cost incurred (negative number) by flying at the step altitude
compared to flying at the current cruise altitude. Generated data.
CI (L4 key) - Cost Index value of the flight. This value is typically obtained from the flight release, but can be modified at any
time. Mandatory entry. Valid entry is 0 - 999.
HOLDING - Econ Holding Speed (KIAS). When given holding instructions, crew must enter altitude in TGT ALT (L1) then
UPDATE (R4) for accurate Econ holding speed. Note: Use Econ hold speed, or current Vref +30 Kts., whichever is higher.
Generated data.
UPDATE (R4 key) - Time of the last data uplink. Select (R4) to request a manual update at any time.
SYSTEM MESSAGE - Messages related to system function and crew inputs.
Econ Speed Pages by Phase of Flight.
Press (L5) to access the ECON SPEED page.
To enable system functionality, enter the planned cruise altitude at (L1) and the Cost Index value (from the dispatch release) at
(L4).
No information displayed. Climb speed is assumed to be 250 KIAS.
Econ Climb Speed automatically displays in the SPEED field.

The climb speed updates as wind and weight change by a predetermined amount.
TGT N1 is not displayed during climb because climb power is assumed.
If target altitude is changed during climb, the new altitude should be entered at (L1) and then an updated Econ Speed
requested by pressing (R4).
A new update will be received once the aircraft has been level for approximately two (2) minutes.
TGT N1 is now displayed
Econ Cruise KIAS or Mach displayed under SPEED field

Econ Holding Speed displayed under the HOLDING field
STEP cost comparison function available at (R1)
Once established at cruise altitude, if a change to a new cruise altitude is required, enter the new altitude at (L1) then request an
update by pressing (R4). This will return a new Econ Climb/Descent Speed after two (2) minutes.
Note
During climbout do not change TGT altitude with each level-off. Remaining at an altitude for 2 min
will cause cruise information for that altitude to be displayed; once a climb is re-initiated, climb data is
displayed once again.
Example: ATC gives you an intermediate level-off at FL280 during your climb to FL310. After 2 minutes ECON CRZ screen
appears with a cruise speed for FL280. When climb to FL310 resumes, a new climb speed will be displayed.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-33
12 FEB 10
Once established at cruise altitude, the STEP altitude cost comparison function becomes available. To determine the
difference in cost between the current altitude and a proposed altitude, entered the proposed altitude at (R1) and then request
an update by pressing (R4).
You may also input wind direction and speed for the step altitude. If these are not entered, the calculations are made using
winds at current altitude.
Potential costs savings (positive number), or additional costs (negative number) which would occur if you moved to the STEP
altitude will be displayed beside the (R3) key under SAVINGS.
When descending below the TGT ALT, the system assumes a descent to the airport, and will automatically update TGT ALT to
FL100 and request an update for the Econ Descent Speed. Holding speed is calculated for FL100; if holding at a different
altitude, enter the altitude in (L1) and manually request an update.
TGT N1 is no longer displayed, because an idle descent is assumed

Econ Descent Speed is displayed under SPEED field
STEP function no longer available at (R1)
Level-off during descent: Econ Cruise Speed will appear after 2 minutes. No change to TGT altitude required.
Messages related to system function and crew inputs are displayed on this line.
Figure 21
Figure 22
Figure 23
PSA Airlines, Inc.


9-34
12 FEB 10
9.8.6
Performance
ERROR MESSAGES.
The following are a list of messages that you might encounter when using the ACARS PERF/W&B.
General Error Messages

SYSTEM ERROR ([ERROR CODE]) - RETRY IN 5 MINS
A system error occurred while processing the request. Resubmit request and contact Dispatch with the error code indicated
by [ERROR CODE] if the error persists.
SYSTEM ERROR ([ERROR CODE])
A system error occurred while processing the request. Contact Dispatch with the error code indicated by [ERROR CODE]
DATA ERROR - RESUBMIT
The system encountered an error during the processing of the request. Re-request the data at your earliest convenience.
Processing Error Messages

AC ID ERROR
Error occurred while retrieving aircraft from database. Contact Dispatch if the error message persists.
UNABLE TO FORMAT REQ
Error occurred while passing/formatting the request from the computer system. Contact Dispatch if the error message
persists.
PAGE # ERROR
Error occurred while preparing page # / 5 of the uplinks. Contact Dispatch if the error message persists.
REMARKS ERROR
Error occurred while preparing the remarks page (page 2 / 5). Contact Dispatch if the error message persists.
TYPE FORMAT ERROR
Error occurred while preparing the uplinks. Contact Dispatch if the error message persists.
Dispatch Related Error Messages

FLT RLS DATA NOT AVAILABLE OR HAS EXPIRED - CHECK FLT NUM / ORIGIN
The flight release for the requested flight either could not be found or is more than 8 hours old. This message may be
returned because of a mismatch between ACARS entered data and flight release data. Confirm all input data is correct and
contact dispatch if necessary.
UNABLE TO FIND TAKEOFF FLT PARAMETERS - CONTACT DX
The takeoff parameters for the requested flight could not be found. Contact dispatch and have dispatcher re-submit flight
parameters, then re-request takeoff data.
UNABLE TO FIND LANDING FLT PARAMETERS - CONTACT DX
The landing parameters for the requested flight could not be found. Contact dispatch and have dispatcher re-submit flight
parameters, then re-request landing data.
A/C ID DOES NOT MATCH FLT RLS
The aircraft registration from the request downlink does not match the registration on the active flight release. Contact
dispatch about a possible aircraft swap and/or ensure you are the correct aircraft.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-35
12 FEB 10
Input Error Messages

ORIGIN DOWNLINK ERROR - RE-ENTER ORIGIN CODE AND RE-SEND
The Origin code was not downlinked correctly. Re-enter the origin code and resubmit the request.
INVALID ORIGIN CODE - RE-ENTER ORIGIN CODE AND RE-SEND
The origin entered was not in the correct format. Format for origin code is four characters; first character must be an alphacharacter, characters two through four must be alphanumeric characters. Check format of origin code, re-enter, and
resubmit data request.
ORIGIN AIRPORT NOT IN DATABASE - CONFIRM ORIGIN CODE
The origin airport entered could not be found in the AeroData database. Confirm that origin code is valid.
NO VALID RWYS REQUESTED
No valid runways were requested for the selected airport. Confirm that the runways entered on the TAKEOFF
CONDITIONS page match the runway identifier on the TLR. Use alias codes where provided.
NO RWYS SPECIFIED
No runways were specified in the request. Enter at least one runway in the first runway entry field on the TAKEOFF
CONDITIONS page.
INVALID WIND DIR
A wind direction was entered that was not within the valid range (000-360). Enter a valid wind direction on the TAKEOFF
CONDITIONS PAGE.
INVALID WIND SPD
A wind speed was entered that was not within the valid range (00-99). Enter a valid wind speed on the TAKEOFF
CONDITIONS page.
OAT ABOVE AFM MAX
The OAT entered was greater than the AFM maximum OAT for the requested aircraft. Check OAT on the TAKEOFF
CONDITIONS page.
OAT BELOW AFM MIN
The OAT entered was less than the AFM minimum OAT for the requested aircraft. Check OAT on the TAKEOFF
CONDITIONS page.
QNH NOT WITHIN VALID RANGE
The QNH entered was not within the allowed range. Valid ranges are 950-1050hPa and 28.00 - 31.00 in. Check QNH on
the TAKEOFF CONDITIONS page.
Weight and Balance Error Messages

AIRCRAFT NOT IN WB DATABASE - CALL DX
The aircraft was not found in the AeroData database. Contact Dispatch to have aircraft added.
PAX ZONE # EXCEEDED
The number of passengers entered for zone # exceeded the maximum number of passengers for that zone. Check number
of passengers for that zone.
FWD BIN MAX WT EXCEEDED
The maximum weight for the forward bin was exceeded. Check forward bin weight. <701 ONLY>
PSA Airlines, Inc.


9-36
12 FEB 10
Performance
AFT BIN MAX WT EXCEEDED

The maximum weight for the aft bin was exceeded. Check aft bin weight.
MAX FUEL EXCEEDED
The maximum amount of fuel allowed was exceeded. Check FOB entered and contact dispatch as necessary.
MZFW EXCEEDED
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight was exceeded.
MTXW EXCEEDED
Maximum Structural Taxi Weight was exceeded.
MTOW EXCEEDED
Maximum Takeoff Weight was exceeded.
MLW EXCEEDED
Maximum Landing Weight was exceeded.
FWD EDGE ZFW VIOLATION
Forward envelope violation for Zero Fuel Weight.
AFT EDGE ZFW VIOLATION
Aft envelope violation for Zero Fuel Weight.
FWD EDGE TOW VIOLATION
Forward envelope violation for Takeoff Weight.
AFT EDGE TOW VIOLATION
Aft envelope violation for Takeoff Weight.
UNABLE TO PRODUCE TRIM
An error occurred while determining the trim settings. Check loadsheet and resubmit request.
Performance Calculation Error Messages

TAKEOFF NOT POSSIBLE
Performance restrictions do not allow takeoff on specified runway.
MRTW EXCEEDED
Gross takeoff weight exceeds maximum runway takeoff weight (MRTW) for the specified runway and conditions. Select
another runway for takeoff, modify conditions, or reduce payload, as necessary.
RLS MTOW EXCEEDED
The maximum flight plan takeoff weight (MFPTW) allowed by the flight release has been exceeded. Contact the
dispatcher to revise the flight release or reduce payload, as necessary.
MLDW EXCEEDED
Gross landing weight exceeds maximum landing weight for the specified runway and conditions.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-37
12 FEB 10
Cost Indexing Error Messages

SYSTEM ERROR
Results unavailable because of a system error.
MAX ALT FLxxx
Current Cruise FL exceeds maximum FL.
MAX CRZ ALT FLxxx
TGT ALT FL exceeds maximum FL.
STEP ALT EXCEEDS MAX
STEP FL entered exceeds maximum FL.
Other aircraft configuration error messages may be returned depending on the engine/airframe combination.
9.9
Thrust Limit Charts
The following charts should be used in the absence of FMS thrust limit data.
9.9.1
<-200> Thrust Limit Charts.

<-200> TAKEOFF THRUST SETTINGS
CF 34-3B1
(Hot & High Perf.)
Normal Takeoff Thrust Setting, % N1

(Zero Engine Bleed)
OAT
Airport Pressure Altitude (Feet x 1000)
-1
10
-40
-40
80.9
81.3
82.2
83.1
83.9
85.0
86.1
-35
-31
81.8
82.2
83.0
83.9
84.8
85.9
87.0
-30
-22
82.6
83.1
83.9
84.8
85.7
86.8
87.9
-25
-13
83.4
83.9
84.7
85.7
86.6
87.7
88.7
-20
-4
84.3
84.7
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.5
89.6
-15
85.1
85.5
86.4
87.3
88.3
89.4
90.5
-10
14
85.9
86.4
87.2
88.2
89.1
90.3
91.4
-5
23
86.7
87.2
88.0
89.0
89.9
91.1
92.2
32
87.5
88.0
88.8
89.8
90.8
91.9
93.0
41
88.3
88.8
89.6
90.6
91.6
92.8
93.9
10
50
89.1
89.5
90.4
91.4
92.4
93.6
94.7
15
59
89.8
90.3
91.2
92.2
93.2
94.1
93.8
20
68
90.6
91.1
91.9
93.0
93.4
93.0
92.7
25
77
91.3
91.6
92.5
92.7
92.3
91.9
92.0
30
86
91.2
91.9
91.7
91.5
91.2
91.1
91.1
35
95
90.4
90.5
90.6
90.5
90.4
90.3
90.2
40
104
89.5
89.6
89.7
89.6
89.5
45
113
88.6
88.7
88.7
88.6
50
122
87.7
87.7
87.6
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-38
12 FEB 10

CF 34-3B1
(Hot & High Perf.)

(10th Stage Bleeds ON - Packs ON)
OAT
-1
10
-40
-40
80.9
81.3
82.2
83.1
83.9
85.0
86.1
-35
-31
81.8
82.2
83.0
83.9
84.8
85.9
87.0
-30
-22
82.6
83.1
83.9
84.8
85.7
86.8
87.9
-25
-13
83.4
83.9
84.7
85.7
86.6
87.7
88.7
-20
-4
84.3
84.7
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.5
89.6
-15
85.1
85.5
86.4
87.3
88.3
89.4
90.5
-10
14
85.9
86.4
87.2
88.2
89.1
90.3
91.4
-5
23
86.7
87.2
88.0
89.0
89.9
91.1
92.2
32
87.5
88.0
88.8
89.8
90.8
91.9
92.2
41
88.3
88.8
89.6
90.6
91.6
92.3
92.9
10
50
89.1
89.5
90.4
91.4
91.7
92.7
93.8
15
59
89.8
90.3
91.1
91.4
92.4
93.3
92.9
20
68
90.6
90.8
91.2
92.1
92.5
92.1
91.7
25
77
90.6
90.9
91.8
91.9
91.4
91.0
91.0
30
86
90.4
91.1
90.9
90.6
90.2
90.1
90.0
35
95
89.6
89.7
89.7
89.5
89.4
89.2
89.2
40
104
88.6
88.7
88.8
88.6
88.5
45
113
87.7
87.7
87.7
87.6
50
122
86.9
86.8
86.7
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-39
12 FEB 10

CF 34-3B1
(Hot & High Perf.)
(Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
-1
0
2
4
6
8
10
-40
-40
80.9
81.3
82.2
83.1
83.9
85.0
86.1
-35
-31
81.8
82.2
83.0
83.9
84.8
85.9
87.0
-30
-22
82.6
83.1
83.9
84.8
85.7
86.8
87.9
-25
-13
83.4
83.9
84.7
85.7
86.6
87.7
88.7
-20
-4
84.3
84.7
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.5
89.6
-15
5
85.1
85.5
86.4
87.3
88.3
89.4
90.5
-10
14
85.9
86.4
87.2
88.2
89.1
90.3
91.4
-5
23
86.7
87.2
88.0
89.0
89.9
91.1
92.2
0
32
87.5
88.0
88.8
89.8
90.8
91.9
92.7
5
41
88.3
88.8
89.6
90.6
91.6
92.3
92.9
10
50
89.1
89.5
90.4
91.4
91.7
92.7
93.8

NOTE: In Icing conditions, between 0C and 5C, at pressure altitudes of
2,000 ft. and below, the takeoff thrust settings with cowl anti-icing ON may
be used when taking off with the wing and cowl anti-icing ON.
CF 34-3B1
(Hot
& High Perf.)
(Wing and Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
-1
0
2
4
6
8
10
-40
-40
80.9
81.3
82.2
83.1
83.9
85.0
86.1
-35
-31
81.8
82.2
83.0
83.9
84.8
85.9
87.0
-30
-22
82.6
83.1
83.9
84.8
85.7
86.8
87.9
-25
-13
83.4
83.9
84.7
85.7
86.6
87.7
88.7
-20
-4
84.3
84.7
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.3
88.7
-15
5
85.1
85.5
86.4
87.2
87.8
88.3
88.7
-10
14
85.9
86.4
86.8
87.2
87.8
88.3
88.7
-5
23
86.2
86.6
86.8
87.2
87.8
88.3
88.7
0
32
86.2
86.6
86.8
87.2
87.8
88.3
88.7
5
41
86.2
86.6
86.8
87.2
87.8
88.3
88.9
10
50
86.2
86.6
86.8
87.2
87.8
88.6
89.7
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-40
12 FEB 10
<-200> MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
THRUST SETTINGS
CF 34-3B1
Maximum Continuous Thrust Setting, % N1
(Hot & High Perf.)
(Pack ON)
OAT
Pressure Altitude (Feet x 1000)
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
36
41
-70
-94
90.7 91.0
-65
-85
90.0 91.9 92.1
-60
-76
89.7 91.2 93.0 93.2
-55
-67
88.8 90.7 92.1 94.1 94.2
-50
-58
89.9 91.7 93.1 95.2 95.2
-45
-49
88.8 90.7 92.7 94.3 95.9 95.0
-40
-40 82.3 84.7 87.0 89.7 91.7 93.7 95.3 95.1 94.3
-35
-31 83.2 85.6 87.9 90.6 92.7 94.6 96.2 94.4 93.9
-30
-22 84.1 86.5 88.8 91.6 93.6 95.6 95.8 94.0 92.7
-25
-13 84.9 87.3 89.7 92.5 94.6 96.3 94.9 93.0
-20
-4
85.7 88.2 90.6 93.4 95.5 95.5 94.3 91.9
-15
5
86.6 89.1 91.5 94.3 95.9 95.0 93.4
-10
14 87.4 89.9 92.3 95.2 95.3 94.2 92.3
-5
23 88.2 90.8 93.2 95.5 94.5 93.3 91.2
0
32 89.0 91.6 94.0 94.7 93.7 92.2
5
41 89.8 92.4 94.2 94.0 92.8 91.2
10
50 90.6 93.2 93.6 93.2 92.0
15
59 91.4 93.5 92.9 92.4 91.1
20
68 92.2 92.7 92.2 91.5
25
77 92.4 92.0 91.3 90.5
30
86 91.6 91.2 90.4
35
95 90.8 90.4 89.6
40
104 90.0 89.5
45
113 89.0 88.5
50
122 88.1
-
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-41
12 FEB 10
THRUST SETTINGS
CF 34-3B1
(Hot & High Perf.)
(Pack ON; Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
-65
-85
90.0
-60
-76
89.7
91.2
-55
-67
88.8
90.7
92.1
-50
-58
89.9
91.7
93.1
-45
-49
88.8
90.7
92.7
94.3
-40
-40
82.3
84.7
87.0
89.7
91.7
93.7
95.2
-35
-31
83.2
85.6
87.9
90.6
92.7
94.6
95.0
-30
-22
84.1
86.5
88.8
91.6
93.6
95.2
93.9
-25
-13
84.9
87.3
89.7
92.5
94.6
94.9
93.3
-20
-4
85.7
88.2
90.6
93.4
94.9
94.2
92.4
-15
5
86.6
89.1
91.5
94.3
94.7
93.4
91.2
-10
14
87.4
89.9
92.3
94.6
93.9
92.4
89.9
-5
23
88.2
90.8
93.2
94.3
93.1
91.3
88.7
0
32
89.0
91.6
93.5
93.5
92.2
90.2
5
41
89.8
92.4
93.2
92.7
91.3
89.1
10
50
90.6
92.9
92.6
91.9
90.4
-
THRUST SETTINGS
CF 34-3B1
(Hot
& High Perf.)
(Pack ON; Wing and Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
-65
-85
89.8
-60
-76
89.5
90.9
-55
-67
88.8
90.6
91.6
-50
-58
89.8
91.2
91.6
-45
-49
88.8
90.6
91.2
91.6
-40
-40
82.3
84.7
87.0
89.7
90.6
91.2
91.6
-35
-31
83.2
85.6
87.9
90.0
90.6
91.2
91.3
-30
-22
84.1
86.5
88.8
90.0
90.6
91.2
90.4
-25
-13
84.9
87.3
89.2
90.0
90.6
90.9
89.4
-20
-4
85.7
88.2
89.2
90.0
90.6
90.0
88.3
-15
5
86.6
88.5
89.2
90.0
90.3
89.1
87.3
-10
14
87.4
88.5
89.2
90.0
89.5
88.2
86.3
-5
23
87.7
88.5
89.2
89.8
88.8
87.1
85.2
0
32
87.7
88.5
89.2
89.1
87.9
86.1
5
41
87.7
88.5
88.9
88.3
87.0
84.9
10
50
87.7
88.5
88.1
87.4
85.8
-
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-42
12 FEB 10
<-200> MAXIMUM CLIMB THRUST SETTINGS
FLAPS UP (250 KIAS/.7M)

CF 34-3B1
Maximum Climb Thrust Setting, % N1
(Packs ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
36
-70
-94
93.8
-65
-85
91.9 95.0
-60
-76
90.2 93.0 96.1
-55
-67
88.2 91.2 94.1 97.1
-50
-58
89.2 92.2 95.1 96.4
-45
-49
87.8 90.2 93.3 96.1 95.7
-40
-40 80.2 82.9 85.9 88.7 91.2 94.3 95.9 95.0
-35
-31 81.1 93.8 86.8 89.7 92.1 95.2 95.1 94.3
-30
-22 81.9 84.7 87.7 90.6 93.1 94.6 94.6 93.7
-25
-13 82.7 85.6 88.6 91.5 94.0 94.3 93.9 92.7
-20
-4
83.6 86.4 89.5 92.4 93.6 93.5 93.0 91.6
-15
5
84.4 87.3 90.4 93.3 92.8 92.7 91.9
-10
14 85.2 88.1 91.2 92.6 91.9 91.8 90.9
-5
23 86.0 88.9 92.1 91.8 91.0 90.8 89.9
0
32 86.8 89.8 91.3 90.8 90.1 90.0
5
41 87.6 90.6 90.5 90.1 89.3 89.2
10
50 88.4 89.9 89.7 89.3 88.5
15
59 89.1 89.1 89.0 88.5 87.7
20
68 88.4 88.4 88.2 87.7
25
77 87.6 87.6 87.3 86.8
30
86 86.7 86.7 86.4
35
95 85.9 85.9 85.6
40
104 85.1 85.1
45
113 84.4 84.3
50
122 83.6
-
PSA Airlines, Inc.

41
92.4
93.5
94.6
95.1
94.3
93.7
93.1
92.4
91.4
-

Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-43
12 FEB 10

CF 34-3B1
(Packs ON; Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
-65
-85
-60
-76
90.2
-55
-67
88.2
91.2
-50
-58
89.2
92.2
-45
-49
87.8
90.2
93.3
-40
-40
80.2
82.9
85.9
88.7
91.2
94.1
-35
-31
81.1
83.8
86.8
89.7
92.1
94.1
-30
-22
81.9
84.7
87.7
90.6
93.1
93.6
-25
-13
82.7
85.6
88.6
91.5
93.1
93.0
-20
-4
83.6
86.4
89.5
92.4
92.5
92.1
-15
5
84.4
87.3
90.4
92.4
91.6
91.2
-10
14
85.2
88.1
91.2
91.6
90.6
90.1
-5
23
86.0
88.9
91.2
90.6
89.6
89.3
0
32
86.8
89.8
90.4
89.7
88.8
88.3
5
41
87.6
89.8
89.5
88.9
87.9
87.3
10
50
88.4
89.0
88.7
88.1
87.1
-
30
91.9
93.0
94.1
95.1
95.2
94.4
93.8
93.3
92.2
91.1
90.0
89.0
88.0
-

CF 34-3B1
(Packs ON; Wing and Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
-65
-85
-60
-76
90.2
-55
-67
88.2
91.2
-50
-58
89.2
91.5
-45
-49
87.8
90.2
91.5
-40
-40
80.2
82.9
85.9
88.7
90.4
91.5
-35
-31
81.1
83.8
86.8
89.7
90.4
91.5
-30
-22
81.9
84.7
87.7
89.8
90.4
90.7
-25
-13
82.7
85.6
88.6
89.8
90.4
89.7
-20
-4
83.6
86.4
89.0
89.8
89.5
88.5
-15
5
84.4
87.3
89.0
89.8
88.4
87.4
-10
14
85.2
87.8
89.0
88.9
87.5
86.2
-5
23
86.0
87.8
89.0
88.0
86.4
85.4
0
32
86.5
87.8
88.1
87.0
85.4
84.5
5
41
86.5
87.8
87.2
86.0
84.3
83.6
10
50
86.5
87.0
86.2
84.9
83.1
-
30
91.9
92.0
92.0
92.0
92.0
91.4
90.3
89.2
88.1
87.3
86.3
85.6
84.8
-
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-44
12 FEB 10
<-200> MAXIMUM CRUISE
THRUST SETTINGS FLAPS UP

CF 34-3B1
Maximum Cruise Thrust Setting, % N1
(Packs ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
36
-70
-94
92.9
-65
-85
91.1 94.0
-60
-76
89.9 92.1 95.1
-55
-67
87.9 90.9 93.2 95.7
-50
-58
88.9 91.9 94.3 94.9
-45
-49
87.3 89.9 92.9 95.3 94.2
-40
-40 80.3 82.9 85.5 88.3 90.9 93.9 94.8 93.8
-35
-31 81.2 83.8 86.4 89.2 91.9 94.9 94.5 92.8
-30
-22 82.0 84.7 87.3 90.1 92.8 94.4 93.6 91.7
-25
-13 82.9 85.6 88.2 91.0 93.8 93.5 92.7 90.7
-20
-4
83.7 86.4 89.1 92.0 93.0 92.5 91.7 89.8
-15
5
84.5 87.3 90.0 92.9 92.1 91.6 90.8
-10
14 85.3 88.1 90.9 92.0 91.3 90.9 90.0
-5
23 86.1 88.9 91.7 91.3 90.6 90.2 89.1
0
32 86.9 89.8 91.1 90.6 89.8 89.5
5
41 87.7 90.6 90.4 89.9 89.2 88.9
10
50 88.5 89.9 89.7 89.2 88.5
15
59 89.3 89.2 89.0 88.6 87.8
20
68 88.6 88.5 88.4 87.9
25
77 87.9 87.8 87.7 87.3
30
86 87.1 87.1 87.0
35
95 86.4 86.4 86.3
40
104 85.7 85.7
45
113 85.0 85.0
50
122 84.2
-
PSA Airlines, Inc.

41
91.0
92.1
93.1
93.7
93.0
92.5
91.6
90.5
89.5
-

Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-45
12 FEB 10

CF 34-3B1
(Packs ON; Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
-65
-85
-60
-76
89.2
-55
-67
87.9
90.9
-50
-58
88.9
91.9
-45
-49
87.3
89.9
92.9
-40
-40
80.3
82.9
85.5
88.3
90.9
93.9
-35
-31
81.2
83.8
86.4
89.2
91.9
94.0
-30
-22
82.0
84.7
87.3
90.1
92.8
93.2
-25
-13
82.9
85.6
88.2
91.0
92.8
92.2
-20
-4
83.7
86.4
89.1
92.0
91.9
91.3
-15
5
84.5
87.3
90.0
92.0
91.0
90.5
-10
14
85.3
88.1
90.9
91.1
90.3
89.7
-5
23
86.1
88.9
90.9
90.4
89.5
88.9
0
32
86.9
89.8
90.3
89.6
88.7
88.3
5
41
87.7
89.8
89.5
88.8
88.0
87.6
10
50
88.5
89.1
88.8
88.2
87.3
-
30
91.1
92.1
93.2
94.2
94.2
93.9
93.1
92.1
91.0
90.1
89.2
88.3
87.6
-

CF 34-3B1
(Packs ON; Wing and Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
0
5
10
15
20
25
-65
-85
-60
-76
89.9
-55
-67
88.0
90.9
-50
-58
88.9
91.3
-45
-49
87.3
89.9
91.3
-40
-40
80.3
82.9
85.5
88.3
90.2
91.3
-35
-31
81.2
83.8
86.4
89.2
90.2
91.3
-30
-22
82.0
84.7
87.3
89.7
90.2
90.2
-25
-13
82.9
85.6
88.2
89.7
90.2
89.2
-20
-4
83.7
86.4
89.0
89.7
89.4
88.3
-15
5
84.5
87.3
89.0
89.7
88.5
87.4
-10
14
85.3
88.0
89.0
89.0
87.6
86.6
-5
23
86.1
88.0
89.0
88.0
86.7
85.6
0
32
86.7
88.0
88.3
87.2
85.9
84.6
5
41
86.7
88.0
87.4
86.4
85.0
83.6
10
50
86.7
87.2
86.7
85.6
84.2
-
30
91.1
91.6
91.6
91.6
91.6
90.7
89.5
88.3
87.3
86.5
85.8
85.0
84.2
-
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-46
12 FEB 10
<-200> GO-AROUND THRUST SETTINGS

NOTE: All Go-Around thrust setting tables are given for a go-around with
either both engines operating or one engine inoperative.
CF 34-3B1
(Hot & High Perf.)
Go-Around Thrust Setting, % N1

(Zero Engine Bleed)
OAT
-1
10
-40
-40
82.4
83.2
84.1
85.0
85.8
86.8
87.9
-35
-31
83.3
84.0
85.0
85.9
86.7
87.7
88.8
-30
-22
84.2
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.6
89.7
-25
-13
85.0
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.5
89.5
90.6
-20
-4
85.9
86.6
87.6
88.5
89.4
90.4
91.5
-15
86.7
87.5
88.4
89.3
90.3
91.3
92.4
-10
14
87.5
88.3
89.3
90.2
91.1
92.2
93.3
-5
23
88.3
89.1
90.1
91.0
92.0
93.0
94.1
32
89.2
89.9
90.9
91.9
92.8
93.9
95.0
41
90.0
90.8
91.7
92.7
93.6
94.7
95.9
10
50
90.8
91.6
92.6
93.5
94.5
95.6
96.7
15
59
91.5
92.3
93.4
94.3
95.3
96.1
95.8
20
68
92.3
93.1
94.2
95.1
95.4
95.1
94.7
25
77
93.1
93.9
95.0
95.1
94.7
94.3
94.4
30
86
93.9
94.5
94.5
94.3
94.0
93.9
93.9
35
95
93.6
93.5
93.6
93.5
93.4
93.3
40
104
92.6
92.6
92.7
92.7
92.6
45
113
91.7
91.8
91.8
91.7
50
122
90.9
90.8
90.7
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-47
12 FEB 10

Go-Around Thrust Setting, % N1
(10th Stage Bleeds ON - Packs ON)
OAT
CF 34-3B1
(Hot & High Perf.)
-1
10
-40
-40
82.4
83.2
84.1
85.0
85.8
86.8
87.9
-35
-31
83.3
84.0
85.0
85.9
86.7
87.7
88.8
-30
-22
84.2
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.6
89.7
-25
-13
85.0
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.5
89.5
90.6
-20
-4
85.9
86.6
87.6
88.5
89.4
90.4
91.5
-15
86.7
87.5
88.4
89.3
90.3
91.3
92.4
-10
14
87.5
88.3
89.3
90.2
91.1
92.2
93.3
-5
23
88.3
89.1
90.1
91.0
92.0
93.0
94.1
32
89.2
89.9
90.9
91.9
92.8
93.9
95.0
41
90.0
90.8
91.7
92.7
93.6
94.7
95.4
10
50
90.8
91.6
92.6
93.5
94.5
95.0
95.4
15
59
91.5
92.4
93.4
94.3
94.7
94.9
94.6
20
68
92.3
93.1
94.1
94.5
94.3
93.9
93.4
25
77
93.1
93.7
94.1
94.0
93.5
93.1
93.1
30
86
93.3
93.7
93.6
93.3
92.9
92.7
92.6
35
95
92.6
92.6
92.6
92.4
92.2
92.0
40
104
91.6
91.7
91.7
91.6
91.5
45
113
90.7
90.7
90.7
90.4
50
122
89.7
89.6
89.4
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-48
12 FEB 10

CF 34-3B1
(Hot
& High Perf.)
(Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
-1
0
2
4
6
8
10
-40
-40
82.4
83.2
84.1
85.0
85.8
86.8
87.9
-35
-31
83.3
84.0
85.0
85.9
86.7
87.7
88.8
-30
-22
84.2
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.6
89.7
-25
-13
85.0
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.5
89.5
90.6
-20
-4
85.9
86.6
87.6
88.5
89.4
90.4
91.5
-15
5
86.7
87.5
88.4
89.3
90.3
91.3
92.4
-10
14
87.5
88.3
89.3
90.2
91.1
92.2
93.3
-5
23
88.3
89.1
90.1
91.0
92.0
93.0
94.1
0
32
89.2
89.9
90.9
91.9
92.8
93.9
95.0
5
41
90.0
90.8
91.7
92.7
93.6
94.7
95.7
10
50
90.8
91.6
92.6
93.5
94.5
95.3
95.7

CF 34-3B1
(Hot
& High Perf.)
(Wing and Cowl Anti-Ice ON)
OAT
C
F
-1
0
2
4
6
8
10
-40
-40
82.4
83.2
84.1
85.0
85.8
86.8
87.9
-35
-31
83.3
84.0
85.0
85.9
86.7
87.7
88.8
-30
-22
84.2
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.6
89.7
-25
-13
85.0
85.8
86.7
87.6
88.5
89.5
90.6
-20
-4
85.9
86.6
87.6
88.5
89.4
90.4
91.4
-15
5
86.7
87.5
88.5
89.3
90.3
91.1
91.4
-10
14
87.5
88.3
89.3
90.2
90.8
91.1
91.4
-5
23
88.3
89.1
90.1
90.5
90.8
91.1
91.4
0
32
89.2
89.9
90.2
90.5
90.8
91.1
91.4
5
41
89.4
89.9
90.2
90.5
90.8
91.1
91.4
10
50
89.4
89.9
90.2
90.5
90.8
91.1
91.4
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9.9.2
9-49
12 FEB 10
<-701> Thrust Limit Charts.

<-701> NORMAL TAKE-OFF THRUST SETTING
(ALL ENGINES OPERATING), %N1
ENGINE BLEEDS CLOSED - STATIC TO 65 KIAS
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.9
84.2
-40
-40 79.3
79.7 80.5
81.3
82.1
83.1
84.0
84.8
85.0
-35
-31 80.1
80.5 81.3
82.1
82.9
83.9
84.8
85.6
85.9
-30
-22 80.9
81.3 82.2
82.9
83.8
84.7
85.7
86.4
86.7
-25
-13 81.7
82.1 82.9
83.8
84.6
85.5
86.5
87.3
87.5
-20
-4
82.4
82.9 83.8
84.6
85.4
86.3
87.3
88.1
88.3
-15
83.2
83.7 84.5
85.3
86.2
87.1
88.1
88.9
89.1
-10
14
84.0
84.5 85.3
86.1
87.0
87.9
88.9
89.7
89.9
-5
23
84.8
85.3 86.1
86.9
87.8
88.7
89.7
90.4
90.7
32
85.5
86.0 86.8
87.7
88.6
89.5
90.5
91.2
91.5
41
86.3
86.8 87.6
88.4
89.3
90.3
91.2
92.0
92.0
10
50
87.0
87.5 88.4
89.2
90.1
91.0
92.0
91.9
91.8
15
59
87.8
88.2 89.1
89.9
90.8
91.6
91.5
91.4
91.3
20
68
88.5
89.0 89.8
90.7
91.1
91.0
90.9
90.8
90.7
25
77
89.2
89.7 90.6
90.6
90.5
90.4
90.3
90.2
90.1
30
86
89.9
90.4 90.2
89.9
89.7
89.6
89.5
89.4
89.4
35
95
89.5
89.6 89.4
89.1
88.9
88.8
88.7
88.7
40
104 88.3
88.3 88.3
88.2
88.1
88.0
45
113 86.9
86.9 87.0
87.3
87.2
50
122 85.4
85.4 85.5
86.4
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-50
12 FEB 10

(ALL ENGINES OPERATING), %N1
ANTI-ICE OFF, PACKS ON - STATIC TO 65 KIAS
OAT
PRESSURE ALTITUDE (Feet)
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.4
83.6
-40
-40 78.8
79.3 80.1
80.8
81.6
82.6
83.5
84.2
84.4
-35
-31 79.6
80.1 80.9
81.7
82.4
83.4
84.3
85.1
85.3
-30
-22 80.4
80.9 81.7
82.5
83.3
84.2
85.1
85.9
86.1
-25
-13 81.2
81.7 82.5
83.3
84.1
85.0
85.9
86.7
86.9
-20
-4
82.0
82.5 83.3
84.1
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.5
87.7
-15
82.8
83.2 84.1
84.8
85.7
86.6
87.5
88.3
88.5
-10
14
83.5
84.0 84.8
85.6
86.4
87.4
88.3
89.1
89.3
-5
23
84.3
84.8 85.6
86.4
87.2
88.1
89.1
89.8
90.0
32
85.0
85.5 86.3
87.2
88.0
88.9
89.9
90.6
90.8
41
85.8
86.3 87.1
87.9
88.7
89.7
90.6
91.4
91.3
10
50
86.5
87.0 87.8
88.7
89.5
90.4
91.4
91.2
91.1
15
59
87.2
87.7 88.6
89.4
90.2
90.9
90.8
90.7
90.5
20
68
87.9
88.4 89.3
90.1
90.5
90.4
90.2
90.1
89.9
25
77
88.7
89.2 90.0
90.0
89.8
89.7
89.6
89.4
89.2
30
86
89.4
89.9 89.6
89.3
89.0
88.9
88.7
88.6
88.5
35
95
88.9
89.0 88.8
88.4
88.2
88.0
87.9
87.8
40
104 87.6
87.7 87.6
87.5
87.3
87.1
45
113 86.2
86.2 86.2
86.6
86.3
50
122 84.7
84.7 84.7
85.6
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-51
12 FEB 10

(ALL ENGINES OPERATING), % N1
COWL ANTI-ICE ON, PACKS ON - STATIC TO 65 KIAS
OAT
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.4
83.6
-40
-40 78.8
79.3 80.1
80.8
81.6
82.6
83.5
84.2
84.4
-35
-31 79.6
80.1 80.9
81.7
82.4
83.4
84.3
85.1
85.3
-30
-22 80.4
80.9 81.7
82.5
-25
-13 81.2
81.7 82.5
83.3
83.3
84.2
85.1
85.9
86.1
84.1
85.0
85.9
86.7
86.9
-20
-4
82.0
82.5 83.3
84.1
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.5
87.7
-15
82.8
83.2 84.1
84.8
85.7
86.6
87.5
88.3
88.5
-10
14
-5
23
83.5
84.0 84.8
85.6
86.4
87.4
88.3
89.1
89.3
84.3
84.8 85.6
86.4
87.2
88.1
89.1
89.8
90.0
32
85.0
85.5 86.3
87.2
88.0
88.9
89.9
90.6
90.8
41
85.8
86.3 87.1
87.9
88.7
89.7
90.6
91.1
91.0
10
50
86.5
87.0 87.8
88.7
89.5
90.4
90.8
90.6
90.4

WING AND COWL ANTI-ICE ON, PACKS ON - STATIC TO 65 KIAS
OAT
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.4
83.6
-40
-40 78.8
79.3 80.1
80.8
81.6
82.6
83.5
84.2
84.4
-35
-31 79.6
80.1 80.9
81.7
82.4
83.4
84.3
85.1
85.3
-30
-22 80.4
80.9 81.7
82.5
83.3
84.2
85.1
85.9
86.1
-25
-13 81.2
81.7 82.5
83.3
84.1
85.0
85.9
86.7
86.9
-20
-4
82.0
82.5 83.3
84.1
84.9
85.8
86.7
87.5
87.7
-15
82.8
83.2 84.1
84.8
85.7
86.6
87.5
88.3
88.4
-10
14
83.5
84.0 84.8
85.6
86.4
87.4
88.3
88.8
88.8
-5
23
84.3
84.8 85.6
86.4
87.2
88.1
88.9
88.4
88.5
32
85.0
85.5 86.3
87.2
88.0
88.7
88.3
88.0
88.1
41
85.8
86.3 87.1
87.9
88.6
88.2
87.8
87.7
85.1
10
50
86.5
87.0 87.8
88.5
88.0
87.6
87.2
87.2
84.4
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-52
12 FEB 10
<-701> GO-AROUND OR NORMAL
TAKE-OFF THRUST SETTING

ENGINE BLEEDS CLOSED - 140 KIAS
OAT
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
84.0
84.5
-40
-40 79.0
79.6 80.4
81.2
82.0
83.0
-35
-31 79.8
80.4 81.3
82.0
82.9
83.8
83.9
84.8
85.4
84.7
85.7
86.2
-30
-22 80.6
81.2 82.1
82.9
83.7
84.6
85.6
86.5
87.0
-25
-13 81.4
82.0 82.9
83.7
84.5
85.4
86.4
87.3
87.8
-20
-4
82.2
82.8 83.7
-15
82.9
83.6 84.5
84.5
85.3
86.3
87.2
88.1
88.7
85.3
86.1
87.1
88.0
88.9
89.4
-10
14
83.7
84.4 85.2
86.1
86.9
87.9
88.8
89.7
90.2
-5
23
84.5
85.1 86.0
86.8
87.7
88.6
89.6
90.5
91.0
0
5
32
85.2
85.9 86.8
87.6
88.5
89.4
90.4
91.3
91.8
41
86.0
86.7 87.5
88.4
89.2
90.2
91.1
92.0
92.1
10
50
86.7
87.4 88.3
89.1
90.0
90.9
91.9
91.8
91.8
15
59
87.4
88.1 89.0
89.9
90.8
91.5
91.4
91.3
91.2
20
68
88.2
88.9 89.8
90.6
91.0
90.9
90.8
90.7
90.6
25
77
88.9
89.6 90.5
90.5
90.4
90.3
90.2
90.1
90.0
30
86
89.6
90.3 90.1
89.8
89.6
89.5
89.4
89.3
89.3
35
95
89.2
89.2 89.2
89.0
88.8
88.8
88.6
88.6
40
104 87.9
87.9 87.9
87.9
87.9
87.9
45
113 86.6
86.6 86.6
86.7
87.0
50
122 85.1
85.1 85.2
85.5
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-53
12 FEB 10

ANTI-ICE OFF, PACKS ON - 140 KIAS
OAT
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.5
84.0
-40
-40 78.6
79.2 80.0
80.8
81.6
82.5
83.4
84.3
84.8
-35
-31 79.4
80.0 80.8
81.6
82.4
83.3
84.2
85.1
85.6
-30
-22 80.2
80.8 81.6
82.4
83.2
84.1
85.1
85.9
86.4
-25
-13 80.9
81.6 82.4
83.2
84.0
84.9
85.9
86.8
87.2
-20
-4
81.7
82.4 83.2
84.0
84.8
85.7
86.7
87.6
88.1
-15
82.5
83.1 84.0
84.8
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.3
88.8
-10
14
83.2
83.9 84.8
85.6
86.4
87.3
88.2
89.1
89.6
-5
23
84.0
84.7 85.5
86.3
87.2
88.1
89.0
89.9
90.4
32
84.7
85.4 86.3
87.1
87.9
88.8
89.8
90.7
91.2
41
85.5
86.1 87.0
87.8
88.7
89.6
90.5
91.4
91.4
10
50
86.2
86.9 87.8
88.6
89.4
90.3
91.3
91.2
91.1
15
59
86.9
87.6 88.5
89.3
90.2
90.9
90.8
90.6
90.5
20
68
87.6
88.3 89.2
90.1
90.4
90.3
90.2
90.0
89.8
25
77
88.3
89.0 89.9
89.9
89.7
89.6
89.5
89.3
89.1
30
86
89.0
89.8 89.5
89.2
89.0
88.8
88.7
88.5
88.4
35
95
88.6
88.6 88.5
88.3
88.1
88.0
87.8
87.7
40
104 87.3
87.3 87.3
87.2
87.2
87.1
45
113 85.9
85.9 85.9
86.0
86.2
50
122 84.4
84.4 84.4
84.7
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Thrust Limit Charts
9-54
12 FEB 10

COWL ANTI-ICE ON, PACKS ON - 140 KIAS
OAT
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.5
84.0
-40
-40 78.6
79.2 80.0
80.8
81.6
82.5
-35
-31 79.4
80.0 80.8
81.6
82.4
83.3
83.4
84.3
84.8
84.2
85.1
85.6
-30
-22 80.2
80.8 81.6
82.4
83.2
84.1
85.1
85.9
86.4
-25
-13 80.9
81.6 82.4
83.2
84.0
84.9
85.9
86.8
87.2
-20
-4
81.7
82.4 83.2
-15
82.5
83.1 84.0
84.0
84.8
85.7
86.7
87.6
88.1
84.8
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.3
88.8
-10
14
83.2
83.9 84.8
85.6
86.4
87.3
88.2
89.1
89.6
-5
23
84.0
84.7 85.5
86.3
87.2
88.1
89.0
89.9
90.4
0
5
32
84.7
85.4 86.3
87.1
87.9
88.8
89.8
90.7
91.1
41
85.5
86.1 87.0
87.8
88.7
89.6
90.5
91.1
91.0
10
50
86.2
86.9 87.8
88.6
89.4
90.3
90.8
90.6
90.4

WING AND COWL ANTI-ICE ON, PACKS ON - 140 KIAS
OAT
(C) (F) -1000
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
-45
-49
83.5
84.0
-40
-40 78.6
79.2 80.0
80.8
81.6
82.5
83.4
84.3
84.8
-35
-31 79.4
80.0 80.8
81.6
82.4
83.3
84.2
85.1
85.6
-30
-22 80.2
80.8 81.6
82.4
-25
-13 80.9
81.6 82.4
83.2
83.2
84.1
85.1
85.9
86.4
84.0
84.9
85.9
86.8
87.2
-20
-4
81.7
82.4 83.2
84.0
84.8
85.7
86.7
87.6
88.1
-15
82.5
83.1 84.0
84.8
85.6
86.5
87.4
88.3
88.8
-10
14
-5
23
83.2
83.9 84.8
85.6
86.4
87.3
88.2
89.1
88.8
84.0
84.7 85.5
86.3
87.2
88.1
89.0
88.6
88.5
32
84.7
85.4 86.3
87.1
87.9
88.8
88.5
88.1
88.1
41
85.5
86.1 87.0
87.8
88.7
88.3
87.9
87.7
87.7
10
50
86.2
86.9 87.8
88.6
88.1
87.7
87.3
87.2
84.7
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Brake Cooling Requirements
9.10
9-55
12 FEB 10
9.10.1 BTMS Operative

A minimum brake cooling time of fifteen (15) minutes must be observed between a landing stop or a rejected takeoff and the
subsequent takeoff. This time is required for the brakes to reach maximum temperature.
A BTMS indication of green and stable or decreasing also must be observed on all BTMS indicators prior to takeoff.
If any BTMS indication turns red (13 or greater), Maintenance Control must be notified, and an inspection must be performed
before the aircraft is considered airworthy.
9.10.2 BTMS Inoperative <-200>

Brake cooling times with any BTMS inoperative are determined by the following tables. You must first determine the V1/
V1MBE ratio. V1 in this ratio is the V1 for the upcoming takeoff.
The following corrections apply to the V1MBE tables:
At weights less than 40,000 lbs., use V1MBE for 40,000 lbs
Reduce V1MBE by 3 knots per 1,000 ft. altitude above sea level
Wind correction: Reduce V1MBE by 1.5 kts/1 kt of tailwind

Increase V1MBE by .3 kts/1 kt of headwind
Runway slope correction:
Reduce V1MBE by 2 kts/1% downhill

Increase V1MBE by 2 kts/1% uphill
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-56
12 FEB 10
<-200>
V1MBE, Flaps 8 (Sea Level, 0 Wind, 0 Runway Slope)

APPLY CORRECTIONS FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
OAT
Airplane Weight (lb. x 1000)
C
F
53
52
50
48
46
44
42
-40
-40
192
194
197
201
205
208
212
-30
-22
187
189
192
196
200
203
207
-20
-4
182
184
187
191
195
198
202
-10
14
178
180
183
187
191
194
198
0
32
173
175
178
182
186
189
193
10
50
169
171
174
178
182
185
189
20
68
166
168
171
175
179
182
186
30
86
163
165
168
172
176
179
183
40
104
161
163
166
170
174
177
181
50
122
159
161
164
168
172
175
179
40
216
211
206
202
197
193
190
187
185
183

APPLY CORRECTIONS FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
OAT
C
F
53
52
50
48
46
44
42
-40
-40
195
197
200
204
208
211
215
-30
-22
190
192
195
199
203
206
210
-20
-4
185
187
190
194
198
201
205
-10
14
181
183
186
190
194
197
201
0
32
176
178
181
185
189
192
196
10
50
172
174
177
181
185
188
192
20
68
169
171
174
178
182
185
189
30
86
166
168
171
175
179
182
186
40
104
164
166
169
173
177
180
184
50
122
162
164
167
171
175
178
182
40
219
214
209
204
200
196
193
190
188
186
<-200>
Below 80 kts. (RTO) or Below Max Quick-Turn Weight (Landing) <-200>.

Following a rejected takeoff with a brake application speed of not more than 80 knots or a landing at a weight not exceeding
the maximum permissible quick turn-around landing weight (reference page 9-57), the brake cooling times shown below must
be observed:
V1/V1MBE
Minimum Brake Cooling Time (Minutes)
< 0.899
10
0.90 - 0.919
15
0.92 - 0.939
20
0.94 - 0.959
28
0.96 - 0.979
36
0.98 - 1.00
45
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-57
12 FEB 10
Above 80 kts. (RTO) or Above Max Quick-Turn Weight (Landing) <-200>.

Following a rejected takeoff with a brake application speed of more than 80 knots or a landing at a weight exceeding the
maximum permissible quick turn-around landing weight (reference page 9-57), the brake cooling times shown below must be
observed, followed by an inspection of the wheel fuse plugs:
V1/V1MBE
< 0.85
40
0.85 - 0.90
60
0.90 - 0.95
90
0.95 - 1.00
140
MAXIMUM QUICK TURNAROUND WEIGHT <-200>

(FLAPS 45 LANDING)
Temperature (C)
P.A
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
-18
50000
51000
52100
53100
54200
55100
55100
55100
55100
-14
49600
50600
51600
52700
53700
54800
55100
55100
55100
-10
49300
50200
51200
52300
53300
84300
55100
55100
55100
-6
48900
49900
50800
51800
52900
53900
55000
55100
55100
-2
48500
49500
50400
51400
52500
53500
54500
55100
55100
2
48200
49100
50100
51100
52100
53100
54100
55100
55100
6
47800
48800
49700
50700
51700
52700
53700
54700
55100
10
47400
48400
49400
50300
51300
52300
53300
54300
55100
14
47100
48100
49000
50000
50900
51900
52900
53900
54900
18
46700
47700
48700
49600
50600
51500
52500
53500
54500
Adjustments:
22
46400
47400
48400
49300
50200
51200
52100
53100
54100
26
46000
47000
48000
48900
49800
50800
51800
52700
53700
30
45700
46700
47700
48600
49500
50500
51400
52400
53400
34
45400
46400
47400
48300
49200
50100
51000
52000
53000
38
47000
48000
48900
49800
50700
51700
52600
42
46
50
48600
49500
50400 50100
51300 51000
52300 51900 51600
Headwind: 0 per kt
Tailwind: -590 per kt
Upslope: 0 per 1%
Downslope: -580 per 1%
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-58
12 FEB 10
9.10.3 BTMS Inoperative <-701>

Brake cooling times with any BTMS inoperative are determined by the following tables. You must first determine the V1/
V1MBE ratio. V1 in this ratio is the V1 for the upcoming takeoff.
The following corrections apply to the V1MBE tables:
At weights less than 55,000 lbs., use V1MBE for 55,000 lbs
Reduce V1MBE by 5 knots per 2,000 ft. altitude above sea level
Wind correction: Reduce V1MBE by 3 kts/1 kt of tailwind

Increase V1MBE by .3 kts/1 kt of headwind
Runway slope correction: Reduce V1MBE by 3 kts/1% downhill

Increase V1MBE by 2 kts/1% uphill
<-701>
APPLY CORRECTIONS FROM ABOVE
OAT
C F 75 73 71 69 67 65 63 61 59 57
-40 -40 197 201 204 208 212 215 219 223 226 230
-30 -22 192 196 199 203 207 210 214 218 221 225
-20 -4 187 191 195 198 202 206 209 213 217 220
-10 14 183 187 190 194 198 201 205 209 212 216
0
32 179 183 186 190 194 197 201 205 208 212
10 50 175 179 183 186 190 193 197 201 204 208
20 68 172 175 179 183 186 190 194 197 201 204
30 86 168 172 176 179 183 187 190 194 198 201
40 104 166 170 174 177 181 185 188 192 196 199
50 122 165 168 172 175 179 183 186 190 194 197
55
233
228
224
219
215
212
208
205
203
201

APPLY CORRECTIONS FROM ABOVE
OAT
C F 75 73 71 69 67 65 63 61 59 57
-40 -40 198 202 205 209 213 216 220 224 227 231
-30 -22 193 197 200 204 208 211 215 219 222 226
-20 -4 188 192 196 199 203 207 210 214 218 221
-10 14 184 188 191 195 199 202 206 210 213 217
0
32 180 184 187 191 195 198 202 206 209 213
10 50 176 180 184 187 191 194 198 202 205 209
20 68 173 176 180 184 187 191 195 198 202 205
30 86 169 173 177 180 184 188 191 195 199 202
40 104 167 171 175 178 182 186 189 193 197 200
50 122 166 169 173 176 180 184 187 191 195 198
55
234
229
225
220
216
213
209
206
204
202
<-701>
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
9-59
12 FEB 10
Below 80 kts. (RTO) or Below Max Quick-Turn Weight (Landing) <-701>.

Following a rejected takeoff with a brake application speed of not more than 80 knots or a landing at a weight not exceeding
the maximum permissible quick turn-around landing weight (reference page 9-59), the brake cooling times shown below must
be observed:
V1/V1MBE
< 0.76
25
<0.83
30
<0.91
40
<1.00
50
Above 80 kts. (RTO) or Above Max Quick-Turn Weight (Landing) <-701>.

Following a rejected takeoff with a brake application speed of more than 80 knots or a landing at a weight exceeding the
maximum permissible quick turn-around landing weight (reference page 9-59), the brake cooling times shown below must be
observed, followed by an inspection of the wheel fuse plugs:
V1/V1MBE
< 0.759
35
0.76 - 0.799
40
0.80 - 0.879
50
0.88 - 0.959
60
0.96 - 1.00
65
MAXIMUM QUICK TURNAROUND WEIGHT <-701>

(FLAPS 45 LANDING)
Temperature (C)
P.A
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
-18
75100
76800
78400
79400
79400
79400
79400
79400
79400
-14
74500
76100
77800
79300
79400
79400
79400
79400
79400
-10
73900
75500
77200
78700
79400
79400
79400
79400
79400
-6
73300
75000
76600
78100
79400
79400
79400
79400
79400
-2
72800
74400
76000
77500
79100
79400
79400
79400
79400
2
72200
73800
75400
77000
78500
79400
79400
79400
79400
6
71700
73300
74800
76400
77900
79400
79400
79400
79400
10
71100
72700
74300
75800
77300
78900
79400
79400
79400
14
70600
72200
73700
75300
76800
78300
79400
79400
79400
18
70100
71600
73200
74700
76200
77800
79300
79400
79400
Adjustments:
22
69600
71100
72600
74200
75700
77200
78700
79400
79400
26
69100
70600
72100
73600
75200
76700
78200
79400
79400
30
68600
70100
71600
73100
74600
76100
77600
79200
79400
34
68100
69600
71100
72600
74100
75600
77100
78600
79400
38
70600
72100
73600
75100
76600
78100
79400
42
46
50
73100
74600
76400 75600
77600 77100
79100 78600 78100
Headwind: 0 per kt
Tailwind: -840 per kt
Upslope: 0 per 1%
Downslope: -840 per 1%
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Landing Tables
9-60
12 FEB 10
9.11
Landing Tables
These landing tables are to be used in the event that ACARS is inoperative and you are not landing at the airport listed on the
release (Destination landing numbers are on the release).
9.11.1 <-200> Landing Data.

<-200> Actual Landing Distance
(Landing Gear Down - Flaps 45)
Gross
Weight
(lb)
DRY
Pressure Altitude (feet)
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
Actual Landing Distance (feet)
34000
2313
2408
2509
2623
2747
2884
36000
2406
2506
2612
2732
2862
3007
38000
2498
2603
2715
2840
2978
3131
40000
2590
2699
2817
2949
3094
3257
42000
2681
2796
2919
3059
3212
3384
44000
2772
2892
3022
3169
3331
3513
46000
2863
2989
3126
3281
3451
3645
48000
2954
3086
3231
3394
3574
3798
50000
3046
3187
3342
3516
3713
3969
52000
3148
3300
3465
3651
3881
4158
53000
3204
3360
3531
3724
3972
4261
Distance: + 68 ft/ kt of tail wind, -12 ft / kt of head wind
9.11.2 Contaminated Runway Data.

(Flaps 45, Both Thrust Reversers Operative)
Gross
Weight
(lb)
WET
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
Actual Landing Distance for Wet Runway (feet)
34000
3040
3200
3375
3565
3775
3995
36000
3190
3360
3550
3750
3970
4210
38000
3340
3525
3725
3940
4175
4430
40000
3495
3685
3900
4125
4375
4650
42000
3645
3855
4075
4320
4585
4875
44000
3805
4020
4255
4515
4795
5105
46000
3960
4190
4440
4715
5015
5345
48000
4120
4365
4625
4915
5230
5605
50000
4285
4535
4815
5120
5480
5875
52000
4445
4715
5005
5325
5710
6155
Distance: + 125 ft/ kt of tail wind, - 20 ft / kt of head wind

+ 70 ft / kt above VREF
+ 600 ft when one thrust reverser inoperative
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Landing Tables
9-61
12 FEB 10
Gross
Weight
(lb)
STANDING WATER / SLUSH

SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
Actual Landing Distance for Contaminated Runway (feet)
34000
4110
4330
4575
4815
5075
5340
36000
4320
4555
4800
5055
5330
5620
38000
4535
4770
5030
5300
5590
5895
40000
4736
4985
5265
5550
5845
6165
42000
4940
5210
5495
5795
6105
6450
44000
5145
5430
5730
6035
6370
6730
46000
5355
5650
5955
6285
6630
7020
48000
5565
5865
6195
6530
6905
7335
50000
5770
6080
6425
6785
7185
7665
52000
5975
6310
6660
7040
7480
7990


Gross
Weight
(lb)
DRY SNOW / LOOSE SNOW

SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
34000
4135
4330
4545
4760
4995
5230
36000
4315
4520
4745
4975
5220
5475
38000
4495
4715
4945
5190
5445
5715
40000
4675
4900
5150
5400
5670
5955
42000
4850
5090
5345
5615
5895
6195
44000
5030
5280
5545
5825
6120
6435
46000
5210
5470
5750
6040
6350
6690
48000
5390
5660
5950
6255
6575
7005
50000
5565
5850
6150
6465
6845
7335
52000
5745
6040
6355
6690
7150
7650

PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Landing Tables
9-62
12 FEB 10

WET SNOW / COMPACTED SNOW
Gross
Weight
(lb)
SL
34000
3620
3790
3970
4160
4355
4570
36000
3775
3950
4140
4340
4550
4775
38000
3930
4115
4310
4520
4740
4975
40000
4080
4275
4480
4700
4930
5175
42000
4235
4435
4650
4875
5120
5375
44000
4385
4595
4820
5055
5310
5575
46000
4535
4755
4985
5235
5495
5780
48000
4685
4910
5155
5410
5685
6005
50000
4835
5070
5320
5590
5880
6230
52000
4985
5230
5490
5765
6090
6455

2000
4000
6000
8000
10000


ICE
Gross
Weight
(lb)
SL
34000
5375
5675
6000
6315
6650
6995
36000
5630
5950
6295
6625
6980
7350
38000
5890
6225
6580
6940
7315
7705
40000
6145
6495
6870
7250
7650
8060
42000
6405
6770
7170
7565
7985
8420
44000
6665
7045
7465
7880
8325
8780
46000
6920
7325
7760
8195
8660
9145
48000
7185
7600
8055
8510
8995
9535
50000
7445
7880
8350
8830
9345
9935
52000
7705
8160
8645
9145
9715
10335

2000
4000
6000
8000

PSA Airlines, Inc.

10000

Performance
Landing Tables
9-63
12 FEB 10
9.11.3 <-701> Landing Data.

Landing Gear Down, Flaps 45
Gross
Weight
(lb)
DRY
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
Actual Landing Distance (feet)
50000
2706
2823
2950
3088
3247
3438
52000
2710
2827
2954
3092
3251
3443
54000
2713
2831
2958
3096
3255
3447
56000
2716
2835
2962
3100
3259
3450
57000
2718
2837
2965
3105
3266
3465
59000
2786
2909
3041
3186
3357
3568
61000
2854
2981
3117
3266
3454
3671
63000
2921
3052
3192
3352
3550
3772
65000
2987
3121
3265
3439
3643
3872
67000
3052
3189
3344
3527
3736
3971
69000
3116
3258
3424
3615
3830
4072
71000
3181
3331
3506
3702
3923
4177
73000
3245
3406
3589
3790
4017
4285
75000
3313
3482
3671
3877
4112
4395
77000
3386
3562
3756
3969
4215
4511
Distance: + 81 ft/ kt of tail wind, -15 ft / kt of head wind
9.11.4 <-701> Contaminated Runway Data.

Gross
Weight
(lb)
STANDING WATER / SLUSH / WET SNOW

SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
50000
4705
4943
5196
5477
5776
6113
52000
4757
4998
5256
5535
5845
6188
54000
4801
5046
5314
5597
5912
6260
56000
4849
5098
5364
5658
5977
6330
57000
4870
5122
5398
5688
6012
6378
59000
5018
5285
5564
5873
6217
6600
61000
5172
5442
5738
6058
6420
6817
63000
5320
5606
5912
6243
6622
7042
65000
5472
5761
6077
6430
6823
7256
67000
5619
5923
6250
6619
7025
7472
69000
5766
6080
6425
6809
7228
7698
71000
5920
6244
6596
7001
7440
7922
73000
6068
6401
6776
7193
7646
8159
75000
6216
6569
6957
7386
7852
8397
77000
6377
6736
7144
7586
8080
8644
Distance: + 65 ft/ kt above VREF

+ 150 ft / kt of tail wind, - 50 ft / kt of head wind
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Landing Tables
9-64
12 FEB 10
Gross
Weight
(lb)
DRY SNOW / LOOSE SNOW

SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
50000
4450
4658
4880
5120
5381
5662
52000
4490
4701
4926
5169
5433
5718
54000
4529
4742
4970
5215
5483
5771
56000
4566
4781
5012
5260
5530
5822
57000
4584
4802
5035
5287
5560
5864
59000
4713
4939
5180
5440
5725
6042
61000
4843
5076
5325
5594
5892
6220
63000
4971
5212
5469
5746
6059
6397
65000
5097
5345
5610
5899
6222
6571
67000
5222
5477
5750
6053
6385
6744
69000
5347
5610
5892
6206
6548
6918
71000
5472
5742
6036
6359
6711
7096
73000
5596
5873
6180
6512
6873
7277
75000
5720
6007
6324
6665
7036
7458
77000
5849
6147
6472
6823
7210
7646
8000
10000


Gross
Weight
(lb)
COMPACTED SNOW
SL
2000
4000
6000
50000
3898
4075
4264
4468
4689
4927
52000
3921
4100
4291
4496
4718
4959
54000
3943
4123
4315
4522
4747
4989
56000
3964
4145
4339
4547
4773
5017
57000
3974
4157
4353
4564
4792
5047
59000
4079
4269
4471
4688
4925
5191
61000
4185
4380
4588
4813
5061
5335
63000
4289
4490
4705
4935
5196
5478
65000
4391
4597
4818
5059
5327
5618
67000
4492
4704
4931
5182
5458
5757
69000
4593
4811
5045
5306
5589
5896
71000
4693
4917
5161
5429
5720
6039
73000
4794
5023
5276
5551
5850
6185
75000
4893
5130
5392
5674
5980
6330
77000
4997
5243
5511
5801
6120
6482

PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Landing Tables
9-65
12 FEB 10
Gross
Weight
(lb)
ICE
SL
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
50000
6136
6436
6758
7108
7493
52000
6226
6532
6860
7218
7611
7908
8033
54000
6313
6625
6960
7324
7724
8154
56000
6398
6716
7056
7427
7834
8272
57000
6440
6761
7107
7483
7896
8350
59000
6633
6967
7326
7716
8146
8622
61000
6827
7174
7545
7950
8400
8893
63000
7020
7379
7763
8182
8654
9164
65000
7210
7580
7978
8415
8903
9431
67000
7400
7782
8193
8650
9154
9698
69000
7590
7984
8409
8884
9404
9965
71000
7779
8186
8629
9119
9655
10239
73000
7969
8388
8850
9354
9906
10517
75000
8159
8593
9070
9589
10157
10796
77000
8354
8805
9297
9831
10422
11083

PSA Airlines, Inc.


Performance
Landing Tables
9-66
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Differences
Chapter 3 Limitations
10-1
30 AUG 10
Chapter 10: Differences

10.1
Chapter 3 Limitations
Limitations are combined in Chapter 3. Unless noted by <-200> or <-701>, limitations apply to both aircraft. Some
limitations have been modified from the AFM limits to promote commonality.
10.2
Chapter 4b Normal Procedures <-701>
10.2.1 SAFETY & POWER ON Check.
When checking aircraft status, there is no need to verify nose gear door (mechanical) and APU exhaust area. (page 4b-9)
There are only 2 circuit breaker panels in the cockpit. (page 4b-9)
The SLATS/FLAPS lever replaces the FLAPS lever. (page 4b-9)
The EMER FLAP switch is unique to the -701. (page 4b-9)
When checking battery voltage, note that the CHARGER messages may be displayed. (page 4b-9)
The FIRE TEST and APU start sequence are different (page 4b-10 and page 4b-10)
There is no need to confirm nose gear area is clear and the nose gear door has been omitted from the check.
10.2.2 External Walkaround.
The oxygen blowout plug is located on the left forward fuselage. (page 4b-13)
There is no need to confirm the nose door status.
ADG Safety Pin...Removed check and bay maintenance light added. (page 4b-14)
Nose door switch omitted.
Dust cover check removed from main gear.
Slats added to leading edge check. (page 4b-14 and page 4b-15)
No Cowl Anti-Ice blowout plugs.
10.2.3 ACCEPTANCE Check & Flow.
Selector valves not installed.

All GEN switches confirmed in AUTO. (page 4b-18)
FIRE TEST sequence. (page 4b-19)
A hydraulic SOV panel is added. (page 4b-19)
Bleed test omitted.
Bleed panel check. (page 4b-20)
There are no IGNITION A(B) switchlights.
RECIRC FAN added. (page 4b-21)
ICE DETECTOR TEST no longer temperature dependent and ADS Test added. (page 4b-21)
EGPWS Test omitted.
Standby airspeed indicator indicates 40 rather than 0. (page 4b-22)
Anti-Skid test. (page 4b-23)
ENGINES SYNCH and HIGH PWR SCHEDULE switchlight checks added. (page 4b-23)
No EMER STOW switchlights.
No Engine speed switches.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

10-2
30 AUG 10
Differences
Chapter 4b Normal Procedures <-701>
EMER FLAP Check added. (page 4b-26)
10.2.4 BEFORE START Check.
No need to insert OAT on PERF page, only AT (assumed temperature) if FLEX is planned. (page 4b-29)
ANTI-SKID Test is omitted from Before Start Check (FFD only)
No need to turn off the packs or arm the ignition prior to start engines. (page 4b-34)
Fuel variance is +/- 500 lbs. (page 4b-33)
FADEC engine starts. (page 4b-35)
No need to verify N1 rotation prior to the introduction of fuel. (page 4b-35)
ENG START White Status message disappears at N2 50%. (page 4b-35)
If a hung/hot start occurs, the FADEC will automatically terminate the engine start (fuel & ignition removed). (page 4b-36)
10.2.5 AFTER START Check & Flow.
Engine generators should stay in the AUTO position. (page 4b-18)

Bleeds should stay in the auto position. (page 4b-38)
Pack switchlights should remain on. (page 4b-38)
There is no Anti-Ice Check. (page 4b-38)
On the FFD, both engines need not be started at the gate since there are no FFD items that require both engines be operating
on the -701 (page 4b-41)
10.2.6 TAXI Check.
When selecting flaps for takeoff, ensure the appropriate slat configuration occurs at flaps 8, slats should be 20, at flaps 20
slats should be 25. (page 4b-42)
10.2.7 BEFORE TAKEOFF Check.
After the engines are stabilized (just above 70% N1), advance the thrust levers to the TOGA detent. (page 4b-45)
10.2.8 AFTER TAKEOFF Check & Flow.
The PF will place the thrust levers in the climb detent. (page 4b-47)
10.2.9 DESCENT Check.
The -701 is a CAT C aircraft for determining straight-in approach mins. (page 4b-51)
10.2.10 BEFORE LANDING Check.
Ensure with flaps at 45 the slats are full at 25. (page 4b-54)
10.2.11 SECURING Check.
Since the -701 has ISIS, there is no need to cage the STBY instrument. (page 4b-58)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Differences
Chapter 5 Supplemental Procedures
10.3
10-3
12 FEB 10
Chapter 5 Supplemental Procedures
Inserted separate procedures for the following:

External Air Start (page 5-2)
Cross Bleed Start (page 5-3)
Battery Start with External Air (page 5-5)
Unpressurized Takeoff or Landing (page 5-6)
10.4
Takeoff and climb thrust settings are achieved via detents in the thrust lever quadrant. (page 7-1, page 7-20, page 7-20,
page 7-21, page 7-21)
10.5
Chapter 8 Adverse Weather
For de-icing procedures, place the BLEED VALVES knob to the CLSD position. (page 8-6)
10.6
Chapter 7 Maneuvers and Profiles
Chapter 9 Performance
BTMS Inop brake cooling charts differ (page 9-58)

Speed Card differences (page 9-22)
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Differences
Chapter 9 Performance
10-4
12 FEB 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


FMS Quick Reference
Table of Contents
11-i
15 MAR 10
Chapter 11: FMS Quick Reference

11.1
Going Direct-To Waypoints ................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2
Tracking Radials (Inbound) ................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.3
Tracking Radials (Outbound) .............................................................................................................. 11-1
11.4
Flyover Waypoints ............................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.5 User Defined Waypoints ......................................................................................................................

11.5.1 Place Bearing/Distance waypoints....................................................................................................
11.5.2 Along-Track Offset waypoints ...........................................................................................................
11.5.3 PLACE BRG/PLACE BRG waypoints...............................................................................................
11.5.4 LATITUDE and LONGITUDE waypoints...........................................................................................
11-2
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-3
11.6 Holding..................................................................................................................................................
11.6.1 Holding at Flight Plan Waypoint........................................................................................................
11.6.2 Holding at an Off-Flight Plan Waypoint.............................................................................................
11.6.3 Present Position Hold .......................................................................................................................
11.6.4 Entering Holding ...............................................................................................................................
11.6.5 Exiting Holding ..................................................................................................................................
11.6.6 Cancelling a Holding Exit ..................................................................................................................
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-4
11-4
11-4
11-5
11.7 Approaches .......................................................................................................................................... 11-5

11.7.1 Selecting an Approach...................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.7.2 Cleaning up an Approach ................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.8 Entering SIDS and STARS................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.8.1 Setting up the FMS for a Standard Instrument Departure (SID) ....................................................... 11-6
11.8.2 Setting up the FMS for a Standard Terminal Arrival Route (STAR).................................................. 11-6
PSA Airlines, Inc.


FMS Quick Reference
Table of Contents
11-ii
15 MAR 10
PSA Airlines, Inc.


FMS Quick Reference
Going Direct-To Waypoints
11-1
12 FEB 10
Chapter 11: FMS Quick Reference

11.1
Going Direct-To Waypoints
While there are a number of different methods to accomplish tasks on the Rockwell Collins 4200 FMS, the following outlines
two options of navigating directly to a waypoint.
Option 1, using DIR key:
Push the DIR key to show the ACT DIRECT-TO page. This brings up a list of current flight plan waypoints.
Push the line select key next to the identifier of the waypoint that you intend to fly Direct-To.
Verify the flight plan change on the MFD and CDU, then push the EXEC key to execute the modified flight plan.
Option 2, using the LEGS page:
Push the LEGS key to show the ACT/MOD LEGS page.
Enter the waypoint into the scratchpad by either pushing the line select key next to the identifier of the waypoint that you
intend to fly Direct-To, or by manually entering the waypoint identifier with the keypad.
Push the line select key next to the current TO waypoint (shown in magenta on ACT/MOD LEGS page 1) to move the
waypoint from the scratchpad to the TO waypoint display line.
11.2
Tracking Radials (Inbound)
The Rockwell Collins 4200 Series FMS can only navigate TO waypoints. If a clearance is received with something other than
a Course TO, the user will need to tell the FMS the actual Course TO in order for the FMS to process the data.
Example: The following is a clearance to track inbound towards a VOR.
Clearance: Bluestreak 447 intercept and track inbound on the 246 degree radial from the XYZ VOR.
Enter a waypoint into the scratchpad by either pushing the line select key next to the identifier of the waypoint that you
intend to intercept the radial to, or by manually entering the waypoint identifier with the keypad. (XYZ VOR for this
example)
Push the line select key next to the current TO waypoint (shown in magenta on ACT/MOD LEGS page 1) to move the
waypoint from the scratchpad to the TO waypoint display line.
At this point, the bottom right of the CDU will show INTC CRS in white-this is the Course TO the waypoint from your
present position. Enter the reciprocal of the radial to be intercepted in the INTC CRS field using the Alpha-Numeric
keypad. (066 degrees would be entered as the Course TO as it is the reciprocal of the 246 degree radial for this example.)
11.3
Tracking Radials (Outbound)
In order to track outbound on an assigned radial the FMS must have a defined end point to track towards. In order to track
outbound see PLACE BEARING/DISTANCE in the User Defined Waypoints section (11.5).
PSA Airlines, Inc.


11-2
12 FEB 10
11.4
FMS Quick Reference

Flyover Waypoints
Flyover Waypoints
Some RNAV procedures contain flyover waypoints. As the name implies, pilots must fly over these waypoints before
turning versus allowing the aircraft to lead the turn prior to the waypoint. This is accomplished by adding /0 (slash zero) to a
waypoint name in the FMS. The map will show the waypoint with an arrow after it, pointing to the subsequent route reflecting
that the point will be flown over before a turn on course is initiated. If a flyover is no longer necessary, pilots must delete and
re-enter the waypoint (minus the /0 suffix) and execute the route change.
11.5
User Defined Waypoints
User defined waypoints are specific navigation points created by the user. These points are created by the crew and entered
into the LEGS page. The FMS will track directly to these waypoints in the order in which they appear on the legs page. User
defined waypoints will also allow the FMS to track outbound from a VOR, intersection, or specified waypoint for a given
distance.
You can define a waypoint in one of four ways:
PLACE BRG/DISTANCE-A waypoint defined as a bearing and distance from another waypoint.
Along-Track offset-A waypoint offset a specified distance that either precedes or follows a specified existing waypoint on
your flight plan route.
PLACE BRG/PLACE BRG-A waypoint defined as the intersection created by bearings from two different waypoints.
LATITUDE and LONGITUDE-A waypoint defined by latitude and longitude.
11.5.1 Place Bearing/Distance waypoints: These will allow the FMS to track outbound from any waypoint
on a certain bearing or Radial-From a station. It is most commonly used when given a radial to track outbound from a VOR.
To create a PLACE BEARING/DISTANCE waypoint use the following format: [IDENT][BRG]/[DIST].
Example: The following is a clearance to track outbound on the XYZ VOR.
Clearance: Bluestreak 447 cleared direct to the XYZ 150 degree radial, 35 mile fix, then
This fix would be entered in the scratchpad as: XYZ150/35.
Once entered in the scratchpad, push the line select key in the location in the flight plan where the waypoint is to be entered.
11.5.2 Along-Track Offset waypoints: These are most commonly used when an altitude restriction is given for
a certain distance from a flight plan waypoint.
To create an Along-Track Offset waypoint use the following format: [IDENT]/[DIST]. When entering the distance a positive
number is down-track from the flight plan waypoint being used and a negative number is before the flight plan waypoint being
used.
Example: When tracking east towards the XYZ VOR, the following clearance is given.
Clearance: Bluestreak 447 cross 30 miles west of the XYZ VOR at 11,000 feet.
This would be entered in the scratchpad as: XYZ/-30.
Place the fix into the LEGS page prior to XYZ .
PSA Airlines, Inc.


FMS Quick Reference
Holding
11-3
12 FEB 10
11.5.3 PLACE BRG/PLACE BRG waypoints: These are most commonly used when a flight plan exists
where two airway routes join together at a certain point.
To create a PLACE BRG/PLACE BRG waypoint use the following format: [IDENT][BRG]/[IDENT][BRG].
Example: The following clearance is given which joins to Jet routes.
Clearance: Bluestreak 447 Direct XYZ, Jet 431 to join Jet 293 to QRS as filed.
Assume for the example that J431 follows the 090 degree radial from XYZ VOR and that J293 follows the 300 degree
radial to the QRS VOR. To create this point it would be entered into the scratchpad as: XYZ090/QRS300.
Once entered in the scratchpad, push the line select key in the location in the flight plan following XYZ.
11.5.4 LATITUDE and LONGITUDE waypoints: These will allow the crew to enter a waypoint based on
Latitude and Longitude coordinates.
To create a LATITUDE and LONGITUDE waypoint use the following format:
[NDDMM.MM WDDDMM.MM] where N & W=hemisphere, D=degrees, and M=minutes. The hemisphere designation must
always precede the coordinates, and coordinates are entered using a standard of six (for latitude) and seven (for longitude)
digits. The minutes entry range is from 00.00 to 59.99.
Note that there are no spaces in the entry.
Example: The following clearance is given to a Latitude/Longitude waypoint.
Clearance: Bluestreak 447 cleared to a Latitude/Longitude point of 39 degrees, 58.05 minutes North and 076 degrees, 37.1
minutes West.
This would be entered in the scratchpad as: N3958.05W07637.10
Once entered in the scratchpad, push the line select key in the location in the flight plan where the waypoint is to be
entered.
11.6
Holding
A flight plan can have up to six holds. Each hold can be set up at a waypoint on the flight plan, at a waypoint off the flight
plan, or at the airplane's present position. A hold can be defined with an inbound course and turn direction, or a quadrant and
a radial, either from a navaid or from the point on which the hold is defined.
For all Holds the FMS defaults to holding inbound on the present course. If you require another course enter the course TO or
radial into the appropriate field. The FMS will default to Right hand turns, if the clearance requires left turns, an L must be
entered after the '/' in the INBND CRS/DIR field. Leg time will default to 60 or 90 seconds based on altitude. You may enter
an alternate LEG TIME or LEG DIST in either field. It is recommended to enter an EFC time on the HOLD page to provide a
reminder to the crew. If the time expires the FMS will continue the hold but will display a HOLD EFC EXPIRED message on
the CDU.
11.6.1 Holding at Flight Plan Waypoint.

Push the HOLD key.
If either the ACT FPLN HOLD page or the ACT HOLD LIST page is showing, push the NEW HOLD line select key.
Push the left side line select key of the waypoint for the hold to copy the waypoint to the scratchpad.
Push the line select key for the HOLD AT prompt to move the waypoint from the scratchpad to HOLD AT prompt.
Verify the flight plan change on the MFD and on the CDU, then push the EXEC key to execute the modified flight plan.
Push the LEGS key to return to the ACT LEGS page and confirm the programmed hold is in the proper sequence on the
flight plan.
PSA Airlines, Inc.

11-4
12 FEB 10
FMS Quick Reference

Holding
11.6.2 Holding at an Off-Flight Plan Waypoint.

Push the HOLD key.
Enter the waypoint identifier of the desired holding fix into the scratchpad.
Push the line select key for the HOLD AT prompt to move the waypoint from the scratchpad to the prompt. (HOLD AT
[IDENT] shows in the scratchpad.)
Push the line select key of the waypoint that the HOLD is to precede.
flight plan.
11.6.3 Present Position Hold.

Push the HOLD key.
Push the PPOS line select key to show the HOLD page with the present position as the holding fix (PPOS).
flight plan.
11.6.4 Entering Holding.

Once a hold has been entered into the active flight plan, the FMS automatically enters the hold once reaching the holding fix.
11.6.5 Exiting Holding.

The FMS can be programmed to exit a hold from either the ACT LEGS page or the ACT FPLN HOLD page. To exit holding,
arm the FMS for the exit, then execute the flight plan change. The FMS steers the airplane to exit the hold in one of three
ways:
If the airplane is already on the inbound turn or inbound leg of the hold, the FMS will steer the airplane along the existing
holding track to exit the hold.
If the airplane is on the outbound turn, the FMS will continue the turn through the outbound leg heading and back to the
holding fix.
If the airplane is on the outbound leg of the hold, the FMS will start an immediate turn to the inbound leg to exit the hold
The FMS-calculated exit path will show on the MFD map.

To exit holding from the ACT LEGS or the ACT FPLN HOLD page:
Push the EXIT HOLD line select key.
Push the EXEC key to execute the change and exit the holding pattern.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


FMS Quick Reference
Approaches
11-5
12 FEB 10
11.6.6 Cancelling a Holding Exit.

A holding exit can be cancelled at any time or any point around the holding pattern before crossing the holding fix for the exit.
Exit from course reversal holds used in instrument approaches may only be cancelled before sequencing to the inbound course
INTC waypoint. The FMS steers the plane to continue the hold in one of three ways:
If an outbound turn is in progress, the FMS will complete the turn to the outbound leg and continue the hold.
If an inbound turn is in progress, the FMS will complete the turn to the inbound leg and continue the hold.
If the airplane is on the inbound leg, the FMS will continue the hold as if exit was never selected.
To cancel a holding exit:

Push the LEGS key to show the ACT LEGS page.
Push the CANCEL EXIT line select key to cancel the hold exit.
Push the EXEC key to execute the change and remain in the hold.
11.7
Approaches
Approaches are selected from the APPR or VISUAL columns on the ARRIVAL page. Select the ARRIVAL page with the
DEP ARR key or with the appropriate ARR line key on the DEP/ARR INDEX page. Both visual and instrument approaches
can be selected from the ARRIVAL page.
11.7.1 Selecting an Approach:

Push the DEP ARR key to show the ARRIVAL page.
Push the line key next to the desired approach under the APPR list.
Push the line select key for the desired approach transition.
11.7.2 Cleaning up an Approach.

Once on vectors at the arrival airport, the pilot should remove old waypoints no longer needed for navigation and make the
approach the next waypoint. This is referred to as cleaning up the approach or extending the centerline.
To clean up or extend the centerline of the approach:
Locate the first approach waypoint following the Discontinuity on the LEGS page and line select it to the scratchpad.
Line select the first approach waypoint to the current magenta waypoint on the first page of ACT LEGS.
INTC CRS will then appear in white at the bottom right of the CDU. (If the modification is executed at this point the
navigation line will extend from the aircraft's present position to the first waypoint on the approach).
The inbound final approach course will be displayed in small numbers in the INTC CRS field. If this number represents
the correct final approach course, line select the field which will cause the number to become larger. This is referred to as
make the numbers BIG.
If the inbound approach course is not correct or numbers do not appear in the INTC CRS field, enter the proper inbound
course in the scratchpad and enter it manually.
Once complete this will draw an extended centerline representing the final approach course on the MFD.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


11-6
15 MAR 10
11.8
FMS Quick Reference

Entering SIDS and STARS
Entering SIDS and STARS
11.8.1 Setting up the FMS for a Standard Instrument Departure (SID).

To select a SID, transition route (if applicable) and departure runway:
Push the DEP ARR key to show DEPARTURE page.
Push the left side line key next to applicable SID.
Push the left side line key next to desired transition.
Use right side line key to select departure runway.
Note
In many cases the departure transition is based on specific runway to be used and waypoints will not
appear until a runway is selected.
Go to ACT LEGS page by pressing LEGS button and ensure all waypoints and runway selection are correct.
11.8.2 Setting up the FMS for a Standard Terminal Arrival Route (STAR).
To select a STAR, transition route (if applicable) and approach:
Push the DEP ARR key to show the ARRIVAL page. If the aircraft has not yet reached the halfway point of the flight the
DEP ARR key will need to be pushed a second time to show the ARRIVAL page.
Push the left side line key next to the applicable STAR.
Push the left side line key next to planned transition route.
Go to ACT LEGS page by pressing LEGS button and ensure all waypoints and approach/runway selection are correct.
Note
In some cases the full transition route will not appear unless an approach/runway is selected.
PSA Airlines, Inc.


Status Page
B-11
20 JUN 11
Instructions
Insert this Status Page behind the BULLETINS Tab in the CRJ Pilot Operating Handbook. Remove Status Page A-10 dated
22 OCT 10.
Bulletin
Number
01-11
Paragraph
5.15
Title
Effective
Date
Status
1 JUNE 11
Current
PSA Airlines, Inc.


B-11
20 JUN 11

Status Page
PSA Airlines, Inc.


POH

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

POH

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

Scope of This Manual

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

Intentionally Left Blank

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

POH Revision 14 Overview

Chapters 4a and 4b:

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

Intentionally Left Blank

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

Follow revision instructions.

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

Pilot Operating Handbook Transmittal Sheet

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

Pilot Operating Handbook Transmittal Sheet

Intentionally Left Blank

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

List of Effective Pages

Title Page - CRJ Pilot Operating Handbook(front & back)

4 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

i................................. REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

7 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

1. REVISIONS / LEPs TAB

9 ................................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

1................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

10 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

2................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

11 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

3................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

12 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

4................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

13 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10

5................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

14 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

6................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

15 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

7................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

16 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

8................................ REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

17 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

18 ..............................REVISION 11.................... 12 FEB 10

7................................ REVISION 11 ....................12 FEB 10

PSA Airlines, Inc.

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

34.............................. REVISION 13 ...................30 AUG 10

UNCONTROLLED WHEN PRINTED

66.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

30 ..............................REVISION 13................... 30 AUG 10

67.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11

31 ..............................REVISION 14.................... 9 MAY 11

68.............................. REVISION 14 .................... 9 MAY 11